Seabulk

1
Molinos, 25
36213 – Vigo (Spain)
Fax: +34 986 202779.
Phone: +34 986 213900.
Phone (workshop): +34 986 214712.
Phone (Technical Assistance): (+ 34 639 836174 / + 34 616 602071)
E-mail: ibercisa@ibercisa.es
INSTRUCTIONS & MAINTENANCE BOOK
CLIENT: SEABULK TANKERS, INC.
ADDRESS: 2200 ELLER DRIVE - P.O. BOX 13038 - FORT LAUDERDALE - FLORIDA
MACHINERY : HYDRAULIC COMBINED TOWING WINCH MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
VESSEL: STATIA SUNRISE
S.O.: 16491
DATE Nº: APR-11
PREPARED : IVÁN
Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde

2
INDEX
1. - Scope of supply............................................................................................... 4
2. - Description of winches. .................................................................................. 4
2.1. - Hydraulic combined towing winch ......................................................................................................... 4
3. - Preservation..................................................................................................... 5
3.1. - Storage.................................................................................................................................................. 5
3.2. - Protection of machined surfaces. .......................................................................................................... 5
3.4. - Lubrication points, threaded holes......................................................................................................... 6
3.5. - Brake lining............................................................................................................................................ 6
3.6. - Spare parts............................................................................................................................................ 6
3.7. - Electrical equipment, cabinets, and panels. .......................................................................................... 6
3.8. - Inspection and maintenance. ................................................................................................................ 6
3.9. - Paint. ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
4. - Drawings. ......................................................................................................... 8
4.1. - General disposition................................................................................................................................ 8
5. - Hydraulic diagrams. ........................................................................................ 8
6. - Electric connection diagram........................................................................... 8
7. - Handling........................................................................................................... 8
8. - Guide for installation....................................................................................... 8
8.1. - Foundation. ........................................................................................................................................... 8
8.2. - Levelness and alignment....................................................................................................................... 8
8.3. - Bolting. .................................................................................................................................................. 9
8.4. - Hydraulic motor (TRACTION WINCH) and hoses................................................................................. 9
8.4.1. - Hydraulic Motor.................................................................................................................. 9
8.4.2. - Hoses............................................................................................................................... 13
8.5. - Electrical connections.......................................................................................................................... 15
8.6. – Hydraulic components ........................................................................................................................ 15
9. - Start - up......................................................................................................... 20
9.1. - Table of oils. ........................................................................................................................................ 20
9.2. – Greasing ............................................................................................................................................. 20
10. – Maintenance manual .................................................................................. 20
10.1. – Hydraulic components ...................................................................................................................... 21
ANNEXES ............................................................................................................. 23
Annex I. – Winches datasheets .................................................................................................................... 24
Annex II – Datasheet Tectyl 506 .................................................................................................................. 31
Annex III – Drawings and material list .......................................................................................................... 34
Annex IV – Hydraulic diagram ...................................................................................................................... 51
Annex V – Electric diagrams ........................................................................................................................ 53
Annex VI – Hydraulic motor ........................................................................................................................ 149
Annex VII – Proximity sensor ..................................................................................................................... 198
Annex VIII – Joystick Penny ang Giles JC 150Y ........................................................................................ 215
Annex IX – Digital valve amplifier ............................................................................................................... 220
Annex X – Hydraulic blocks........................................................................................................................ 235
Block 1: command clipper, bmg-0037-00-eml............................................................................. 243
Block 2: safety rendering, bhe-g, 1068-00 .................................................................................. 304
Block 3: proportional control clutch and brake, bhe-g-1069-00................................................... 360
Block 4: selection pressure steering ........................................................................................... 436
Block 5, selection pressure "Load Sensing "............................................................................... 438
Block 6: proportional control block safety rendering, bhe-g-1070-00.......................................... 445
Annex XI – Table of oils.............................................................................................................................. 484
Annex XII – Greasing points drawing ......................................................................................................... 486
Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 3

1. - Scope of supply.
Qty Dwg Ib ref Winch Model
2 20360521 110018 HYDRAULIC COMBINED TOWING MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
WINCH
110018 HYDRAULIC BLOCK
110018 CONTROL AT WHEELHOUSE AND
LOCAL CONTROL
110018 RELAYS AND PROPORTIONAL CARD
110018 MODIFICATIONS AND WIRING INSIDE
THE CONTROL CABINET BY OUR
ELECTRICAL TECHNICIAN AT
VESSEL (INCLUDED THE TRAVEL OF
THE TECHNICIAN TO DO THIS WORK)
2 110019 PROPORTIONAL ELECTRO-VALVE
WITH POTENTIOMETER FOR BRAKE
VARIABLE CONTROL FROM THE
BRIDGE CONTROL (FOR STATIC
OPERATION)
2 110019 DYNAMIC PULL CONTROL.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL BLOCK TO
OPERATE IN CONSTANT TENSION
REMOTE CONTROLLED FROM
WHEELHOUSE PANEL, INCLUDING
ONE AUXILIARY POWER UNIT OF 3
KW TO SUPPLY OIL FLOW IN
RENDERING
LR classification expenses for the anchoring part (ABS)

Shipment cost to Dominican Republic
In relation to the stoppers, it would be used the actual ones
2. - Description of winches.
2.1. - Hydraulic combined towing winch
SPECIFICATIONS
• Directly driven by low speed high torque Hägglunds hydraulic motor, radial piston type,
assembled with torque arm.
• Specially reinforced drum fitted with band brake differential type to be remote hydraulically
driven – working automatically by means of resorts and pressure loss – and claw clutch also
prepared to be remote hydraulically driven, both of them with local controls for emergency.
• Brake lining asbestos free, fixed with stainless steel screws.
• Chain lifter made of cast steel with band brake and claw clutch, both manually operated.
• Warping end in cast steel.

• Main shaft assembled on oscillating roller bearings and lubricated bronze bushes.
• Robust and compact unit, painted with one coat of antioxidant and two coats of marine paint.
TECHNICAL DATA
♦ Capacities:
= Drum capacity ………………………. 150 m. Ø 50 (pp rope).
= Warping end ………………………… Ø 430 mm.
♦ Nominal pulls and speeds at:
= Drum 1st layer ………… 12,2 t ; 22,5 m/min
= Drum 7th layer ………… 6,1 t ; 44,6 m/min
= Drum 11th layer ……..… 4,6 t ; 59,3 m/min
= Chain-lifter ……………. 5,5 t ; 16,2 m/min (80 bar)
= Warping end …………... 4,3 t ; 20,8 m/min (80 bar)
♦ Working pressure and oil flow required . 245 bar ; 135 L/min
♦ Static brake capacity (drum 1st layer) …. 125 t

Additional data are included on datasheet IB-FT-0521-16491 mrman h RA (Annex-I)
3. - Preservation.
These are a general recomendations to be considered when applicable.
Due long period of vessel construction, the equipments after delivery are stored in warehouses and the
moving parts remain static.
In the case of electrical equipment, the moisture, the ambient dust and temperature changes can affect their
performances when be installed and start up.
Often the winches are positioned on their foundations before the construction is completed; meanwhile is
built often are produced grinder, sand or grit projections during sandblasting, in the ambient are gases
produced by chemicals used for stripping, cleaning and painting.
In these paragraphs are given recommendations for that equipments supplied by IBERCISA can be
preserved without deterioration when they remain stored or installed in their anchorages for a period longer
than 3 months before its commissioning.
3.1. - Storage.
It is preferable to storage below cover, in a ventilated place without changes of temperature, because these
changes cause condensation of ambient humidity on the internal parts.
If outdoor storage the winches will be covered with tarpaulins to keep out water and dust particles, sand,
grit, solvents which are wind moved; and discoloration of the paint.
Attention will be pay to the identification of storage area, especially for small components to help locate
them. The storage date will be recorded.
3.2. - Protection of machined surfaces.

The machined surfaces are covered with TECTYL 506EH-WD (data sheet in Annex-II) to protect against
rusting.
The time for prevention in accordance with the manufacturer of TECTYL is 36 months for indoor storage
and 18 months for the outdoor storage.

Special attention will be paid to surfaces close to retainers due the rusting cause deterioration of lip closure
and oil leakages.
In periods of 6 months will be checked the status of protective film, if it is damaged shall be cleaned and
applied again.
Before commissioning the TECTYL will be removed, in the machined surfaces will be applied grease, to see
table with Ibercisa recommended “oils and greases”.
3.4. - Lubrication points, threaded holes.

The moving part joints have greasers; their position is marked with a sticker. In the grease points will be
applied grease to keep the contact surfaces without rusting.
Threaded holes for eyebolts, holes for levelling, holes for flanges, etc. are supplied with paint; due the edges
the tendency is to lose the paint during cured process. For preservation will be applied grease on holes.
3.5. - Brake lining.

The brake linings are a compressed fibre reinforced with metal wire, although inert behaviour, the coefficient
of friction changes with grease and oil, therefore caution will be paid during installation works, erection and
commissioning to prevent pouring or coming into contact with them.
3.6. - Spare parts.

The spare parts will be maintained until use in the original packaging in clean and dry areas, protecting them
from blows.
3.7. - Electrical equipment, cabinets, and panels.

Equipment and components are packed in factory according to the order received. Outside, on the
packaging, there is a sign indicative. Attend to the instructions in the transportation, storage and proper
use of equipment.
Avoid subjecting the equipment during transport to strong vibrations. Also avoid subjecting it to severe
shock. In the case of detecting damage for the shipment, please notify to the agency of transportation.
If you plan to store this equipment for some time before installation is recommended that the storage
area is dry, clean, protected and not subject to extreme changes in moisture, dirt and excessive oil or
similar adverse conditions.
When are not available facilities to keep the equipment, do not remove the packaging before it is ready
for use.
It should be noted storage temperatures between 10 ° C and 50 ° C (50 ° F and 120 ° F) with relative
humidity of 60%.
For frequency converters:
If tension-free periods are higher than one year, at the commissioning should be performed to reshape
the intermediate circuit condensers. If this is not taken into account could result in equipment damage.
3.8. - Inspection and maintenance.

Internal Storage:
For internal storage will be visually inspected every 6 months by checking:
a That the surfaces are in good condition.
b It will rotate moving parts.
c It will check the desiccant electric motors and will regenerate or replace if necessary.

d Measure the insulation resistance.
e TECTYL be verified and re-applying when necessary.
The outdoor storage:
For outdoor storage shall be visually inspected every 3 months doing the same checks listed above.
Will record the inspection and maintenance activities, details about the work, stating the date, operators
and the comments they had.
3.9. - Paint.
The exterior paint has been applied in accordance with the procedure shown bellow, although the
duration of the painting is longer than the storage time if the equipments need some touching up the paint
procedure applied was the following.
The outer surface preparation.
Sa 2-1/2 surface preparation, according to ISO Standard 8501-1 10 applied to the surfaces of carbon
steel.
The paint system.
The paint system consists of:
First a primer layer of 175 microns of Intershield 300.
The final layer of Polyurethane paint 50 microns Interthane 990.
Application.
Paint can be applied by brushing, air spraying, airless spraying or spraying hot or a combination thereof.
Spray or brush can be used.
The painting does not apply when the temperature of steel, or the paint is below the dew point advantage
3 º C ambient air, when this temperature is above 43 º C and relative humidity is higher than 85%.
The painting does not apply in the rain, wind, snow, fog, or mist.
Each layer of paint will be in a proper state of cure before applying the next layer.

4. - Drawings.
4.1. - General disposition
Winch Gral. Arrang. Under-frame Gral. As. & M. List
HYDRAULIC COMBINED TOWING WINCH 20360521C 20360521C-AN 20360521
BRAKE ASSEMBLY 20970628
Hydraulic cylinder assembly 20920183
BRAKE ASSEMBLY 20970574A
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY 20960507
CLUTCH ASSEMBLY 20960449
To see Annex III.
5. - Hydraulic diagrams.
To see Annex IV
6. - Electric connection diagram

To see annex V
7. - Handling
To lift and move the equipment to be considered carefully the weights and dimensions. The winches are
provided with lugs and eyebolts for this purpose.
On table bellow are summarized the empty weight and main dimensions:
Winch Empty weight (Kg) Length (mm) Depth (mm) Height (mm)
HYDRAULIC
COMBINED 5.900 2.425 2.096 1.900
TOWING WINCH
Notes: Data for one item of each model.
Caution to be taken to download horizontal over anchorage.
8. - Guide for installation

8.1. - Foundation.
The foundation will be prepared and drilled in accordance with under-frame drawings.
The foundation will be strong enough to support the foundation loads without deformations.
8.2. - Levelness and alignment.

The foundation level will be checked before to put the winch over.
The winch drum will be aligned checking the perpendicular with dial gauge.
To check the cover will be removed and dial gauge will be put over centre of shaft. The dial will be
applied over machined surface of cover.

Also will be checked the support levelness.
The target values for dial gauging (mm).
To adjust levelness and angle deviation the base of gear box and base of support are drilled and
threaded with 4 holes M22. Four bolts M22 will be screwed on each hole.
8.3. - Bolting.
The chock-fast will be applied following the manufacturer recommendations especially for curing and
safety.
The winch will be bolted. Minimum bolts quality DIN 8.8 (minimum yield strength 640 N/mm²).
Winch qty size Torque(Nm) qty size Torque(Nm)
HYDRAULIC
COMBINED 24 M30 1.300 10 M36 2.275
TOWING WINCH
Data for one item of each model.
8.4. - Hydraulic motor (TRACTION WINCH) and hoses

For more information to see annex VI
8.4.1. - Hydraulic Motor
8.4.1.1 The motor is delivered with internal protection in the form of an oil film and external protection in the
form of an anti-rust film. This provides sufficient protection for indoor storage in normal temperatures for
about 12 months.
Note: The anti-rust protection must be touched up after transport and handling.
8.4.1.2 If the motor is stored for more than 3 months in uncontrolled environment or more than 12 months in
controlled environment, it must be filled with oil.
8.4.1.3 Place the motor as shown in figure 4.1, fill the motor with filtered oil in the following order: D1, A1, B,

C1. Take extreme care to ensure that not contamination enters the motor. Seal connections A and C
with the cover plate fitted to the connection mounting surface at delivery. Check that the o-rings or
rubber seals are in position in the cover plate. Fit the plug D1, D2 and D3, the table bellow states the
amount of oil needed to fill the various types of motors.
8.4.1.4 Before commissioning.

Check the following points before commissioning the motor, i.e. before starting the first time.
8.4.1.4.1 Check that the motor is connected to give the correct direction of rotation.
8.4.1.4.2 Select the hydraulic fluid in accordance with recommendations.
8.4.1.4.3 Fill the motor housing with hydraulic fluid via a filter into the drain outlets D1, D2 or the vent hole
(depending on how the motor is mounted).
8.4.1.4.4 Check the drain line to ensure that excessive pressure does not build up in the motor housing.
8.4.1.4.5 Check that the motor is protected from the overloads.
8.4.1.4.6 Check that the charge pressure conforms to the charge pressure curve. Check that all hydraulic
couplings and plugs are properly tightened to prevent leakage.
8.4.1.4.7 Make sure that the arm is sufficiently fastened.
8.4.1.5 Commissioning.
8.4.1.5.1 During the initial starting and the period immediately after it, any hydraulic installation must be regularly
and carefully checked at frequent intervals.
8.4.1.5.2 The working pressure and charge pressure must be checked to ensure that they correspond to the
contracted values.
8.4.1.5.3 The pressure in the drain line measured at the motor must be less than 3 bar (43.5 psi). This pressure
limit is important for the life of the motor seals.
8.4.1.5.4 If leakage occurs, correct the fault and carry out new measurements.
8.4.1.5.5 Check all lines, connections, screws, etc., and correct if necessary.
8.4.1.5.6 Check other possible leakage points and replace faulty parts
8.4.1.5.7 During the start up period, dirt particles in the system are removed by the filters. The filter cartridges
have to be changed after the first 100 working hours and after that according to the maintenance chart
see 4.4 note to check the “filter clogged” indicators.
Note: When starting up the motor it is important that the motor out power is limited to 75% of max power
according to these the technical data.

8.4.1.5.8 A not run-in motor in combination with dirt particles in the oil can badly affect the sliding surfaces in the
motor. This is valid during the first 100 working hours.
8.4.1.6 Maintenance.
8.4.1.6.1 When a hydraulic system has been in service for some time, it must undergo periodic maintenance and
servicing at which depend on the equipment and the type of duty.
8.4.1.6.2 This periodic maintenance must include the following operations:
8.4.1.6.2.1 Check the hydraulic system for leakage. Tighten the screws, replace faulty seals and keep the drive
clean.
8.4.1.6.2.2 Inspect and clean all air, oil and magnetic filters; replace all the filter cartridges for which a filter
clogged indication has been given; inspect tank, pump, filters, etc., and clean if necessary.
8.4.1.6.2.3 Inspect and clean all air, oil and magnetic filters; replace all the filter cartridges for which a filter
clogged indication has been given; inspect tank, pump, filters, etc., and clean if necessary.
8.4.1.6.2.4 Check the hydraulic fluid; see the section headed "Oil".
8.4.1.6.2.5 Check that no dirt or other contaminations enter the system. Check that outside of the hydraulic motor
in an installation is kept free of dirt; thus leakage and faults will be detected earlier.
8.4.1.6.2.6 We recommend that a running log be kept and that planned inspections are carried out at set intervals.
8.4.1.6.2.7 Maintenance checks and operations are as follows:
8.4.1.7 If the motor is to be stored stationary for a longer period than about 1 month, it must be protected from
internal rust. This can be done as follows:
8.4.1.7.1 Mix anti-rust additive with the hydraulic fluid of the system. Use 5% of Rust Veto Concentrate
(manufactured by EF Houghton & Co, Philadelphia, USA). This additive gives rust protection for up to
about one year, after which time the motor must be turned a few revolutions.

8.4.1.7.2 If no additives are used, the motor must be regularly turned a few revolutions.
8.4.1.7.3 If it is not possible to turn the motor, plug all connections, open drain outlet D1 or D2 on the port end
housing (or if the motor is mounted vertically, Flushing connection F1 on the shaft end housing) and fill
the motor with hydraulic fluid. (See Figures 4.3 and 4.3.a).
8.4.1.8 Filters.
Filters must be changed after the first 100 working hours, and make the second change is to be carried
out after 3 months or 500 working hours is earlier. They must then be changed at regular intervals of 6
months or 4000 working hours.
8.4.1.9 Viscosity.
Many hydraulic oils become thinner with increasing use, and this means poorer lubrication. The
viscosity of the oil in service must never be fall bellow the minimum recommended viscosity.
8.4.1.10 Oxidation.
8.4.1.10.1 Hydraulic oil oxidizes with the time of use and temperature. This is indicated by changes in colour and
smell, increased acidity or the formation of sludge in the tank. The rate of oxidation increases rapidly at
surface temperatures above 60 º C (140 º F), and the oil should then be checked more often.
8.4.1.10.2 The oxidation process increases the acidity of the fluid; the acidity is stated in terms of "neutralisation
number". Typical oxidation is slow initially and increases rapidly later.
8.4.1.10.3 A sharp increase (by a factor of 2 and 3) in the neutralisation between inspections is a signal that the oil

has oxidized too much and should be replaced immediately.
8.4.1.11 Water content.
Contamination of the oil by water can be detected by sampling from the bottom of the tank. Most
hydraulic oils repel the water, which then collects at the bottom of the tank. This water must be drained
off at regular intervals. Certain types of transmission oils and engine oils emulsify the water; this can be
detected by coatings on filter cartridges or a change in the colour of the oil. Obtain the advice of your oil
supplier in such cases.
8.4.1.12 Degree of contamination.
8.4.6.1 Heavy contamination of the oil causes increased wear of the hydraulic system components. The cause
of contamination must be immediately investigated and remedied.
8.4.6.2 All hydraulic fluids are affected differently. Obtain the advice of your oil supplier or by nearest
Hagglunds representative.
8.4.1.13 Oil inspection.
8.4.1.13.1 The purpose to take an oil sample is to check the condition of the oil.
8.4.1.13.2 With scheduled oil analysis, wear products can be identified and corrective action can be taken before
failure occurs. Oil analysis can indicate when an oil change is required, point out shortcomings in
maintenance and keep repair cost to a minimum. Using oil analysis can create a “windows of
opportunity”, allowing the user to schedule re-fittings or overhauls, maintenance or repairs, thus saving
money on equipment repairs and downtime.
8.4.1.13.3 The most used method is to take samples in a special bottle and send it to a fluid laboratory for an
analysis and from the laboratory you get a report, which follow a specific international standard.
8.4.1.13.4 You have to select what analysis the laboratory should take, but the most used analysis are particle
count, water content, oxidation and viscosity.
8.4.1.13.5 Another method is to install an inline particle counter in your hydraulic system which gives you the
contamination level according to the international rules, the disadvantage with this method is that you
only get the contamination level in oil.
8.4.2. - Hoses
8.4.2.1 Hose storage.
Temperature, humidity, ozone, sunlight, oils, solvents, corrosive liquids, insects, rodents, and
radioactive materials can adversely affect hose products. Hose should be stored in a dark, dry
atmosphere away from heat sources, electrical equipment, and the above adverse elements. The ideal
storage temperature for rubber hose is +50°F to +70°F, with a maximum of 100°F.
8.4.2.2 Maintenance.
8.4.2.2.1 Hydraulic hose has a finite service life, which can be reduced by a number of factors. From a
maintenance perspective, little or no attention is usually paid to the hoses of a hydraulic system until a
failure occurs.
8.4.2.2.2 Hydraulic hose failures cost more than the replacement hose. Additional costs can include:
8.4.2.2.2.1 Clean up, disposal and replacement of lost hydraulic oil.
8.4.2.2.2.2 Collateral damage to other components, e.g. a hose failure on a hydrostatic transmission can result in
loss of charge pressure and cavitation damage to the transmission pump and/or motor.
8.4.2.2.2.3 Possible damage caused by the ingression of contaminants.
8.4.2.2.2.4 Machine downtime.
8.4.2.3 What causes hydraulic hose failures?
Focus on the following points to extend hydraulic hose life and minimize the costs associated with
hydraulic hose failures:

8.4.2.2.1 External damage.
8.4.2.2.1.1 Hydraulic hose manufacturers estimate that 80% of hose failures are attributable to external physical
damage through pulling, kinking, crushing or abrasion of the hose. Abrasion caused by hoses rubbing
against each other or surrounding surfaces is the most common type of damage.
8.4.2.2.1.2 To prevent external damage, ensure all clamps are kept secure, pay careful attention to routing
whenever a replacement hose is installed and if necessary, apply inexpensive polyethylene spiral wrap
to protect hydraulic hoses from abrasion.
8.4.2.2.1.3 Multi-plane bending
8.4.2.2.1.4 Bending a hydraulic hose in more than one plane results in twisting of its wire reinforcement. A twist of
five degrees can reduce the service life of a high-pressure hydraulic hose by as much as 70% and a
seven degree twist can result in a 90% reduction in service life.
8.4.2.2.1.5 Multi-plane bending is usually the result of poor hose-assembly selection and/or routing but can also
occur as a result of inadequate or unsecure clamping where the hose is subjected to machine or
actuator movement.
8.4.2.2.2 Operating conditions.
8.4.2.2.2.1 The operating conditions that a correctly installed hydraulic hose is subjected to will ultimately
determine its service life. Extremes in temperature, e.g. high daytime operating temperatures and very
cold conditions when the machine is standing at night, accelerate aging of the hose's rubber tube and
cover.
8.4.2.2.2.2 Frequent and extreme pressure fluctuations, e.g. rock hammer on a hydraulic excavator, accelerate
hose fatigue. In applications where a two-wire braid reinforced hydraulic hose meets the nominal
working pressure requirement but high dynamic pressure conditions are expected, the longer service
life afforded by a spiral reinforced hydraulic hose will usually more than offset the higher initial cost.
8.4.2.2.2.3 A hose and fitting maintenance program can reduce equipment downtime and maintain peak operating
performance of the hydraulic system. Here are a few maintenance reminders.
1 Hose assemblies should be inspected on a regular basis with frequency based on prior history of the
equipment, a set maintenance/inspection program, and the severity of the application or risk potential.
2 Always use Safety Considerations (page 269) when inspecting hose assemblies. To avoid personal
injury during system checkouts, do not touch the assembly and be aware of the potentially hazardous
area surrounding the hose assembly.
3 Inspect hose and fittings for the following:
a Exposed, broken, or corroded reinforcement wires.
b Leaks in the hose or at the fitting.
c Cracked, damaged, or corroded fittings.
d Other signs of significant deterioration.
If any of the above conditions exist, the hose assembly should be replaced immediately.
4 The hydraulic system should also be inspected for the following:
a Leaking ports.
b Damaged or missing hose clamps, guards, or shields.
c Excessive dirt or grease on the assembly.
d Condition of system fluid, fluid temperature, contamination, and air entrapment.
If any of the above conditions are found, appropriate corrective action should be taken.
5 Functional tests should be conducted to determine if systems are leak-free and operating properly.
6 If hose assembly can be inspected and detached from the hydraulic system, additional steps can be
taken to ensure a properly maintained assembly.
a With hose assembly detached, clean assembly by blowing out with clean, compressed air or rinsed with

a compatible cleaning fluid.
b Inspect hose tube for cuts, obstructions, and cleanliness.
c Check layline of the hose to make sure the hose is not twisted.
d Check fittings to insure they are in good condition and properly crimped or attached to the assembly.
If any of the above conditions are found, the hose assembly should be replaced.
7 The hose assembly should be hydrostatically tested, using the approved test stands and procedures as
outlined in SAE J517. Test at proof pressure, or twice the working pressure of the hose, for 30 seconds
to one minute. When test pressure is reached, visually inspect the hose for any signs of weakness,
leaks, or any hose movement relative to the fitting that would indicate a loose fitting. If any of these
conditions exist, the assembly should be replaced.
8 Specific hose assembly replacement intervals must be considered based on previous service life,
government or industry recommendations, or when failures Could result in injury risk or property
damage.
8.5. - Electrical connections.

The electrical connections between electrical motors, encoder, sensors, controls and cabinets will be
done and supervised by electrical cabinet and panels company supplier.
On Annexes-VII to IX are included information to connect sensors, joystick, digital valve amplifier
8.6. – Hydraulic components

For information about hydraulic blocks to see Annex X
USE AND MAINTENANCE HYDRAULIC UNITS MANUAL
A - Installation guide of high pressure piping systems:
1. - General remarks and Installation.
2. - Pipes; types, cleaning and flushing.
3. - Pressure test.
B - Recommendation for hydraulic oils:
4. - General remarks.
5. - Recommendation and selection oil table
C - Commissioning of Hydraulic equipment:
6. - Oil filling.
7. - Checklist to do before starting.
8. - Starting of pumps. Purge air.
9. - Adjustment of system.
A - INSTALLATION GUIDE OF HIGH PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

1. - General remarks and Installation:
There are 4 lugs on the tank support for positioning the unit on site. This may be placed in
position using a crane and slings in good condition that are able to support the weight of the
power pack.
The perfect functioning of high pressure hydraulic systems is guaranteed by the proper laying of
the pipe lines and accessories.
Impurities such as scale, welding beads, sand, machining residue they have to be avoided. They
could to damage hydraulic components and to cause bad operation system.
Special attention must be paid out to the piping. Only trained staff may be used for design and
installation of the piping.

Installation should be carrying out according to the hydraulic pipe diagram of the system, because
the pipes have been designed for the flow and pressure required for system and mentioned in the
pipe diagram. They should be as short as possible and sharp bends have to be avoided. No pipe
is allowed to transfer mechanical stress to the equipments. The pipes must be well supported to
prevent vibrations.
2. - Pipes; types, cleaning and flushing:

The material for pipe lines is indicated in the hydraulic diagram. Preferably the pipe quality must
be NBK, if not they should be stripped.
Flushing of hydraulic pipes:
• Poorly cleaned and rusty pipes may not be cleaned by flushing. Unacceptable.
• Flushing must always be carried out on the spot and only after all the pipes are assembled.
• During flushing all the valves and actuators (manifolds and hydraulic motors) must be by-
passed by a hose or temporary pipes.
• External hydraulic power pack with an external flushing filter should be used for flushing.
Flushing with the pumps of hydraulic system is forbidden, they may become damaged, and
because also the necessary volume current speed is not reached. During flushing, hydraulic fluid
is flushed through the system pipes at high speed; due to the speed al foreign bodies are swept
out and separated by a flushing filter.
• The oil used for the flushing must be suitable for cleaning and antirusting. It must also be
compatible with the hydraulic oil which will be used in the system.
• The flushing circuit must have a sufficiently big filter equipped with a pressure gauge for
monitoring the dirtying of the filter. Filtration grade of the filter should be 3µm or better.
• Flushing speed and temperature should be chose as high as possible, experience shows that
the temperature should be higher than operational temperature, recommended temperatures of
60ºC for mineral oils. The flushing system should contain a check valve or pressure regulating
valve, by which the flushing oil temperature may be easily risen to the before mentioned correct
value.
The speed of flow should be at least double as high as the nominal speed of flow during
operation of the system and to reach at all points in the range of the turbulent flow. Speed
recommendations:
Pressure line between pump set and control valve 8 m/s
Pressure line between control valves and winch 14 m/s
Return line between pump set and control valve 5 m/s
Leak oil lines 2 m/s
• Flushing time depends on the length of the piping, the flushing flow, the oil temperature, the
filter and most of all on the degree of precleaning of the piping. The flushing time should be
carried out until the filter contamination indicators or a particle counter machine has shown no
contamination for more than an hour.
• Take oil samples from the piping and the oil reservoir. When the cleanliness of the piping is
16/13 of ISO 4406 or equivalent NAS 1638 class 7, flushing may be stopped.

OIL CONTAMINATION LEVELS CHART
Quantity
CODE
CONTAMINATION of recommended Sensibility
ISO
CLASS particles of the Type of hydraulic system
4406
NAS 1638 each 100 ml System
5 µm 15 µm 5 µm 15 µm
Super High reliability system, sensitive to
4 13 9 4000 250
Crítical microlad. Laboratory and Aerospace
High pressure system, long life of service
6 15 11 16000 1000 Crítical .Servo-systems, machine-tools NC, test
stands.
Reliable system of high quality. Necessities
Very
7 16 13 32000 4000 Industrial in general, machine-tool, iron and
Important
steel industry
Medium system of capacity of pressure.
9 18 14 130000 8000 Important Mobile systems and industrial necessities
in general
System of low pressure. Heavy industry
10 19 15 250000 16000 Medium and applications in those that it is not
necessary long life of service.
12 21 17 1000000 64000 Weak System of low pressure and high tolerance
• When flushing has stopped, drain the piping and connect the actuators, valves and aggregate
to the piping. This working must be carried out with absolute cleanliness.
3. - Pressure test:
Pressure test for the piping system to be carried out before the hydraulic equipments are
connected and checked for leaks and re-tightened as necessary.
The pressure test must be done, if there are no other handicaps or requirements of classification
societies, according the following value:
P = 1.5 x nominal work pressure
B – RECOMMENDATION FOR HYDRAULIC OILS

4. - General remarks:
Normally the system uses mineral oil based hydraulic oils with good lubrication characteristics
and a viscosity suitable for the running temperature.
The ISO recommendations designate all lube oil viscosities used in industry as cent stokes (cst)
+40ºC. the grades are marked as ISO VG. The most common hydraulic viscosity grades are:
ISO VG 32, viscosity +40ºC 28.8.....35.2 cst
The oil viscosity varies according to temperature. The viscosity index indicates the effect of
temperature changes in viscosity. The higher the viscosity index, the smaller the change in
viscosity caused by temperature variations.

The pour point represents the temperature in which oil congeals. As a rule, the oil pour point
should be at least 10ºC below the ambient temperature.
5. - Recommendation and selection oil table:

In the under table there are some hydraulic oils recommended by Ibercisa:
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE WORK

-15ºC AT 0ºC 0ºC AT 40ºC >40ºC
AGIP OSO 15 OSO 46 OSO 68
ESSO NUTO H 15 NUTO H 46 NUTO H 68
IP HIDRUS OIL 15 HIDRUS OIL 46 HIDRUS OIL 68
MOBIL DTE 22 DTE 25 DTE 26
SHELL TELLUS 22 TELLUS 46 TELLUS 68
The above recommendation and selection table are used as guidelines. Use the help of local oil
specialist in the selection of oil.
C – COMMISSIONING OF HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

6. - Oil filling:
Tanks should be re-checked for cleanliness before being filled with hydraulic fluid. Open the
cleaning cover of the tank of the power pack and check the tank is clean inside, and also that
there is no condensed water. Clean the inside of tank if was required. Cotton rags must not be
used.
Check that the oil used for filling is clean and conform to the oil recommendations of the
installation manufacturer, taking in account operating conditions (operating pressure, operating
temperature, etc), and ambient conditions. Information can also be obtained from the data sheets
supplied by the manufacturer of hydraulic oil.
To fill oil into tank, to remove the filling plug and the oil tank should be filled up to the upper mark
and checked for leaks (welded joints, valves, flanges, etc), make sure that the drain valve is
closed.
The pump and motor crankcases should be re-filled by removing the drain hose or pipe and must
be the highest drain connection.
7. - Check list before start:

Before starting should be check that:
The pipelines, flexible hoses and components (valves, motors, pumps, etc.) are correctly
connected in the lines.
The electrical motor connections are connected, and check the insulation resistances of the
same.
The electrical connections of electro valves, levels, servo-valves, etc. are connected.
The oil level in the tank is above the minimum mark.
The low oil level alarm is connected and it works correctly.
The very low oil level alarm is connected and it works correctly, must to stop pumps.
The shut-off valves in suction lines of the pumps are fully open; they must be opened little by little
not suddenly.

The crankcases of the pumps and motors are full of oil, lose the highest hose in crankcase and
see oil leak.
The directional control valves are in neutral position.
The direction of rotation of the pump is according with the direction of rotation indicated with the
arrow in the electrical motor.
Set all pressure relief valves to minimum, particularly the pump main pressure valve or
compensator pumps.
8. - Starting of pumps. Purge air:

Start the electric motor momentarily so that it rotates and to check the direction of rotation
indicated with the arrow is correct. If necessary, change the direction of rotation of the motor.
In order to lubricate the pump, start the pumps one by one, and rotate the pump momentarily (2-3
sec.) and stop it, repeat it few times and check that the pump starts to delivery flow.
Switch on the hydraulic system under no pressure conditions.
Make sure that the claw clutches are disconnected, if not disconnect them.
Purge air may be done at lowest possible pressure, the air will purge through T line to the tank
little by little, or if there is a connection at high point in the system you can purge by here.
Allow the pumps to run for approx. 10 minutes under no pressure conditions and check for pump
noise and temperature. You can rotate the winch at varying speed to both directions.
Start to set the main pressure relief valve and compensator pumps 20 bars, this will allow the
installation to warm up. May be you need to clutch the winch to reach more pressure.
Monitor measuring equipment, pressure gauges, thermometers, continuously.
Check lines and connectors for leaks and re-tighten if necessary.
9. - Adjustment of system:
The pumps mounted in the power pack have pressure compensator it should be adjusted to the
maximum work pressure.
If there is more pressure relief valves in the system they should be adjusted 10 or 15 bars above
the pressure adjusted in the pump compensators.
The overcenter valves should be adjusted 20 or 25 bars over the hauling work pressure.
To set the pump compensator to maximum pressure and set the other pressure relief valves, we
could to clutch the winch and work against brakes.

9. - Start - up
Before to start up the Tectyl applied on mechanical parts, guides and spindle must be removed. To remove
as follows:
9.1. - Table of oils.

On Annex-XI is a table with recommended oils and greases to be used on winches.
9.2. – Greasing
Before to rotate the winches the gearboxes will be filled with oil, the type in accordance with
recommendation table and capacity as shown above.
The greasers will filled with grease, when applicable the guides and diamond shafts of spooling device and
all mechanical parts in the proximity of retainers, chains and pieces not covered by paint.
On annex-XII are drawings with points to be greased.
The transport stiffeners when applied should be removed.
10. – Maintenance manual

Hydraulic combined towing winch
• The components of the winch which need maintenance are:
- Brakes.
- Clutches.
- Hydraulic motor.
- Chain-lifter.
- Drum.
- Supports.
• It’s recommend, as minimum, to check each year the brake hydraulic cylinder to see the
Belleville springs condition.
• Regarding the bushings, brake bolts, spindles, supports, clutch nuts, Chain-lifter, drum, etc.
which need to be lubricated with grease (each one of them have its correspondent greaser) have
to be greased, as minimum each week.
• The greases, which are recommended, are indicated in the enclosed list of oils and greases.
• Regarding the hydraulic motor see: “Hagglunds”, maintenance and purification.
Note:
Before starting the winch, be sure that all the parts of the machine are greased.

10.1. – Hydraulic components
1.General:
Proper maintenance of a hydraulic circuit takes very little time compared to the number of hours
of operation it can ensure. Good maintenance always begins with the right choice of oil for the
circuit.
Using the right fluid for your application will protect all material against wear, especially the
moving parts of pumps and motors.
You should establish a maintenance schedule, and open a maintenance card, either for each
circuit or for each apparatus. On it you should not down the preventative measures already taken,
and the anomalies noted during inspection, in order to determine further maintenance work.
Recommendations for maintenance:

Before starting any work on a circuit, ensure that the power circuit of the electric motor is turned
off. If the circuit contains accumulators, insulate them, and open the bleed valves of the
accumulators and make sure there are no remains of pressure in the circuit.
Every day:
• Check the oil level in the tank.
• Check the appearance of the oil; foam on the surface indicates that air has got in, either in
the pump (shaft pass-gaskets, bottom gaskets), or in the suction line or in the connections. The
presence of foam is generally accompanied by noisy operation of the pump and irregularities in
the receivers. A cloudy appearance indicates the presence of water.
• If necessary, add oil to re-establish a correct level; for preference, we recommend that you
use a bleed set fitted with a micronic filter of 10 microns of absolute filtering.
• Note all new leaks in the apparatus and the pipes. During the first month in service, pay
special attention to the connections will enable you to eliminate leaks.
• Check colmatage of un-submerged filters, by looking at the position of the colmatage
indicators.
• For filters fitted in line, note down the pressure gauge readings at the inlet and outlet of the
filters.
• Note down the oil temperature. Any important variation may be due to an obstruction in the
bundle of pipes, in the cooler or in the water filter fitted in the cooler supply line, or even to a fault
in the power supply, or an operating fault in the thermostat valve.
• Check the power supply to the electric valves. The voltage should lie within the following
values: 5% above the rated value and 10% below this value.
• Check pumps fitted with drainage pipes, to ensure that there is no abnormal rise in
temperature in the drainage pipes, which could be an indication of excessive internal leakage.

Every week:
• Cleaning power pack unit.
• Checking hoses and piping for damage.
• Repair any leaks noted on the list over the previous days during operation. Do not try to
repair a leak by over-tightening the connection elements. It is better to change faulty elements,
gaskets and rings that are incorrectly fitted in the pipe, flanges, etc.
• Ensure that the securing elements of the motor pump sets, valve supports and pipes are
properly tightened.
• Check proper securing of the receivers, hydraulic motors and cylinders.
• Adjust the operating pressures and correct any settings that need changing.
Every month:
• Draining water from oil tank.
• Take oil samples to the tank and motor (by under drainage connection)
• Checking pump delivery.
Every year (or in oil change):

• Empty the tank, clean the walls and ensure that there are no signs of rust on the top wall.
Brush off any signs of rust and re-paint if necessary.
• Oil change:
It depends of the characteristics of the equipment.
The first change should be carried out under the conditions of work and the aging of the oil. In
small installations, up to 500 after 1000 hours of service, in large installations, since 2000 until
2500 hours of service. Oil changes can be used later than 3000 to 4000 hours, and even a little
longer if the oil will be cleaned and monitored continuously, however it is recommended not to
exceed 5000 hours of work.
The continuous monitoring of oil can be removed once a week a sample of the oil, leaving it to
pass through a filter paper or clean cloth. The colour of the waste allows certain conclusions
about the degree of aging. A dark blue colour requires an urgent change of oil.

ANNEXES

ANNEX I. – WINCHES DATASHEETS

OV 16491-0521 DATASHEET
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
OV 16515-0521
NPI 110040
Dwg 20360521
1.:. Winch data

RA3 Empty weight We 5.900 Kg Operation weight 1 Wo 6.214 Kg
Drum diameter D 457 mm Flow pump Q 135 l/min

Drum flange diameter Da 1.525 mm Maximum pressure pm 250 bar
Drum flanges distance La 300 mm Working pressure pw 245 bar
Ratio D/d D/d 9,1 Return pressure pr 5 bar
Ratio Da/D Da/D 3,3 Spindle pitch ph
Warping end diameter Dwe 430 mm Mechanical efficiency ηm 0,97
Rope diameter w.end dr 40 mm Volumetric efficiency ηv 0,92
Gear ratio i 1 Requested power P 58 Kw
Chain diameter dc 20,5 mm Warping en pressure pw 45 bar
CBL Q 3 dc 350 KN Maximum pressure wildcat pm 80 bar
Wildcat diameter 7 Dwi 365 mm Spooling factor sf 0,97
Rope capacity 176 Lc 150 m Laps/layer ne 5

Rope diameter (drum) d 50 mm Laps on last layer ne' 3
Rope breaking load RBL 2.150 KN Cable weight Wc 264 Kg
Dyneema 219,2 tons Cable weight (seawater) Wsw Kg
2.:. Performances
Dynamic layer pull tons v m/min pull tons v m/min
1 12,2 22,5 Wi 5,5 16,2
7 6,1 44,6 We 4,3 20,8
11 4,6 59,3
Static F1c 125,0
Revision A3 . . . . . Doc nº
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
Prepared AAP . . . . .
page 1 of 6
Approved AAP . . . . .
25
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
3.1.:. Pull / speed on first layer

s1 - 1st Haulback 100,00% 9,00 tons 88,26 KN 31,00 m/m
s1 - half Haulback 100,00% 4,40 tons 43,15 KN 63,00 m/m
s1 - full Haulback 100,00% 3,30 tons 32,36 KN 85,00 m/m
s1 - wild Haulback 100,00% 3,80 tons 37,27 KN 22,00 m/m
s1 - warp Haulback 100,00% 3,00 tons 29,42 KN 29,00 m/m
3.2.:. Hydraulic motors data

cc-1 sp.trq-1 r/m-1 p 1 max
motor
cm3 Nm/bar max bar
CA-140 8.800,00 127,60 220,00 350,00
3.3.:. Required flow and pressure for each speed

s1 - 1st s1 - half s1 - full s1 - wild s1 - warp
pull KN 88,26 43,15 32,36 37,27 29,42
v m/min 31,00 63,00 85,00 22,00 29,00
radius 0,25 0,50 0,67 0,18 0,24
r/m drum 19,46 19,94 20,21 19,16 19,64
cc M 8.800,00 8.800,00 8.800,00 8.800,00 8.800,00
i 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00 1,00
r/m M 19,46 19,94 20,21 19,16 19,64
sp.trq. M 127,60 127,60 127,60 127,60 127,60
Q 186,17 190,69 193,35 183,31 187,86
p 180,77 175,34 174,98 55,01 55,86
3.4.:. Pull and speed with nominal flow and pressure

Q 135,00 135,00 135,00 135,00 135,00
p 245,00 245,00 245,00 80,00 80,00
pull tons 12,20 6,15 4,62 5,53 4,30
v m/m 22,48 44,60 59,35 16,20 20,84
r/m drum 14,11 14,11 14,11 14,11 14,11
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
page 2 of 6
26
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
4.:. Drum capacity

Drum diameter D 457,00 mm Drum flange diameter Da 1.525 mm
Rope diameter d 50,00 mm Drum flanges distance La 300 mm
layer inc Ø layer pull speed laps layer cp acum cap acum inv
mm mm tons m/min m m m
1 50,00 507 12,20 22,48 5 8 8 151
2 83,15 590 10,48 26,17 5 9 17 143
3 83,15 673 9,19 29,85 5 11 28 134
4 83,15 756 8,18 33,54 5 12 40 123
5 83,15 840 7,37 37,23 5 13 53 111
6 83,15 923 6,70 40,91 5 14 67 98
7 83,15 1.006 6,15 44,60 5 16 83 84
8 83,15 1.089 5,68 48,29 5 17 100 68
9 83,15 1.172 5,28 51,97 5 18 119 51
10 83,15 1.255 4,93 55,66 5 20 138 32
11 83,15 1.338 4,62 59,35 3 13 151 13
Outside spooled diameter Do 1.388,48 mm Drum speed nd 14,11 r/m

Free heigth h 68,26 mm Filled time t 3,76 min
Laps nº nt 53,00 Average speed vavg 39,94 m/m
Laps pitch a 55,56
4.1.:. ISO 4568

U3 Tmin = 47,5 * d^2 19,96 KN 2,04 tons
Tov = 1,5 * Tmin 29,94 KN 3,05 tons
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
page 3 of 6
27
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
5.1.:. Brake and components calculation P3 125,00 tons 47,35 tons

P3 1.225,83 KN 464,33 KN
Brake diameter Db 1.388,00 mm 1.388,00 mm
Drum diameter D mm mm
Working diameter Dw 507,00 mm 1.338,48 mm

Lever brake distance Lb 895,00 mm 895,00 mm
Brake material brake liner TRIMAT
Friction coefficient µ 0,30 0,30
Width of brake wb 200,00 mm 200,00 mm
Brake force Fb 347,20 KN 347,20 KN

Brake moment Mb 310.748,22 Nm 310.748,22 Nm
Brake contact angle 300,00 deg α 5,24 rad 5,24 rad
Coefficient m 4,81 4,81
Operation force Pt 447,76 KN 447,76 KN
Band forces S2 117,51 KN 117,51 KN
S1 565,27 KN 565,27 KN
Max pressure on brake band Pa máx 4,07 N/mm2 4,07 N/mm2
5.2.:. Brake cylinder

L1 241,00 mm 241,00 mm La 745,00 mm 745,00 mm
L2 860,00 mm 860,00 mm Da 125,00 mm 125,00 mm
S2 117,51 KN 117,51 KN Di 64,00 mm 64,00 mm
F 32,93 KN 32,93 KN s 8,00 mm 8,00 mm
doc 150,00 mm 150,00 mm ho 10,60 mm 10,60 mm
dic 130,00 mm 130,00 mm h 2,60 mm 2,60 mm
p 60,00 bar 60,00 bar f 1,95 mm 1,95 mm
Li 895,00 mm 895,00 mm P 85,93 KN 85,93 KN
fass 150,00 mm 150,00 mm n 120,00 120,00
K 0,37 KN/mm 0,37 KN/mm
5.3.:. Forces on cylinder
Force due to spring washers as assembled - ON Fa 55,08 KN 55,08 KN
Cylinder section area Ac 13.273,23 mm2 13.273,23 mm2
Force due pressure on cylinder Fc 79,64 KN 79,64 KN
Maximum force on spring washers Fmax 114,57 KN 114,57 KN
Working run at p 60,00 bar Lp 66,87 mm 66,87 mm
Limited run r 65,00 mm 65,00 mm
OFF OFF 78,95 KN 78,95 KN
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
page 4 of 6
28
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
6.:. Wildcat brake P3 16,06 tons

P3 157,50 KN
Brake diameter Db 470,00 mm
Wildcat diameter Dw 365,42 mm
Brake moment Mb 28.776,81 Nm
Brake material TRIMAT
Friction coefficient µ 0,30
Width of brake wb 120,00 mm
Brake contact angle 360,00 deg 6,28 rad

6,59
Pt 122,45 KN
S2 21,92 KN
S1 144,38 KN
Maximum pressure on brake band Pa máx 5,12 N/mm2
Angle on b.joint 90,00 deg 1,57 rad
Force on the bolted joint Sb1 203,42 N
Angle on b.joint 270,00 deg 4,71 rad
Force on the bolted joint Sb2 39,36 N
Force to be applied F 39,36 KN
wheel diameter dv 230,00 mm
pitch p 7,00 mm
spindle mean diameter dm 36,00 mm
wheel force µ 0,20
Fv 0,82 KN
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
page 5 of 6
29
NPI 110018
MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1
Dwg 20360521
7.:. Drum clutch
7.1.:. Data
Outside cylinder diameter do 90,00 mm Length b/clutch levers L1 374,00 mm
Inside cylinder diameter di 70,00 mm Length b/clutch-cyl levers L2 293,00 mm
Outside shaft diameter Do 80,00 mm Lever radius cylinder rcy 316,50 mm
Inside shaft diameter Di 50,00 mm Lever radius clutch rc 348,00 mm
Square side a 50,00 mm Maximum working pressure p 30,00 bars
Material F-112 Yield strength Sy1 225,00 N/mm2

Transversal elasticity modulus G 79.461,00 N/mm2 Allowable shear τallow1 128,25 N/mm2
Material F-1250 Yield strength Sy2 560,00 N/mm2
Allowable shear τallow2 319,20 N/mm2
7.2.:. Shear safety coefficient and angle
Cylinder area Ac 3.848,45 mm2 Torque moment Mt 3.654,10 Nm
Cylinder force Fc 11,55 KN Force on clutch lever Fcl 10,50 KN
Shaft area Ase 3.063,05 mm2 Shear on shaft τ 42,90 N/mm2
Shaft Wt Wt 85.169,66 mm3 Cu 2,99
Polar inertia moment It 3.407.646,28 mm4 Torsion angle by meter 7,73 deg/m
Angle between clutch levers ψm1 2,89 deg Angle between end levers ψm2 2,27 deg
Square Wt Wt 26.000,00 mm3 Shear on square τ 140,54 N/mm2
Cu 2,27
7.3.:. Clutch nut
Hexagon outside diameter dh 215,00 mm Hexagon length (nut) Lh 135,00 mm
Number of merlons nm 6,00 Mean diameter on merlons dm 480,00 mm
Merlon heigth (contact) hm 50,00 mm Merlon width (contact) wm 40,00 mm
Torque transmited 350 M 44.660,00 Nm Force on hexagon by mm Fh 0,51 KN/mm
Merlon pressure σ 15,51 N/mm2
Date 25-04-11 . . . . . IB-FT- 16491-0521
page 6 of 6
30
ANNEX II – DATASHEET TECTYL 506

32
33
ANNEX III – DRAWINGS AND MATERIAL LIST

20360521 – Hydraulic combined anchor winch

36
37
38
Listado de nivel inmediato
Company: 001 IBERCISA MADE BY: JUAN DATE: 16-02-11

REVISED BY: AAP DATE: 16-02-11
DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20360521 HYDRAULIC TOWING WINCH MR-MAN/H/80/150-40/20,5-22-S/1

PIECE Nº DWG Nº QTY DENOMINATION MATERIAL DESCRIPTION
1 20970628 1.000 BRAKE ASSEMBLY F-1390 IBERCISA SEE DWG
2 20970574 1.000 BRAKE ASSEMBLY F-470 IBERCISA SEE DWG
3 20960507 1.000 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IBERCISA SEE DWG
4 20960449 1.000 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY IBERCISA SEE DWG
5 20952441 1.000 SUPPORT MOTOR S355 J2 SEE DWG
6 20952451 1.000 SUPPORT S355 J2 SEE DWG
8 20990715 1.000 DRUM S355J2 SEE DWG
9 20891344 1.000 MAIN SHAFT F-1250 SEE DWG
10 20770786 2.000 BASE S355 J2 SEE DWG
11 20770787 1.000 BASE S355 J2 SEE DWG
12 20770788 1.000 BASE S355 J2 SEE DWG
13 20810081 1.000 CHAIN LIFTER ø 20,5-22 AC. MOLDEADO SEE DWG
14 20800171 1.000 WARPING END ø 430 AC. MOLD. GS-45 SEE DWG
15 20882232 1.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
16 20882233 1.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
17 20882234 1.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
18 20882235 2.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
19 20882236 1.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
20 20861472 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
21 20861473 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
22 20861474 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
23 20861475 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
24 20861323 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
25 20861324 1.000 SPACER S355 J2 SEE DWG
26 20410194 1.000 FIXATION NUT S355 J2 SEE DWG
27 20411075 1.000 FIXATION NUT S355 J2 SEE DWG
28 20570097 1.000 WASHER S355 J2 SEE DWG
29 20410186 4.000 STUD F-114 SEE DWG
30 20952449 3.000 BRAKE SUPPORT S355 J2 SEE DWG
31 20411076 1.000 GUIDE CHAIN S355 J2 SEE DWG
32 20840501 2.000 BUSHING BRONZE RG10 SEE DWG
34 28108140 6.000 GREASER 1/4" BSP
35 27160807 8.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 16 X 80 DIN 931-GALVANIZED
36 28701609 8.000 WASHER 16 DIN 125 GALVANIZED
37 28701601 8.000 HEX. NUT M 16 DIN 934-GALVANIZED
41 27240608 1.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 24 X 60 DIN 933 8. 8 GALVANIZED
43 27201007 4.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M20 X 100 DIN 931-8.8 GALVANIZED
44 27120508 48.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 12 X 50 DIN 933-8.8 GALVANIZED
18/04/11 1 de 2
39
DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20360521 HYDRAULIC TOWING WINCH MR-MAN/H/80/150-40/20,5-22-S/1

46 28703001 8.000 HEX. NUT M 30 DIN 934-8.8 GALVANIZED
48 21123132 1.000 SPHERICAL ROLLER BEARING 160-270-86 23132 CC/W33
49 21123038 3.000 SPHERICAL ROLLER BEARING 190-290-75 23038 CC/W33
50 22606433 4.000 SEAL BA 220 - 250- 15
51 22320733 2.000 SEAL BA 190 - 220 - 15
52 22420833 1.000 SEAL BA 160-190-15
53 22557333 1.000 SEAL 185-210-13 BA
54 13160050 2.000 O-RING OR 160-5
55 13123884 1.000 O-RING OR 123,8-8,4
56 02400150 1.000 MOTOR HID HAGGLUNDS CA-140 140 SA0N 00+BRAZO TCA1 4
57 28321880 0.170 BAR KEY A 32 X 18 DIN 6885
58 28121571 2.000 BEARING M 12 X 15 DIN 913
18/04/11 2 de 2
40
41

DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20970628 BRAKE ASSEMBLY F-1390

1 20920183 1.000 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY IBERCISA SEE DWG
3 20580938 2.000 TIE S355 J2 SEE DWG
5 20580593 1.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
6 20580687 2.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
7 20580688 2.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
8 20580573 2.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
9 20580872 3.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
11 20410842 6.000 ASEMBLING PLATE S355 J2 SEE DWG
12 20870554 1.000 BOLT F-1270 SEE DWG
13 20560057a 1.000 PULL S355 J2 SEE DWG
14 20450170 1.000 BAND BRAKE S355 J2 SEE DWG
15 20580680 2.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
16 20440094 1.000 SPINDLE F-1270 SEE DWG
17 20440091 1.000 NUT BRONZE RG10 SEE DWG
20 20870485 1.000 BOLT AISI-304 SEE DWG
21 20870580 1.000 BOLT AISI-304 SEE DWG
22 20410936 2.000 ASEMBLING PLATE S355 J2 SEE DWG
23 14012016 2.157 M. BRAKE LINING ASBESTOS FREE 200 X 16
24 14012016 1.740 M. BRAKE LINING ASBESTOS FREE 200 X 16
25 27100402 4.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 10 X 40 DIN 933-8.8
26 28701009 4.000 WASHER A 10 DIN 125 GALVANIZED
27 28108140 10.000 GREASER 1/4" BSP
30 27200408 6.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 20 X 40 DIN933-8.8 GALVANIZED
34 27080445 27.000 SCREW CAB. HAZELNUT M8 X 40 DIN 7991 A-4 INOX
37 28400805 70.000 SELF BLOCKING NUT M 8 DIN 985- A-4 INOX
38 20570391 1.000 WASHER S355 J2 SEE DWG
39 20411138 1.000 STOP FOR SPINDLE S355 J2 SEE DWG
40 27160507 6.000 SCREW EXAGONAL M 16 X 50 DIN 931-8.8 GALVANIZED
18/04/11 1 de 1
42
JU A N
43

DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20920183 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER ASSEMBLY

1 20440184 1.000 SCREW SHANK F-114 CROMED SEE DWG
2 20460094 1.000 CYLINDER BODY S355 J2 SEE DWG
3 20460093 1.000 PISTON S355 J2 SEE DWG
4 20881723 1.000 COVER S355 J2 SEE DWG
5 28112585 120.000 DISK SPRINGS A-125 DIN 2093
6 13048050 2.000 O-RING OR 48-5
7 22011903 1.000 GUIDE PISTON FB 20 X 2 LONG. 459
8 22012003 1.000 COLLAR AUN 130-106 (Ø 130 X Ø150 X15 )
9 28104501 1.000 HEX. NUT M 45 DIN 934-8.8
10 28104508 1.000 WASHER SPRING A45 DIN 127
11 22011003 1.000 GUIA SPINDLE FB 35 X 2 LONG. 214
12 22010903 1.000 SCRAPER AS Ø 63 X Ø75-7-10
13 22015403 1.000 COLLAR T20 63-78-10
14 13160040 1.000 O-RING OR 160-4
15 13192040 1.000 O-RING OR 192-4
16 27140006 10.000 HEX. HEAD SCREW M 14 X 50 DIN 933-12K
18 22018303 1.000 MOULDED BELOWS V6-00352 (50CR879) REF 334513
18/04/11 1 de 1
44
45

DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20970574 BRAKE ASSEMBLY F-470

1 20440128 1.000 SPINDLE AISI 304 SEE DWG
4 20580706 4.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
5 20580707 2.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
7 20450107 1.000 BAND BRAKE S355 J2 SEE DWG
8 27080001 52.000 SCREW CAB. HAZELNUT M8 X 30 DIN 963 A BRASS
9 28500801 52.000 HEX. NUT M8 DIN 934 BRASS
12 14011210 1.450 M. BRAKE LINING ASBESTOS FREE 120-10
14 20580708 4.000 LUG S355 J2 SEE DWG
15 20870630 1.000 BOLT F-1270 SEE DWG
16 28104450 2.000 COTTER PIN ø 4 X 40 DIN 94
18/04/11 1 de 1
46
JU A N
47
Company: 001 IBERCISA MADE BY: DATE:

REVISED BY: DATE:
DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20960507 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

1 20590293 1.000 CLUTCH NUT S355 J2 SEE DWG
2 20430072 2.000 CRANKPIN BRONZE RG5 SEE DWG
3 20410786 2.000 SCREW S355 J2 SEE DWG
4 20420241 1.000 CLUTCH LESEE S355 J2 SEE DWG
5 20420209 1.000 CYLINDER LESEE S355 J2 SEE DWG
8 20570220 1.000 WASHER S355 J2 SEE DWG
9 20870461 1.000 BOLT AISI 304 SEE DWG
10 20870267 1.000 BOLT AISI 304 SEE DWG
11 20952061 1.000 CYLINDER SUPPORT S355 J2 SEE DWG
15 30916045 2.000 PROXIMITY SWITCHER OMRON E2A-M18KS08-WP-B1 PNP
16 28104450 4.000 COTTER PIN ø 4 X 40 DIN 94
17 28108140 3.000 GREASER 1/4" BSP
20 12100055 1.000 CIL HIDRØ80XCARR50MM VAST INOX HORQ MECM3660508
22 20952062 1.000 CATCHER SUPPORT S355 J2 SEE DWG
18/04/11 1 de 1
48
49

DATE : 18/04/11
Item: 20960449 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

1 20590273 1.000 CLUTCH NUT S355 J2 SEE DWG
2 20430075 2.000 CRANKPIN BRONZE RG5 SEE DWG
3 20430076 2.000 SCREW F-112 SEE DWG
4 20420186 1.000 FORK S355 J2 SEE DWG
5 20410178 1.000 SCREW F-304 SEE DWG
10 28108140 1.000 GREASER 1/4" BSP
11 25501008 0.045 M. BAR ø 8 F-1 F-1
12 40011001 0.200 INOX CHAIN ø 3
13 30916045 2.000 PROXIMITY SWITCHER OMRON E2A-M18KS08-WP-B1 PNP
14 20951869 1.000 CATCHER SUPPORT S355 J2 SEE DWG
18/04/11 1 de 1
50
ANNEX IV – HYDRAULIC DIAGRAM

52
ANNEX V – ELECTRIC DIAGRAMS

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
ANNEX VI – HYDRAULIC MOTOR

Installation and
Maintenance
Manual
Compact CA Motors
150
151
Installation and Maintenance Manual
Compact CA
EN411-14h 2008
152
Preface Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
Preface
Hägglunds Drives is one of the worlds leading manufacturers of large hydraulic
Drive Systems. A leading position, made possible by unbeatable service spirit
and of continuing development of both products and markets all over the world.
Our drives are to be found in most industrial and marine segments, where
there are extremely high demands for efficiency and reliability. Our main office
and production plant is in Mellansel, Sweden and we have our own sales- and
representation offices in some 40 different countries.
Our high quality Drive Systems, are based upon our unique hydraulic piston
motors, developed through a wealth of experience accumulated over 30
years in marine and industrial areas.Today this ongoing development work
has resulted in the powerful COMPACT CA industrial motor. New, as well as
established technical solutions, contribute to the creation of this product. The
most desirable features and operating reliability have been designed in this
hydraulic motor.
This manual provides necessary information for installation and maintenance

of the motor. In order to find particular information, just search for the wanted
section as listed in the table of contents. However, changes in the equipment
may occur. We therefore reserve the right to introduce amendments in the
manual as we deem necessary without notice or obligations.
This Installation and Maintenance Manual is

valid for motors manufactured after 2003-06-01.
For older motors please contact your nearest
Hägglunds Drives representative.
Original EN411-13h, 2006
153
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Contents
Contents
1. GENERAL............................................................................................................................. 6
1.1 Safety precautions ................................................................................................................ 6
1.2 Motor data............................................................................................................................. 7
1.3 Functional description........................................................................................................... 8
2. TECHNICAL DATA............................................................................................................... 9
2.1 Recommended charge pressure........................................................................................... 9
2.2 Sound from a complete installation..................................................................................... 10
2.3 Choice of hydraulic fluid...................................................................................................... 11
Environmentally acceptable fluids....................................................................................... 12
3. INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................... 13
3.1 Mounting instructions........................................................................................................... 13
Thread for mounting tool...................................................................................................... 14
Spline .................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.1 Lifting methods..................................................................................................................... 15
Standing the motor on a flat surface..................................................................................... 17
3.1.2 Mounting the coupling onto the motor shaft......................................................................... 18
Instruction to follow when mounting the COMPACT CA motor on a driven shaft................. 18
3.1.3a Fitting the torque arm to the motor ...................................................................................... 20
3.1.3b Fitting the double ended torque arm.................................................................................... 21
3.1.4a Mounting the motor onto the driven shaft - shaft coupling.................................................... 22
3.1.4b Mounting the motor onto the driven shaft - splines............................................................... 24
3.1.5 Removing the motor from the driven shaft........................................................................... 26
3.1.6 Mounting the reaction point ................................................................................................. 27
3.1.7 Brake MDA........................................................................................................................... 28
3.1.8 Brake MDA 5, 7 & 10 ........................................................................................................... 28
3.1.9 Mounting MDA 5, 7 & 10...................................................................................................... 29
3.1.10 Draining of brake cylinder . .................................................................................................. 29
Disassembly of MDA 5, 7 &10 ............................................................................................. 30
3.1.11 Brake MDA 14 & 21 ............................................................................................................. 31
3.1.12 Mounting MDA 14 & 21 ........................................................................................................ 32
3.1.13 Draining of brake cylinder .................................................................................................... 32
Disassembly and assembly of MDA 14 & 21 ....................................................................... 33
3.1.14 Control of braking torque ..................................................................................................... 33
3.1.15 Motors with 2-speed valve ................................................................................................... 34
Mounting of 2-speed valve on CA 50 - 210 ........................................................................ .34
3.2 Oil connections..................................................................................................................... 35
3.2.1 Direction of rotation of motor shaft....................................................................................... 37
Motor with displacement shift valve .................................................................................... .37
3.2.2 Draining and venting the motor............................................................................................ 38
3.2.3 Flushing................................................................................................................................ 39
4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS........................................................................................... 39
4.1 Storage................................................................................................................................ 39
4.2 Before commissioning......................................................................................................... 39
4.3 Commissioning.................................................................................................................... 40
4.4 Periodic maintenance.......................................................................................................... 40
Maintenance chart.............................................................................................................. 40
Axial thrust bearing ............................................................................................................ 41
Motor................................................................................................................................... 41
Filters.................................................................................................................................. 42
Oil........................................................................................................................................ 42
4.5 Oil inspection....................................................................................................................... 42
5. FAULT FINDING................................................................................................................. 44
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY................................................................................... 46
154
General Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
1. GENERAL
1.1 Safety precautions
It is of high importence that the Safety precautions are always followed, if you are
unsure about something, please don´t hesitate to contact your nearest HD-office
for advice.
Warning signs
In this manual you will find the following signs which indicate a potential hazard, which can or will
cause personal enjury or substantial property damage. Depending on the probability of the hazard,
and how serious the injury or property damage could be, there are three levels of classification.
DANGER is used to indicate the presence of a hazard

which will cause severe personal injury, death, or
substantial property damage if the warning is ignored.
WARNING is used to indicate the presence of a hazard

which can cause severe personal injury, death, or
substantial property damage if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION is used to indicate the presence of a hazard

which will or can cause minor personal injury or property
damage if the warning is ignored.
Application area
All new and rebuild applications, should always be approved and supervised by Hägglunds
personel.
Mounting
Carefully follow the instructions and be aware of the high weights and forces during lifting.
Before starting up
Before starting up new, rebuild or just worked on applications, all accessories and safety
arrangements functions, should be controlled/tested.
Periodic maintenance
Notice the intervals in maintenance chart (4.4) and keep a record.
Dismounting
Carefully follow the instructions and be aware of the high weights and forces during lifting.
155
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA General
1.2 Motor data

Table 1.1
Motor type FULL DISPLACEMENT Max. ** DISPLACEMENT SHIFT
pressure
Displace- Specific Rated Max.*** Displace- Specific Rated Max. Ratio
Metric ment torque speed speed ment torque speed speed
Vi cm3 Ts Nm n rev bar

n rev p Vi cm3 Ts Nm n rev n rev
rev bar min min rev bar min min
CA 50 20 1256 20 400 400 350
CA 50 25 1570 25 350 400 350 Not recommended to be used in
CA 50 32 2010 32 280 400 350 reduced displacement
CA 50 40 2512 40 230 350 350
CA 50 3140 50 200 280 350 1570 25 200 280 1:2
CA 70 40 2512 40 270 400 350
CA 70 50 3140 50 225 320 350 1570 25 225 320 1:2
CA 70 60 3771 60 195 275 350 1886 30 195 275 1:2
CA 70 4400 70 180 240 350 2200 35 180 240 1:2
CA 100 40 2512 40 390 400 350
CA 100 50 3140 50 320 400 350
CA 100 64 4020 64 260 390 350
CA 100 80 5024 80 220 310 350 2512 40 220 310 1:2
CA 100 6280 100 190 270 350 3140 50 190 270 1:2
CA 140 80 5024 80 245 340 350
CA 140 100 6280 100 205 275 350 3140 50 205 275 1:2
CA 140 120 7543 120 180 245 350 3771 60 180 245 1:2
CA 140 8800 140 170 220 350 4400 70 170 220 1:2
CA 210 160 10051 160 105 150 350 5026 80 105 150 1:2
CA 210 180 11314 180 100 135 350 5657 90 100 135 1:2
CA 210 13200 210 85 115 350 6600 105 85 115 1:2
Motor type FULL DISPLACEMENT Max. ** DISPLACEMENT SHIFT

Displace- Specific Rated Max. *** pressure Displace- Specific Rated Max. Ratio
US ment torque speed speed ment torque speed speed
Vi in3 Ts lbf·ft n rev n rev p

psi Vi in3 Ts lbf·ft n rev n rev
rev 1000 psi min min rev 1000 psi min min
CA 50 20 76,6 1017 400 400 5000
CA 50 25 95,8 1271 350 400 5000 Not recommended to be used in
CA 50 32 122,6 1627 280 400 5000 reduced displacement
CA 50 40 153,3 2034 230 350 5000
CA 50 191,6 2543 200 280 5000 95,8 1271 200 280 1:2
CA 70 40 153,3 2034 270 400 5000
CA 70 50 191,6 2543 225 320 5000 95,8 1271 225 320 1:2
CA 70 60 230,1 3051 195 275 5000 115,1 1526 195 275 1:2
CA 70 268,5 3560 180 240 5000 134,3 1780 180 240 1:2
CA 100 40 153,3 2034 390 400 5000
CA 100 50 191,6 2543 320 400 5000
CA 100 64 245,3 3254 260 390 5000
CA 100 80 306,6 4068 220 310 5000 153,3 2034 220 310 1:2
CA 100 383,2 5085 190 270 5000 191,6 2543 190 270 1:2
CA 140 80 306,6 4068 245 340 5000
CA 140 100 383,2 5085 205 275 5000 191,6 2543 205 275 1:2
CA 140 120 460,3 6102 180 245 5000 230,1 3050 180 245 1:2
CA 140 537 7119 170 220 5000 268,5 3560 170 220 1:2
CA 210 160 613,2 8136 105 150 5000 306,7 4068 105 150 1:2
CA 210 180 690,4 9154 100 135 5000 345,2 4577 100 135 1:2
CA210 805,5 10678 85 115 5000 402,8 5339 85 115 1:2
* Related to a required charge pressure of 12 bar/175 psi for motors in braking mode. (Special considerations
regarding charge pressure, cooling and choice of hydraulic system for speeds above rated, 4 ports must be used).
** The motors are designed according to DNV-rules. Test pressure 420 bar/6000 psi.
Peak/transient pressure 420 bar/6000 psi maximum, allowed to occur 10000 times.
*** Speed above 280 rpm requires viton seals. Max permitted continues case pressure is 2 bar.
156
General Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
1.3 Functional description

Hägglunds hydraulic industrial motor COM- Oil main lines are connected to ports A and C
PACT CA is of the radial-piston type with a in the connection block and drain lines to ports
rotating cylinder block/hollow shaft and a sta- D1, D2 or D3 in the motor housing.
tionary housing. The cylinder block is mounted
The motor is connected to the shaft of the
in fixed roller bearings in the housing. An even
driven machine through the hollow shaft of
number of pistons are radially located in bores
the cylinder block.The torque is transmitted by
inside the cylinder block, and the valve plate
using a mechanical shaft coupling, or alterna-
directs the incoming and outgoing oil to and
tively by splines.
from the working pistons. Each piston is wor-
king against a cam roller. The symmetrical design of the motor has made
it possible to design it as a two displacement
When the hydraulic pressure is acting on the
motor. This means that two different speeds
pistons, the cam rollers are pushed against the
can be obtained for a given flow. The simplest
slope on the cam ring that is rigidly connected
way of performing displacement change is by
to the housing, thereby producing a torque.The
connecting a special valve, direct to the flange
cam rollers transfer the reaction force to the
face on the connection block.
piston which are guided in the rotating cylinder
block. Rotation therefore occurs, and the torque
available is proportional to the pressure in the Valid patents
system. US 4522110, US 005979295A, SE 9101950-
5, EP 0102915, JP 83162704, GB 1524437,
EP NL 0524437, EP:DE 69211238.3.
Quality
To assure our quality we maintain a Quality
Fig. 1 The COMPACT CA motor Assurance system, certified to standard ISO
9001, EN 29001 and BS 5750; Part 1.
1 1. Cam ring
D
2. Cam roller
2 A, C
3. Piston
3
4. Shaft coupling
4 8 5. Cylinder block /
hollow shaft
5 6. Cylinder block / spline
7. Front end cover
8. Cylindrical roller
bearing
11
9. Connection block
10. Valve plate
6
11. Axial bearing
7 9
A = inlet or outlet port »A«
F4 C = inlet or outlet port »C«
D = drain port
10
F4 = Flushing
157
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Technical data
2. TECHNICAL DATA
2.1 Recommended charge There are three distinct cases:
pressure Case 1:
The hydraulic system must be such that the The motor works in braking mode. Required
motor will recieve sufficient charge pres- charge pressure at the inlet port is according
sure at the low-pressure port. This app- to diagram below.
lies to all types of installations.
Case 2:
The motor works in driving mode only. Required
back pressure at the outlet port corresponds to
30% of value given in diagram below, but may
not be lower than 2 bar (29 psi).
In hanging load applications, charge Case 3:

pressure at motors connection must The motor is used with 2-speed valve. Requi-
be according to graph below under red charge pressure at inlet port for valve is
all conditions. according to AC-3.1 Accessories.
Table 2.1 Charge pressure
RECOMMENDED CHARGE PRESSURE - COMPACT CA MOTORS

Double port connection (4 ports) oil viscolisty 40 cSt / 187 SSU
CA 50, CA 70-60
CA 70, CA 100,
CA 210-160
CA 210-180
CA 140-120
CA 140-100
CA 100-80,
CA 140-80
CA 100-64
CA 70-50,
CA 50-32
CA 70-40
CA 50-40
CA 210
CA 140
20
18
250
16 CA 100-50
Recommended charge pressure (psi)
Recommended charge pressure (bar)
14 200
CA 50-32
12
CA 100-40
10 150
CA 50-20
8
100
6
4
50
2
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Compact motors Double port connection (4 ports) Speed (rpm)
Note:
The diagram is valid for 1 bar (15 psi) case pressure. With increasing case pressure the charge
pressure must be increased accordingly. The graph is valid when 4 ports are used. Max casing
pressure is 3 bar (43,5 psi)(for 1% of the operation time evenly divided, pressure peaks of max 5
seconds upto 8 bar (116 psi) is allowed). Max permitted case pressure at stand-still is 8 bar (116
psi).
158
Technical data Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
2.2 Sound from a complete installation

Background noise
Pump Pipe Hydraulic Noise from

motor noise motor driven unit
Foundation and construction noise
Remarks:
Background noise Hydraulic motor

The background noise can not normally be The hydraulic motor is a known noise level.
influenced but is usually known or easy to (Tables of sound data - see subsection 4.9 in
measure. the Engineering Manual).
Pump unit Driven unit

The pump unit is a known noise level. The driven unit is an unknown sound source
(for us) but can through certain information
Pipe noise probably be obtained from the supplier. When
securing the torque arm of a hydraulic motor to
The pipe noise is probably the source of the the foundation or casing of a driven machine,
majority of mistakes in installations: all pipe it is highly important to study the construction
clamps should be of vibration insulating type of the foundation or casing. This may well be
secured to concrete ceiling, wall or floor. the most important factor to consider, since
Securing to non-rigid metal structures or many structures may give rise to resonance,
structures is likely to give resonance and resulting in severe noise problems.
should be avoided.
10
159
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Technical data
2.3 Choice of hydraulic fluid

The Hägglunds hydraulic motors are primarily designed to operate on conventional petroleum
based hydraulic oils. The hydraulic oil can be chosen in consultation with the oil supplier of your
local sales office, bearing the following requirements in mind:
GENERAL
The oil shall have FZG (90) fail stage minimum 11 described in IP 334 (DIN 51354). The oil must also
contain inhibitors to prevent oxidation, corrosion and foaming. The viscosity of mineral oil is highly
dependent of the temperature. The final choice of oil must depend on the operating temperature
that can be expected or that has been established in the system and not in the hydraulic tank.
High temperatures in the system greatly reduce
RECOMMENDED VISCOSITY AT
the service life of oil and rubber seals, as well
OPERATING TEMPERATURE
as resulting in low viscosity, which in turn
40-150 cSt/187-720 SSU.
provides poor lubrication.
FOR SPEED BELOW 5 RPM, COATED
Content of water shall be less than 0,1%.
PISTONS OR HIGH VISCOSITY SHALL
In Industrial applications with high demands BE USED.
for service life, the content of water shall be
less than 0,05%.
Viscosity limits Temperature limits

Viscosity index = 100 recommended Normal operating temperature should be less
= 150* for operation than +50°C (122°F)
with large temperature
difference Nitrile seals (std motor) -35°C to +70°C
Viton seals -20°C to +100°C
Min. permitted in continuous duty 40 cSt/187 SSU
Min. permitted in intermittent duty 20 cSt/98 SSU** Nitrile seals (std motor) -31°F to +158°F
Max. permitted 10000 cSt/48000 SSU Vition seals -4°F to +212°F
* Many hydraulic fluids with VI-improvers are subject to temporary and permanent reductions of the viscosity.
** Low viscosity gives reduced service life for the motors and
reduction of max. allowed power for "COMPACT CA".
Fire resistant fluids

OPERATING WITH FIRE RESISTANT FLUIDS
The following fluids are tested for Hägglunds motors: (ISO/DP 6071)
Fluid Approved Seals Internal paint
HFA: Oil (3-5%) in water emulsion No - -
HFB: Inverted emulsion 40-45% water in oil Yes Nitrile (std motor) Not painted*
HFC: Water-glycol Yes Nitrile (std motor)** Not painted*
HFD synthetic fluids
HFD:R - Phosphate esters Yes Viton Not painted*
HFD:S - Chlorinated hydrocarbons Yes Viton Not painted*
HFD:T - Mixture of the above Yes Viton Not painted*
HFD:U - Other compositions Yes Viton Not painted*
* Must be specified in the order.
**The motor must have synthetic oil for the axial bearing.
IMPORTANT!
Down rating of pressure data and service life must be considered when using fire
resistant fluid. The Hägglunds company or its authorised representative must always
be contacted for approval in the case of these types of fluids.
11
160
Technical data Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
Environmentally acceptable fluids
Fluid Approved Seals Internal paint

Vegetable */** Fluid
Yes Nitrile (std motor) -
HTG
Synthetic **/*** Esters
Yes Nitrile (std motor) -
HE
* Vegetable fluids give good lubrication and small change of viscosity with different temperature. Vegetable fluids
must be controlled every 3 months and temperature shall be less than +45° (113°F) C to give good service life for
the fluid.
** Environmental acceptabel fluid gives the same servicelife for the drive, as mineral oil.
*** The fluid shall have less than 10g/100g according to ASTMD 1958-97/DIN 53241
Filtration Explanation of
"GRADE OF FILTRATION"
The oil in a hydraulic system must always be
filtered and also the oil from your supplier has Grade of filtration ß10=75 indicates the fol-
to be filtered when adding it to the system. lowing:
The grade of filtration in a hydraulic system is ß10 means the size of particle ≥10µm that will
a question of service life v.s. money spent on be removed by filtration.
filtration.
=75 means the grade of filtration of above
In order to obtain stated service life it is im- mentioned size of particle. The grade of
portant to follow our recommendations con- filtration is defined as number of particles in
cerning contamination level. the oil before filtration in relation to number of
When choosing the filter it is important to particles in the oil after filtration.
consider the amount of dirt particles that the Ex. Grade of filtration is ß10=75.
filter can absorb and still operate satisfactory.
For that reason we recommend a filter with an Before the filtration the oil contains N number
indicator that gives a signal when it is time to of particles ≥10µm and after passing the filter
change the filter cartridge. N
once the oil contains
75 number of particles
≥10µm.
Filtering recommendations
N = 74·N
Before start-up, check that the system is N
This means that 75 75 number of
thoroughly cleaned. particles have been filtered (=98,6%).
1. In general the contamination level in our
motors should not exceed ISO 4406 19/15.
(NAS 10)
2. For heavy-duty industrial applications the
contamination level should not exceed ISO
4406 16/13. (NAS 7)
3. When filling the tank and motor housing, we
recommend the use of a filter with the grade
of filtration ß10=75.
12
161
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Installation
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 Mounting instructions Design of driven shaft end on heavily-
loaded shaft
If the motor is to work properly it must be
Where the driven shaft is heavily loaded
installed with the greatest possible precision.
and is subject to high stresses, for example
Every item connected to the motor that does
on changes in the direction of rotation, it is
not meet the requirements of the following
recommended that the driven shaft should
instructions may result in stresses that
have a stress relieving groove; see Fig. 3.1
adversely affect the service life of the motor.
and tables 3.1 and 3.4.
Normally the motor must be completely filled
with oil. When the motor is installed with the
shaft in the horizontal plane, the drain ports G
must be positioned vertically. The higher of the F
two drain ports must be used: see fig. 3.25. Fig. 3.1 Max. Ra 3,2
When the motor is mounted with the shaft in

the vertical plane, drain outlet D1 or D2 must
be connected to the drain hole on the shaft
C
A
D
end housing or end cover. A preloaded check
valve must be connected in the drain line to
E
30°
ensure that the motor is filled with oil; see 3.2.2
"Draining and venting the motor". 6±0,5
(0,24±0,02)
R 50
(R 1,97)
B±0,5
The drain line must be dimensioned so that (B±0,02)
max. 3 bar (43.5 psi) motor housing pressure

is not exceeded. Normally-loaded shaft
The max housing pressure is 3 bar (43.5 psi). In drives with only one direction of rotation
Brief peaks during operation up to 8 bar (116 where the stresses in the shaft are moderate,
psi) are permissible. The permitted housing the shaft can be plain, see Fig. 3.2 and tables
pressure when the motor is stationary is 8 bar 3.1 and 3.4
(116 psi).
Fig. 3.2
The motor must always be connected in such G
a way as to give a sufficient boost, make-up
F
flow at the low pressure connection. This is Max. R a 3,2
particularly important at high speeds and
with rapid reversing, see 2.1 "Recommended
charge pressure".
A
E
Table 3.1 Valid for couplings 30°
Dim CA50/70 CA100/140 CA210 6±0,5

(0,24±0,02)
0 0 0
A mm 120 -0,025 140 -0,025 160 -0,025
in 4,7244
0
-0,00098 5,5118 -0,00098
0
6,2992 -0,00098
0 Table 3.2
B mm 71,5 84,5 105 Unidirectional drives
in 2,81 3,33 4,13
Steel with yield strength Rel = 300 N/mm
C mm 116 133 153
in 4,57 5,24 6,02
Bidirectional drives
Note! The dimensions are valid for +20°C (68°F)
Steel with yield strength Rel = 450 N/mm
13
162
Installation Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
Spline Thread for mounting tool
The splines shall be lubricated with hydraulic To make it easier to mount the motor on
oil, or filled with transmission oil from the the driven shaft end or to remove the motor
connected gearbox. To avoid wear in the from the shaft it is recommended that a hole
splines, the installation must be within the (Table 3.4) should be drilled and tapped in the
specified tolerances in fig. 3.3. If there is no centre of the shaft for a mounting tool; see
radial or axial force on the shaft, the shaft can 3.1.4 "Mounting the motor onto the driven
be oiled only. shaft", and 3.1.5 "Removing the motor from
the driven shaft".
For production of the shaft, see 278 2230,
278 2231, 278 2232, 278 2233, 278 2234, The tool has both a UNC thread and a metric
278 2235, 278 2236, 278 2238 and 278 2239. thread, so that the hole can be drilled and
For control of spline see table 3.3. tapped to conform to one of the two alternatives
given in table 3.4.
Unidirectional drives
Steel with yield strength Relmm= 450 N/mm2
Bidirectional drives Table 3.4 Alternative thread (Fig.3.1 and 3.2)
Steel with yield strength Relmm= 700 N/mm2 CA 50-210

D M20 UNC 5/8"
E >17 (0,67) >13,5 (0,53)
F 25 (0,98) 22 (0,87)
G 50 (1,97) 30 (1,18)
Table 3.3
Motor CA50/70 CA100/140 CA210

Tooth profile
and bottom DIN 5480 DIN 5480 DIN 5480
form
Tolerance 8f 8f 8f
Guide Back Back Back
Pressure angle 30° 30° 30°
Fig 3.3
Module 5 5 5
Number of 0,15 A
22 26 28
teeth (0.006)
Pitch diameter Ø 110 Ø 130 Ø 140
0 0 0
Minor diameter Ø 109 Ø 129 Ø 139 A
-1,62 -1,62 -1,62
0 0 0
Major diameter Ø 119 Ø139 Ø 149
-0,220 -0,250 -0,250
Measure over -0,083 -0,085 -0,085

Øi
Ø
129,781 149,908 159,961

measuring pins -0,147 -0,150 -0,150
Diameter of
Ø 10 Ø 10 Ø 10
measuring pins
Addendum
modification
+2,25 +2,25 +2,25
XM
0,2 A
(0.008)
14
163
3.1.1 Lifting methods

Always make sure where the centre of gravity Note: Motor lifted without coupling
is before any lifting. fitted, danger of slipping off.
Steel eye bolts.

Fig. 3.4a Fig. 3.4b (3xM12)
1Max. 10°
Note: The End cover and screws

must be removed before mounting
the Steel eye bolts. After the lift re-
fit the End cover and screws with
torque 81 Nm (59 lbf.ft).
Fig 3.4d (CA 210) Steel eye

with bolt.
1
Fig. 3.4c
Lifting the torque arm

Fig. 3.5
Always make sure where

the centre of gravity is
before any lifting. Never
stand below a hanging mo-
tor or torque arm.
15
164
Lifting Compact Tandem motor
Lifting method
Oiling of splines with hydraulic oil.

Fig. 3.4c Fill up to plug G3/4". 90 Nm / 65 lbf.ft.
Always make sure where centre

of gravity is before any lifting.
Never stand below the motor
during lifting.
Installation
See 3.1 Mounting instructions.
Data for the Tandem motor
Total weight Total weight
Max. pres- Max. Max.torque to
Spline ver- Shaft ver-
Tandem motor sure bar speed driven shaft*
sion sion
(psi) rpm Nm (lbf·ft)
kg (lb) kg (lb)
CA50 XB0NH + TA5 + CA50 SA0N 245 (3552) 280 399 (878) 427 (936)
CA70 XB0NH + TA5 + CA50 SA0N 205 (2972) 429 (944) 456 (1003) 24500 (18000)
240
CA70 XB0NH + TA7 + CA70 SA0N 175 (2538) 462 (1016) 489 (1076)
CA100 XB0NH + TA5 + CA50 SA0N 325 (4712) 489 (1076) 534 (1175)
CA100 XB0NH + TA7 + CA70 SA0N 290 (4205) 270 522 (1148) 567 (1247)
CA100 XB0NH + TA10 + CA100 SA0N 245 (3552) 638 (1404) 683 (1503)
CA140 XB0NH + TA5 + CA50 SA0N 260 (3770) 529 (1164) 571 (1256) 49000 (36100)
CA140 XB0NH + TA7 + CA70 SA0N 235 (3408) 562 (1236) 604 (1329)
220
CA140 XB0NH + TA10 + CA100 SA0N 205 (2972) 678 (1492) 720 (1584)
CA140 XB0NH + TA14 + CA140 SA0N 175 (2538) 718 (1578) 760 (1672)
CA210 XB0NH + TA5 + CA50 SA0N 280 (4060) 619 (1362) 680 (1496)
CA210 XB0NH+ TA7 + CA70 SA0N 260 (3770) 652 (1434) 713 (1569)
CA210 XB0NH + TA10 + CA100 SA0N 235 (3408) 768 (1690) 829 (1824)
115 73500 (54200)
CA210 XB0NH + TA14 + CA140 SA0N 210 (3045) 808 (1778) 869 (1912)
CA210 XB0NH + TA21 + CA210 180 SA0N 190 (2755) 898 (1976) 959 (2110)
CA210 XB0NH + TA21 + CA210 SA0N 175 (2538) 898 (1976) 959 (2110)
* See Engineering Manual AC-3.5
16
165
Table 3.5 Standing the motor on a flat surface

Motor with Motor with
When the motor is placed on a flat surface
Motor shrink disc splines
such as a floor, it must stand either on its outer
kg lb kg lb diameter or on the suitably protected end face
CA 50 203 447 175 385 of the hollow shaft (see Fig. 3.6 and 3.7).
CA 70 232 510 205 451
CA 100 310 682 265 583 Fig. 3.6
CA 140 347 763 305 671
CA 210 456 1003 395 869
Table 3.6a
Weight
Torque arm
kg lb
TCA 5 21 46
TCA 7 24 53
TCA 10 75 165 Support
TCA 14 65 143
Fig. 3.7
Table 3.6b
Weight
Brake
kg lb
MDA 5-10 100 220
MDA 14-21 230 506
BICA 13 87 191
BICA 24 175 385
BICA 37 210 462 Support
Lifting straps must be

chosen with reliable
saftey margin over the
total weight of the lifted NOTE:
object.
The motor must not be placed on the end
face of the hollow shaft when the coupling is
fitted, since this may cause damage to the
coupling.
When in storage, the motor must always be
placed on the end face to the hollow shaft. It
is also advisable to provide supports at the
mounting surface of the motor; see Fig. 3.7.
17
166
3.1.2 Mounting the coupling onto the motor shaft
Instruction to follow when mounting

the COMPACT CA motor on a driven Never tighten the coupling
shaft screws until the motor has
Before the motor is mounted there are some been mounted onto the
preconditions which must be fulfilled: driven shaft.
- The shaft material for the driven shaft must
be of a quality which meets the minimum
requirements specified by Hägglunds. (See However for the tightening of the coupling
our recommendations, table 3.2. screws the following must be observed:
- The shaft must have the dimensions as Keep tension in your lifting wires to
recommended in the section 3.1. avoid a skew setting of the motor on the
shaft during the tightening of the screws.
- You should note that the couplings are from Wobbling caused by a skew setting of
the factory lubricated with MoS2 (Molycote) the motor gives extra forces on the main
on the conical surfaces and the bolts. This bearings.
lubricants shall remain on those surfaces but: In order to avoid the misalignment of the two
clamping rings during the screw tightening,
the gap between the rings must be measured
Molycote must under no in several places during the process, see Fig.
circumstances be trans- 3.14. The difference between the measured
ferred to the surfaces gaps must never vary more than 1 mm (0,04")
between the driven shaft during any stage of the tightening process.
and the motor. Pre-set the coupling screws in opposite pairs
(12-6-3-9 o´clock) until you reach max. 50%
of the torque specified for the screws. It is
It is therefore important that you clean your
very important that when you reach this stage
hands free from Molycote.
the misalignment is controlled as described
If those conditions are fullfilled you may start above.
the mounting. Mark the screw head (at 12 o´clock) with a
- Clean the driven shaft and the out- and inside pen or paint so that you can follow the turning
of the Compact CA motor hollow shaft. Use sequence of the screws.
acetone or similar. Set the torque wrench for the specified
- Remove the spacers between the two clam- maximum torque. Tightening torque of the
ping rings of the coupling. coupling screws; see the sign on the coupling,
or table 3.9.
- Mount the coupling on the hollow shaft of
the motor. The coupling must be pushed right Now start tightening the screws in sequence
up to the stop of the shaft. shown in Fig. 3.14a.
- Mount the motor onto the driven shaft by Keep on doing this until you have reached the
following the instruction in the section 3.1.4 stated torque. Several passes are required
"Mounting the motor onto the driven shaft". before the screws are tightened to specified
(With or without using the mounting tool). torque. Keep checking the alignment of the
coupling. (15-20 passes may be necessary).
When the specified torque is reached it is
important that all screws are tightened with
specified torque and that no further movement
can be observed.
18
167
Remember:
The following factors are important for successful mounting:
- Right material and dimension on the driven - Absolutely No Molycote on the surfaces
shaft. between shaft-motor. Clean the driven shaft
and the inside of the motor hollow shaft.
- The conical surface between the coupling
ring and the clamping rings + the bolts shall be - Alignment of the motor on the shaft.
coated with MoS2 (Molycote), see Fig. 3.8.This (Dimensional check).
is done from the factory at delivery! When a
- Minimum variation in the gap between the
motor has been in for overhaul or service and
clamping rings (Dimensional check).
shall be reassembled it may be necessary to
relubricate those surfaces with Molycote again - Right torque on the bolts. (Use torque
but remember only the specified surfaces! wrench).
Fig. 3.8
Clamping rings
Seal Coupling ring
Washer - - - - - = Coated surface
Cleaned surface
Before starting the motor, check

that the rotating coupling can not
cause damage.
19
168
3.1.3a Fitting the torque arm to the motor

The torque arm is fitted to the motor before the Fig. 3.9 CA 50/70
motor is mounted on the driven shaft.
- Open the nuts M16 screws for CA50-70.
- Clean the spigot surface on the torque arm
and motor.
- Oil the screws.
- Make sure that the torque arm will be
pointing in the right direction when the
motor is mounted in place on the machine.
To achieve the highest possible oil level in the
motor housing, the motor must be turned until
the drain outlets are positioned according to
fig 3.12.
- Line up the torque arm on the motor by
using the screws with washers.
- Mount screws and washers according to fig.
3.9 and screws according to fig 3.9a.
- Tighten the screws to the torque stated in the
table below. Fig. 3.9a CA 100/140/210
Do not weld, drill, grind or

carry out any similar work
on the torque arm without
Hägglunds approval.
Table 3.7a
Number of Tightening torque
Motor Screw dimension
screws Nm lbf·ft
CA 50 M16 Strength class 10.9 16 280 205
CA 140/210 M20 Strength class 10.9 21 540 400
Note: Use torque wrench and oiled screws!
20
169
3.1.3b Fitting the double ended torque arm

The torque arm is fitted to the motor before the Remark!
motor is mounted on to the driven shaft. See Start the system and run it for some minutes.
3.1.3a "Fitting the torque arm to the motor". Vent the cylinder from air. Use the vent screws
on the cylinder (pos 4).
Check and adjust the rod end (pos 1) accord-
ing to the drawing. Mount the rod to the torque
Fig. 3.9b
arm, use the shaft (pos 2) and lock them with
circlips. Tighten the 4 pcs of screw (pos 3) on
the rod end, Torque according to table 3.7b.
A C
Mount the hydraulic cylinder. The piston rod
has to be mounted upwards, and on the right
A
hand viewed from the motors main connection
side. Cylinders oil connection A, B and C must
point in the direction to the motor. Mount the
hoses. The hose mounted to the high pressure
connection (C) has to be mounted to the
hydraulic cylinders connection B, and the hose A
4
from connection (A) has to be mounted to the
cylinders connection A. 1
B
This is valid with the cylinder on the right side C
hand-side of the the motor, and a single speed 3
motor. 2
Table 3.7b
Screw Tightening torque

Cylinder
dimension Nm lbf·ft
50/36 M8x25 25 15
80/56 M10x30 49 36
100/70 M12x40 86 63
125/90 M16x30 210 155
21
170
3.1.4a Mounting the motor onto the driven shaft - shaft coupling
The motor can be mounted onto the driven shaft with or without a mounting tool, but the use of a
mounting tool is recommended since it makes the work easier.
It is important to arrive at the correct clamping length between the driven shaft and the hollow
shaft of the motor.
Ensure that the full clamping length is used by, for example, measuring and marking the driven
shaft. This is of particular importance if the duty is so severe that a stress relieving groove has
been made on the driven shaft. See Fig. 3.11, 3.11a and the table 3.8.
Mounting the motor with a mounting tool (Fig. 3.10)

- Remove the End cover together with screws and washers.
- Align the motor with the driven shaft.
- Locate the existing plastic washer between the nut on the mounting tool and the bearingretainer.
Pass the mounting tool through the centre of the motor, and screw it into the driven shaft to stated
depth by using the key handle in the end of the tool.
- Pull the motor onto the shaft by turning the nut on the mounting tool until the length stated in the
table 3.8, is obtained; see Fig. 3.11.
- Tightening the shaft coupling see table 3.9
- Remove the mounting tool.
- Refit the plug.
- Refit the end cover and tighten the screws together with washers. Torque 81 Nm (59 lbf·ft).
Fig. 3.10 Mounting the CA 50...210
Plastic Washer
Nut
Mounting tool
22
171
Fig. 3.11 Without stress relieving groove Fig. 3.12
D1
B+50
( B+0,2
0 )
D2
Vertical line
Fig. 3.11a With stress relieving groove
Mounting the motor without a

mounting tool
B+50 The motor can be mounted onto the driven shaft
( B+0,2
0 ) without using a mounting tool, though this is
more difficult and takes longer time. However, it
is easier to mount the motor if during mounting
the compressed air trapped within the hollow
shaft is evacuated. To do this, remove the End
cover as described in "Mounting the motor with
a mounting tool"
Align the motor with the driven shaft using
an overhead crane or lifting truck and press
it carefully onto the shaft so that the length
stated in the table beside is obtained, see
Table 3.8 Fig. 3.11.
Lenght To achieve the highest possible oil level in the

Motor motor housing, the motor must be turned until
B mm B in
the drain outlets are positioned according to
CA 50 71,5 2,81 fig 3.12.
CA 70 71,5 2,81
CA 100 84,5 3,33
CA 140 84,5 3,33
CA 210 105 4,13
23
172
Fig. 3.13
Clean the driven shaft and

the inside of the motor
hollow shaft.
5 9
Table 3.9
No of Strength Tightening torque Type of

Motor type Screw dim
screws class Nm lbf·ft head
CA 50/70 8 M16 x 55 10.9 250 185 Hexagon
CA 100/140 12 M16 x 65 10.9 250 185 Hexagon
CA 210 15 M16 x 80 10.9 250 185 Hexagon
Note 1 Uncoated screws greased with MoS2.

Note 2 There is a metallic sign on every coupling with a tightening torque stamped on it.
This torque is always to be used.
Note 3 Tightening torque value is critical. Use calibrated torque wrench.
Fig. 3.14 Fig. 3.14a
1
12
2
11
3
4 10
5 9
6 8
7
24
173
3.1.4b Mounting the motor onto the driven shaft - splines

Flange mounted motors
Mounting kit For flange mounted motors, the spline shall nor-
478 3629-801 mally not be subject to radial load.With no radial
load, the splineshaft can be oiled before mounting
the motor. If the motor is subject to radial load, the
o-ring splines shall be filled up with oil.
- Lubricate and install o-ring at leading edge of
motor bore.
- Check shaft/splines for burrs and lubricate shaft/
splines.
- Mark spline tooth location on outside of motor bore
Oil to be filled before to assist alignment during installation.
tightening G1 plugg
- Mount the motor on to the shaft.
If oil here, it can be used
for the spline. Then take away
- Bolt the motor to the flange.
the o-ring. - Fill up hydraulic oil to the G1 plug.
- Torque the G1 plug. MV=125 Nm/90 lbf.ft.
- Mount the cover. MV=81 Nm/59 lbf.ft.
Torquearm mounted motors
Mounting kit
Motors that carry radial load, must have the splines
478 3629-801 oiled. The motor can be used for horizontal mount-
ing and mounting with motor shaft pointing down-
10 (0,4) during wards.
filling of oil
o-ring - Mount torque arm to motor with bolts supplied.
Align with oil connection ports as required.
ANNICA
A3
_
motor bore.
splines.
Oil to be filled before

- Mark spline tooth location on outside of motor bore
tightening bolt M20 to assist alignment during installation.
L=100 mm
- Mount the motor on to the shaft.
- Fill up hydraulic oil to the G1 plug.
- Mount special designed bolt.
- Torque the bolt. MV=385 Nm/280 lbf.ft.
- Mount the cover. MV=81 Nm/59 lbt.ft.
25
174
Torquearm mounted motors with brake

Motors with brake MDA, must have the brake disas-
Mounting kit sembled. See 3.1.10.
478 3629-801
- Mount torque arm to motor with bolts supplied.
o-ring Align with oil connection ports as required.
ANNICA
A3
motor bore.
_

splines.
Oil to be filled - Mark spline tooth location on outside of motor bore
before tightening
bolt M20 L=100 mm
to assist alignment during installation.
- Mount motor with brake housing on the shaft.
- Fill up hydraulic oil to the G1 plug.
- Mount the brake according to 3.1.9.
Mounting kit
478 3629-801 Torquearm mounted motors with brake
Motors with brake BICA, must have the screwed
center cover disassembled. See Installation and
Maintenance Manual for BICA
- Mount torque arm to motor with bolts supplied.
Align with oil connection ports as required.
motor bore.
Oil to be filled
before tightening - Check shaft/splines for burrs and lubricate shaft/
bolt M20 L=100 mm
splines.
- Mark tooth location on outside of motor bore to
assist alignment during installation.
- Mount motor with brake on the shaft.
- Fill up hydraulic oil to the plug G1".
- Mount the screwed center cover and torque the
bolts. MV=24 Nm/18 lbf.ft.
26
175
3.1.5 Removing the motor from the driven shaft

Before dismounting the motor from the driven Removal by using the mounting tool
shaft the oil in the motor housing must be
drained through the lower draining hole. - Slacken the shaft coupling screws gradually;
The motor can be removed from the shaft with see Fig. 3.14 and 3.14a. Each screw should
or without the mounting tool. The operation is be slackened only about a quarter of a
easier if the tool is used. turn each time. Thus tilting and jamming
of the collars or thread stretching will be
avoided. The screws must be slackened until
the coupling ring is fully released.
- Remove the End cover and Bearing retainer
together with screws and washers; see Fig.
Never stay below the motor
3.15.
during disassembly
- Locate the existing plastic washer outside
the mounting tool nut.Then pass the tool
through the centre shaft, and screw it into
Always make sure that the driven shaft to stated depth.
the lifting equipment is - Screw in the nut of the tool until the Bearing
strong enough to handle retainer can be refitted.
the weight of the motor - Remove the motor from the driven shaft by
unscrewing the nut of the mounting tool.
- Remove the Bearing retainer and mounting
tool. Finally, refit the removed Bearing
retainer, torque 136 Nm (100 lbf·ft) and End
cover, torque 81 Nm (59 lbf·ft) as before.
Fig. 3.15 Removal of Compact 50...210
Removing the motor without using the

mounting tool
1 - Slacken the screws of the shaft coupling,

see above "Removal of motors by using the
mounting tool".
2
- Remove endcover and plug to allow air to
enter the space in the hollow shaft of the
motor; see “Mounting the motor without a
mounting tool“. After removal of the motor,
3 refit the removed components as before.
4 - Carefully pull the motor off the driven shaft
supported by an overhead crane or a lifting
truck.
1; Bearing retainer
2; Plastic Washer
3; Nut
4; Mounting tool
27
176
3.1.6 Mounting the reaction point

Fig. 3.16 Mounting of pivoted attachment
x = ±2 mm (0,079) misalignment in installation.
x ≤ ±15 mm (0,59) movement when in use.
±25°
Alternative
position x
Note: The toggle bearing must
be dismounted during welding.
Steel:
EN 10113S355N 10
DIN St E39
BS 4360 Grade 50 C
Protected against corrosion, after welding.
Fig. 3.18
DANGER ZONE
Fig. 3.17 In case of failure of
torque arm installation
Make sure that the foundation

can withstand the forces from
the torque arm.
Bearing fitted
with Loc-Tite 601
28
177
3.1.7 Brake MDA

The brake is of the fail safe multi disc type. During normal operation hydraulic pressure keeps the
discs within the brake separated, allowing shaft rotation. If hydraulic pressure is lost, springs force
the discs together, stopping rotation of the shaft. The brakes are designed to operate on conven-
tional petroleum based hydaulic oils. Fire resistant fluids HFB and HFC are not allowed.
- The brakes are fatigue resistant for a - To be used as emergency brake for hanging
braking force corresponding to 67% of loads, the brake must be closed very
braking torque. quickly.
- The brake is fatigue resistant for a brake
release pressure of 25 bar (360 psi). If the brake is used in cold
- The brake is intended to be used as a parking environment as emergency
brake or emergency brake. brake, it must be flushed.
Max allowed pressure - The hydralic connection must be on top of the

50 bar (750 psi). brake, to avoid air. Air gives a slow function
for the brake.
Fig. 3.20
3.1.8 Brake MDA 5, 7 & 10
Fig. 3.19 54
BSP 3/4" (2,1)
F3
(0,83)
21
B1 and B2
F3, F4 Flushing connection BSP 1/4"

F4
Begins Fully
Braking Rec. opening Max allowed
to open open Displ. Weight
Brake Motor torque* pressure pressure
at** at**
Nm (lbf·ft) bar (psi) bar (psi) bar (psi) cm3 (in3) bar (psi) kg (lbs)
21 900 16 19 20-25 96 50 100
MDA 5 CA 50
(16 100) (230) (275) (275-350) (5,9) (725) (220)
29 500 16 19 20-25 134 50 100
MDA 7 CA 70
(21 700) (230) (275) (275-350) (8,2) (725) (220)
CA 100
39 500 16 19 20-25 192 50 100
MDA 10 CA 140
(29 100) (230) (275) (275-350) (11,7) (725) (220)
CA 210
* Valid at wet running. Friction coefficient µ = 0,12. Pressure in Brakecylinder = 0 bar. Hydraulic oil with AW-additives.
** See diagram 3.1. High pressure reduce service life for seals and axial bearing.
29
178
3.1.9 Mounting MDA 5, 7 & 10

The brake is normally mounted on the motor Fig. 3.21
at the factory. If the brake is disassembled and 305
shall be mounted on a motor, it must be done 3xx
according to following. 43
1. Control that seal and Seal retainer (25) is
mounted according to Fig. 3.21. 314
302
2. Mount Disc center (302) on the cylinderblock.
Oil the screws (43) and assemble with torque
136 Nm (100 lbf.ft).
315
3. Put the Brake housing (305) on the motor, 25
and mount the right spacer (3xx). Oil the 313
screws and mount them with tightening
torque 136 Nm (100 lbf.ft). See table 3.10.
4. Mount first one outerdisc. Then mount inner
disc, outerdisc until all discs are mounted.
Table 3.10
MDA5 has 6 outerdiscs and 5 innerdiscs.
MDA7 has 8 outerdiscs and 7 innerdiscs. Brake Screws (ISO 89811) Spacer
MDA10 has 11 outerdiscs and 10 innerdiscs.
MDA 5 MC6S 12x50 12.9 t=54 (2,13)
MDA 7 MC6S 12x50 12.9 t=42,4 (1,67)
5. Grease the seals with Texaco Multifak EP2 or MDA 10 MC6S 12x50 12.9 t=25 (0,98)
an equivalent grease without solid additives
and mount the piston (313).
6. Grease the springs (315) with Texaco Multifak 3.1.10 Draining of Brake cylinder
EP2 or an equivalent grease without solid
additives. Put the springs on the Brakecover The Diagram 3.1 below shows the falling
(314). The springs shall be mounted against braking torque Mmax for increasing pressure in
each other on the inner diameter. the brake cylinder drain.
7. Mount the Brake cover (314) on the brake. Oil Example: MDA 10 has a braking torque of
the screws and assemble the screws. Start 39500 Nm / 29100 lbf.ft, when the brake is not
mounting by slightly tightening the screws, under pressure and µ = 0,12.
no more than 1 turn each. Continue with Assume that the pressure in brake cylinder
one turn of each screw around the cover. drain is 1,5 bar / 21,75 psi. The diagram shows
Tightening torque is 114 Nm (84 lbf·ft). that the actual brake torque (Mact) corresponds
to only 90% of Mmax.
Diagram 3.1
% Braking torque
Motors with SPECIAL

brakes may have different
working operation. Please
make sure that you check
the Ordering code on
your brake.
Back pressure in brake cylinder drainage line.
30
179
Disassembly of MDA 5, 7 &10.

Fig. 3.22
320
318
43
40
302
313
314
315
3xx
Connection 1/4" BSP for flushing of axial bearing

*
18 Nm / 13 lbf.ft
Please read this instruction Note: The M12 screw can not be used to
carefully before starting the hold the Brake cover (314) while remo-
disassembly! ving the screws (40). There is a risk that
the threaded part in the Brake piston
(313) can fail due to big forces when re-
1. Start the disassembly by slightly loosening moving the screws.
the screws (40). Not more than 1 turn each. 3. Inner and outer discs (318, 320) can be
Continue with 1 turn of each screw around removed and the screws (43) holding the
the cover until the pre-load of the Belleville spacer (3xx) in place can be removed.
springs (315)(Cup springs) is zero. After that
the screws can be removed and the Brake 4. Loosen the screws (43) holding the Disc
cover (314) lifted off. centre (302) in place.
2. The Brake piston (313) can be removed

by installing an M12 screw in the centre Please note that the motor cannot be
hole and lifted off by using the screw. pressurised when the brake assembly
is removed.
31
180
3.1.11 Brake MDA 14 & 21

Max external load: 200 kN (44800 lbf)
External load: 110 kN (24600 lbf) according to FEM M5: (L2:T5)
27
B1
(1,06)
B3
W150x5x30x28x8f
297 (2x)
(11,7)
DIN 5480
+0.100
(5,98 +0,00425)
+0,00819
Splines
152 H9 0
B1 and B2
B2
160,5 144,5 B3 Flushing connection G 1/8"
(6,32) (5,69)
Braking Begins to Fully Rec. opening Max allowed

Displ. Weight
Brake Motor torque* open at** open at** pressure pressure
Nm (lbf·ft) bar (psi) bar (psi) bar (psi) cm3 (in3) bar (psi) kg (lbs)
MDA 57 000 15 20 20-25 300 50 230
CA 140
14 (42 000) (220) (290) (275-350) (18) (725) (510)
MDA 81 800 15 20 20-25 300 50 230
CA 210
21 (60 300) (220) (290) (275-350) (18) (725) (510)
* Valid at wet running. Friction coefficient µ = 0,12. Pressure in Brakecylinder = 0 bar (0 psi).
Hydraulic oil with AW-additives.
** See diagram 3.2.
32
181
3.1.12 Mounting MDA 14 & 21

The brakes, MDA 14 and MDA 21 are mounted to the bracket with M20 (strength class 10.9). Tigh-
tening torque 540 Nm (398 lbf·ft). Inside of the brake, the spline shaft shall be greased with Texaco
Multi fac EP2. The spline shaft shall be filled with oil, if there are external load during rotation.
Plug M6
Lifting the MDA 14 & 21 brake

Steel eye (x2)
with bolt
Steel eye
bolts (x3)
3.1.13 Draining of Brake cylinder

The Diagram 3.2, shows the falling static braking torque 95 000 Nm (70 000 lbf·ft) Mmax for increa-
sing pressure in the brake cylinder drain.
Example: MDA 21 has a static braking torque of 95 000 Nm (70 000 lbf·ft), when the brake is not
under pressure and µ = 0,12.
Assume that the pressure in brake cylinder drain is 1,5 bar / 21,75 psi. The diagram shows that
the actual brake torque (Mact) corresponds to only 90% of Mmax.
Diagram 3.2
% Braking torque
Motors with SPECIAL

brakes may have different
working operation. Please
make sure that you check
the Ordering code on
your brake. Back pressure in brake cylinder drainage line.
33
182
Disassembly and assembly of MDA 14 & 21
Please read this in-

struction carefully
before starting the
disassembly! 320
318
40
1. Star t the disassembly by slightly
34
loosening the screws (40). Not more
than 1 turn each. Continue with 1 turn 313
of each screw around the cover until
the pre-load of the Belleville springs
314
(315)(Cup springs) is zero. After that the
screws can be removed and the Brake
cover (314) lifted off.
2. The Brake piston (313) can be removed 315
by installing 3 screws (M8) and be lifted
off by using the screws. 308
3. Inner and outer discs (318, 320) can be
removed and the spacer (308) in place
can be removed.
4. Loosen the screws (43), and take off the
25
seal retainer (25).
5. Control the seal and mount seal retainer
(25) as figure. Oil the screws (43) and
assembly with torque 114 Nm (84
lbf·ft).
6. Mount spacer for MDA 14 (308). Mount
first one outerdisc, then innerdisc, 8. Grease the springs (315) with Texaco Multifak
outerdisc until all discs are mounted. EP2 or an equivalent grease without solid
N.B Matched disc set. additives, put the springs on the Brake cover
(314). The springs shall be mounted against
MDA 14 has 8 outerdiscs and 7 innerdiscs
each other in the innerdiameter.
MDA 21 has 11 outerdiscs and 10
innerdiscs 9. Mount the Brake cover (314) on the brake, oil the
screws and assembly the screws. Start mounting
7. Grease the seals with Texaco Multifak
by slightly tightening the screws, no more than
EP2 or an equivalent grease without
one turn each. Continue with one turn of each
solid additives and mount the piston
screw around the cover, tightening torque is 114
(313).
Nm (84 lbf·ft).
3.1.14 Control of braking torque

The motor can be used for controlling the torque for the brake.
Start to drain the brake to tank, and increase pressure for the motor until it starts to rotate. Pressure
drop over the motor x Ts for the motor gives braking torque for the brake.
If the motor can not rotate the brake, increase back pressure in the brake cylinder until the motor
can rotate the brake.
Braking torque = Pressure drop over the motor x motor torque Ts x 100/ % Braking torque in diagram
3.1 or 3.2. With full torque and 10 rpm, the brake must not rotate more than max 10 sec.
34
183
3.1.15 Motors with 2-speed valve Mounting of 2-speed valve

on CA 50-210
Motors with 2-speed function must be ordered
with correct direction of rotation. With wrong Remove the protective cover from motor
direction, load on the piston will be increased 3 mounting surface, place the O-rings (included
times, which can give overheating of the pistons. in delivery) in their proper position on the valve
With the high pressure supply connected to A- mounting surface. Use grease to keep O-ring
port, the motor shaft rotates in the directions fixed. Mount valve against the motor with the
shown by arrows. R-motor rotates clockwise, ports in corresponding position.
and L-motor counter-clockwise, wiewed from
4 pcs 1/2 UNC x 127 (5") included in delivery,
the motor shaft side. If the motor is working
strength class 12.9 (ISO 898/1) Tightening
in half displacement, and in not prefered
torque: 131 Nm (97 lbf·ft).
"direction of rotation", allowed pressure is
max 210 bar (3000 psi). *For Marine applications, use Sicaflex or simi-
lar for corrosion protection.
Fig. 3.23 Fig. 3.24 *
P (A-port on motor)
C Standard
2-speed valve 2-speed valve
Motor prepared for valve, direction of rotation,

Clockwise = R
Valve S05
must have
Fig. 3.23a the sign in
P (A-port on motor)
this position
C
2-speed valve
VTCA 600 will not auto-

matic shift from half to full
displacement at overload.
Direction of rotation see

also page 38.
Motor prepared for valve, direction of rotation,

Counter-clockwise = L Valve S05 is not allowed
with hanging load
35
184
3.2 Oil connections

When using (heavy wall) piping and in frequent Fig. 3.25a
reversal drives, it is recommended to fit flexible
hoses between the motor and piping to avoid
F1
damage due to vibration and to simplify
D3
installation of the motor. The length of the
hoses should be kept fuirly short.
Fig. 3.25
T x
A1* C1* F3
D1
y
Fig. 3.25b D A
B
C
D2
***
A2 C2 F4
Connection Description Remarks

If C is used as the inlet, the motor shaft rotates clockwise,
C1*, C2 Main connection
viewed from the motor shaft side*.
If A is used as the inlet, the motor shaft rotates counter-
A1*, A2 Main connection
clockwise, viewed from the motor shaft side*.
D1 Drain outlet Normally plugged at delivery.
D2, D3 Alternative drain outlets Normally plugged at delivery.
F1 Flushing connection For flushing of radial lip seal. Normally plugged.
F3, F4 Flushing connection For flushing of axial bearing and motor case.
Used to measure pressure and/or temperature at the
T Test connections
main connections.
A, B, C and D: Connections for 2-speed valve. See fig. 3.25b
F1, F3,
Motor A** C** D1, D2 D3 T y mm y in x mm x in
F4
CA 50...210 1 1/4" 1 1/4" G 3/4" G 3/4" G 1/4" G 1/4" 188 7,40 99 3,90
*Not valid for motors prepared for displacement shift.
**SAE coupling J 518 C, code 62, 414 bar (6000 psi).
*** A2-connection and C2-connection is blocked at delivery. They are able to withstand max pressure.
36
185
Main connection A, C
c
a b
Table 3.11
a c
Motor b
mm (in) mm (in)
CA 50...210 31 (1,22) 1/2 UNC 25 (0,98)
Drain connection D1, D2 Test connection T

BSP 3/4"
BSP 1/4"
 50
(2,0)
(0,59)
15
37
186
3.2.1 Direction of rotation of Fig. 3.26

motor shaft
With the inlet pressure supply connected to
A port, the motor shaft rotates in the direction
shown by the arrow, anti-clockwise viewed from
the motor shaft side.
With the inlet pressure supply connected to C
port, the motor shaft rotates clockwise viewed
from the motor shaft side.
Fig. 3.27b Motor sign single speed motor

HÄGGLUNDS DRIVES AB
SWEDEN
S-890 42 Mellansel
HAGGLUNDS Telephone
Telefax
+46 660-870 00
+46 660-871 60
http://www.hagglunds.com
TYPE
Note: Single speed motor
CA-XX-C A O N O-XX XX
INDIVID NO. WEIGHT MAX PRESSURE
kg bar
Motor with displacement shift valve
Fig. 3.27 Fig. 3.27a

P (A-port motor) P (A-port motor)
C C
With a two-speed If the motor sign is
valve mounted on marked "R" the motor
the motor and the rotation direction is
oil supply connected clockwise, see fig.
to P give a counter 3.27a
clockwise rotation
direction on a motor
sign marked "L" as
shown at fig.3.27
and fig. 3.27b
The motor sign has to show "R" or "L" the

specific motor rotation direction. Example of
motor sign with two speed motor:
Example: CA 50 C A L N
C
Displacement shift valve

Single speed motor 0 Check direction
Two speed motor of rotation
Direction of rotation:
(as viewed from shaft end and inlet to A-port)
Clockwise R
Counter-clockwise L
38
187
3.2.2 Draining and venting the motor

Horizontal mounting
When the motor is installed with the shaft in the horizontal plane, it can be drained without special
provisions for venting. The highest of the three drain outlets D1, D2 or D3 must always be used;
see Fig. 3.28.
Drain line must be connected direct to the tank with a minimum of restrictions, to ensure that the
maximum housing pressure is not exceeded.
Vertical mounting
When the motor is mounted vertically, one or the other of the vent holes must be connected to the
drain line. Which of the holes that is to be used depends on whether the motor shaft is pointing
upwards or downwards.
Motor shaft pointing downwards
The motor must be connected to the drain connection in D1 or D2 and F3 or F4. See figure 3.29.
Motor shaft pointing upwards

The motor must be connected to the drain line connection on the shaft end housing; see Fig.
3.30.
The flushing connection F on the shaft end housing should be connected to the low pressure
connection. With bi-directional drives, use the connection with lowest average pressure. (Connection
to high pressure will increase the motor drain flow). This gives flushing of the radial lip seal. It is
advisable to fit the nipple and the hose to the motor before fitting the torque arm.
Fig. 3.28 Fig. 3.30

Orifice ∅1,0 (0,04)
Flushing
connection F
Drain line
connection
Drain line D3
Fig. 3.29
Drain line D1 or D2,
and F3 or F4
G 1/4" Low Pressure
D3 connection
39
188
Maintenance Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
3.2.3 Flushing
Flushing of motor case For calculation of required flushing, please
contact your Hägglunds representative.The
To avoid high temperature in the motor case
flushing oil shall be drained in the normal
the heat must be removed, because high tem-
drainline. See 3.2.2.
perature gives lower viscosity and that gives
reduction in basic rating life/service life. Low Connect the input line for flushing in the lowest
viscosity also means reduced permitted output flushing F3 or F4, see fig. 4.1
power from the motor.
For shaft pointing downwards, input line shall
- For continuous duty in applications with an
be D3, see fig. 3.29. When there is risk for
ambient temperature of +20°C (68°F), the
pressurespikes in motorcase, input line D3 or
motor case must be flushed when the output
D2 is recommended.
power exceeds the values shown beside.
Fig. 4.1a
F3
Max. power without flushing A1 C1
CA 50/70 60 kW (80 hp) D1

CA 100/140/210 120 kW (160 hp)
Flushing inlet for

mod. 02. Connec-
D2
tion G1/4". Max
Vertical line
F4 allowed flushing
20 litres/min (5.5
Fig. 4.1b
gal./min)
G 1/4" Flushing connection e

d
F3, F4
4. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
4.1 Storage
The motor is delivered with internal protection in the form of an oil film and external protection in
the form of an anti-rust film. This provides sufficient protection for indoor storage in normal tem-
peratures for about 12 months.
Note: the anti-rust protection must be touched-up after transport and handling.
If the motor is stored for more than 3 months in uncontrolled environment or more than 12 months
in controlled environment, it must be filled with oil and positioned as shown in Fig. 3.7.
40
189
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Maintenance
Place the motor as shown in fig 4.1, fill the motor 4.3 Commissioning
with filtered oil in the following order: D1, A1, B, C1.
See 2.3, "Filtration". - During initial starting and the period im-
Take extreme care to ensure that no contamination mediately after it, any hydraulic installa-
enters the motor. tion must be regularly and carefully checked
Seal connections A and C with the cover plate at frequent intervals.
fitted to the connection surface at delivery. Check
that the O-rings or rubber seals are in postion in - The working pressure and charge pressure
the cover plate. must be checked to ensure that they cor-
Fit the plug to D1, D2 and D3, the table below states respond to the contracted values.
the amount of oil needed to fill the various types
of motors.
- The pressure in the drain line measured at
the motor must be less than 3 bar (43,5 psi).
This pressure limit is important for the life of
4.2 Before commissioning the motor seals.
Check the following points before commissioning - If leakage occurs, correct the fault and carry
the motor, i.e. before starting the first time: out new measurements.
- Check that the motor is connected to give
- Check all lines, connections, screws, etc. and
the correct direction of rotation (see 3.2 "Oil
connections" and 3.2.1 "Direction of rotation of correct if necessary.
motor shaft"). - Check other possible leakage points and
- Select the hydraulic fluid in accordance with the replace faulty parts.
recommendations (see 2.3 "Choice of hydraulic
fluid"). - During the start up period, dirt particles in the
- Fill the motor housing with hydraulic fluid via a system are removed by the filters. The filter
filter into the drain outlets D1, D2 or the vent hole cartridges have to be changed after the first
(depending on how the motor is mounted). 100 working hours and after that according to
- Check the drain line to ensure that excessive the maintenance chart. see 4.4 note to check
pressure does not build up in the motor housing; the "filter clogged" indicators.
see 3.1 "Mounting instructions" and 3.2.2.
"Draining and venting the motor".
NOTE:
- Check that the motor is protected from overloads - When starting up the motor it is important
(see 1.1 "Motor data").- Check that the charge that the motor output power is limited
pressure conforms to the charge pressure curve to 75% of max power according to these
(see 2.1 "Recommended charge pressure"). technical data.
- Check that all hydraulic couplings and plugs are
properly tightened to prevent leakage.
350
- Make sure that the torque arm is sufficiently 5000
fastened, see 3.1.3. 300

20 cSt 4000
250
High pressure [bar]
High pressure [psi]
200 3000
10 cSt
Table 4.1 150
2000
100
5 cSt
Oil volume approx.
Motor 50
1000
Litres US gal.
0 0
CA 50 2,0 0,53 50 70 90 110 130 150 170 190 210 230 250 270 290 310 330 350 370 390
Speed
CA 70 2,5 0,66
CA 100 3,7 0,98
CA 140 5,0 1,32 A not run-in motor in combination with dirt
CA 210 6,8 1,80 particles in the oil can badly affect the sliding
surfaces in the motor. This is valid during the
first 100 working hours.
41
190
4.4 Periodic maintenance

When a hydraulic system has been in ser- Motor
vice for some time, it must undergo periodic If the motor is to be stored stationary for a
maintenance and servicing at intervals which longer period than about 1 month, it must be
depend on the equipment and the type of protected from internal rust. This can be done
duty. as follows:
This periodic maintenance must include the 1. Mix anti-rust additive with the hydraulic
following operations: fluid of the system. Use 5% of Rust Veto
- Check the hydraulic system for leakage. Concentrate (manufactured by E F
Tighten the screws, replace faulty seals and Houghton & Co, Philadelphia, USA). This
keep the drive clean. additive gives rust protection for up to
about 1 year, after which time the motor
- Inspect and clean all air, oil and magnetic must be turned a few revolutions.
filters; replace all filter cartridges for which
a filter clogged indication has been given; 2. If no additives are used, the motor must
inspect tank, pump, filters etc. and clean if be regularly turned a few revolutions.
necessary. 3. If it is not possible to turn the motor, plug
- Check the pressure and temperature of the all connections, open drain outlet D1 or D2
hydraulic fluid and carry out routine opera- on the port end housing (or if the motor is
tions. Adjust valves etc. if necessary. mounted vertically, Flushing connection F1
- Check the hydraulic fluid; see the Section on the shaft end housing) and fill the motor
headed "Oil". with hydraulic fluid.(See Fig. 4.3 and 4.3a).
- Check that no dirt or other contaminations
enter the system during inspection.Check
that the outside of the hydraulic motor in an Fig. 4.3
installation is kept free of dirt; thus leakage
and faults will be detected earlier. D1
- We recommend that a running log be kept

and that planned inspections are carried out
at set intervals.
- Maintenance checks and operations are as
follows:
Maintenance chart
Oil Braking Torque
In operation Oil D2
filters equipment arm
After the first
Rpl. Insp. Insp.
100 hours
After 3 months Fig. 4.3a
Rpl. Insp.
or 500 hours
Once every 6
Rpl. Insp. Insp. Insp. F1
months
D3
Once every 12
Ctrl
months
Rpl = Replacement Insp = Inspection
Ctrl = Control of braking torque
42
191
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Maintenance
Filters Water content
Filters must be changed after the first 100 Contamination of the oil by water can be
working hours and the second change is to detected by sampling from the bottom of the
be carried out after 3 months or 500 working tank. Most hydraulic oils repel the water, which
hours whichever is earlier. They must then be then collects at the bottom of the tank. This
changed at regular intervals of 6 months or water must be drained off at regular intervals.
4000 working hours. Certain types of transmission oils and engine
oils emulsify the water; this can be detected
by coatings on filter cartridges or a change in
Oil (Se also 2.3) the colour of the oil. Obtain the advice of your
oil supplier in such cases.
Analysis
It is recommended that the oil should be
Degree of contamination
analysed every 6 months. The analysis should
cover viscosity, oxidation, water content, Heavy contamination of the oil causes
additives and contamination. increased wear of the hydraulic system
components. The cause of the contamination
Most oil suppliers are equipped to analyse the
must be immediately investigated and re-
state of the oil and to recommend appropriate
medied.
action. The oil must be replaced immediately if
the analysis shows that it is exhausted.
Viscosity
Many hydraulic oils become thinner with
increasing use, and this means poorer
lubrication. The viscosity of the oil in service
must never fall below the minimum recom-
mended viscosity. All hydraulic fluids are affected
differently. Obtain the advice of
Oxidation your oil supplier or by nearest
Hydraulic oil oxidizes with time of use and Hägglunds representative.
temperature. This is indicated by changes
in colour and smell, increased acidity or 4.5 Oil inspection
the formation of sludge in the tank. The rate
of oxidation increases rapidly at surface
temperatures above 60°C (140°F), and the oil Purpose
should then be checked more often. The purpose to take an oil sample is to check
The oxidation process increases the acidity of the condition of the oil.
the fluid; the acidity is stated in terms of the With scheduled oil analysis, wear products
"neutralisation number". Typical oxidation is can be identified and corrective action can be
slow initially and increases rapidly later. taken before failure occurs. Oil analysis can
indicate when an oil change is required, point
A sharp increase (by a factor of 2 and 3) in the out shortcomings in maintenance and keep
neutralisation number between inspections is repair cost to a minimum. Using oil analysis
a signal that the oil has oxidized too much and can create a “window of opportunity”, allowing
should be replaced immediately. the user to schedule re-fittings or overhauls,
maintenance or repairs, thus saving money on
equipment repairs and downtime.
The most used method is to take samples in a
special bottle and send it to a fluid laboratory
for an analysis and from the laboratory you get
a report, which follow a specific international
standard.
43
192
You have to select what analysis the laboratory possible and don’t let any contamination be
should take, but the most used analysis are in touch with the cap, bottle or the mini-mess
particle count, water content, oxidation and hose when the sample is taken.
viscosity. In dirty air area, use a soft plastic foil (normal
as protection in laboratory bottles between
Another method is to install an inline particle bottle and cap).
counter direct in your hydraulic system which
give you the contamination level according Do not remove the foil, prick the end of your
to the international rules, the disadvantage mini-mess hose through the foil into the bottle
with this method is that you only get the and fill.
contamination level in the oil. To get a reliable result the system must run
without moving any valves and the mini-mess
hose should not touch the bottle.
General Only ¾ of the bottle shall be filled because
The intention is to verify the condition of the the laboratory has to shake the sample to get
oil during operation.The motors should be a mixed fluid when they analyse it. Minimum
running at normal operation while the sample 200ml are needed for a good analysis.
is taken. When the bottled is filled close the cap as soon
The cleanliness is extremely important during as possible to prevent contamination from the
sampling. air that might enter the bottle and give you a
Always use bottles adapted to oil samples, wrong result.
they can be ordered from any fluid analysis
laboratory. Inline measure
Never try to clean your own bottle if you want The sample shall be taken at the mini-mess
a true value of the result. coupling on the charge pressure side of the
The sample should be taken by using a motor in of the closed loop system. Clean the
mini-mess hose connected to a mini-mess coupling and the hose carefully.
coupling. Connect the hoses according to the particle
Always clean the connections carefully before counters manual.
you connect the mini-mess hose to the To get a true value the contamination readings
coupling. have to be stable about 10 min before you stop
Be careful when connecting the mini-mess to measure.
hose because the oil beam can be dangerous
and should never point against any person or
other sensible object.
Check and be aware of the pressure you
mayhave on the connection before you
connect.
How to do
Bottle samples
The sample shall be taken at the mini-mess
coupling on the charge pressure side of the
motor in the closed loop system. Never out of
the tank using the ball valves.
Clean the coupling and the hose carefully.
Connect the mini-mess hose to the coupling
but be careful and be aware of the direction of
the oil beam.
Let minimum 2 litres (0,6 gallon US) of oil flush
into a bucket before you fill the bottle.
Remove the cap of the bottle as late as
44
193
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Fault finding
5. FAULT FINDING
Hydraulic motor
Fault Probable cause Action

The motor does not run. Mechanical stop in the drive. Check system pressure. If the
pressure has risen to the relief
valve setting, remove the load
from the drive.
The motor does not deliver Investigate the pressure level in

enough torque because the pres- the system and correct the set-
sure difference across the motor ting of the pressure limiting valve
is not great enough for the load. if necessary.
Insufficient or no oil being sup- Check the hydraulic system.

plied to motor. Check the external leakage of
the motor. (The D connection).
Motor rotates in wrong direction. Oil supply connections to motor Connect the oil supply correctly.
incorrectly connected.
Motor runs jerkily. Pressure or flow fluctuations in Find the cause in the system or
the hydraulic system. in the driven unit.
Noise in the motor. The motor is being operated with Adjust the charge pressure to the
the charge pressure too low. correct level. See 2.1 "Recom-
mended charge pressures".
Internal faults in the motor. Investigate the drain oil, if neces-

sary. Put a magnetic plug in the
oil flow and check the material
that sticks to the magnet. Steel
particles indicate damage. Note
that fine material from the cast-
ings may be desposited and
does not mean internal damage
in the motor.
External oil leakage on the mo- The radial lip seal is worn. Replace the radial lip seal.
tor.
45
194
Fault finding Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA
FAULT FINDING
Hydraulic motor with MDA brake
Insufficient braking torque. The brake cylinder is not drained Remove the cause of the pres-
in the described manner, exces- sure. Concerning the maximum
sive counter pressure in drainage counter pressure, see the section
line. dealing with draining the brake
cylinder under 3.3.10/13, "Drain-
ing of brake cylinder".
The brake linings or the discs are Control of braking torque ac-
worn out. cording to 3.1.14. Dismantle
the brake and replace the worn
discs.
The brake does not open. Insufficient brake opening pres- For the required opening pres-
sure. sure see the section dealing with
brake MDA under 3.1.7 "Brake
MDA".
Seals or piston damage. Replace seals. Replace the pis-

ton. IMPORTANT!
The spring in the brake cylinder
is tensioned.
Hydraulic motor with two-speed valve, VTCA 600

Motor only works at one speed. Pilot pressure low. Suitable pilot pressure - see AC-
3.1 Engineering manual.
The valve piston has stuck in Inspect piston and remove impu-
single-speed position due to rities.
impurities in the oil.
46
195
Installation and Maintenance Manual, Compact CA Deklaration of conformity
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Example of the Declaration of Conformity given by Hägglunds Drives AB
The DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY above, is available on request for deliveries from

Hägglunds Drives AB. Translations into other languages are also available.
47
196
www.hagglunds.com
EN411. Repro: Öviks Repro. Printer: Ågrens Tryckeri 2008
Hägglunds Drives AB
SE-890 42 Mellansel, Sweden
Tel: + 46 (0)660 870 00.
Fax: + 46 (0)660 871 60
E-mail: info@se.hagglunds.com
Our drive is your performance.
197
ANNEX VII – PROXIMITY SENSOR

Cylindrical Proximity Sensor
E2A
Safe Mounting with Greater
Sensing Distance
• Ensures a sensing distance approximately 1.5 to 2
times larger than that of any conventional OMRON
Sensor.
• Problems such as the collision of workpieces are
eliminated.
• Full range of standard sizes (M8, M12, M18 and
M30; both long and short barrels)
• Modular construction simplifies customization.
Ordering Information
Sensing Body Thread length Output
Size Connection Operation mode NO Operation mode NC
distance material (overall length) configuration
PNP E2A-S08KS02-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08KS02-WP-B2 2M
27 (40)
Stainless NPN E2A-S08KS02-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08KS02-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired steel PNP E2A-S08LS02-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-B2 2M
49 (62)
NPN E2A-S08LS02-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08LS02-WP-C2 2M
PNP E2A-S08KS02-M1-B1 E2A-S08KS02-M1-B2
27 (43)
Stainless NPN E2A-S08KS02-M1-C1 E2A-S08KS02-M1-C2
steel PNP E2A-S08LS02-M1-B1 E2A-S08LS02-M1-B2
49 (65)
NPN E2A-S08LS02-M1-C1 E2A-S08LS02-M1-C2
Shielded 2.0 mm M12 connector
PNP E2A-M08KS02-M1-B1 E2A-M08KS02-M1-B2
27 (43)
NPN E2A-M08KS02-M1-C1 E2A-M08KS02-M1-C2
Brass
PNP E2A-M08LS02-M1-B1 E2A-M08LS02-M1-B2
49 (65)
NPN E2A-M08LS02-M1-C1 E2A-M08LS02-M1-C2
PNP E2A-S08KS02-M5-B1 E2A-S08KS02-M5-B2
27 (39)
M8 connector Stainless NPN E2A-S08KS02-M5-C1 E2A-S08KS02-M5-C2
(3-pin) steel PNP E2A-S08LS02-M5-B1 E2A-S08LS02-M5-B2
49 (61)
NPN E2A-S08LS02-M5-C1 E2A-S08LS02-M5-C2
M8
PNP E2A-S08KN04-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08KN04-WP-B2 2M
27 (40)
Stainless NPN E2A-S08KN04-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08KN04-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired steel PNP E2A-S08LN04-WP-B1 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-B2 2M
49 (62)
NPN E2A-S08LN04-WP-C1 2M E2A-S08LN04-WP-C2 2M
PNP E2A-S08KN04-M1-B1 E2A-S08KN04-M1-B2
27 (43)
Stainless NPN E2A-S08KN04-M1-C1 E2A-S08KN04-M1-C2
steel PNP E2A-S08LN04-M1-B1 E2A-S08LN04-M1-B2
49 (65)
NPN E2A-S08LN04-M1-C1 E2A-S08LN04-M1-C2
Non-shielded 4.0 mm M12 connector
PNP E2A-M08KN04-M1-B1 E2A-M08KN04-M1-B2
27 (43)
NPN E2A-M08KN04-M1-C1 E2A-M08KN04-M1-C2
Brass
PNP E2A-M08LN04-M1-B1 E2A-M08LN04-M1-B2
49 (65)
NPN E2A-M08LN04-M1-C1 E2A-M08LN04-M1-C2
PNP E2A-S08KN04-M5-B1 E2A-S08KN04-M5-B2
27 (39)
M8 connector Stainless NPN E2A-S08KN04-M5-C1 E2A-S08KN04-M5-C2
(3-pin) steel PNP E2A-S08LN04-M5-B1 E2A-S08LN04-M5-B2
49 (61)
NPN E2A-S08LN04-M5-C1 E2A-S08LN04-M5-C2
Cylindrical Proximity Sensor E2A 1

199
Sensing Body Thread length Output
Size distance Connection material (overall length) configuration Operation mode NO Operation mode NC
PNP E2A-M12KS04-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12KS04-WP-B2 2M

34 (50)
NPN E2A-M12KS04-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12KS04-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired Brass
PNP E2A-M12LS04-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-B2 2M
56 (72)
NPN E2A-M12LS04-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12LS04-WP-C2 2M
Shielded 4.0 mm
34 (48)
M12 connec- NPN E2A-M12KS04-M1-C1 E2A-M12KS04-M1-C2
tor Brass
56 (70)
M12
PNP E2A-M12KN08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12KN08-WP-B2 2M
34 (50)
NPN E2A-M12KN08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12KN08-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired Brass
PNP E2A-M12LN08-WP-B1 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-B2 2M
56 (72)
NPN E2A-M12LN08-WP-C1 2M E2A-M12LN08-WP-C2 2M
Non-shielded 8.0 mm
34 (48)
M12 connector Brass
56 (70)
39 (59)
Pre-wired Brass
61 (81)
Shielded 8.0 mm
39 (53)
M12 connector Brass
61 (75)
M18
PNP E2A-M18KN16-WP-B1 2M E2A-M18KN16-WP-B2 2M
39 (59)
NPN E2A-M18KN16-WP-C1 2M E2A-M18KN16-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired Brass
61 (81)
Non-shielded 16.0 mm
39 (53)
M12 connector Brass
61 (75)
44 (64)
Pre-wired Brass
66 (86)
Shielded 15.0 mm
44 (58)
M12 connector Brass
66 (80)
M30
44 (64) PNP E2A-M30KN20-WP-B1 2M E2A-M30KN20-WP-B2 2M
20.0 mm
(See note.) NPN E2A-M30KN20-WP-C1 2M E2A-M30KN20-WP-C2 2M
Pre-wired Brass
30.0 mm 66 (86)
Non-shielded
44 (58) PNP E2A-M30KN20-M1-B1 E2A-M30KN20-M1-B2
20.0 mm (See note.) NPN E2A-M30KN20-M1-C1 E2A-M30KN20-M1-C2
M12 connector Brass
30.0 mm 66 (80)
Note: M30 non-shielded Models with double sensing distance and short barrels cannot be mounted due to the necessary separation distance from the surrounding
metal. Standard sensing models are thus available.
2 Cylindrical Proximity Sensor E2A

200
Model Number Legend
E2A@-@@@@@-@-@@-@@
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Example: E2A-M12LS04-M1-B1 Standard, M12, long barrel, shielded, Sn=4 mm, M12 connector, PNP-NO
E2A-M08KN04-WP-B1 5M Standard, M8, short barrel, non-shielded, Sn=4 mm, pre-wired PVC cable, PNP-NO, cable length=5 m
1. Basic name 8. Kind of connection
E2A WP: Pre-wired, PVC
2. Sensing technology M1: M12 connector (4-pole)
Blank: Standard double distance M3: M8 connector (4-pole)
3. Housing shape and material M5: M8 connector (3-pole)
M: Cylindrical, metric threaded, brass 9. Power source and output
S: Cylindrical, metric threaded, stainless steel B: DC, 3-wire, PNP open collector
4. Housing size C: DC, 3-wire, NPN open collector
08: 8 mm D: DC, 2-wire
12: 12 mm E: DC, 3-wire, NPN voltage output
18: 18 mm F: DC, 3-wire, PNP voltage output
30: 30 mm 10.Operation mode
5. Barrel length 1: Normally open (NO)
K: Standard length 2: Normally closed (NC)
L: Long body 11.Specials (e.g., cable material, oscillating frequency)
6. Shield
S: Shielded 12.Cable length
N: Non-shielded Blank: Connector type
7. Sensing distance Numeral: Cable type
Numeral: Sensing distance: e.g. 02=2 mm, 16=16 mm

201
Specifications
DC 3-wire Models
Size M8 M12
Type Shielded Non-shielded Shielded Non-shielded
E2A-M08@S02-M1-B1 E2A-M08@N04-M1-B1
E2A-M08@S02-M1-B2 E2A-M08@N04-M1-B2
E2A-M08@S02-M1-C1 E2A-M08@N04-M1-C1 E2A-M12@S04-@@-B1 E2A-M12@N08-@@-B1
E2A-M08@S02-M1-C2 E2A-M08@N04-M1-C2 E2A-M12@S04-@@-B2 E2A-M12@N08-@@-B2
E2A-S08@S02-@@-B1 E2A-S08@N04-@@-B1 E2A-M12@S04-@@-C1 E2A-M12@N08-@@-C1
E2A-S08@S02-@@-B2 E2A-S08@N04-@@-B2 E2A-M12@S04-@@-C2 E2A-M12@N08-@@-C2
E2A-S08@S02-@@-C1 E2A-S08@N04-@@-C1
Item E2A-S08@S02-@@-C2 E2A-S08@N04-@@-C2
Sensing distance 2 mm ± 10% 4 mm ± 10% 4 mm ± 10% 8 mm ± 10%
Setting distance 0 to 1.6 mm 0 to 3.2 mm 0 to 3.2 mm 0 to 6.4 mm
Differential travel 10% max. of sensing distance
Target Ferrous metal (The sensing distance decreases with non-ferrous metal.)
Standard target (mild steel ST37) 8×8×1 mm 12×12×1 mm 12×12×1 mm 24×24×1 mm
Response frequency (See note 1.) 1,500 Hz 1,000 Hz 1,000 Hz 800 Hz
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max.
(operating voltage range) (10 to 32 VDC)
Current consumption (DC 3-wire) 10 mA max.
Output type -B models: PNP open collector
-C models: NPN open collector
Load current 200 mA max. (32 VDC max.)
Control (See note 2.)
output
Residual voltage 2 V max. (under load current of 200 mA with cable length of 2 m)
Indicator Operation indicator (Yellow LED)
-B1/-C1 models: NO
Operation mode -B2/-C2 models: NC
(with sensing object approaching)
For details, refer to the timing charts.
Power source circuit reverse polarity protection, Output reverse polarity protection, Power source
Protection circuit Surge suppressor, Short-circuit protection circuit reverse polarity protection, Surge suppres-
sor, Short-circuit protection
Ambient air temperature Operating: −40°C to 70°C, Storage: −40°C to 85°C (with no icing or condensation)
±10% max. of sensing distance at 23°C within temperature range of −25°C to 70°C
Temperature influence (See note 2.)
±15% max. of sensing distance at 23°C within temperature range of −40°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 95%, Storage: 35% to 95%
Voltage influence ±1% max. of sensing distance in rated voltage range ±15%
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between current carry parts and case
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current carry parts and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 hours each in X, Y and Z directions
Shock resistance 500 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions 1,000 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions
IEC60529: IP67, Degree of protection
Standard and listings EN60947-5-2: EMC
UL (CSA) [E196555] (See note 3.)
-WP models: Pre-wired models (Standard length: 2 m)
Connection method -M1 models: M12 4-pin connector models
-M5 models: M8 3-pin connector models
Pre-wired model Approx. 65 g Approx. 85 g
Weight
(packaged) M12 connector model M12 connector models: Approx. 20 g Approx. 35 g
M8 connector models: Approx. 15 g
Case Stainless steel or brass-nickel plated Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface PBT
Material
Cable PVC
Clamping nut Brass-nickel plated
Note 1. The response frequency is an average value. Measurement conditions are as follows: standard target, a distance of twice the standard
target distance between targets, and a setting distance of half the sensing distance.
2. When using any model at an ambient temperature between −40°C and −25°C and a power voltage between 30 and 32 VDC, use a load
current of 100 mA max.,
3. UL (CSA) [E196555]: Use class 2 circuit only.

202
DC 3-wire Models
Size M18 M30
Type Shielded Non-shielded Shielded Non-shielded Non-shielded
E2A-M18@S08-@@-B1 E2A-M18@N16-@@-B1 E2A-M30@S15-@@-B1 E2A-M30KN20-@@-B1 E2A-M30LN30-@@-B1
E2A-M18@S08-@@-B2 E2A-M18@N16-@@-B2 E2A-M30@S15-@@-B2 E2A-M30KN20-@@-B2 E2A-M30LN30-@@-B2
E2A-M18@S08-@@-C1 E2A-M18@N16-@@-C1 E2A-M30@S15-@@-C1 E2A-M30KN20-@@-C1 E2A-M30LN30-@@-C1
Item E2A-M18@S08-@@-C2 E2A-M18@N16-@@-C2 E2A-M30@S15-@@-C2 E2A-M30KN20-@@-C2 E2A-M30LN30-@@-C2
Sensing distance 8 mm±10% 16 mm±10% 15 mm±10% 20 mm±10% 30 mm±10%
Setting distance 0 to 6.4 mm 0 to 12.8 mm 0 to 12 mm 0 to 16 mm 0 to 24 mm
Differential travel 10% max. of sensing distance
Target Ferrous metal (The sensing distance decreases with non-ferrous metal.)
Standard target
(mild steel ST37) 24×24×1 mm 48×48×1 mm 45×45×1 mm 60×60×1 mm 90×90×1 mm
Response frequency 500 Hz 400 Hz 250 Hz 100 Hz 100 Hz
(See note 1.)
Power supply voltage 12 to 24 VDC. Ripple (p-p): 10% max.
(operating voltage range) (10 to 32 VDC)
Current consumption 10 mA max.
(DC 3-wire)
Output type -B models: PNP open collector
-C models: NPN open collector
Load current 200 mA max. (32 VDC max.)
Control (See note 2.)
output
Residual voltage 2 V max. (under load current of 200 mA with cable length of 2 m)
Indicator Operation indicator (Yellow LED)
Operation mode -B1/-C1 models: NO
(with sensing object approa- -B2/-C2 models: NC
ching) For details, refer to the timing charts.
Protection circuit Output reverse polarity protection, Power source circuit reverse polarity protection, Surge suppressor,
Short-circuit protection
Ambient air temperature Operating: −40°C to 70°C, Storage: −40°C to 85°C (with no icing or condensation)
Temperature influence ±10% max. of sensing distance at 23°C within temperature range of −25°C to 70°C
(See note 2.) ±15% max. of sensing distance at 23°C within temperature range of −40°C to 70°C
Ambient humidity Operating: 35% to 95%, Storage: 35% to 95%
Voltage influence ±1% max. of sensing distance in rated voltage range ±15%
Insulation resistance 50 MΩ min. (at 500 VDC) between current carry parts and case
Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC at 50/60 Hz for 1 min between current carry parts and case
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 1.5-mm double amplitude for 2 hours each in X, Y and Z directions
Shock resistance 1,000 m/s2, 10 times each in X, Y and Z directions
IEC60529: IP67, Degree of protection
Standard and listings EN60947-5-2: EMC
UL (CSA) [E196555] (See note 3.)
-WP models: Pre-wired models (Standard length: 2 m)
Connection method -M1 models: M12 4-pin connector models
-M5 models: M8 3-pin connector models
Weight Pre-wired model Approx. 160 g Approx. 280 g Approx. 280 g Approx. 370 g
(pak- M12 connector
kaged) model Approx. 70 g Approx. 200 g Approx. 200 g Approx. 260 g
Case Brass-nickel plated
Sensing surface PBT
Material
Cable PVC
Clamping nut Brass-nickel plated
Note 1. The response frequency is an average value. Measurement conditions are as follows: standard target, a distance of twice the standard
target distance between targets, and a setting distance of half the sensing distance.
2. When using any model at an ambient temperature between −40°C and −25°C and a power voltage between 30 and 32 VDC, use a load
current of 100 mA max.
3. UL (CSA) [E196555]: Use class 2 circuit only.

203
Engineering Data
Operating Range (Typical)
Shielded Models Non-shielded Models
18 35
Sensing distance X (mm)

E2A-M30LN30
16 E2A-M30@S15
30
14 Y
25 X
12 Y
E2A-M30KN20
X
E2A-M18@S08 20
10
E2A-M18@N16
8 15
E2A-M12@S04 E2A-M12@N08
6
E2A-S08@S02/ 10
E2A-M08@S02 E2A-S08@N04/
4
E2A-M08@N04
5
2
0 0
−30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 −50 −40 −30 −20 −10 0 10 20 30 40 50
Distance Y (mm) Distance Y (mm)
Influence of Sensing Object Size and Materials

Shielded Models
E2A-S08@S02/M08@S02 E2A-M12@S04 E2A-M18@S08

8.0
2.5 5.0
@d @d Iron
t = 1 mm t = 1 mm
X X Iron 7.0
Iron
2.0 4.0
6.0 Stainless steel (SUS303)
Stainless steel
Stainless steel (SUS303) (SUS303)
5.0
1.5 3.0
Brass
Brass 4.0
Brass Aluminum
Aluminum
1.0 Aluminum 2.0 3.0
Copper Copper
Copper @d
2.0 t = 1 mm
0.5 1.0 X
1.0
0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Side length of sensing object d (mm) Side length of sensing object d (mm) Side length of sensing object d (mm)
E2A-M30@S15
20
@d
t = 1 mm
X
16
Iron
12
Stainless steel (SUS303)
8 Brass
Aluminum
Copper
4
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
Side length of sensing object d (mm)

204
Non-shielded Models
E2A-S08@N04/M08@N04 E2A-M12@N08 E2A-M18@N16

10 20

5.0

@d @d @d
t = 1 mm t = 1 mm t = 1 mm
X X X Iron
Iron Iron
4.0 8 16

3.0 6 12
Brass
2.0 4 8 Brass
Aluminum Brass
Aluminum
Copper Aluminum Copper
1.0 2 Copper 4
0 10 20 30 40 50 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 20 40 60 80
Side length of sensing object d (mm) Side length of sensing object d (mm) Side length of sensing object d (mm)
E2A-M30KN20 E2A-M30LN30
35
25
@d @d
t = 1 mm Iron
X t = 1 mm 30 X
Iron
20
25
15 20
Brass
15
10 Aluminum
Brass
Aluminum Copper
10
Copper
5
5
0 20 40 60 80 100 0 20 40 60 80 100
Side length of sensing object d (mm) Side length of sensing object d (mm)

205
Operation
PNP Output
Operation mode Model Timing chart Output circuit
Non-sensing zone Sensing zone Brown
Proximity
+V
Sensor
Sensing
object
Proximity
Sensor Black
(%) 100 0
main
distance
sensing
Rated
circuits (See note 1.)
Load
Blue
ON 0V
Yellow indicator
OFF
NO E2A-@-@-B1 ON Note 1: With M8 connector models, there is no output
Control output
OFF reverse polarity protection diode.
M12 Connector M8 Connector

Pin Arrangement Pin Arrangement
(See note 2.)
1 4
2 4 1 3
Note 2: Terminal 2 of the M12 connector is not used.

Proximity
+V
Sensor
Sensing
object
Proximity
Black
Sensor (M8 connector: )
(%) 100 0
main
distance
sensing
Rated
circuits (See note 1.)
Load
Blue
ON 0V
Yellow indicator
OFF
NC E2A-@-@-B2 ON Note 1: With M8 connector models, there is no output
Control output reverse polarity protection diode.
OFF

(See note 2.)
1 4
2 4 1 3

206
NPN Output
Operation mode Model Timing chart Output circuit
Proximity +V
Sensor
Sensing
object Load
Proximity (See note 1.) Black
(%) 100 0 Sensor
main
distance
sensing
Rated
circuits
Blue
ON 0V
Yellow indicator
OFF
NO E2A-@-@-C1 ON
Control output Note 1: With M8 connector models, there is no output
OFF reverse polarity protection diode.

(See note 2.)
1 4
2 4 1 3

Proximity
+V
Sensor
Sensing
object
Load
Proximity (See note 1.) Black
(%) 100 0 Sensor
main
distance
sensing
Rated
circuits (M8 connector: )
Blue
ON 0V
Yellow indicator
OFF
NC E2A-@-@-C2 ON Note 1: With M8 connector models, there is no output
Control output reverse polarity protection diode.
OFF

(See note 2.)
1 4
2 4 1 3

207
Dimensions
Note: All units are in millimeters unless otherwise indicated.
Pre-wired Models (Shielded) Pre-wired Models (Non-shielded)
E2A-S08KS02-WP-@@ E2A-S08KN04-WP-@@
40
40
27
27
13 6 3 5
13 3 5
5.8 dia.
(See note 1.)
(See note 1.) Indicator (See note 2.)
Indicator (See note 2.) M8×1
M8×1 Two, clamping nuts
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors (conductor cross section: Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors (conductor cross section:
0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m 0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m
2. Operation indicator (yellow) 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
E2A-M12KS04-WP-@@ E2A-M12KN08-WP-@@
50.3 50.3
34 34
17 4 7 17 7 4 7
9.2 dia.
(See note 1.) (See note 1.)
Indicator (See note 2.)
Two, clamping nuts
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors (conductor cross section:
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors (conductor cross section: 0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m
0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
2. Operation indicator (yellow)
59.5
59.5
39
39
24 10 4 10
24 4 10
15.1 dia.
Indicator (See note 2.) Indicator (See note 2.)
M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
64.5
64.5
44
44
36 15 5 10
36 5 10
26.4 dia.
(See note 1.)
(See note 1.)
M30×1.5
M30×1.5 Two, clamping nuts
Two, clamping nuts
0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m
Note 1. 4-dia. vinyl-insulated round cable with 3 conductors (conductor cross section: 2. Operation indicator (yellow)
0.3 mm2; insulator diameter: 1.3 mm); standard length: 2 m

208
E2A-S08LS02-WP-@@ E2A-S08LN04-WP-@@
62
62
49
49
13 6 3 5
13 3 5
5.8 dia.
(See note 1.)
Two, clamping nuts
E2A-M12LS04-WP-@@ E2A-M12LN08-WP-@@
72.3 72.3
17 56 17 56
4 7 4 7
7
9.2 dia.
Indicator (See note 2.) Indicator (See note 2.)
M12×1 M12×1
Two, clamping nuts Two, clamping nuts
E2A-M18LN16-WP-@@
E2A-M18LS08-WP-@@ 81.5
61
81.5
24 10 4 10
61
24 4 10
15.1 dia.
(See note 1.)
M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
E2A-M30LN30-WP-@@
E2A-M30LS15-WP-@@ 86.5
86.5 66
66 36 15 5 10
36 5
10
26.4 dia.
(See note 1.)
M30×1.5
Two, clamping nuts
Mounting Hole Cutout Dimensions
External diameter
of Proximity Sensor Dimension F (mm)
+0.5
M8 8.5 dia. 0
+0.5
M12 12.5 dia. 0
+0.5
F M18 18.5 dia. 0
+0.5
M30 30.5 dia. 0

209
M12 Connector Models (Shielded) M12 Connector Models (Non-shielded)
E2A-S08KS02-M1-@@ E2A-S08KN04-M1-@@
E2A-M08KS02-M1-@@ E2A-M08KN04-M1-@@
43 43
27 27
M12×1
13 3 5 13 6 3 5
M12×1
6 dia.
Indicator (See note.) M8×1 Indicator (See note.)

M8×1
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°) Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
E2A-M12KS04-M1-@@ E2A-M12KN08-M1-@@
48 48
34 34
17 4 7 17 4
M12×1 M12×1
7 7
9.4 dia.
Indicator (See note.) Indicator (See note.)

M12×1 M12×1
E2A-M18KS08-M1-@@ E2A-M18KN16-M1-@@
53
53
39
39
24 4 10 10
24 4 10
M12×1 M12×1
15.3 dia.
Indicator (See note.)
M18×1 Indicator (See note.)
Two, clamping nuts M18×1
Two, clamping nuts
Note: Operation indicator (yellow LED, 4×90°)
E2A-M30KS15-M1-@@ E2A-M30KN20-M1-@@
58
58
44
44
36 15 5 10
36 5 10
M12×1
M12×1
26.6 dia.

M30×1.5
Two, clamping nuts

210
E2A-S08LS02-M1-@@ E2A-S08LN04-M1-@@
E2A-M08LS02-M1-@@ 65 E2A-M08LN04-M1-@@ 65
49 49
M12×1
13 3 5 13 6 3 5
M12×1
6 dia.
Indicator (See note.) M8×1 Indicator (See note.)

M8×1
Two, clamping nuts
70
E2A-M12LS04-M1-@@ E2A-M12LN04-M1-@@ 70
56
4 56
17 7
7 17 4
M12×1 7 M12×1
9.2 dia.
M12×1 Indicator (See note.) Indicator (See note.)

M12×1
E2A-M18LS08-M1-@@ 75 E2A-M18LN16-M1-@@ 75
61 61
24 10 10
24 4 10 4
M12×1
M12×1
15.1 dia.
Indicator (See note.) Indicator (See note.)

M18×1 M18×1
80
E2A-M30LN30-M1-@@
E2A-M30LS15-M1-@@ 80 66
36 15 5 10
66
36 5 10
M12×1
26.6 dia.

M30×1.5

Two, clamping nuts
M8 Connector Models (Shielded) M8 Connector Models (Non-shielded)
E2A-S08KS02-M5-@@ E2A-S08KN04-M5-@@
39 39
27 27
13 3 5 13 6 3 5 M8×1
M8×1
5.8 dia.
M8×1 M8×1
E2A-S08LS02-M5-@@ E2A-S08LN04-M5-@@
61 61
49 49
13 3 5 13 6 3 5 M8×1
M8×1
5.8 dia.
M8×1 M8×1

211
Precautions
Safety Precautions Wiring
Power Supply Be sure to wire the E2A and load correctly, otherwise it may be dam-
aged.
Do not impose an excessive voltage on the E2A, otherwise it may be
damaged. Do not impose AC current (100 to 240 VAC) on any DC Connection with No Load
model, otherwise it may be damaged.
Be sure to insert loads when wiring. Make sure to connect a proper
Load Short-circuit load to the E2A in operation, otherwise it may damage internal ele-
ments.
Do not short-circuit the load, or the E2A may be damaged.
The E2A’s short-circuit protection function will be valid if the polarity Do not expose the product to flammable or explo-
of the supply voltage imposed is correct and within the rated voltage sive gases.
range.
Do not disassemble, repair, or modify the product.
Correct Use Power OFF

Designing The Proximity Sensor may output a pulse signal when it is turned
OFF. Therefore, it is recommended that the load be turned OFF
Power Reset Time
before turning OFF the Proximity Sensor.
The Proximity Sensor is ready to operate within 100 ms after power
Power Supply Transformer
is supplied. If power supplies are connected to the Proximity Sensor
and load respectively, be sure to supply power to the Proximity Sen- When using a DC power supply, make sure that the DC power sup-
sor before supplying power to the load. ply has an insulated transformer. Do not use a DC power supply with
an auto-transformer.
Effects of Surrounding Metal
Mutual Interference
When mounting the E2A within a metal panel, ensure that the clear-
ances given in the following table are maintained. When installing two or more Sensors face-to-face or side-by-side,
ensure that the minimum distances given in the following table are
l maintained.
d dia. n
m
D
m l
(Unit: mm)
M30 (Unit: mm)
Type Dimension M8 M12 M18 Short Long M30
barrel barrel Type Dimension M8 M12 M18 Short Long
0 0 barrel barrel
l 0 0 (See note 1.) (See note 2.) A 20 30 60 110
m 4.5 12 24 45 Shielded
B 15 20 35 70
Shielded
d --- --- 27 45 A 80 120 200 300 300
Non-
D 0 0 1.5 4 shielded B 60 100 120 200 300
n 12 18 27 45
l 12 15 22 30 40
m 8 20 48 70 90
Non- d 24 40 70 90 120
shielded
D 12 15 22 30 40
n 24 40 70 90 120
Note 1. In the case of using the supplied nuts.
If true flash mounting is necessary, apply a free zone of
1.5 mm.
2. In the case of using the supplied nuts.
If true flush mounting is necessary, apply a free zone of
4 mm.

212
Wiring Maintenance and Inspection
High-tension Lines Periodically perform the following checks to ensure stable operation
Wiring through Metal Conduit: of the Proximity Sensor over a long period of time.
If there is a power or high-tension line near the cable of the Proximity 1. Check for mounting position, dislocation, looseness, or distortion
Sensor, wire the cable through an independent metal conduit to pre- of the Proximity Sensor and sensing objects.
vent against Proximity Sensor damage or malfunctioning. 2. Check for loose wiring and connections, improper contacts, and
Cable Extension line breakage.
3. Check for attachment or accumulation of metal powder or dust.
Standard cable length is less than 200 m.
4. Check for abnormal temperature conditions and other environ-
The tractive force is 50 N. mental conditions.
Mounting 5. Check for proper lighting of indicators (for models with a set indi-
cator.)
The Proximity Sensor must not be subjected to excessive shock with
a hammer when it is installed, otherwise the Proximity Sensor may Never disassemble or repair the Sensor.
be damaged or lose its water-resistivity. Environment
Do not tighten the nut with excessive force. A washer must be used Water Resistivity
with the nut.
Do not use the Proximity Sensor underwater, outdoors, or in the rain.
Operating Environment
Be sure to use the Proximity Sensor within its operating ambient
temperature range and do not use the Proximity Sensor outdoors so
that its reliability and life expectancy can be maintained. Although the
Proximity Sensor is water resistive, a cover to protect the Proximity
Sensor from water or water-soluble machining oil is recommended
Type Torque so that its reliability and life expectancy can be maintained.
M8 Stainless steel type 9 Nm Do not use the Proximity Sensor in an environment with chemical
Brass type 4 Nm gas (e.g., strong alkaline or acid gasses including nitric, chromic, and
M12 30 Nm concentrated sulfuric acid gases).
M18 70 Nm Inrush Current
M30 180 Nm
A load that has a large inrush current (e.g., a lamp or motor) will
damage the Proximity Sensor, in which case connect the load to the
Proximity Sensor through a relay.

213
<SUITABILITY FOR USE>
OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards,
codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of the products in
the customer’s application or use of the products.
Take all necessary steps to determine the suitability of the product
for the systems, machines, and equipment with which it will be used.
<CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS>
Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time
based on improvements and other reasons. Consult with your
OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications
of purchased product.
Cat. No. D096-E1-01 In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice.
OMRON EUROPE B.V.

Wegalaan 67-69,
NL-2132 JD, Hoofddorf,
The Netherlands
Phone: +31 23 568 13 00
Fax: +31 23 568 13 88
www.eu.omron.com

214
ANNEX VIII – JOYSTICK PENNY ANG GILES JC 150Y

16.0 KC-B10-11 Proportional Amplifier
Specifications
Current Control Pulse Width Modulation 50 ~ 250Hz adjustable
Supply Input Voltage 24VDC +/-20%
Command Input Signal Voltage 0 ~ 5VDC, Max 7.5VDC
Rated Output Current 0.8A (at 5VDC signal input)
Maximum Output Current 1.2A
Power Consumption Maximum 20VA
Load Resistance 14 ~ 21Ω
Input Impedance 100KΩ
Ambient Temperature Range 32 ~ 122° F (0 ~ 50°C)
Maximum Humidity 90% RH (No dew permissible)
Vibration Resistance (JIS C50250 Type A) Amplitude: 0.59 in peak to peak (1.5 mm peak to peak)
Frequency: 10 ~ 55 Hz
Insulation 100MW minimum at 500VDC
Current Monitor Output 0.47V/A
Mass 0.041lb (90g)
Gain Adjustment Range 0.8A +/- 0.2A at 5VDC input
Bias Adjustment Range 0 ~ 0.24A
Ramp Time Adjustment Range (0.1 ~ 5 sec for ramp up from 0 ~ 0.8A)
(0.1 ~ 5 sec for ramp down from 0.8A ~ 0)
Linearity Up to 2% FS
Current Stability Up to 1.5% FS (ambient temperature change 122°F (50°C))
Up to 2% FS (for supply voltage change +/-20%)
Up to 2% FS (load resistance change 14 ~ 21Ω)
Supply Fuse 3.2A Anti-surge plug type PCB mounted
Installation Drawing
0.43 (11.0)
0.20 (5.0)
0.0315 (0.8) Ø 0.20 (Ø5.0)

4.88 (124.0)
R0.10 (R2.5)
0.20
0.02 (5.0)
0.43 (11.0)
(5.0)
0.47 (12)
0.77 0.77
0.79 (19.5) (19.5)
(20.0) 1.54 5080 36th Street S.E., Grand Rapids, MI 49512
(39.0) (616) 949-6500 • Fax (616) 975-3103
www.kpm-usa.com
P-969-0274C The right to modification for technical improvement is reserved. SG5M 3/06
5080 36th Street S.E., Grand Rapids, MI 49512

(616) 949-6500 • Fax (616) 975-3103
216
JC 150
RUGGED SINGLE-AXIS JOYSTICK
Developed for use in those applications a zero point for a bipolar supply voltage.
where lever strength and handle
The functionality of the JC150 can be
functionality are paramount, the JC150 is a
increased by the inclusion of
large, robust, single-axis joystick that can
potentiometers, switches, membrane
be easily tailored to your applications.
keypads and/or LED displays in its handle.
Designed for use with an electronic Deadmans switches or the Center Lock
controller, the conductive plastic track in handle can be specified to improve the
the JC150 generates analogue and integrity of your control system. Other
switched reference signals, proportional to options include Friction Lock (put-and-stay)
the distance and direction over which the and an End Lock handle.
handle is moved. The analogue output can
Installation time has been reduced through
be configured to provide signals for fault
the use of a standard electronic connector.
detection circuits within the controller or
the direct control of proprietary electro- With an expected life in excess of 5 million
hydraulic valves. A center tap on the cycles*, the JC150 can be used to control
analogue track provides an accurate access platforms, agricultural, construction
voltage reference for the center position or and material handling equipment.
JC150 with HKN handle JC150 with CL handle
(cover removed for clarity)
ORDER CODE
JC150 Y R M HKN STN ////
Axes Special Options

Tracks Interface Board
Spring Handle
Axes Y
No of Axes 1
Tracks E N R Q S T
Track Resistance 5kΩ 1k6Ω 2kΩ 3k2Ω 2kΩ 3k2Ω
Output Voltage Range 0% to 100% Vs 0% to 100% Vs 10% to 90% Vs 25% to 75% Vs 10% to 90% Vs 25% to 75% Vs
Switch Operating Angle ± 7.5° ± 7.5° ± 5° ± 5° ± 7.5° ± 7.5°
Center Return Spring M

Breakout Force 6.2N
Operating Force 17.8N
Handles HKN knob fitted as standard.

Please refer to the handle data sheet for alternatives.
* Some handles will require an additional mounting plate. See page 20 for details.
Interface Board STN STA

No electronics No electronics
with adapter plate
Special Options FLDO FLD1 FLD2 FLD3 FLD4 FLD5
Friction Lock with: No Detent Center Center and End Detent Center and 25° detent
Detent end Detent 25° Detent
Please contact our engineers to determine the compatibility between the FL option and your chosen handle.
16 way connector and pins SA47931

16 way cable harness P49780
217
JC 150
Specifications
Mechanical
Breakout Force 6.2N 55mm from flange
Operating Force 17.8N Full deflection, 55mm from flange
Maximum Applied Force 300N Full deflection, 130mm from flange
Mechanical Angle of Movement ±35°
Electrical Angle of Movement ±32°
Expected Life (operations)* >5 million 500,000 for Friction Lock (FL) option
Mass 560g With HKN handle fitted
Environmental
Operating Temperature Range -25°C to +70°C
Storage Temperature Range -40°C to +85°C
Environmental Sealing Above the Flange IP65 BSEN60529
Electrical General
Maximum Load Current Potentiometer wiper See Design Note in rear of Data Sheet
Directional switches 200mA Resistive
Maximum Power Dissipation 0.25W at 25°C
Mating Connector Body AMP 040 16 Way Connector 174046-2

Mating Connector Pins AMP 040 Pins 175062-1
Analogue Track
Total Track Resistance 1k6Ω, 2k, 3k2 or 5kΩ Tolerance ±20%
Output Voltage Range 0% to 100%Vs, 10 to 90%Vs,
25% to 75%Vs Tolerance ±2%
Center Tap Voltage (1 MΩ load) 50%Vs Tolerance ±2%
Center Tap Angle 2.5° either side of center Tolerance ±1°
Switch Tracks
Directional Switch or Center Off Switch Standard
Switch Operating Angle 5° or 7.5° either side of center Tolerance ±1°
Maximum Supply Voltage (Vs) 35Vdc
End Switches Optional
7.0
End Switch Operating Angle ±28.5° from center

Matingcoer
Termination Details
Description Pin
Positive voltage supply 11
Center tap 12
Negative or zero voltage supply 9
Output voltage signal 10
N/O signal handle forward (+Y) 14
N/O signal handle back (-Y) 1
N/O signal handle fully forward (+Y) EL handle option only 15
N/O signal handle fully back (-Y) EL handle option only 2
Common terminal for directional switches 13
Common Terminal for handle switches 16
3
Please refer to 4
the data sheet for 5
your chosen handle 6
7
8
All dimensions in mm
218
Mounting plates
JC150/JC600
MOUNTING PLATE DETAILS
The panel mounting detail for the JC150

and JC600 joystick controllers is specified
on pages 7 and 15 respectively.
Some handle options with a larger grip size
require the use of an adaptor plate to mount
the joystick from the top of the panel.
The adaptor plate details for the JC150 and
JC600 models is shown below.
JC150 Adaptor Plate P48692 JC600 Adaptor Plate P49367

Required with the A, HC, HP and HS handles Required with the HP and HS handles
20
219
ANNEX IX – DIGITAL VALVE AMPLIFIER

Digital Valve Amplifier Series PROam 20
Technical documentation
PROam20
AMCA HYDRAULIC FLUID POWER B.V.

P.O.BOX 18, 9790 AA Ten Boer Tel. +31 (0)50 3023577
B.Kuiperweg 33, 9792 PJ Ten Post Fax. +31 (0)50 3021226
The Netherlands email: sales@amca-nl.com
homepage: www.amca-nl.com
221
Table of contents
Revisions ...................................................................................................................................................... 3
Ordering code ............................................................................................................................................... 3
Accessories .................................................................................................................................................. 3
General description....................................................................................................................................... 4
General installation remarks......................................................................................................................... 5
In- and outputs ..................................................................................................................................... 6
Block diagram ...................................................................................................................................... 7
Typical wiring ....................................................................................................................................... 8
Technical Data ..................................................................................................................................... 9
General IO description ....................................................................................................................... 10
Power supply ................................................................................................................................... 10
Digital inputs .................................................................................................................................... 10
Analogue inputs ............................................................................................................................... 10
PWM outputs ................................................................................................................................... 11
Start-up and commissioning guidelines...................................................................................................... 12
Adjustments ....................................................................................................................................... 13
Start-up .............................................................................................................................................. 14
Remarks ..................................................................................................................................................... 15
AMCA Hydraulic Fluid Power B.V. 2
222
Revisions
Module Version/
Date Comment
Revision
02.01.2007 1 Hardware based on 192 rev. 2
01.03.2007 2 Software Modification
07.03.2007 3 New Hardware with expanded input selection
Ordering code
PROam20 - for directional valves
Accessories
223
General description
This module is used for the control of proportional valves with one or two solenoids. Various adjustable
parameters enable an optimized adaptation to the respective valve. This power amplifier is inexpensive
and a space-saving solution.
The amplifier is controlled by different voltages or current input signals. The output current is closed loop
controlled and therefore independent from the supply voltage and the solenoid resistance.
Ramps, MIN and MAX and PWM-frequency are adjustable via potentiometer
Typical applications: Control of proportional valves
Features
• Power amplifier for proportional directional valves
• Internal controlled by a modern microcontroller
• Compact housing
• Adjustment via potentiometer
• MIN-, MAX-, RAMP- and PWM-frequency adjustment via potentiometer
• Current range (per DIL switch): 0,8 A and 1,6 A
224
General installation remarks
Explanation of terms and notes on safety
Terms:
Mounting instructions
This module is for the installation provided in shielded electromagnetic compatibility housing (EMC con-
form).
All cables operating outside have to be screened. A complete shielding is presupposed. It is also presup-
posed, that no strong electrical disturbances near the module are installed.
Typical mounting area: 24V control signal area (near PLC)
By the arrangement of the electrical cabinet a separation between power part (and power cables) and
signal part must be taken in consideration. Experience shows us that the area next to the PLC (24 V
area) is suitable. All digital and analogue inputs and outputs have filters and an over voltage protection. In
case of correct wiring and shielding all EMC demands are fulfilled. If there are nevertheless any prob-
lems, please send us detailed sketches of mounting and wiring. We will look after this problem immedi-
ately.
Even if all EMC-norms are fulfilled, technical problems in special cases are possible. Our experience has
shown us that most of these problems are caused in the physical conditions of the cables. If everything is
shielded continuously and configured correctly, no problems have to be expected.
ATTENTION!
Due to electrical disturbances, failure at components as well as software faults can cause
in individual cases uncontrolled movements at the drive. Appropriate safety precautions
have to be considered during the engineering.
Connection and start up of the module may only be allowed by qualified

persons who have, because of education, experience and instruction, sufficient
acknowledge on relevant directives and approved technical rules. Please read
ATTENTION! and follow the operating instructions carefully. In case of non observance of the
instruction the guaranty and liability claim expires.
225
In- and outputs
Terminal Description of the analogue inputs and outputs

PIN 9/10 External command value (V), range = ±100 % corresponds to ±10 V, ±8 V,
0… 10 V or 0… 8 V depending of the DIL switch S1
PIN 13 Input resistor (500 Ohm) used for 4… 20 mA. PIN 13 have to be connected with
PIN 9.
PIN 12 8 V reference output signal
Terminal Description of the digital inputs and outputs

PIN 15 Enable input:
This digital input signal initializes the application. The power output is active and the
READY signal indicates that all components are working correctly.
LEDs Description of the LED function

GREEN Corresponding with the READY output.
OFF: No power supply or ENABLE is not activated
ON: System is ready
FLASHING: A failure is detected.
(4… 20 mA input) signal is out of the range or
short cut / broken cable to the solenoids
YELLOW A/B ON: related solenoid is activated.
OFF: solenoid not activated
226
227
Typical wiring
Joystick Magnet B
8V (10V) PIN 12 Solenoid B
Magnet A
Solenoid A
+In PIN 10
Rückleiter
-In PIN 9 commen
GND PIN 11
0... 10 V or +/- 10 V (SPS / PLC) 1 2 3 4

12 V / 24 V
+In PIN 10
0V
-In PIN 9 Spannungsversorgung
GND PIN 11 Power Supply
5 6 7 8
Potentiometer
8V (10V) PIN 12 PE
PE
+In PIN 10
-In PIN 9
9 10 11 12
GND PIN 11
4... 20 mA (SPS / PLC) 0V

+In PIN 10 13 14 15 16
-In PIN 9
Schirm /
PIN 13 Screen
Analoger Sollwert
Analogue command signal Enable
228
Technical Data
Power supply [VDC] 10… 30 (incl. ripple)

Current consumption [mA] <60 + solenoid current
External fuse [A] 3 (fast)
Digital inputs [V] logic 0: < 2 V
[V] logic 1: > 10 V
Analogue inputs [V] -10… 10; 50 kOhm
[mA] 4… 20; 500 Ohm

Reference voltages [V]8; 10 mA max.
PWM outputs
max. load [A] 0,8, or 1,6 (per DIL switchable)
Frequency [Hz] 70… 120

Sample time (signal conditioning) Depending of the PWM frequency
Adjustments
MIN [%] 0… 60 (0 = preadjusted)
MAX [A] 0,7… 1,6

[A] 0,4… 0,8
RAMP [s] 0,05… 15 (0,05 = preadjusted)
PWM Frequency [Hz] 70… 130 (130 = preadjusted)

Housing Snap-On Module EN 50022
Polyamide PA 6.6
Combustibility class V0… V2 (UL94)
Protection class [IP] 20
Temperature range [°C] -20… 55
Humidity [%] <90 (not condensing)
Dimensions [mm]120 (d) x 100 (h) x 23 (w)
Connetions RS232: 3,5mm JISC-6560
4 x 4pol. screw terminals
PE: direct via DIN rail
EMC EN 50081-1
EN 50082-2
229
General IO description
Power supply
This module is designed for 10… 30 VDC (typical 12 V or 24 V) of a power supply. This power supply
must correspond to the actual EMC standards.
All inductivities at the same power supply (relays, valves …) must be provided with an over voltage pro-
tection (varistors, free-wheel diodes …).
It is recommended to use a regulated power supply (linear or switching mode) for the supply of the mod-
ule and the sensors. These power supplies have a clearly lower internal resistance in comparison with
non regulated power supplies and therefore a better spurious rejection.
Power supply : 10… 30 VDC, incl. ripple

Power consumption: 60 mA + solenoid current consumption
External protection: 3 A fast
ATTENTION: Without an external fuse and in case of a continual short-circuit the

module can be destroyed in spite of all internal protections.
Digital inputs
The digital inputs are designed for a voltage level of 12 V and 24 V. The typical connections to the PLC
will not be screened if the modules are arranged carefully and with short cable lengths. As common po-
tential 0V (PIN 4) is used.
All inputs are protected with suppressor diodes and RC-filters against transient overshoots.
Low level: <4V
High level: > 10 V
Current: < 0,1 mA
Analogue inputs
The analogue inputs are designed for a maximum voltage range of 10 V. The voltage input is typically
±10 V and the current input is 4… 20 mA with 12 mA for the center position of the directional valve.
The inputs are protected with suppressor diodes (level 33 V) and RC-filter against transient overshoots.
All analogue inputs must be screened.
Differential input:
Voltage level: bipolar ±10 V (PIN 9 / PIN 10)
unipolar 0… 10 V to PIN 9 / PIN 10
input resistance: 100 kΩ
Current level: unipolar 4… 20 mA (PIN 9 to PIN 10)

input resistance: app. 500Ω
Cable break down are monitored via the READY output and a flashing
green LED.
230
PWM outputs
The output current is controlled via closed loop PWM current controller with PI characteristics. For high
flexibility PWM frequency, dither frequency, dither amplitude and the PI compensator are free configur-
able. Cable break down and short cuts are monitored via the READY output and a flashing green READY
LED.
The outputs are protected with suppressor diodes (level 33 V) and RC-filter against transient overshoots.
PWM:
Output current: max. 1,6 A
Frequency: 70… 120 Hz
231
Start-up and commissioning guidelines
1. The module must be mounted and wired with attentions to EMC requirements. A star orientated
ground connection should be used when other power consumers are sharing the same power
supply. Following points have to be taken in account for wiring:
• Signal cable and power cable have to be wired separately.

• Analogue signal cables must be screened.
• Other cables should be screened in case of strong electrical disturbance (power relays,
frequency controlled power driver) and cable lengths > 3m. With high frequency EMI in-
expensive ferrite elements can be used. In this typical configuration of installation (see
point 2 to 4), no extra step should be taken in consideration.
2. By the arrangement of the electrical cabinet a separation between the power part (and power ca-
bles) and signal part must be taken in consideration. Experience shows us that the area next to
the PLC (24 V area) is suitable.
3. Low impedance between PE “protected earth” and DIN-Rail should be used. Transient interfer-
ence voltages at the terminals are discharged via DIN-Rail to the local PE. The screens have to
be connected directly next to the module via PE terminals.
4. The power supply should be carried out voltage regulated (i. e. PWM controlled). The low imped-
ance of controlled power supplies facilitates improved interference damping. Therefore the signal
resolution will be increased. Switched inductance (relays and solenoids) operating from the same
power supply has to be damped by surge protection elements directly by the inductance.
5. No plugs with freewheeling diodes, LEDs or other electronics should be used. The freewheeling
diode is integrated in the power stage of the module.
Caution: Using of electronic components in the plugs will destabilize the current
control loop. The power stage can be damaged.
232
Adjustments
Location of the potentiometer
Front:
P1 = MINA
P2 = MINB
P3 = MAXA
P4 = MAXB
Elements inside the module:
P5 = PWM frequency
P6 = RAMP
Input signal selection
DIL S1
S1.1 and S1.2 and S1.3

S1.3=OFF S1.2=OFF S1.1=OFF ±10 V input
S1.3=OFF S1.2=OFF S1.1=ON ±8 V input
S1.3=OFF S1.2=ON S1.1=OFF 0… 5… 10 V input (set in factory)
S1.3=OFF S1.2=ON S1.1=ON 0… 4… 8 V input
S1.3=ON S1.2=OFF S1.1=OFF 4… 12… 20 mA for ± 100%
S1.3=ON S1.2=OFF S1.1=ON ±4 V input (joystick)
S1.3=ON S1.2=ON S1.1=OFF ±5 V input (joystick)
S1.3=ON S1.2=ON S1.1=ON 4… 20 mA for 0… 100%
Solenoid current selection:

(both switches)
S2.1 = OFF, S2.2 = OFF (up to 0,8 A)

S2.1 = ON, S2.2 = ON (up to 1,6 A)
233
Start-up
Application with typical proportional valves.

Because of the type these valves have relatively great tolerances in comparison to the electronics. The
adjustment can vary from valve to valve.
MAX: Maximal current adjustment. The presetting is 0,8 A and/or 1,6 A if the DIL switch S2 is ON.
Preset an input signal of 100 % for the respective direction of the motion. By turning the
MAX-potentiometers anti-clockwise the output current is reducing and the drive becomes
slower. This can be carried out separately for the respective direction of the motion.
Caution: It is to be guaranteed that the maximum output current does not climb over the
rated current of the valve.
MIN: Zero- / deadband adjustment. The MIN-

adjustment should be carried out after MAX A
the MAX-adjustment. The presetting is
0 (fully anti-clockwise). According to
valve adjustments of approx. 15 % to
35 % of the rated current are neces-
sary.
MIN A
Preset a small input signal of approx.
3 % to 5 %. You increase the MIN value
(rotate clockwise) continuously until the
drive moves, from there you reduce the MIN B
value (anti-clockwise) until the drive

came to standstill again.
Caution: By changing of the MAX- MAX B
adjustment also the MIN-adjustment
changes.
RAMP: The ramp time is preset on approx. 50 ms (smallest value). It is prolonged by turning clock-
wise up to approx. 15 s. All ramp times are identical.
Caution Ramp times and simultaneously short cycle times (cycle time < ramp time) can re-
sult in a hardly understandable behaviour because all movements are carried out strongly.
PWM frequency: The PWM frequency is adjustable. Preset is 120 Hz (potentiometer fully clockwise).
With the adjustment of the frequency (rotate anti clockwise) the valve hysteresis can be re-
duced clearly.
Caution: A too high dither amplitude can lead to an increased attrition.
General behaviour:
Power ON: After the power on the input signal is checked (4… 20 mA) and the system is than activated.
When ENABLE is active (ENABLE directly connected with the supply voltage) the current is
activated by an internally defined ramp (smooth starting) in order to drive onto the demand
value with the pre-set ramp time.
ENABLE: With this switching-input the internal signal processing and the final stage are enabled. While
activating the input the valve current will be driven the pre-set ramp. During the deactivation
the current is disconnected immediately.
234
ANNEX X – HYDRAULIC BLOCKS

Order Customer Subject Qty Delivery Hydraulic Drwg. Assembly Drwg.
10-11498; 10-11499; 10-11500; 10-11501; 10-11502; 10-
350552 IBERCISA HYDRAULIC UNIT EXPANSION MODE SEA BULK TUG ESCORT 2 29/04/2011 ---
11503
Bill of Materials
Hydraulic
Item Code Denomination QTY Observations Make Drawings Documents
Drwg.
BLOCK 1:
COMMAND CLIPPER,
BMG-0037-00-EML, S
/ SCHEME
5802_101_00 (10-
11498)
1 PB 75241 BLOCK ACC. DRWG 1 HINE 7-5241.pdf
FITTING
VSTI1/2EDCF 2 PARKER
VSTI1/2EDCF
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
LEGRIS PLUG ALLEN
TL 496710 3 LEGRIS
1 1/4"
VSTI1/4EDCF PLUG VSTI1/4EDCF 1 PARKER
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
BLIND FLANGE SAE
AFC 404 3 MOD. A NUEVO ACCESORIOS
6000 11/4" AFC-404
OR 37,69 X 3,53 90
OR 2222SH90 4 MOD. A NUEVO ACCESORIOS
SHORE
BLIND FLANGE SAE
VO 301104 1 MOD. A NUEVO ACCESORIOS
3000 AFC-104 11/4"
THROTTLE VALVE
TYPE FG Q MAX=
2 FG 1 HAWE FG-FGS-D7275-Ing.pdf
0,15 L/MIN P MAX=
300 BAR
CONTINGENCIES
3 MEV16ASFFC180/180 1 AMCA MEV...A.pdf
MATERIAL
GMB
CHECK VALVE WITH
4 CBGGLJN 1 SUN Counterbalance valve CBGG.pdf
PILOT CKCB-XCN
236
Hydraulic
Drwg.
CARTRIDGE
PRESSURE RELIEF
5 565570 2 VICKERS RV3-16-Ing.PDF
VALVE 1" RV3 16 S 0
50
SHUTTLE VALVE
6 02-171239 1 VICKERS DSV2-8.PDF
DSV2 8 B 0
TEST COUPLING
7 EMA3/1/4EDCF 5 PARKER EMA-3 Screw Coupling.pdf
EMA3/1/4EDCF
TRANSDUCER MBS
3000: 060G4118
8 060G4118 (=060G1349); 0- 1 HR DANFOSS MBS 3000-Ing.pdf
250Bar; 4-20mA;
1/2"G MALE
BLOCK 2: SAFETY
RENDERING, BHE-G,
1068-00, S / SCHEME
5802_102_00 (10-
11499)
BLOCK ACC. DRWG
10 PB 75797 1 HINE
7-5797
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
BLIND FLANGE SAE
VO 301102 3000 AFC-102 1" 4 MOD. A NUEVO ACCESORIOS
WITH SEAL
OR 31,34 X 3,53 90
OR 2218SH90 4 MOD. A NUEVO ACCESORIOS
SHORE
CARTRIDGE VALVE
11 580022 1:2 - TN-16 CVI 16 1 VICKERS CVI-CVC-CVCS-Ing.pdf
D20 2 L 10
CARTRIDGE COVER
12 02-156797 TN-16 CVCS 16 N 1 VICKERS CVI-CVC-CVCS-Ing.pdf
B29 10
13 02-156328 CVI 16 D10 M 40 1 VICKERS CVI-CVC-CVCS-Ing.pdf
CVCS 16 C B29 W350
14 02-156898 1 VICKERS CVI-CVC-CVCS-Ing.pdf
11
CHICLÉ M6, DIAM.
15 MH 999999 1 ACCESORIOS
2,5 MM.
TEST COUPLING
EMA3/1/4EDCF
237
Hydraulic
Drwg.
CHECK VALVE
17 RHZ16SREDOMDCF 1 PARKER RHD-V-Z Valves.pdf
RHZ16SREDOMDCF
FM16SCF NUT FM16SCF 1 PARKER
BLOCK 3:
PROPORTIONAL
CONTROL CLUTCH
AND BRAKE, BHE-G-
1069-00, S / SCHEME
5802_103_00 (10-
11500)
BLOCK ACC. DRWG
20 PB 75798 1 HINE
7-5798
SCREW DIN 912 8.8
T88 570 8 ACCESORIOS
M5X70
SCREW DIN 912 M5
X 50
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
PRESSURE
REDUCING VALVE C-
21 870037 1 VICKERS DGMX(2)-3, DGMR(1)3-Ing.pdf
3 DGMX2 3 PP CW B
40
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE C-3
22 02-109025 1 VICKERS DG4V3-Ing.pdf
DG4V3S 2C M U H5
60
CONNECTOR WITH
A1T1112BR LED 10/50V PG11 2 OMAL CONECTORES 10.pdf
A1T1112BR
FLOW RESTRICTOR
23 02-138529 VALVE MODULE C-3 1 VICKERS DGMFN3-Ing.pdf
DGMFN 3 X B1W 41
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE C-3
DG4V3S 2A M U H5
60
CONNECTOR WITH
A1T1112BR
CARTRIDGE CHECK
25 565845 1 VICKERS CV3-10P.pdf
VALVE CV3 10 P 0 10
238
Hydraulic
Drwg.
CARTRIDGE 3/8"
26 566155 1 VICKERS
PRV2 10 S 0 35
CARTRIDGE
DIRECTIONAL
27 565658 1 VICKERS SV3-10-C-ING.pdf
CONTROL VALVE:
SV3-10-C-0- 24D-G
CONNECTOR WITH
A1T1112BR
PROPORTIONAL
PRESSURE RELIEF
28 02-145957 0,5 VICKERS K(A)CG-3.pdf
VALVE C-3 KCG 3
160D Z M U H1 10
PROPORTIONAL
PRESSURE RELIEF
02-145957 0,5 VICKERS K(A)CG-3.pdf
VALVE C-3 KCG 3
160D Z M U H1 10
CHICLÉ M6, DIAM.
29 MH 999999 1 ACCESORIOS
1,0 MM.
SCREW COUPLING
30 PI 586001 1 HYDROTECHNIK Minimess 1620 - 2103.01.17.00 ....pdf
1/8" 2103.01.17.00
TEST COUPLING
EMA3/1/4EDCF
32 02-326010 EHH AMP 702 D 20 1 VICKERS EHH-AMP-702-D_J_K.pdf
BLOCK No. 4:
SELECTION
PRESSURE
STEERING, S /
SCHEME
5802_104_00 (10-
11501)
PLATE 1C3 LATERAL
EXIT; P,T:1/2"G;
40 P0601038SLSV PAV 1 PLAYFLUID
A,B:3/8"G;
P0601038SLSV
SCREW DIN 912
M5X30
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
FITTING
VSTI1/2EDCF
239
Hydraulic
Drwg.
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE C-3
41 869860 1 VICKERS DG4V3-Ing.pdf
DG4V3 22A M U H7
60
CONNECTOR WITH
42 A1T1112BR LED 10/50V PG11 1 OMAL CONECTORES 10.pdf
A1T1112BR
BLOCK No. 5,
SELECTION
PRESSURE "Load
Sensing ", S /
SCHEME
5802_105_00 (10-
11502)
PLATE 1C3 LATERAL
EXIT; P,T:1/2"G;
50 P0601038SLSV PAV 1 PLAYFLUID
A,B:3/8"G;
P0601038SLSV
SCREW DIN 912 8.8
M5X70
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
FITTING
VSTI1/2EDCF
RELEIF VALVE C-3
51 870257 1 VICKERS DGMC(2)3-Ing.pdf
DGMC 3 BT CW 41
DIRECTIONAL
CONTROL VALVE C-3
DG4V3S 2A M U H5
60
CONNECTOR WITH
A1T1112BR
BLOCK 6:
PROPORTIONAL
CONTROL BLOCK
SAFETY
RENDERING, BHE-G-
1070-00; BY SCHEME
5802_106_00 (10-
11503)
60 PB 75799 BLOCK ACC. DRWG 1 HINE
240
Hydraulic
Drwg.
7-5798
SCREW DIN 912 M5
X 50
FITTING
VSTI3/8EDCF
RELEIF VALVE RV1 8
61 02-173229 1 VICKERS
S 0 3/
62 02-176528 SV13 10 C 0 24DGH 1 VICKERS SV13-10-Ing.PDF
CONNECTOR WITH
A1T1112BR
CARTRIDGE 3/8"
63 02-112831 1 VICKERS dps2-10.ing.doc
DPS2 10 F S O 160
PROPORTIONAL
PRESSURE RELIEF
64 02-145958 1 VICKERS
VALVE C-3 KCG 3
250D Z M U H1 10
65 02-326010 EHH AMP 702 D 20 1 VICKERS EHH-AMP-702-D_J_K.pdf
TEST COUPLING
EMA3/1/4EDCF
LOOSE MATERIAL
GEAR PUMP
70 2PB16/8,3DG28P1 2PB16/8,3D-G28P1 1 SALAMI
ROSCADA
BELL HOUSING RV BellhousingsSeries_RV_VDMA.
71 PT2500033 1 RAJA
250/110/446 CAMPANAS.pdf
HALF-COUPLING
72 SP240125 SPIDEX ALU 1 RAJA Elastic Coupling SPIDEX.pdf
A24/32.28H7
HALF-COUPLING
73 SP240153 1 RAJA Elastic Coupling SPIDEX.pdf
SPIDEX ALU A24.N2
CROWN SPIDEX ZK
74 SP240192 1 RAJA Elastic Coupling SPIDEX.pdf
24 SHORE A
CHECK VALVE
75 RHD18LOMDCF 1 PARKER RHD-V-Z Valves.pdf
RHD18LOMDCF
FM18LCF NUT FM18LCF 2 PARKER
CARTRIDGE 3/8" RV1
76 02-112895 1 VICKERS rv1-10.ing.doc
10 C 0 9
241
Hydraulic
Drwg.
ALUMINUM BODY
FATIGUE TEST FOR
876703 1 VICKERS
C-10-2, THREAD 3 / 8
"BSPP
242
BLOCK 1: COMMAND CLIPPER, BMG-0037-00-EML

244
THROTTLE VALVE TYPE FG Q MAX= 0,15 L/MIN P MAX= 300 BAR

Precision throttle type FG and FGS
for screw-in into control oil inlets or outlets of hydraulically actuated hydraulic units
Operating pressure pmax = 300 (400) bar
1. General
The precision throttle serves to delay the switching rate of pressure oil actuated valves:
' Response time setting of directional control valves
' Pulsations prevention
' Vibration dampening
The attenuation effect is achieved by means of thread with an adjustable screw length.
2. Available versions, main data

Coding examples:
FG 1 Throttle screw for screw-in into mounting hole (not available as type FGS)
FG 2 - S Version with thread type throttle and swivel housing
FGS H6 K Version with thread type throttle (locked against complete removal) and swivel housing
Sealing of the mounting hole
without = Standard, via sealing edge ring DKA 1/4
K = Seal KDS 14 A3C (only with FGS)
Table 1: Basic type and function
Version With lock against Standard

complete removal (suited for screw-in into mounting hole)
FGS 1) FG FG 1 FG 2
Codings, symbol and schematic
cross-sectional view
Bearing
needle
2x5.7
NRA
G 2-1-2
1) Only available as version

with swivel housing
(see table 2)
Throttling direction A → B and B → A B→A A→B

Function
Free flow direction None A→B B→A
Table 2: Version with housing

2.4
Banjo bolt Swivel housing List of ERMETO components not scope of delivery
FG
FG 1 - S #d Housing Tapered an Coupling nut
FG 2 cutting ring
FGS H6 XWH 6-SR-A3C

FG -S6 6 DPR 6-LS M 6-S-A3C
FG 1 -S6 Xswve 6-SR
FG 2 -S6
FGS H8 XWH 8-SM/SR-A3C
FG -S8 8 DPR 8-LS M 8-S-A3C
FG 1 -S8 Xswve 8-SR
FG 2 -S8
HAWE HYDRAULIK SE D 7275

STREITFELDSTR. 25 • 81673 MÜNCHEN Precision throttle type FG, FGS
© 1982 by HAWE Hydraulik May 2007-00

246
D 7275 page 2
3. Additional data
Design Thread type throttle
Installed position Any
Flow In throttled direction: Depending on the setting, refer to the |p-Q-a curves.
The flow rate values are dependent on the viscosity.
Pressure max. Type FG, FG 1 and FG 2 = 300 bar

Type FGS = 400 bar
Pressure fluid Hydraulic oil conforming DIN 51524 part 1 to 3; ISO VG 10 to 68 acc. to DIN 51519
Viskosity limits: min. approx. 4; max. approx. 1500 mm2/sec
opt. operation: approx. 10 ... 500 mm2/sec
Also suitable for biological degradable pressure fluids types HEPG (Polyalkylenglycol) and HEES
(Synth. Ester) at service temperatures up to approx. +70°C
Temperature Ambient: approx. -40 ... +80 C

Fluid: -25 ... +80°C, note the viscosity range
Permissible temperature during start: -40°C (observe start-viscosity!), as long as the service tem-
perature is at least 20 K (Kelvin) higher for the following operation. Biological degradable pressure
fluids: Observe manufacturer's specifications. Considering the compatibility with seal material not
over +70°C.
Mass (weigth) approx. Thread type throttle = approx. 15 g

Version with banjo bolt = approx. 40 g
Version with swivel housing = approx. 110 g
|p-Q curves Throttled flow direction Flow direction

( |p-Q-a ) A → B (FG 1...)
B → A (FG 2...)
Flow resistance |p (bar)

Back pressure |p (bar)
→ Q (cm3/min) → Q (cm3/min)
Oil viscosity during measurement 50 mm2/s

Viscosity influence: The flow will be reduced in a ratio of approx. 50/px, with setting
unchanged (px = viscosity).
It is therefore recommended to use a setting for a above 1, when viscosities below
400 to 500 mm2/s are anticipated in the later use (applications outside etc.). See
also description regarding amax in sect. 5.
247
D 7275 page 3
4. Dimensions All dimensions in mm, subject to change without notice!
4.1 Throttle screw for screw-in into mounting hole

Type FG, FG 1 and FG 2
SW = a/f
Location hole
4.2 Housing design (swivel housing)

Type FGS H 6(8)
FG - S 6(8)
FG 1 - S 6(8)
FG 2 - S 6(8)
SW = a/f
Sealing edge ring DKA 1/4

(standard, without coding)
Seal ring Thread seal

KDS 14 A3C made of PTFE
(only with FGS H..K !)
Location hole
with seal ring KDS 14 A3C
with sealing edge ring DKA 1/4
248
D 7275 page 4
5. Instructions for operation

Max. setting range 6 mm Red marking
Effective restriction SEAL lock nut

from 0 to 4 mm max. torque 8 Nm
Setting range a
The greatest throttling action is achieved at a = 0 (the throttle screw and lock nut are flush with one another).
The throttling action is terminated when the red ring mark appears (= end of the permissible setting range). Do not unscrew the
throttle screw any farther, since the number of supporting threads will decrease.
Type FGS: Locked via bearing needle 2x5.7 NRA G 2-1-2

Type FG, FG 1(2): The design of the screw does not allow the provision of a mechanical safeguard which would prevent the screw
from being unscrewed farther or removed. Hence, special reference must be made in the operation manual or
instructions for use to the red mark as the end of the permissible setting range.
If neccessary (e.g. for accident prevention), appropriate securing element (a) are to be attached to the manifold into which the
FG-screw is inserted, so as to prevent the screw from turning outwards any further.
This also applies to housing designs ...-S, ...-S 6(8).
Lock nut
Prior to setting the throttle screw, loosen the SEAL lock nut completely to remove the tension from the elastomer sealing ring
provided in the thread.
249
CONTINGENCIES MATERIAL

MEV PROPORTIONAL DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE
Electrical operation
Sizes 12, 16, 20, 25, 32 Series MEV...A
FEATURES
* Load independent flow control corresponds to the * Load independent switching adjustment, constant
spool-position proportional to the electrical input acceleration and deceleration.
signal.
* Proportional solenoids with longer life for the
* The pump pressure always corresponds to the user armature in the oil (explosion proof solenoids “II 2 EEx
pressure, +3,6,8 or 12 bar (43, 86, 114 or 172 psi) mII T4 or T5”, available).
∆p compensator.
* Proportional directional control valves also
* The built-in pump-unloading valve results in: available as:
- very low power turned into heat; - Manual proportional series MHV and
- minimum loading of the prime mover. - Hydraulic proportional series MOV.
Any combination of these control options is
* User speed is precisely controlled under all load possible.
conditions.
* The sub plate system allows a construction up to
* Progressive regulating curve; no pressure peaks 8 control valves.
when switching; sensitive control even for
alternating pressures.
* Constant working speed of differential cylinders at

the different regulating flow to the valve by grinding
angle.
* Constant recirculation pressure independent of the

number of units.
* Any limiting of flow for every user port.
Publ. MEV...A-E-06/07
251
TECHNICAL DATA
Operating pressure (P,A,B) ...350 bar (5000 psi)

Maximum return pressure (T):
- aluminium springcaps 15 bar (214 psi)
- cast iron springcaps 30 bar (428 psi)
∆p compensator 3; 6; 8 or 12 bar (43; 86; 114 or 172 psi)
Pressure setting range 5...350 bar (72...5000 psi)
Flow range ...800 l/min (...211 USgpm) - with 32 cSt at 40oC
Fluid Mineral oil according to DIN 51524/51525
Fluid temperature range -35...+80°C (-31°...+176°F)
Viscosity range 2,8...380 cSt, optimal 30 cSt
Contamination level max. according to NAS 1638 Class 9 or ISO 18/15
Nominal voltage 12 V, 24 V
Nominal current 12 V DC = 1.400 mA ; 24 V DC = 700 mA
Hysteresis 3...8% (50...800 l/min (13...211 USgpm))
Continuous operating 100%
Type of protection IP 65, optional IP67/II 2 EEx m II T4
Recommended dither frequency 100Hz
Mounting position optional
Size working ports: MEV12 : 1/2" BSP (SAE optional)

(in subplate) MEV16 : 3/4" BSP (SAE optional)
MEV20 : 1" BSP (SAE optional)
MEV25 : 1 1/4" BSP (SAE optional)
MEV32 : 1 1/2" BSP (SAE optional)
Max. flow in l/min. (USgpm) related to the ∆p in bar (psi) over the compensator, per nominal bore:
∆p compensator
3 (43) 1) 6 (86) 8 (114) 12 (172) 2)
Size
MEV12 50 (13) 80 (21) 90 (24) 100 (26)
1
) For the MEV only valid with
MEV16 100 (26) 140 (37) 155 (41) 180 (47)
external pilot supply
MEV20 160 (42) 225 (59) 250 (66) 300 (79) 2
) Due to loss of pressure
MEV25 250 (66) 350 (92) 390 (103) 500 (132) c.q. energy conversion into
MEV32 400 (106) 500 (132) 550 (145) 800 (211) heat, we recommend the
next largest size related
to a lower ∆p compensator.
Spool Spool
Symbols Operation Characteristic Symbols Operation Characteristic
types types
A a 0 b In neutral position F In neutral position
4/3 way all ports blocked 3) 4/2 way A B all ports blocked 3)
A B
P T P T
B A B In neutral position G A B In neutral position

4/3 way A-T 20% of nominal 4/2 way A+B-T 20% of nominal
bore 3) bore 3)
P T P T
C A B In neutral position K A B Port A out of function
X
4/3 way A+B-T 20% of nominal 3/3 way position 3)

bore 3)
P T P T
D A B In neutral position M A B Port A out of function,
X
4/3 way B-T 20% of nominal 3/2 way P-B 70% of nominal
bore 3) bore
P T P T
E A B P-B and A-T 70% A B Port B out of function,
X
4/2 way of nominal bore port T leakage flow 3)

O
3/2 way
P T P T
) recirculation at low
3
pressure only with

MUV
2
252
DESCRIPTION
Conventional directional control valves control start, stop and directions of movement from hydraulic motors
and cylinders. However, the speed of these users depends on the load pressure. If this load pressure varies,
the speed is hardly controllable (figure 1)
The AMCA proportional directional control valves are pressure compensated and achieve an ideal control of
force, speed, acceleration and deceleration, independent of the load and increased demands (figure 2)
100 100
si)
90 90
643 p
psi)
i)
ps
57
r (71 psi)
bar (2
00
80 80
(33
35
i )
ps
r(
ar
ba
00
5b
185
70 70
50
5
Load 5 ba
24
23
to
Load
ad
9
ad
,2
Lo
14
60
Lo
60
%
r(
ba
0
35
50 50
to
1
ad
Lo
40 40
30 30
Flow
Flow
20 20
10 10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Control range % Control range %

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
The pressure compensator could be a pressure relief valve (MUV) or a pressure reducing valve (MDM), together
with the throttling function of one or more directional control valve spools. This compensator acts as a by-pass
(3-way) flow control valve (with MUV) or as series (2-way) flow control valve (with MDM).
See figures 3 and 4.
A/B A/B
MUV MDM
one or more one or more

directional directional
control valves control valves
T
P P
Fig. 3 Fig. 4
Advantages of the AMCA Proportional Directional Control Valves:
The shape of the AMCA proportional directional control valve spool differs from the conventional one.
The result is a progressive flow curve (figure 5). To make optimal use of the maximum stroke of the spool the
flow angles of the A and/or B port can be defined for the different flows. For a constant flow, the pressuredrop
over the orifice of the spool remains constant, independent of the load pressure (figure 6).
100
90
80
70
60 350 (5000)
Pressure diff.constant
%
Pressure bar (psi)
50 280 (4000)
Pumppressure
40
210 (3000)
30
Flow
140 (2000)
20 Loadpressure
70 (1000)
10
Recirculation pressure 3,6,8 or 12 bar
(43, 86, 114 or 172 psi)
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0
Stroke % Time
Inputsignal %
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
3
253
OPERATION
Functioning of the by-pass (3-way) flow control to close (is balancing).

valve (with MUV) The pressure controls the pump-capacity to a
minimum. Again the power (p x qv) turned into heat
(this type is used in combination with fixed is very low.
displacement pumps) (fig. 7 and 8) The spring chamber is connected, via the “load-
pressure check back system” to T (tank).
The AMCA-MUV has three functions:
2. Load independent flow control
1. Energy saving (acting as a 2-way flow control valve)
If the directional control spools are in neutral position If one directional control spool is actuated (spool 2
(spool 1 in fig.7), and the pump is running, the in fig. 9) MDM-orifice throttles the flow and reduces
pressure relief valve 1 (MUV) opens at low pressure the pressure. This reduced pressure is connected to
(depending on the spring 3, 6, 8 or 12 bar (43, 86, B2.
114 or 172 psi)). The left part of the “load pressure check back system”
P and T are connected. The power (pxqv) turned into is closed by spool 2. The load pressure added to the
heat is very low. spring-equivalent pressure (3, 6, 8 or 12 bar (43, 86,
The spring chamber is connected, via the “load- 114 or 172 psi)) is in balance with the reduced
pressure check back system”, to T (tank). pressure.
(example fig. 21) Therefore the ∆p at flow angle 2 remains constant
(3, 6, 8 or 12 bar (42, 86, 114 or 172 psi)). As qv =
2. Load independent flow control k. ∆p, the flow remains constant at a given opening
(acting as a 3-way flow control valve) of port B2, independent of the load pressure.
If one directional control spool is actuated (spool 2 The output (flow) is proportional to the input signal
in fig. 7, where P is connected to B2), the load- (displacement of spool).
pressure is connected to the spring chamber of the There is no unnecessary pumpflow (pump capacity
MUV. The left part of the “load pressure check back is controlled by pressure).
system” is closed by spool 2. The load-pressure
added to the spring-equivalent pressure is in balance 3. Adjustable maximum load pressure
with the pressure at P. Therefore the ∆p over the The maximum load pressure can be restricted by
directional control valve remains constant (3, 6, 8 or the adjustable relief valve 2.
12 bar (43, 86, 114 or 172 psi)).
As qv = k. ∆p, the flow remains constant, at a given
opening of port B2, independent of the load-pressure. Functioning of the by-pass (3-way) flow control
The output (flow) is proportional to the input signal valve (with MUV/R)
(displacement of spool).
The unnecessary pumpflow returns to tank. (this type is used if there is a need to use the MUV
as a sequence valve)
3. Adjustable maximum load pressure (fig. 11 and 12)
The maximum load-pressure can be restricted by the The function is the same as described in clause 1
adjustable relief valve 2. (fig. 7). The return bore is blocked (as in fig. 9). There
is an additional possibility of directing the pumpflow
from P to R (fig. 12) to feed another circuit up to 350
Functioning of the series (2-way) flow control bar, or to control the adjusting mechanism on a
valve (with MDM) variable displacement pump (fig. 11).
(example fig. 24)
(this type is used in combination with variable
displacement/pressure compensated pumps Note: (1) If the systempump is of the load sensing type,
(example fig. 9 and 10) or accumulator circuits. no compensator is required. (example fig.25)
(2) For simultanious operation of the proportional
The AMCA-MDM has three functions: directional control valve, independent of
loadpressure, we advice a pressure
1. Energy saving compensator for each control valve.
For flows < 201 l/min. (53 USgpm) per control
If the directional control spools are in neutral position
section, the MFC stacked valves are a good
(spool 1 in fig. 9) and the pump is running, the
alternative in this case. (see Publ. F12/18K)
pressure reducing valve MDM (normally open) tends
4
254
OPERATION
Load-pressure check back system

Damping-screw
Spool 2 Spool 1
Adjustable relief valve 2
End plate Inlet plate
A2 A1 Spring chamber A1 B1 A2 B2
spool orifice
P
B2 B1
Pressure relief valve 1 (MUV) P T
Fig.7 By-pass control valve Fig. 8 With MUV

Damping-screw
Spool 2 Spool 1
A2 A1 A1 B1 A2 B2
Spring chamber
B2 B1
T1 P
MDM orifice
M
P T
0
Reducing valve (MDM)
Fig. 9 Series flow control valve Fig. 10 With MDM

Spool 2 Spool 1 Damping-screw
A2 A1 A1 B1 A2 B2
Spring chamber
spool orifice
B2 B1 P
T1 R
M
Pressure relief valve 1 (MUV/R) R P T

another circuit
Fig. 11 By-pass flow control valve Fig. 12 With MUV/R
5 255
OPERATION
Functioning of the proportional directional control valve with electrically controlled pilot stage. (MEV)
(Fig. 13, 14 and 15)
When solenoid a is actuated it pushes the pilot spool towards solenoid b and opens throttle position 1.
This allows pilot pressure to the springchamber 1 (speed controlled by the adjustable restriction 5) and also
through bore 3 to the end of the pilot spool opposite to solenoid a.
The balance force on the pilot spool is the force of the solenoid which is proportional to the electric input.
The balance force equates the pilot pressure in solenoid b and also in springchamber 1.
This pressure pushes the main spool against the spring in springchamber 2 and thus takes up a position
proportional to the electric input signal.
With the screws on the springchambers the maximum flow can be adjust by turning in the screw and block the
main spool in his stroke.
5 6
Throttle position 1 Throttle position 2
Solenoid b Solenoid a
3 4
Springchamber 1 Springchamber 2
T A P B T
Fig. 13 MEV
b a
A B
a b
P T
P T
A B
Fig. 14 (detailed) Fig. 15 (simplified)
6
256
DIAGRAMS
Flow P A/B Flow P A/B

with max. spoolangles with min. spoolangles
with 3, 6, 8 or 12 bar spring to max. spoolangles
(43, 86, 114 or 172 psi)
100 12 bar (172 psi) 100 max.
90 90
80 8 bar (114 psi) 80
70 6 bar (86 psi) 70
60 60
%
%
50 3 bar (43 psi) 50
40 40
min.
30 30
Flow
Flow
20 20
10 10
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Stroke % Stroke %
0 600 800 1000 1200 1300 0 600 800 1000 1200 1300
12V 12V
24V 24V
0 300 400 500 600 650 0 300 400 500 600 650
Inputsignal mA. Inputsignal mA.
Response time from neutral position

to maximum spool stroke.
Measured with external pilot supply
on the pilot stage = 100 bar (1430 psi)
at 32 cSt.
32
25
20
16
Size
12
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
msec
7 257
DIAGRAMS
Free recirculation pressure P T

MUV with 3, 6, 8 or 12 bar spring (43, 86, 114 or 172 psi).
MUV-12 MUV-16
2 psi)
12 bar (17 12 bar (172
psi)
12 (172) 12 (172)
bar (psi)
bar (psi)
9 (129) 9 (129)
psi)
8 bar (114 psi)
8 bar (114
psi)
6 (86) 6 bar (86
6 (86) 6 bar (8
6 psi)
3 (43) 3 bar (43 psi) 3 (43) 3 bar (43 psi)

∆p
∆p
0 0
0 50 100 150 200 0 50 100 150 200
(13.2) (26.4) (39.6) (52.8) (13.2) (26.4) (39.6) (52.8)
Flow l/min. (USgpm) Flow l/min. (USgpm)
MUV-25 72 p
si)
ar (1
12 b
MUV-20
12 (172) psi) 12 (172)
r (172
12 ba
14 psi)
bar (psi)
bar (psi)
9 (129) 8 bar (1
9 (129) 14 psi)
8 bar (1
6 (86) 6 bar (8
6 psi) 6 (86) 6 bar (8
6 psi)
3 (43) 3 bar (43 psi) 3 (43) )

3 bar (43 psi
∆p
∆p
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 0 200 400 600

(26.4) (52.8) (79.2) (105.6) (52.8) (105.6) (158.5)
24 (343)
MUV-32
21 (300) si)
72 p
ar (1
12 b
18 (257)
15 (214)
bar (psi)
12 (172)
psi)
9 (129) (114
8 bar
6 psi)
6 bar (8
6 (86)
3 (43)
∆p
3 bar (43 psi)
0 200 400 600 800

(52.8) (105.6) (158.5) (211.4)
Flow l/min. (USgpm)
8
258
DIAGRAMS
Pressure drop A/B T

20 (286) 20 (286)
MEV-12 MEV-16
A1-T A1-T
A6-T
15 (214) 15 (214)
A6-T
10 (143) 10 (143)
bar (psi)
bar (psi)
B6-T B6-T
B1-T
B1-T
5 (72) 5 (72)
∆p
∆p
0 0
0 50 80 100 0 100 140 180
(13.2) (21.1) (26.4) (26.4) (37) (47.6)

20 (286)
20 (286)
MEV-20 MEV-25
A1-T
A6-T
15 (214) 15 (214) A1-T
A6-T
10 (143) 10 (143)
bar (psi)
bar (psi)
B6-T
B6-T
B1-T
B1-T
5 (72) 5 (72)
∆p
∆p
0 0
0 160 225 300 0 250 350 500
(42.3) (59.4) (79.3) (66.1) (92.5) (132.1)

20 (286)
MEV-32
A1-T
15 (214) A6-T T B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6
10 (143)
bar (psi)
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
B6-T
B1-T
5 (72)
measured with C-spool and
max. spoolopening A/B T
∆p
Viscosity 32 cSt.
0 Including subplates and couplings.
0 400 500 800
(105.7) (132.1) (211.4)
Flow l/min. (USgpm)
9 259
CONFIGURATION
TYPE OF VALVE MOUNTING
The AMCA proportional directional control valves series MEV...A are sub-plate-, multiple sub-plate- and ganged
sub-plate valves. A complete AMCA-MEV..A system consists for example of three main parts (fig 16)
1. MUV or MDM : pressure relief (fig 17) or

pressure reducing valve (fig 18)).
2. MEV : 4/3 directional control valve with
electrically controlled pilot stage.
3. Ganged sub-plates : including inlet- and endplate 2
1 : MUV..A or MDM..A
2 : MEV..A (including pilot stage) 3
3 : A..UV or A..DM + A..EV + AP
Fig. 16
MUV..A MEV..A
b a
A B
a b
P T
A..UV A..EV AP
T P A B
Fig. 17 (detailed) Fig. 17a (simplified)
MDM..A MEV..A
b a
A B
a b
P T
A..DM A..EV AP
P T2 A B
Fig. 18 (detailed) Fig. 18a (simplified)
10
260
OPTIONS
The following options are possible (see fig 19,

application (example) and ordering code).
Port connections:
T2 : Low back pressure. X2 : External pilot supply (on the pilot stage).
- if a MUV-valve is mounted, T2 is normally - if, due to very light loads, the pump pressure
plugged in the subplate, or does not rise up to 12 bar (172 psi) during a
- if there are cylinders in the circuit with a large part of the cycle, the pilot stage shall be fed
returnflow, T2 shall be connected to tank for a by an external pilot supply source.
lower return pressure in the valve, or
- if a MDM-valve is mounted on the subplate, Y : Auxiliary port (on the directional control
T2 is the mainport to tank. subplate).
- if it is necessary that one or more users in a
T3 : External pilot drain (on the pilot stage). circuit operate at reduced pressure, a small
- is neccesary if the backpressure in the relief valve (size 4 mm (0.16 inch)) may be
returnline rises continually above 6 bar, for connected to port Y.
example a spring loaded check valve in the
returnline between T connection of the valve Z : Auxiliary port (on the directional control
and the tank connection, subplate).
- T3 is a pilotdrain and has to be drained to tank - if valves are combined (with the same or
seperately. different size), port Z is used, or
- for sensing the load pressure check back
X : Auxiliary port (on inlet subplate). signal, this port shall be connected to port X of
- the maximum pressure-level in the entire the next valve, which requires only a simple
system can be remotely controlled by the use inlet plate AN (see ordering code).
of a small relief valve (size 4 mm (0.16 inch))
connected to the auxiliary port X, or Options are standard with BSP thread, SAE thread
- the pressure in the entire system can be is optional
unloaded by the use of an electrically operated
2/2 valve connected to aux. port X (e.g. for
load security systems on mobile cranes), or
- in case of a load sensing system, the load
pressure check back signal on the X port can
be connected to the load sense port of the
variable displacement pump.
X2 T3
MUV..A MEV..A/T3/X2
b a
T1
A..UV/T2/X
A..EV/Y/Z AP../T1
T P X T2 Y A B Z
Fig. 19 (detailed) with options
11 261
VARIANTS/OPTIONS
The following variants/options are possible (see Options:

ordering code, page 26 and 28). Q : Normally, MUV spools have no connection
between the P bore and the spring chamber.
Compensator (MUV/MDM) variants: In certain cases, a small orifice (0,6 mm) to
Recirculation pressure: provide a “positive feed in” is desirable. As
V : Adjustment 6...12 bar (86...172 psi). The an example: for multi-section blocks.
spring in the spring chamber is adjustable P : Normally, MDM spools are mounted with a
between 6 and 12 bar (86 and 172 psi) for small orifice, to connect the reduced pressure
exact control of the max. flow on users A to the spring chamber for quick response. If
and B of the proportional directional control one or more MDM valves are connected to a
valve. (see page 26) load sensing pump, option P (plugged MDM-
spool) is recommended.
Max. pressure adjustments variants:
H : With handwheel (Ø 30mm, Ø 1.18inch) for
manual adjustment without using tools
E2 : Electrical remote control up to 350 bar (5000
psi)
W : Without pressure adjustment, no relief valve.
Control valve (MEV) variants:

Electrical control system: Options:
N : No proportional control, on/off ACS : Adjustable Centering Springs on the main
F : Proportional control spool, if the users A and B should have
exactly the same flow in combination with the
Spool types: same current on solenoids a and b.
A,B,C,D,E,F,G,K,M,O : See page 2 G : Cast iron spring caps. If the standard
aluminium caps are not suitable for the
Flow: environment conditions. (for instance sea-
.../... : Flow port A/port B in litres/minute, the choice water resistance)
has to be made in combination with the ∆p of JS : Additional connection for hydraulical control,
the compensator (MUV or MDM). For the with shuttle valves and restriction for external
maximum flow per ∆p compensator see page pilot control e.g., through pilot pressure
2. devices.
Note: the control valve is standard equiped M : Additional manual control, a second control
with stroke limitation screws in the spring possibility in addition to the electrical control.
caps, if the flow of a port is adjusted with this (manual override)
screw, the electrical input signal has a shorter MSW : As option M, suitable for special environment
bandwidth. conditions like seawater. (the springcap is also
in cast iron)
Solenoid types: N : Neutral spool position signal, through inductive
A : 12 VDC IP65 with emergency control by pin switch.
B : 24 VDC IP65 with emergency control by pin
(standard)
E : 12 VDC IP65 with emergency control by
button
F : 24 VDC IP65 with emergency control by
button
H : 24 VDC IP67 with explosion proof, II 2 G EEx
m II T4, IP 57, including connector and 5 metres
(16.4 ft) cable
J : 24 VDC Military, IP 67, without female
connector
12 262
APPLICATIONS
Many applications have been realized.

Some examples are described below.
1. Concrete pump Australia 21. Salt Spreader Switzerland

2. Swing Bridge Britain 22. Salt Spreader The Netherlands
3. Grader China 23. Skyworker The Netherlands
4. Fire Ladder France 24. Rubber Press The Netherlands
5. Arc Furnace France 25. Fire Brigade Skyworker The Netherlands
6. Road Bridge France 26. Steering Gear (for ships) The Netherlands
7. Container Handling France 27. Cargo Cranes The Netherlands
8. Road Roller France 28. Grain Elevator The Netherlands
9. Canal Lock France 29. Manipulator (Robot) The Netherlands
10. Injection Moulding Machine France 30. Cargo Doors The Netherlands
11. Telescope Cranes Germany 31. Ship cleaning Installations The Netherlands
12. Rocker Truck Germany 32. Probing Machines The Netherlands
13. Winches for Mobile Cranes Germany 33. Winches for Fishing Vessels The Netherlands
14. Injection Moulding Machine India 34. Diamond-, Exploration- and
15. Ladle Carriage Italy Rotary drilling equipment USA
16. Injection Moulding Machine Italy
17. Grinding Machine Italy
18. Deck Cranes Norway
19. Winches Norway
20. Waste Collection Switzerland
Fig. 20 Cone Penetration Testing Unit, The Netherlands
13
263
APPLICATIONS
Cylinder , bore 250 mm

stroke 1800 mm
60 bar 120 bar
COUNTERBALANCE VALVES
NON-RETURN VALVES
PILOT CONTROLLED
MUV..A MEV..A
b a
MUV-12-AS6S
A-12-UV
MEV-12-ASFFC-50
A-12-EV
AP-12-A
A..UV A..EV AP
T P A B
4 bar
M M
48l/min. 7l/min.
Fig. 21 Circuit diagram example
MEV..A MEV..A MEV..A MEV..A
b a b a b a b a
P
XL
A B A B A B A B
Fig. 22 Example for simultaneous operation (independant of load pressure) See note on page 4.
14
264
APPLICATIONS (EXAMPLE)
First control block Second control block

X2 T3
MEV..A/T3/X2
MUV..A MEV..A MEV..A
b a b a b a
T1
A..UV/X A..EV/Y A..EV/Z AP../T1 AN..A A..EV AP
T P X T2 Y A1 B1 A2 B2 Z T P X A B
Fig. 23
Parallel circuit with fixed displacement pump

Two valve blocks using only one pressure compensator (MUV).
By connecting port X (the load pressure signal) of the second control block (AN..A) to port Z of the first control
block (A..EV/Z), the MUV creates a load independent flow control for both valve-blocks (not for simultaneous
operation).
MUV..A MEV..A MUV..A MEV..A
b a b a
A..UV A..EV AP A..UV/R A..EV AP
T P A B R P T2 A B Fig. 24
Series circuit with fixed displacement pump

With the subplate A..UV/R there is an additional possibility of directing the pumpflow from P to R in order to feed
another circuit.
Note: - Connecting T2 of the subplate A..UV/R must always be connected to tank.
- Not for simultaneous operation.
MEV..A MEV..A
b a b a
T1
AN..A A..EV A..EV AP../T1
T P X A B A B
Fig. 25
M
MIN. ∆P LS-PUMP 6 bar (86 psi)
Load independent flow control by using load sensing pump. (No AMCA compensator: AN)
If the hydraulic system is equiped with a load sensing pump, the X port of the inlet plate AN..A has to be
connected with the load sensing signal-port of the LS-pump. A pressure compensator MUV or MDM is not
necessary in that case.
Note: If ordering the control valves (MEV) the ∆p of the pump has to be specified, so the spools can be grinded
for the ordered flow.
15 265
DIMENSIONS
Nominal bore 12 16 20 25 32
Connecting threads in BSP (SAE thraight thread 'O'ring BOSS) (Other thread on request)
A,B,P,T,T2 1/2" (8) 3/4" (12) 1" (16) 1 1/4" (20) 1 1/2" (24)
X 1/8" (4) 1/8" (4) 1/4" (6) 1/4" (6) 1/4" (6)
Y,Z 1/8" (4) 1/4" (6) 1/4" (6) 1/4" (6) 1/4" (6)
X2,T3 1/8" (4) 1/8" (4) 1/8" (4) 1/8" (4) 1/8" (4)
T1 3/8" (6) 3/8" (6) 1/2" (8) 3/4" (12) 1" (16)
Control spool stroke 2x8 2 x 10 2 x 12 2 x 14 2 x 16
in mm. (inch) (2 x 0.32) (2 x 0.39) (2 x 0.47) (2 x 3.15) (2 x 0.63)
Dimensions in mm. (inch)
a 60 (2.36) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 86 (3.39) 100 (3.94)
b 46 (1.81) 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68) 76 (2.99)
c 60 (2.36) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68) 76 (2.99) 90 (3.55)
d 46 (1.81) 70 (2.76) 86 (3.39) 100 (3.94) 120 (4.73)
e 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 86 (3.38) 100 (3.94)
f 40 (1.58) 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68) 76 (2.99)
g 40 (1.58) 40 (1.58) 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68)
h 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 86 (2.39)
j 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68) 76 (2.99) 90 (3.55)
k 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76) 86 (3.39) 100 (3.94) 120 (4.73)
l 246 (9.69) 296 (11.66) 338 (13.32) 376 (14.81) 425 (16.75)
m 38 (1.50) 48 (1.89) 54 (2.13) 58 (2.29) 66 (2.60)
n 110 (4.33) 140 (5.52) 170 (6.70) 200 (7.88) 235 (9.26)
p1 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 85 (3.35) 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)
r 36 (1.42) 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 75,5 (2.97)
s 74 (2.92) 94 (3.70) 115 (4.53) 135 (5.32) 159,5 (6.28)
t1 93 (3.66) 118 (4.65) 145 (5.71) 170 (6.70) 201,5 (7.94)
t2 17 (0.67) 22 (0.87) 25 (0.99) 30 (1.18) 33,5 (1.32)
u 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47) 14 (0.55) 16 (0.63) 17 (0.67)
v M6x8 M6x8 M8x10 M8x10 M8x10
w 188 (7.41) 204 (8.04) 229 (9.02) 256 (10.09) 284 (11.19)
x1 20 (0.79) 19 (0.75) 25 (0.99) 27 (1.06) 31 (1.22)
x2 33 (1.30) 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 65 (2.56) 75,5 (2.97)
y1 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 15 (0.59) 18,5 (0.73) 21 (0.83)
y2 8 (0.32) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43) 11 (0.43)
z 70 (2.76) 81 (3.19) 98 (3.86) 118 (4.65) 136 (5.36)
Dimensions option M in mm. (inch)

n 110 (4.33) 140 (5.52) 170 (6.70) 200 (7.88) 235 (9.26)
m1 45 (1.77) 58 (2.29) 70 (2.76) 80 (3.15) 88 (3.47)
m2 75 (2.96) 79 (3.11) 90 (3.55) 164 (6.46) 171 (6.74)
m3 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)
m4 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 30 (1.18) 25 (0.99) 23 (0.91)
m5 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø32 (Ø1.26) Ø32 (Ø1.26) Ø40 (Ø1.58) Ø40 (Ø1.58)
m6 Ø8 (Ø0.32) Ø10 (Ø0.39) Ø10 (Ø0.39) Ø12 (Ø0.47) Ø12 (Ø0.47)
mr 182,5 (7.19) 234 (9.22) 234 (9.22) 270 (10.64) 270 (10.64)
m 180 180 180 120 120
m 510 580 660 710 820
m 100 50 - - -
Weight in N (lbs)
MUV 26,48 (5.95) 41,19 (9.26) 78,45 (17.64) 125,53 (28.22) 205,94 (46.30)
MDM 26,48 (5.95) 41,19 (9.26) 78,45 (17.64) 125,53 (28.22) 205,94 (46.30)
A-UV 17,65 (3.97) 23,54 (5.29) 34,32 (7.72) 78,45 (17.64) 93,16 (20.94)
MEV 44,13 (9.92) 58,84 (13.23) 93,16 (20.94) 132,39 (29.76) 181,42 (40.78)
A-EV 17,65 (3.97) 23,54 (5.29) 34,32 (7.72) 78,45 (17.64) 88,26 (19.84)
AP 13,73 (3.09) 16,67 (3.75) 29,42 (6.61) 58,84 (13.23) 93,16 (20.94)
16
266
DIMENSIONS
187 (7.37) MUV MEV MEV AP

MDM
63,5 60 63,5 46
(2.50) (2.36) (2.50) (1.81)
(2.21)
56
w
k
d
z
10(0.39)
h
b
f
j Y v Z
30 m n m 30
(1.18) (1.18) 15 (0.59) y1 y1
l
e
u a e e g u
x1 x1 x1
0 0 0 T1 0
y2
t2 t2
T2 T2 t2 T2 Y Z
x2 x2 r
x2
X X X A2
p1 p1 p1 X2
P P
T3 s
19
B2
t1 t1 t1
P R T 5 5
MDM MEV MUV/R MEV
MUV MEV MEV AP

m
Option M
m m
m5
m
m6
r
m
m3 m1 n m2 m4
17
267
DIMENSIONS
Dimensions in milimeters (inches)
DIMENSIONS + LAY-OUT FOR SUBPLATES MUV; TO PRODUCE BY CUSTOMERS
MUV..A
0,01/100
MUV 12 16 20
X P T L
(0.0004/3.94)
+0,15 (+0.006) B 60 (2.36) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68)
(+0.004)
Ø7,8 (Ø0.31) D2 +d2 D1 Ø12 (Ø0.47) Ø16 (Ø0.63) Ø20 (Ø0.79)
1,9 (0.075)
(+0.004)
D2 Ø17,25 (Ø0.68) Ø21,9 (Ø0.86) Ø26,6 (Ø1.05)

1,2 (0.047)
Ø4 (Ø0.16) M D1
+0,1
d2 0,15 (0.006) 0,2 (0.008) 0,2 (0.008)
+0,1
0,8 (32)
0,8 (32)
0,8 (32) D3 Ø17,25 (Ø0.68) Ø21,9 (Ø0.86) Ø26,6 (Ø1.05)
M M6 M8 M10
M1
M2
M1 8 (0.32) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)

M2 12 (0.47) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67)
M3 44 (1.73) 38 (1.50) 50 (1.97)
X
PM1 15 (0.59) 24 (0.95) 31 (1.22)
=
PM2 15 (0.59) 24 (0.95) 31 (1.22)

P T
=
X
PX 37 (1.46) 51 (2.01) 63 (2.48)

PT 38 (1.50) 48 (1.89) 60 (2.36)
M3
B
L
D1 D1 PL 48 (1.89) 59 (2.32) 75 (2.96)
=
PL1 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)

=
PL2 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)

PL3 97 (3.82) 115 (4.53) 135 (5.32)
PM1 PM2 PL4 67 (2.64) 85 (3.35) 105 (4.14)
X 20 (0.79) 19 (0.75) 25 (0.99)
PX PT
PL
PL1 PL2
PL3 PL4
+0,15 (+0.006)
(+0.004)
Ø7,8 (Ø0.31) 0,01/100

1,9 (0.075)
+0,3 (+0.012)
(+0.004)
D2
MUV 25 32
1,2 (0.047)
(0.0004/3.94)
+0,1
Ø4 (Ø0.16)
M D1
B 76 (2.99) 90 (3.55)
+0,1
0,8 (32) 0,8 (32) D1 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø32 (Ø1.26)

D2 Ø31,25 (Ø1.23) Ø37,5 (Ø1.48)
M1
M2
M M8 M10
M1 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47)
M2 14 (0.55) 15 (0.59)
M3 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76)
PM1 40 (1.58) 46 (1.81)
X
=
PM2 15 (0.59) 19 (0.75)

=
X
P T
PX 76 (2.99) 84,5 (3.33)
M3
PT 70 (2.76) 84 (3.31)
B
L
PL 89 (3.51) 105,5 (4.16)
D1 D1
=
PL1 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)

=
PL2 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)

PL3 155 (6.11) 177,5 (6.99)
PM1 PM2 PL4 125 (4.93) 147,5 (5.81)
PX PT X 27 (1.06) 31 (1.22)
PL
PL1 PL2
PL3 PL4 ALL COORDINATES 0,25 (0.001)
18
268
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS + LAY-OUT FOR SUBPLATES MDM; TO PRODUCE BY CUSTOMERS
MDM..A
0,01/100 MDM 12 16 20
X PH PR L (0.0004/3.94)
+0,15 (+0.006) B 60 (2.36) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68)
Ø7,8 (Ø0.31)
(+0.004)
D2 +d2 D1 Ø12 (Ø0.47) Ø16 (Ø0.63) Ø20 (Ø0.79)
(+0.004)
1,9 (0.075)
D2 Ø17,25 (Ø0.68) Ø21,9 (Ø0.86) Ø26,6 (Ø1.05)
1,2 (0.047)
Ø4 (Ø0.16) M D1
d2 0,15 (0.006) 0,2 (0.008) 0,2 (0.008)
+0,1
+0,1
0,8 (32) 0,8 (32)

0,8 (32) D3 Ø17,25 (Ø0.68) Ø21,9 (Ø0.86) Ø26,6 (Ø1.05)
M M6 M8 M10
M1
M2
M1 8 (0.32) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)

M2 12 (0.47) 17 (0.67) 17 (0.67)
M3 44 (1.73) 38 (1.50) 50 (1.97)
X PM1 15 (0.59) 24 (0.95) 31 (1.22)
PM2 15 (0.59) 24 (0.95) 31 (1.22)
=
PR PH
PX 37 (1.46) 51 (2.01) 63 (2.48)
=
X
PT 38 (1.50) 48 (1.89) 60 (2.36)

M3
B
L
D1 D1 PL 48 (1.89) 59 (2.32) 75 (2.96)
=
PL1 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)

=
PL2 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 70 (2.76)

PL3 97 (3.82) 115 (4.53) 135 (5.32)
PM1 PM2 PL4 67 (2.64) 85 (3.35) 105 (4.14)
X 20 (0.79) 19 (0.75) 25 (0.99)
PX PT
PL
PL1 PL2
PL3 PL4
+0,15 (+0.006)
Ø7,8 (Ø0.31)
(+0.004)
0,01/100
(+0.004)
D2+0,3 (+0.012)
1,9 (0.075)
MDM 25 32
1,2 (0.047)
(0.0004/3.94)
Ø4 (Ø0.16)
+0,1
M D1
B 76 (2.99) 90 (3.55)
+0,1
0,8 (32) 0,8 (32) D1 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø32 (Ø1.26)

D2 Ø31,25 (Ø1.23) Ø37,5 (Ø1.48)
M1
M2
M M8 M10
M1 10 (0.39) 12 (0.47)
M2 14 (0.55) 15 (0.59)
M3 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76)
PM1 40 (1.58) 46 (1.81)
X
PM2 15 (0.59) 19 (0.75)
=
=
X
PR PH PX 76 (2.99) 84,5 (3.33)

M3
PT 70 (2.76) 84 (3.31)
B
L
PL 89 (3.51) 105,5 (4.16)
D1 D1
PL1 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)
=
=
PL2 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)

PL3 155 (6.11) 177,5 (6.99)
PM1 PM2 PL4 125 (4.93) 147,5 (5.81)
PX PT X 27 (1.06) 31 (1.22)
PL
PL1 PL2
19
269
DIMENSIONS
DIMENSIONS + LAY-OUT FOR SUBPLATES MEV; TO PRODUCE BY CUSTOMERS
MEV 12 16 20
(+0.004)
B 46 (1.81) 55 (2.17) 68 (2.68)
1,9 (0.075)
0,01/100
(+0.004)
D1 Ø12 (Ø0.47) Ø16 (Ø0.63) Ø20 (Ø0.79)
1,2 (0.047)
+0,1
(0.0004/3.94)
+d3 +d3 +0,15 (+0.006) D2 Ø11 (Ø0.43) Ø14 (Ø0.55) Ø17 (Ø0.67)
+0,1
D3 D3 Ø7,8 (Ø0,31) D3 Ø17,25 (Ø0.68) Ø21,9 (Ø0.86) Ø26,6 (Ø1.05)
M D4 D2 Ø4 (Ø0,16) d3 0,15 (0.006) 0,2 (0.008) 0,2 (0.008)
0,8 (32) 0,8 (32) 0,8 (32) D4 Ø12 (Ø0.47) Ø14 (Ø0.55) Ø18 (0.008)
M M6 M8 M10
M1
M2
M1 9 (0.35) 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)

M2 14 (0.55) 15 (0.59) 17 (0.67)
M3 33 (1.30) 40 (1.58) 50 (1.97)
X PA 19 (0.75) 24 (0.95) 30 (1.18)
T1 B P A T2
=
PB 19 (0.75) 24 (0.95) 30 (1.18)

=
Z X
M3
B
D1 D2 D4 D2 D1
PM1 26,6 (1.05) 30 (1.18) 43 (1.69)
=
=
Z PM2 26,6 (1.05) 30 (1.18) 43 (1.69)

PT1 38 (1.50) 48 (1.89) 60 (2.36)
PB PA PT2 38 (1.05) 48 (1.89) 60 (2.36)
PL1 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 85 (3.35)
PM1 PM2
PL2 55 (2.17) 70 (2.76) 85 (3.35)
PT1 PT2 PL3 123 (4.85) 148 (5.83) 169 (6.66)
PL4 123 (4.85) 148 (5.83) 169 (6.66)
PXZ
PXZ 49 (1.93) 64 (2.52) 77 (3.03)
PL1 PL2 X 9 (0.35) 10 (0.39) 15 (0.59)
Z 9 (0.35) 10 (0.39) 15 (0.59)
PL3 PL4
0,01/100
MEV 25 32
(+0.004)
1,9 (0.075)
(0.0004/3.94)
(+0.004)
B 76 (2.99) 90 (3.55)
1,2 (0.047)
D1 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø30 (Ø1.18)

+0,1
+d3 +d5 +0,15 (+0.006)

D3+d3 D2 Ø18 (Ø0.71) Ø23 (Ø0.91)
+0,1
D3 D5 Ø7,8 (Ø0,31)
D3 Ø31,25 (Ø1.23) Ø37,5 (Ø1.48)
D4 M D1 D2 Ø4 (Ø0,16)
d3 0,3 (0.01) 0,3 (0.01)
0,8 (32)
0,8 (32) 0,8 (32)
D4 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø32 (Ø1.26)
D5 Ø25 (Ø0.99) Ø29,7 (Ø1.17)
M1
M2
d5 0,2 (0.008) 0,3 (0.01)

M M8 M10
M1 12 (0.47) 12 (0.47)
M2 16 (0.63) 17 (0.67)
M3 60 (2.36) 70 (2.76)
X
PA 36 (1.42) 43 (1.69)
=
A
=
B
PB 36 (1.42) 43 (1.69)
PAB PAB
T1 P T2 PM1 24 (0.95) 28,5 (1.12)

M3
B
B A PM2 24 (0.95) 28,5 (1.12)

Z
D4 D1 D4 PM3 53 (2.09) 63 (2.48)

=
=
Z PM4 53 (2.09) 63 (2.48)

PT1 70 (2.76) 84 (3.31)
D2 PM1 PM2 D2 PT2 70 (2.76) 84 (3.31)
PL1 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)
PB PA
PL2 100 (3.94) 117,5 (4.63)
PM3 PM4 PL3 188 (7.41) 212,5 (8.37)
PL4 188 (7.41) 212,5 (8.37)
PT1 PT2
PXZ 91 (3.59) 108,5 (4.27)
PXZ
PAB 13,5 (0.53) 16 (0.63)
X 18,5 (0.73) 21 (0.83)
PL1 PL2 Z 18,5 (0.73) 21 (0.830)
20
270
MAINTENANCE DATA
Mounting procedure
- AMCA-valves shall not be mounted by Valve response time

overtightening of mounting bolts, causing
mechanical distortion and thus spool lock. (see The valve response time is adjustable from 0,24 -
tightening torques). 10 seconds. Adjustment screws are on the pilot stage
- Mounting on flat surface, flatness 0,01/100 mm below the solenoids.
(0.0004/3.9 inch).
- Don’t use conical thread for port-fittings. - Turn the adjustment screws clockwise to enlarge
- For sealing purposes, use O-rings. valve response time.
- At the port-connections at the sub-plates, the B- - Turn the adjustment screws anti-clockwise to
port shall be connected to the line with the largest shorten valve response time.
return-flow (e.g. piston-side of differential cylinder),
because in the valve the distance B-T is shorter Flow-adjustment
than A-T.
- Check the voltage and current of the solenoids, Factory-setting of flows, as ordered in ordering code.
before operation. If, after long life-cycle, re-adjustment should be
- Avoid ingression of contaminants during mounting. necessary, two possibilities are available, depending
on the configuration:
Start-up procedure 1. Stroke limiter (see fig. 33, (5) on page 22)
- Remove cover-screw of stroke limiter
- Start the system-flushing procedure with the - Loosen the lock-nut (width 13 mm (0.51 inch))
adjustment-screw of relief valve (see fig. 29-31, - Turn the stroke limiting screw (width 4 mm (0.16
(1) on page 22) fully released to achieve the inch)) clockwise to reduce flow and anti-clockwise
minimum pressure. to enlarge flow.
- Turning the adjustment-screw clockwise (360 turn
= ca. 100 bar (143 psi)), the maximum load-pressure 2. ∆p adjustment (see page 26)
rises up to the desired level. (max. 350 bar (5000 - Loosen the lock-nut (width 13 mm (0.51 inch))
psi)). During this adjustment the end-users (cylinder - Turn the adjustment screw (width 4 mm (0.16 inch))
and/or motor) should be blocked. clockwise to enlarge the preset spring-force, to
- Check the valve-function and the tightness of achieve more flow. (anti-clockwise to reduce flow)
fittings etc. - Tighten lock-nut.
- Use the stroke limiting screws to bleed the end-
caps, during system bleeding. Note: If the flow through A-port is sufficient and
the flow through B-port should be enlarged, adjust
first the B-flow by ∆p-adjustment and reduce after
Adjustment procedure that the A-flow by stroke limitation.
MDM/MUV Fluid maintenance
To avoid instability of the MDM- or MUV-spool, the Due to the construction, these AMCA-valves, are
damping-screw (see fig. 32, (2) on page 22) is factory- not highly susceptible to particulate (silt type) lock,
setted. Adjustment on location is possible as follows: nor to contaminant wear. Therefore the contaminant
sensitivity is very low.
- Remove the cover-screw (width 5 mm (0.2 inch))
- Adjust the damping with the damping-screw (width - Use mineral oil (recommended ISO/VG-32). Other
5 mm (0.2 inch)), turning clockwise or anti- fluids on request.
clockwise for more or less throttling. - Keep the contamination level better or equal NAS
1638 class 9 or ISO 18/15.
Note: Don’t throttle too much especially in the case
of MDM otherwise the load signal can be disturbed.
21
271
TROUBLE SHOOTING
Fig.29 MUV..A Fig.30 MUV..A Fig.31 MDM..A Fig.32 MUV..A

MDM..A
1 3 4 1 3 4 1 3A 4 2
A..UV A..UV/R A..DM A..UV

A..DM
P T T P R T P A..UV/R
A. System pressure too low or set pressure Fig.31 7

cannot be reached 6 6
1. Relief valve cartridge fouled
Dirt particles jammed between cone and seat of b a
relief valve (1) and prevent pressure being built MEV..A

up. 9
Turn adjustment anti-clock wise, switch a

directional valve several times. If necessary,
dismantle (a M4 bolt assists in removing the 5 5
springcup). If damaged, replace cone and seat. 8 P 8
Examine the system filter. T T

A..EV
A B
2. Damping throttle (2) blocked (dir t or
Fig. 33 Fig. 33
maladjustment). Fig. 32 Fig. 32
If necessary, remove, clean and replace. Fig. 29,30 and 31 Fig. 29,30 and 31
Adjust to 1 1/2 - 2 1/2 turns from fully closed

position. Find the right damping position. Turn the Also spool lock, when mounting faces are not
throttle only by unloaded pump. flat.
3. MUV-spool (3) or MDM-spool (3A) jammed open 4. Excessive damping

When removing lower end-cover (4) the spring See B2.
should push out of the spool. Remove and
examine the spool and bore for damage. Deburr 5. Excessive friction in other components of the
with care. Flush the spool to remove dirt. system
4. Faults in other components of the system C. User does not move or moves at slow speed
Damaged pump, motor, seals etc. 1. Damping throttle blocked or dirty
See A2.
Note: The set pressure can only be reached if a
cylinder is at the end of its stroke or a motor 2. Relief valve setting too low
is stalled. See A1.
B. User moves erratically 3. Directional spool does not shift

1. Air in system See B3.
Bleed both end-caps with stroke limiting screws
(5). 4. MUV or MDM-spool jammed open
Slacken bolts (6) fixing the solenoids to body and See A3.
retighten after repeated operation.
5. There is insufficient user load.
2. Pilot valve faulty
Fit a pressure gauge in place of the stroke limiting 6. Filter in returnline is contaminated.
screws to observe pilot pressure.
If persistent, swap pilot stage (7) to another
section to detect faulty unit. D. Pump does not unload
1. MUV-spool jammed (see A3)
3. Excessive friction of directional spool
Remove both end-caps (8) and examine spool 2. Directional spool not centring
(9) and bore from dirt or damage. Deburr with care. Excessive friction (see B3).
Examine system filter. Electrical fault. Check the electrical circuit.
22 272
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
MUV MEV MEV AP

MDM
Spring cap (alu.) Spring cap (cast iron)
with stroke limitation with stroke limitation
Spring (cartridge) :HR-0111-039 MEV-12 HR-2121-309 HR-2121-759
MEV-16 HR-2122-309 HR-2122-759
MEV-20 HR-2123-309 HR-2123-759
MEV-25 HR-2124-309 HR-2124-759
MEV-32 HR-2125-759
Centering spring
MEV-12 HR-2121-016
MEV-16 HR-2122-016
MEV-20 HR-2123-016
MEV-25 HR-2124-016
MEV-32 HR-2125-016
Spring (MUV/MDM):
∆P compensator
Size 3 bar(with X2) 6 bar 8 bar 12 bar
12 HR-0111-040 HR-2121-032 HB-0014-001 HR-2121-040
16 HR-0111-040 HR-2121-032 HB-0014-001 HR-2121-040
20 HR-0113-040 HR-2123-032 HB-0014-003 HR-2123-040
25 HR-0114-040 HR-2124-032 HB-0014-002 HR-2124-040
32 HR-0115-040 HR-2125-032 HB-0112-014 HR-2125-040
Relief valve insert

Size With standard seals With Viton seals
12 HR-0111-335 HR-0111-635
16 HR-0111-335 HR-0111-635
20 HR-0113-335 HR-0113-635
25 HR-0114-335 HR-0114-635
32 HR-0115-335 HR-0115-635
Pilot stage
HR-2121-264 : Pilot stage without solenoid
HR-2121-264V : Ditto with Viton seals
Solenoid (including BUNA-N seal)

WX-2170K001 : SOLENOID 24 V + MANUAL PIN
WX-2170K002 : SOLENOID 12 V + MANUAL PIN
WX-2170K011 : SOLENOID 24 V + MANUAL BUTTON
WX-2170K012 : SOLENOID 12 V + MANUAL BUTTON
WX-2270K051 : SOLENOID 24 V + EEx m II T4 (Explosion Proof)
WX-2270K041 : SOLENOID 24 V + IP67 and MIL.
WX-2170K101 : Female connector for MIL. solenoid
23 273
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS
Seals and assembly kits
R .. .. ..
R SPARE KIT 12 SIZE 12

16 SIZE 16
20 SIZE 20
25 SIZE 25
01 SEALS (BUNA-N 700 Shore) 32 SIZE 32
06 ASSEMBLY KIT:SEALS(BUNA-N 700 Shore),
SCREWS OR BUSHES
11 SEALS (VITON 700 Shore)
16 ASSEMBLY KIT:SEALS(VITON 700 Shore), 010 for MUV-..-A/ED 031 for MUV-..-A
SCREWS OR BUSHES 032 for MDM-..-A
011 for MUV-..-A + A-..-UV
21 SEALS (VITON 900 Shore)
26 ASSEMBLY KIT:SEALS(VITON 900 Shore), 012 for MDM-..-A + A-..-DM 033 for AN-..-A + A-..-UV
SCREWS OR BUSHES 013 for AN-..-A 035 for MEV-..-A..F.
015 for MEV-..-A..F. + A-..-EV 038 for MEV-..-A..N.
016 for MDM-5 040 for MDM-..-A/ED + A-..-DM
017 for AP-..-A 061 for MUV-..-A/V + A-..-UV
018 for MEV-..-A..N. + A-..-EV 062 for MDM-..-A/V + A-..-DM
020 for MDM-..-A/ED 071 for MUV-..-A/V
030 for MUV-..-A/ED + A-..-UV 072 for MDM-..-A/V
Maximum tightening torques MEV
PILOT STAGE
MUV/MDM-12 10 Nm (7.4 lb.ft) : 4xM6

MUV/MDM-16 25 Nm (18.5 lb.ft) : 4xM8
6 Nm (4.4 lb.ft) : 4xM5
MUV/MDM-20 50 Nm (37 lb.ft) : 4xM10
MUV/MDM-25 25 Nm (18.5 lb.ft) : 6xM8
MUV/MDM-32 50 Nm (37 lb.ft) : 6xM10
MUV-..-A MEV-..-A MEV-..-A

MDM-..-A
MEV-12 10 Nm (7.4 lb.ft) : 4xM6
MEV-16 25 Nm (18.5 lb.ft) : 4xM8
MEV-20 50 Nm (37 lb.ft) : 4xM10
MEV-25 25 Nm (18.5 lb.ft) : 6xM8
MEV-32 50 Nm (37 lb.ft) : 8xM10
AP-..-A
A-..-UV
A-..-DM A-..-EV A-..-EV
TIEROD SIZE 12: 40 Nm (29.6 lb.ft) : 3x 8

24
274
ORDER EXAMPLE
Example for Ordering
One electrically controlled directional control valve assembly, nominal bore 16, mounting type; sub-plate, consists
of:
1. MUV Pressure relief valve, ∆p compensator 6 bar (86 psi)
2. A..UV/X Inlet plate for ganged sub-plate and pressure relief valve with X connection for remote control
3. MEV 4/3 way controlvalve, spool type A, flow range 100 l/min (26 USgpm) (at ports A + B , with spring
return to neutral position and adjustable flow limiter
4. A..EV Sub-plate for 4/3 way valve, standard
5. MEV 4/3 way controlvalve, spool type A, flow range at port A = 50 l/min (13 USgpm) port B = 100 l/min
(26 USgpm) with spring return to neutral position and adjustable flow limiter
6. A..EV Sub-plate for 4/3 way control valve, standard
7. AP..A AP endplate, standard
(Ordering codes see page 26, 27, 28 and 29)
7 1
1: MUV 16 AS6S
6
2: A 16 UV/X
3: MEV 16 ASFFA 100/100 2
4
4: A 16 EV
5: MEV 16 ASFFA 50/100
6: A 16 EV
7: AP 16 A
25
275
ORDERING CODE
(For composing a valve block use a copy of the order form, page 30)
MUV OR MDM
Model Number M U V 16 A S 6 S / Viton
Compensator type
MUV = pressure relief valve
MDM = pressure reducing valve
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Mounting type
A = Sub-plate
Series
S = max. operating pressure
350 bar (5000 psi)
∆p Compensator
3 = 3 bar version (43 psi) *
6 = 6 bar version (86 psi)
8 = 8 bar version (114 psi)
12 = 12 bar version (172 psi) **
V = 6-12 bar (86-172 psi) adjustable, see picture below.
(to increase or decrease the flows of the control valves)
Maximum pressure adjustment

S = With screw (standard) Option V
H = With handwheel for manual adjustment ( ∆P Adjustment 6-12 bar)
E2 = Electrical remote control up to 350 bar (5000 psi) MAX.PRESSURE SETTING
W = Without pressure adjustment ∆P ADJUSTMENT
Options
P = Plugged MDM-spool (standard)
Q = Orifice in MDM-spool
Viton = With Viton seals 70 Shore
... = Factory setting of operating pressure: 350 bar (5000 psi)
Indicate here other desired operating pressure in bar.
P
* Only with external pilot pressure (X2) on MEV-section.
** Due to loss of pressure, c.q. energy conversion into heat,
we recommend the next largest series.
T
26
276
ORDERING CODE
INLETPLATE FOR GANGED SUB-PLATES
Model Number A 16 UV / T2
Series
A = Sub-plate
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Sub-plate
UV = for MUV
DM = for MDM
Options
R = allows serial connection with 2nd MUV (only for sub-plate UV)
SAE = S.A.E. straight thread O RING BOSS
T2 = 2nd tankport (only for sub-plate UV)
Viton = With Viton seals
X = Remote Control Connection
INLETPLATE FOR GANGED SUB-PLATES (WITHOUT MOUNTED MUV OR MDM)
Model Number AN 1 6 A / T 2
Series
AN = Inlet plate*
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Mounting type
A = Sub-plate
Options
SAE = S.A.E. straight thread ‘O’RING BOSS
T2 = 2nd tankport
* AN = Inlet plate for use with variable displacement pump (L.S. pump) or two valve systems in parallel use, with one MUV.
Standard with X-port in sub-plate
27
277
ORDERING CODE
CONTROL VALVE (MEV)
Model Number MEV 16 A S F F A 50/50 / T3 / X2 / A

Series
MEV = Directional control valve,
electrically controlled
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Mounting type
A = Sub-plate
Series
S = Max. operating pressure
350 bar (5000 psi)
Position lock
F = Spring return (spring ctr)
Control system
N = on/off
F = proportional
Spool type
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, K, M or O. See page 2
Maximum Flow (l/min)

.../... = choose the flow for port A and port B
(see for max. flows page 2 , choose the flow in
combination with the ∆p compensator)
In case of differing flow ranges for ports

A + B, the range for port A is given first,
followed by the range for B, eg. 50/100.
Options
ACS = Adjustable Centering Springs
G = Cast iron spring caps
JS = Additional connection for hydraulical control
M = Additional manual control
MSW = Additional manual control Seawater Resistant
N = Neutral spool position signal, through inductive switch
SAE = S.A.E. straight thread ‘O’RING BOSS (Option T3 and/or X2)
T3 = External pilot drain
X2 = External pilot pressure
Solenoid types
A = 12V DC IP65 with emergency control by pin
B = 24V DC IP65 with emergency control by pin (standard)
E = 12V DC IP65 with emergency control by button
F = 24V DC IP65 with emergency control by button
H = 24V DC IP57 EEx m II T4 (Explosion Proof)
J = 24V DC IP67 Military, without female connector
28
278
ORDERING CODE
GANGED SUB-PLATE
Model Number A 16 EV / Y
Series
A = Sub-plate
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Sub-plate
EV = for MEV
Options
Y = Remote Control Connection
Z = Remote Control Connection
END PLATE (AP)
Model Number AP 16 A / T1
Series
AP = End-plate
Size
12 = for size 12
16 = for size 16
20 = for size 20
25 = for size 25
32 = for size 32
Mounting type
A = Sub-plate
Options
T1 = With additional tank port.
29
279
ORDER FORM
Company :
Name :
Order No. :
Quantity :
(complete system)
Date : (stamp)
Size
MUV or MDM M AS
Spool type
INLET PLATE A Flow
INLET PLATE AN
A B
MEV AS F
1
A EV
MEV AS F
2
A EV
MEV AS F
3
A EV
MEV + MEV AS F
4
GANGED A EV
SUBPLATE MEV AS F
5
A EV
MEV AS F
6
A EV
MEV AS F
7
A EV
MEV AS F
8
A EV
END PLATE AP A
DO NOT WRITE ON THIS CHART - make a photocopy of this page and record
the valve ordering code on the copy (then the chart can be used more than once)
30
280
NOTES
31
281
AMCA Hydraulic Fluid Power B.V.
B.Kuiperweg 33, 9792 PJ TEN POST
P.O.BOX 18, 9790 AA TEN BOER
The Netherlands
Tel.: +31 (0) 50 - 3023577

Fax.: +31 (0) 50 - 3021226
e-mail: sales@amca-nl.com
homepage: http://www.amca-nl.com
Your local representative
282
CHECK VALVE WITH PILOT CKCB-XCN

Capacity:
4.5:1 pilot ratio, standard capacity counterbalance 60 gpm (240
valve L/min.)
Functional Group:
Model:
Products : Cartridges : Counterbalance : 3-Port Non-vented : Standard, 4.5:1
CBGG
Pilot Ratio
Product Description
Counterbalance valves with pilot assist are meant to control an overrunning
load. The check valve allows free flow from the directional valve (port 2) to
the load (port 1) while a direct-acting, pilot-assisted relief valve controls
flow from port 1 to port 2. Pilot assist at port 3 lowers the effective setting
of the relief valve at a rate determined by the pilot ratio.
Other names for this valve include motion control valve and over center
valve.
Technical Features
Counterbalance valves should be set at least 1.3 Sun counterbalance cartridges can be installed
times the maximum load induced pressure. directly into a cavity machined in an actuator
housing for added protection and improved
stiffness in the circuit.
Turn adjustment clockwise to decrease setting and Two check valve cracking pressures are available.
release load. Use the 25 psi (1,7 bar) check unless actuator
cavitation is a concern.
Full clockwise setting is less than 200 psi (14 bar). This valve has positive seals between all ports.
Backpressure at port 2 adds to the effective relief All 3-port counterbalance, load control, and pilot-
284
setting at a ratio of 1 plus the pilot ratio times the to-open check cartridges are physically
backpressure. interchangeable (i.e. same flow path, same cavity
for a given frame size).
Reseat exceeds 85% of set pressure when the Incorporates the Sun floating style construction to
valve is standard set. Settings lower than the minimize the possibility of internal parts binding
standard set pressure may result in lower reseat due to excessive installation torque and/or
percentages. cavity/cartridge machining variations.
Technical Data
U.S. Units Metric Units
Cavity T-17A
Capacity 60 gpm 240 L/min.
Pilot Ratio 4.5:1
Maximum Recommended Load Pressure at Maximum Setting 3850 psi 270 bar
Maximum Setting 5000 psi 350 bar
Adjustment - Number of Counterclockwise Turns to Increase
3.75
Setting
Factory Pressure Settings Established at 2 in³/min. 30 cc/min.
Maximum Valve Leakage at Reseat 5 drops/min. 0,4 cc/min.
Series (from Cavity) Series 3
Reseat >85% of Set Pressure
Valve Hex Size 1 1/4 in. 31,8 mm
Valve Installation Torque 150 - 160 lbf ft 200 - 215 Nm
Adjustment Screw Internal Hex Size 5/32 in. 4 mm
Adjustment Nut Hex Size 9/16 in. 15 mm
Adjustment Nut Torque 108 lbf in. 12 Nm
Model Weight 1.34 lb. 0.61 kg.
Seal Kits - Cartridge Buna: 990-017-007
Seal Kits - Cartridge Viton: 990-017-006
CBGG-LJN
Control Functional Setting Range

External Material/Seal
285
Material
Preferred Options
L Standard Screw Adjustment 2000 - 5000 psi w/25 psi N Buna-N

Check (140 - 350 bar w/1,7
J
bar Check), 3000 psi (210
bar) Standard Setting
Standard Options
Tamper Resistant - Factory 2000 - 5000 psi w/4 psi P Stainless/Buna-N

C*
Set Check (140 - 350 bar w/0,3
C V Viton
bar) Standard Setting W Stainless/Viton
1000 - 2500 psi w/4 psi
Check (70 - 175 bar w/0,3
D
1000 - 2500 psi w/25 psi
Check (70 - 175 bar w/1,7
K
Additional Options( Click Here)

External Material/Seal
Control Functional Setting Range
Material
R* Lockwired Screw Adjustment
If the material/seal is P, the control must be L or C

If the material/seal is W, the control must be L or C
* Special Setting required, specify at time of order

Customer specified setting stamped on hex $1.10
Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - US units.

Explanation of Sun cartridge control options - metric units.
| | | | | |
Copyright © 2008-2009 Sun Hydraulics Corporation. All rights reserved.
Terms and Conditions - ISO Certification - Statement of Privacy
286
CARTRIDGE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE 1" RV3 16 S 0 50

RV3-16
Relief valve
Functional Symbol Description

The RV3-16 is a direct acting, differential area, poppet type, screw-in cartridge
relief valve.
2 1
Operation
This valve remains closed from port 2 to port 1 until the predetermined setting has
been reached at port 2. The poppet is unseated and allows flow out of port 1.
Ratings and specifications

Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cSt (105 SUS) and 49_C (120_F)
Typical application pressure (all ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 bar (5000 psi)
Sectional View Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 bar (5000 psi)
Rated flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 - 303 l/min (8 - 80 USgpm)
Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-16–2 (See page 72)
Standard housing materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum or steel
Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 to 120_C (-40_ to 248_F)
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
MIL–H–5606, SAE 10, SAE 20, etc.
Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanliness code 18/16/13
Weight cartridge only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,71 kg. (1.57 lbs.)
Seal kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565810 Buna–N
889609 Viton®
1
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I.DuPont
Pressure Override Curves Flow in l/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49_C)

Cartridge only 50 100 150 200 250
6000 415
5000 350
A
4000
Inlet pressure psi
280
Inlet pressure bar
3000 210
B
2000 140
1000 70
0 0
A – 50 spring 0 20 40 60 80
B – 35 spring Flow in USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120_F)
22
288
Model Code RV3-16
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 Function 6 Port size

RV3 – Relief valve O – Cartridge only
Code Port size Housing number
2 Size Aluminum Aluminum Steel
Light duty Fatigue rated Fatigue rated
16 – 16 Size
6B 3/4” BSPP 02–175463
4G 1/2” BSPP 876716 02–175106
3 Seals 6G 3/4” BSPP 876718 02–175107
10H SAE 10 876717
Blank – Buna–N
V– Viton 12H SAE 12 566113
10T SAE 10 02–175104
12T SAE 12 566149 02–175105
4 Adjustment See pages 75 and 78 for housings
K– Knob 7 Cracking pressure range 8 Factory set reduced pressure
S– Screw
13 – 3,5 - 90 bar (50 - 1300 psi) Within ranges in 7
35 – 14 - 240 bar (200 - 3500 psi) Blank – Normal factory setting at
5 Valve housing material 50 – 20 - 350 bar (300 - 5000 psi) approximate mid–range.
User requested settings in 3,45 bar
Blank – Aluminum Aluminum housings can
be used for pressures up (50 psi) steps, coded as in the
S – Steel following examples:
to 210 bar (3000 psi)
Steel housings must be used for operating 10 – 70 bar (1000 psi)
pressures above 210 bar (3000 psi) 10.5 – 72,4 bar (1050 psi)
Dimensions Torque cartridge in housing

A – 108–122 Nm (80–90 lbf ft)
mm (inch)
S – 136–149 Nm (100–110 lbf ft)
“S” Adjustment “K” Adjustment

9,5 (0.37) hex
19.1 (0.75) hex

104,0
(4.09)
38,1 (1.5) hex
1.312I-12 Thd.
1
∅ 28,55 (1.124)
23
289
SHUTTLE VALVE DSV2 8 B 0

DSV2-8
Shuttle valve

The DSV2-8-B is a direct acting, ball type, shuttle valve.
1 3
Operation
The DSV2-8-B shuttle valve senses the higher of two pressures at port 3 or port 1
2 and directs it to port 2.

Typical application pressure (all ports) . . . . . . . . . . 240 bar (3500 psi) steel housing
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 bar (3500 psi)
Rated flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 l/min (6 USgpm)
Internal leakage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Between ports 2 and 1, and 2 and 3;

Sectional View 5 drops/min. maximum @ 240 bar (3500 psi)
Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8-3 (See page 59)


3
Seal Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 02-160755 (Buna–N)

2 02-160756 (VitonR)
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont
Pressure Drop Curves

Flow in l/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49_C)
Cartridge only 0 8 16 22
300 20
250
16
Pressure Drop bar
Pressure Drop psi
200
12
150
A
8
100
B
50 4
0 0
A – Port 1 to port 2 0 2 4 6
B – Port 3 to port 2 Flow in USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120_C)
20
291
Model Code DSV2-8
1 2 3 4 5 6

DSV2 – Shuttle valve O – Cartridge only
2 Size Code Port size Housing number
8 – 8 size Aluminum Steel
Fatigue rated
3 Seals 4T SAE 4 02–160741 02–160745
Blank–Buna-N 6T SAE 6 02–160742 02–160744
V – Viton 2G 1/4” BSPP 02–160739 02–160743
4 3G 3/8” BSPP 02–160740 02–160746
Style
See pages 62 and 64 for housings
B – Ball
5 Valve housing material Aluminum housings can

Omit for cartridge only be used for pressures up
A – Aluminum to 210 bar (3000 psi)
S – Steel Steel housings must be used for
operating pressures above 210 bar
(3000 psi)
Torque cartridge in housing

Dimensions mm (inch) 34–41 Nm (25–30 lbf ft))
22,2 (.875) Hex

8,6 (0.34)
0.750I–16 Thd.
40,6 3
(1.60)
1
∅ 14,2 (0.559)
∅ 15,8 (0.622)
21
292
TEST COUPLING EMA3/1/4EDCF

Ermeto Original
SensoControl
Diagnostic
Equipment/
EO Test Points
294
Test Points/Diagnostic
EMA 1/EMA 3-Test Point

fitting
– For pressure monitoring and checking on high, low nad Differences between EMA 1 and EMA 3 types
negative pressure systems. a) sealing system (see previous section)
– For bleeding cylinders and hydraulic systems. b) Test hose connection by plug-in coupling in EMA 1
– For taking samples. Test hose connection by threaded connection in EMA 3
c) Working pressures
Advantages:
Coupling at system pressure level Working pressure
Leakproof connection before ball valve is open – EMA 3 types up to 630 bar
Simple connection to measuring, control and switching – EMA 1 types up to 400 bar
devices Max. working pressure 630 bar for GMA, VKA and
Self locking metal guard cap EMA… the recommended working pressure of fitting
manufacturer has to be applied
Sealing system of the primary seal: Joining under pressure up to 400 bar max.
EMA 1 by ball non-return valve.
EMA 3 by cone seal with O-ring.
The new EMA 3 sealing system garanties minimum leak- Materials and Temperatures:
age rates even for pneumatic and gas applications (see Metal parts: Steel, Stainless Steel on request
application). Ball: Stainless Steel
Seals:
The screw-on Cap (EMA 3), and pin lock (EMA 1) types NBR (Temperature range –20 to +100°C)
both employ an O-ring seal as secondary sealing with the FPM (Temperature range –20 to +200°C)
hose attached. EPDM Ethylene Propylene (for Break Fluid)
(Temperature range –40 to +150°C)
Hose:
Polyamide (Temperature range:
H
–35°C … 100°C max.)
EMA 1
Seals:
– Steel Types NBR (Perbunan)
– Stainless Steel FPM (Viton) only
Media:
Suitable for hydraulic oils and other mineral oil based
fluids (Please pay attention to the sealing materials
used!)
For use in conjunction with other liquid media please
consult Parker
Approvals
EMA 3 DVGW for EMA3/8X1OR, EMA3/10X1OR, EMA3 1/8NPT,
EMA 3 1/4 NPT
H3 Catalogue 4100-2/UK
295
EMA 3 Test Point with threaded connection M 16×2

Male thread: BSP, metric
Sealing: O-ring, fig. A/Eolastic sealing, fig. B and C, cutting face, fig. D and E
Fig. A M16×2 Fig. B M16×2 Fig. C M16×2
Parker E O EMA3
Parker EO EMA3 Parker E O EMA3
H
H
H
SW17
S1
S1 S1
L
Eolastic sealing Eolastic sealing
I
I
I
O-ring
G G G
D3 D3 D3
0,5 + 0,15
2,5 + 0,2
+0,05
d3 30°
G
min.
9
13
Fig. F M16×2 Fig. D M16×2 Fig. E M16×2
Parker E O EMA3
Parker E O EMA3
Parker E O EMA3
H
H
H
SW17
S1 S1 S1
L
Cutting face
O-ring
I
Cutting face
I
G G G I
Iso 6149 D3 D3 D3
PN Pmax G S1 I L H D3 Form Part no. Part no.

(bar) (bar) Steel stainless steel
630 700 M8×1 17 8.5 46 9.5 A EMA3/8×1OR
630 700 M10×1 17 9.8 47 11.5 A EMA3/10×1OR EMA3/M10OR71
630 700 M14×1.5 19 11.0 49 18.8 F EMA3/14×1.5ISO EMA3/M14ISO71
400 630 M10×1 17 8.0 45 14.0 D EMA3/10×1
400 630 M12×1.5 17 12.0 49 17.0 D EMA3/12×1.5
400 630 M14×1.5 19 12.0 49 19.0 D EMA3/14×1.5
400 630 M16×1.5 22 12.0 49 21.0 D EMA3/16×1.5
400 630 G1/8 17 8.0 45 14.0 D EMA3/1/8
400 630 G1/4 19 12.0 49 18.0 D EMA3/1/4
400 630 G3/8 22 12.0 49 22.0 E EMA3/3/8
400 630 G1/2 27 14.0 24.5 49 26.0 E EMA3/1/2
630 700 G1/8 17 8.0 45 14.0 B EMA3/1/8ED EMA3/1/8ED71
630 700 G1/4 19 12.0 49 19.0 B EMA3/1/4ED EMA3/1/4ED71
630 700 G3/8 22 12.0 49 22.0 B EMA3/3/8ED EMA3/3/8ED71
630 700 M10×1 17 10.0 47 14.0 B EMA3/10×1ED EMA3/M10ED71
630 700 M12×1.5 17 12.0 49 17.0 B EMA3/12×1.5ED EMA3/M12ED71
400 630 M14×1.5 19 12.0 49 19.0 B EMA3/14×1.5ED EMA3/M14ED71
O-Ring of material NBR (steel); FPM (stainless steel)
296
TRANSDUCER MBS 3000: 060G4118 (=060G1349); 0-250Bar; 4-20mA; 1/2"G
MALE

Pressure transmitter for industrial applications
Type MBS 3000
Technical brochure
298
Technical brochure Pressure transmitter for industrial applications type MBS 3000
Features • Designed for use in severe industrial

environments
• Enslosure and wetted parts of acid-resistant
stainless steel (AISI 316L)
• Pressure ranges in relative (gauge) or absolute
from 0 up to 600 bar
• All standard output signals: 4 - 20 mA, 0 - 5 V,
1 - 5 V, 1 - 6 V, 0 - 10 V, 1 - 10 V
• A wide range of pressure and electrical
connections
• Temperature compensated and laser calibrated
Description The compact pressure transmitter MBS 3000 is gauge (relative) versions, measuring ranges from
designed for use in almost all industrial 0-1 to 0-600 bar and a wide range of pressure and
applications, and offers a reliable pressure electrical connections.
measurement, even under harsh environmental
conditions. Excellent vibration stability, robust construction,
and a high degree of EMC/EMI protection equip
The flexible pressure transmitter programme the pressure transmitter to meet the most
covers different output signals, absolute and stringent industrial requirements.
Ordering Measuring range

Type Code no.
standard versions Pe1) [bar]
Plug: Pg 9 (EN 175301-803-A) 0-1 MBS 3000 - 1011 - 1 AB04 060G1113

Output signal: 4-20 mA 0 - 1.6 MBS 3000 - 1211 - 1 AB04 060G1429
Pressure connection: 0 - 2.5 MBS 3000 - 1411 - 1 AB04 060G1122
G ¼ A (EN 837) 0-4 MBS 3000 - 1611 - 1 AB04 060G1123
0-6 MBS 3000 - 1811 - 1 AB04 060G1124
0 - 10 MBS 3000 - 2011 - 1 AB04 060G1125
0 - 16 MBS 3000 - 2211 - 1 AB04 060G1133
0 - 25 MBS 3000 - 2411 - 1 AB04 060G1430
0 - 40 MBS 3000 - 2611 - 1 AB04 060G1105
0 - 60 MBS 3000 - 2811 - 1 AB04 060G1106
0 - 100 MBS 3000 - 3011 - 1 AB04 060G1107
0 - 160 MBS 3000 - 3211 - 1 AB04 060G1112
0 - 250 MBS 3000 - 3411 - 1 AB04 060G1111
0 - 400 MBS 3000 - 3611 - 1 AB04 060G1109
0 - 600 MBS 3000 - 3811 - 1 AB04 060G1110
1)
Relative/ gauge
2 IC.PD.P20.A3.02 - 520B2575
299
Technical data Performance (EN 60770)

±0.5% FS (typ.)
Accuracy (incl. non-linearity, hysteresis and repeatability)
±1% FS (max.)
Non-linearity BFSL (conformity) ≤ ±0.2% FS
Hysteresis and repeatability ≤ ±0.1% FS
≤ ±0.1% FS/10K (typ.)
Thermal zero point shift
≤ ±0.2% FS/10K (max.)
≤ ±0.1% FS/10K (typ.)
Thermal sensitivity (span) shift
≤ ±0.2% FS/10K (max.)
Response time < 4 ms
Overload pressure (static) 6 × FS (max. 1500 bar)
Burst pressure > 6 × FS (max. 2000 bar)
Durability, P: 10-90% FS >10×106 cycles
Electrical specifications
Nom. output signal (short-circuit protected)
4 − 20 mA 0 - 5, 1 - 5, 1 - 6 V 0 - 10 V , 1 - 10 V
Supply voltage [UB], polarity protected 9 → 32 V 9 → 30 V 15 → 30 V
Supply - current consumption – ≤ 5 mA ≤ 8 mA
Supply voltage dependency ≤ ±0.05% FS/10 V
Current limitation 28 mA (typ.) –
Output impedance – ≤ 25Ω
Load [RL] (load connected to 0V) RL ≤ (UB-9V)/0.02 A RL ≥ 10 kΩ RL ≥ 15 kΩ
Environmental conditions
Media temperature range −40 → +85°C
Ambient temperature range (depending on electrical connection) see page 5
Compensated temperature range 0 → +80°C
Transport temperature range −50 → +85°C
EMC - Emission EN 61000-6-3
EMC Immunity EN 61000-6-2
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 100 V
Mains frequency test SEN 361503
15.9 mm-pp, 5 Hz-25 Hz
Vibration stability Sinusoidal IEC 60068-2-6
20 g, 25 Hz - 2 kHz
Random 7.5 grms,5 Hz - 1 kHz IEC 60068-2-64
Shock 500 g / 1 ms IEC 60068 - 2 - 27
Shock resistance
Free fall IEC 60068 - 2 - 32
Enclosure (depending on electrical connection) see page 5
Mechanical characteristics
Wetted parts EN 10088-1; 1.4404 (AISI 316 L)
Materials Enclosure EN 10088-1; 1.4404 (AISI 316 L)
Electrical connections see page 5
Weight (depending on pressure connection and electrical connection) 0.2 - 0.3 kg
IC.PD.P20.A3.02 - 520B2575 3
300
Ordering of special versions

MBS 3000 - -
Measuring range Pressure connection

0 - 1 bar......................... 1 0 A B 0 4 .......... G ¼ A (EN 837)
0 - 1.6 bar...................... 1 2 A B 0 6 .......... G 3/8 A (EN 837)
0 - 2.5 bar...................... 1 4 A B 0 8 .......... G ½ A (EN 837)
0 - 4 bar......................... 1 6 A C 0 4 .......... ¼ -18 NPT
0 - 6 bar......................... 1 8 A C 0 8 .......... ½ -14 NPT
0 - 10 bar....................... 2 0 G B 0 4 .......... DIN 3852-E-G ¼
0 - 16 bar....................... 2 2 Gasket: DIN 3869-14 NBR
0 - 25 bar....................... 2 4
Preferred versions 0 - 40 bar....................... 2 6 Electrical connection
0 - 60 bar....................... 2 8
Figures refer to plug and standard PIN
0 - 100 bar.................... 3 0
configuration - see page 5
Non-standard build-up combina- 0 - 160 bar.................... 3 2 1 . ..............................................
Plug Pg 9 (EN 175301-803-A)
tions may be selected. However, 0 - 250 bar.................... 3 4 2 . ..............................................
*)Plug, AMP Econoseal, J series, male,
minimum order quantities may 0 - 400 bar.................... 3 6 excl. female plug
apply. Please contact your local 0 - 600 bar.................... 3 8 3 . ..............................................
Screened cable, 2 m
Danfoss office for further informa- 5 . ..............................................
*)Plug, IEC 947-5-2, M12 × 1, male,
tion or request for other versions. excl. female plug
8 . ..............................................
*) Plug, AMP Superseal 1.5 series male,
Pressure reference
excl. female plug
Gauge (relative).............................. 1
Absolute........................................... 2
Output signal
1 .......................................................... 4 - 20 mA
2 .......................................................... 0- 5V
3 .......................................................... 1- 5V
4 .......................................................... 1- 6V *) Gauge versions only avail-
5 .......................................................... 0 - 10 V able as sealed gauge versions
7 .......................................................... 1 - 10 V
Dimensions / Combinations
Type code 1 2 3 5 8
EN 175301-803-A, Pg 9 AMP Econoseal 2 m screened cable EN 60947 - 5 - 2 AMP Superseal
M12x1; 4-pin
G¼ A G 3/8 A G½A ¼ - 18 NPT ½ - 14 NPT DIN 3852-E-G ¼

(EN 837) (EN 837) (EN 837) Gasket:
DIN 3869-14
Type code AB04 AB06 AB08 AC04 AC08 GB04
Recommended 30-35 Nm 30-35 Nm 30-35 Nm 2-3 turns after finger 2-3 turns after finger 30-35 Nm
torque 1)
tightened tightened
1)Depends of different parameters as packing material, mating material, thread lubrication and pressure level.
4 IC.PD.P20.A3.02 - 520B2575
301
Electrical connections
Type code, page 4
1 2 3 5 8
EN 175301-803-A, Pg 9 AMP Econoseal 2 m screened cable EN 60497-5-2 AMP Superseal
J series (male) M12x1 4-pin 1.5 series (male)
Ambient temperature
−40 → + 85 °C −40 → + 85 °C −30 → +85 °C −25 → +85 °C −40 → +85 °C
Enclosure (IP protection fulfilled together with mating connector)
IP 65 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67 IP 67
Materials
Glass filled Glass filled Poliolyfin cable with Nickel plated Glass filled
polyamid, PA 6.6 polyamid, PA 6.61) PE shrinkage tubing brass, CuZn/Ni polyamid, PA 6.62)
Electrical connection, 4 - 20 mA output (2 wire)
Pin1: + supply Pin 1: + supply Brown wire: + supply Pin 1: + supply Pin 1: + supply
Pin 2: ÷ supply Pin 2: ÷ supply Black wire: ÷ supply Pin 2: Not used Pin 2: ÷ supply
Pin 3: Not used Pin 3: not used Red wire: Not used Pin 3: Not used Pin 3 Not used
Earth: Connected to MBS Orange: Not used Pin 4: ÷ supply
enclosure Screen: Not connected
to MBS enclosure
Electrical connection, 0 - 5V, 1 - 5 V, 1 - 6 V, 0 - 10 V, 1 - 10 V output
Pin 1: + supply Pin 1: + supply Brown wire: Output Pin 1: + supply Pin 1: + supply
Pin 2: ÷ supply Pin 2: ÷ supply Black wire: ÷ supply Pin 2: Not used Pin 2: ÷ supply
Pin 3: Output Pin 3: Output Red wire: + supply Pin 3: Output Pin 3: Output
Earth: Connected to MBS Orange: Not used Pin 4: ÷ supply
enclosure Screen: Not connected
to MBS enclosure
1)
Female plug: Glass filled polyester, PBT
2)
Wire: PETFE (teflon)
Protection sleeve: PBT mesh (polyester)
IC.PD.P20.A3.02 - 520B2575 5
302
® Danfoss A/S 03-2009 DE-BD
6 IC.PD.P20.A3.02 - 520B2575
303
BLOCK 2: SAFETY RENDERING, BHE-G, 1068-00

305
CARTRIDGE VALVE 1:2 - TN-16 CVI 16 D20 2 L 10
CARTRIDGE COVER TN-16 CVCS 16 N B29 10
CVI 16 D10 M 40
CVCS 16 C B29 W350 11

Vickers®
Cartridge Valves
Slip-in Cartridge Valves

to ISO 7368 (DIN 24342)
5043.00/EN/0499/A
307
Contents
Page
Availability Summary
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
CVU units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Pilot control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Functional Symbols
Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Introduction to Cartridge Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Cartridge Valve Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Applications, Ratings and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Filtration Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Check, Directional and Flow Restrictor Functions: Sizes 16 to 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Functional descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
For sizes 80 and 100 see pages 115-118
Pressure Relief & Venting Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Pressure Unloading/Relief Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Pressure Reducing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Dynamic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Valvistor Proportional Throttle Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Mounting bolts, Seal kits, Mass, Ordering procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
308
Contents
Electrohydraulic Proportional Throttle Valves (Type EFP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operating and performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Directional Valves with Electrical Indication (Type SWD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Installation dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Mounting bolts, Seal kits, Mass, Ordering procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Special Function Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

1:0.25 area ratio cartridge unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Normally open prefill valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Hydrostat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Sizes 80 and 100 Cartridge Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Functional symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pilot Control Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Model codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Supplementary Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Standard orifice sizes and threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Optional orifice kits, orifice plug assembly data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Orifice sizing guid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Pressure drop at other viscosities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Mounting bolt data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Seal kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Insert cavity dimensions to ISO 7368:
Sizes 16 to 63 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Sizes 80 and 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Ordering Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Mass Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Service/Spares Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
309
Product Availability Summary - Covers
Sizes 16 to 40
Model type
yp Description
p Size Insert most commonly
y
16 25 32 40 used with
A Stroke adjuster R16
A1/A3 Stroke adjuster with size 03 pilot interface R16
B Blank DC16
C Relief D10, C10F
C1/C3 Relief with size 03 pilot interface D10, C10F
C025 1:0.25 area ratio C025
D1/D3 Directional with size 03 pilot interface D16, R16
DC1/DC3 Dual check valve with size 03 pilot interface D16, R16
HFV Valvistor proportional throttle HFV
N Basic D105, D16
OD Prefill valve OD105
PC Pilot operated check D16
SC Main system relief D10
SC1/SC3 Main system relief with size 03 pilot interface D10
U Unloading relief U
U1/U3 Unloading relief with size 03 pilot interface U
W Shuttle D16
W11/W13 Shuttle type 1, with size 03 pilot interface D16
W31/W33 Shuttle type 3, with size 03 pilot interface D16
X Pressure reducer X2
X1/X3 Pressure reducer with size 03 pilot interface X2
ZD1/ZD3 Dynamic with size 03 pilot interface ZD105, ZDN105
ZDA1/ZDA3 Dynamic with stroke adjuster and size 03 pilot interface ZD105, ZDN105
Sizes 50 to 100
Model type
yp Description
p Size Insert most commonly
y
50 63 80 100 used with
A Stroke adjuster F
D2 Directional with size 05 pilot interface; UNC threads D20, R
D16, F
D5 Directional with size 05 pilot interface; metric threads D20, R
D16, F
HFV Valvistor proportional throttle HFV
N Basic D11, D20
D16, F
ZD1/ZD3 Dynamic with size 03 pilot interface ZD105, ZDN105
ZDA1/ZDA3 Dynamic with stroke adjuster and size 03 pilot interface ZD105, ZDN105
310
Product Availability Summary - Inserts
Sizes 16 to 40
Model Description
p Size Cover most commonly
y
type 16 25 32 40 used with
C025 1:0.25 area ratio C025
C10F 1:1 area ratio with fixed orifice (S)C, (S)C*
D10 Relief 1:1 area ratio (S)C, (S)C*
D105 Directional 1:1.05 area ratio A, D*, N
D105V 1:1.05 area ratio with variable orifice plug A, D*, N
D16 Directional 1:1.6 area ratio D*, N, PC, W, W1*, W3*
D20 Directional 1:2 area ratio A, D*, N, PC, W, W1*, W3*
DC16 Direct check 1:1.6 area ratio B
HFV Valvistor proportional throttle HFV*
OD105 1:1.05 normally open (prefill) OD
R16 Damping 1:1.6 area ratio A, A*,D*, N
U 1:1 Unloading normally closed U, U*
(sliding spool)
X2 Reducing X, X*
ZD105 Dynamic 1:1.05, zero pilot leakage ZD*, ZDA*
ZDN105 Dynamic 1:1.05, fast response, low hYsteresis ZD*, ZDA*
Sizes 50 to 100
Model Description
p Size Cover most commonly
y
type 50 63 80 100 used with
D11 Directional 1:1.1 area ratio D*, N
D16 Directional 1:1.6 area ratio D*, N
D20 Directional 1:2 area ratio A, D*, N
HFV Valvistor proportional throttle HFV*
F Flow restrictor 1:1.6 area ratio A, D*, N
F Flow restrictor 1:2 area ratio A
R Damping 1:2 area ratio A, D*, N
ZD105 Dynamic 1:1.05, zero pilot leakage ZD*, ZDA*
ZDN105 Dynamic 1:1.05, fast response, low hYsteresis ZD*, ZDA*
311
Product Availability Summary - Units
Cartridge Valve Units

(CVU-**)
Model type
yp Description
p Valve size
16 25 32 40 50 63
EFP1 Proportional throttle (two-stage)
OD11 Normally open pre-fill
SWD Position monitor switch
SWD3 Position monitor switch
with size 03 pilot interface
ZSWD3 Dynamic position monitor switch
with size 03 pilot interface
Pilot Control Modules

(CVG***-3)
Model type Description

CVGC-3 Relief module: P-T
CVGCA-3 Relief module: A-T
CVGCPA-3 Relief module: P & A-T
CVGMS1-3 Shuttle module
CVGPC1-3 Pilot operated check valve
CVGS1-3 Shuttle valve
312
Functional Symbols - Covers
Cover type Graphical symbol Cover model

Directional with stroke adjuster CVC(S)-**-A-*2(9)-*-10
Sizes 16-100
X AP
Directional with size 03 pilot P A B T CVCS-**-A*-*2(9)-*-10

interface & stroke adjuster Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP1 AP2 Z2 Y
Blank CVCS-**-B-*2(9)-10
Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Z2 Y
Relief CVCS-**-C-*2(9)-*-***-11
(ISO 7368---A) Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y
Relief with size 03 pilot interface P B T CVCS-**-C*-*2(9)-*-***-11

(ISO 7368---A) Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y No orifice/plug tapping on this port on size 16
Directional with size 03 pilot P A B T CVCS-**-D*-*2(9)-10

interface Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP1 AP2 Z2 Y
Directional with size 05♦ pilot P A B T P A T CVC-**-D*-*2(9)-10

interface Sizes 50 & 63 (L.H. sYmbol)
Sizes 80 & 100, (R.H. sYmbol)
X Z2 AP1 Z1 Y X AP1 Y
Dual check valve with size 03 P A B T CVCS-**-DC*-*2(9)-10

pilot interface Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Z2 Y
Valvistor proportional throttle P A B T CVCS-**-HFV*-W-*2(9)-10

For models without free reverse flow
capability
X Z1 AP1 AP2 Z2 Y
P A B T
CVCS-**-HFV*-*2(9)-10
For models with free reverse flow
capability
X Z1 AP Z2 Y Sizes 16-63
Directional CVC(S)-**-N-*2(9)-10
Sizes 16-100
X AP
Prefill CVCS-**-OD-*2(9)-10
Sizes 25-40
X AP
ISO 4401, size 03 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03) ♦ ISO 4401, size 05 (ANSI/B93.7M-D05)
313
Functional Symbols - Covers (continued)
Cover type Graphical symbol Cover model

1:0.25 area ratio CVCS-**-C025-*2(9)-10
Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Z2
Pilot operated check CVCS-**-PC-*2(9)-10

Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y
Main system relief CVCS-**-SC-*2(9)-*-***-10

(ISO 7368---B) Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y
Main system relief with size 03 pilot interface P B T CVCS-**SC*-*2(9)-*-***-10

(ISO 7368---B) Sizes 16-40
Unloading/relief CVCS-**-U-*2(9)-*-***-11
Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y
Unloading/relief with size 03 pilot interface P B T CVCS-**-U*-*2(9)-*-***-11

Sizes 16-40
Shuttle CVCS-**-W-*2(9)-10
Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Z2
Shuttle type 1 with size 03 pilot interface and P A B T CVCS-**-W1*-*2(9)-10

W11/W13 function Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Z2 Y
Shuttle type 3 with size 03 pilot interface and P A B T CVCS-**-W3*-*2(9)-10

W31/W33 function Sizes 16-40
X Z1 AP Y
Reducer CVCS-**-X-*2(9)-11
Sizes 16-40
No orifice/plug tapping on this port on size 16

X Z1 AP Y
Reducer with size 03 pilot interface P B T CVCS-**-X*-*2(9)-11

Sizes 16-40
No orifice/plug tapping on this port on size 16

X Z1 AP Y
Dynamic with size 03 pilot interface See page 74 CVCS-**-ZD*-*2(9)-10

Sizes 16-63
Dynamic with stroke limiter with size 03 pilot See page 74 CVCS-**-ZDA*-*2(9)-10
interface Sizes 16-63
ISO 4401, size 03 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03)
314
Functional Symbols - Inserts
Insert type Function Functional Area ratio Sizes/ Cracking pressure

symbol
ymbol AA : AAP Insert
In ert model bar (psi)
A to B B to A
1:0.25 area ratio C025 1:0.25 Sizes 16-40:
CVI-**-C025-4* N/A – No spring used
B
Relief, standard D10 1:1 CVI-16-D10-M-4* 1,55 (22.5) –

B CVI-25-D10-H-4* 3,1 (45) –
CVI-32-D10-H-4* 3,1 (45) –
A
CVI-40-D10-C-4* 2,35 (34) –
Relief with orifice C10F 1:1 CVI-16-C10F-M-4* 1,55 (22.5) –

B CVI-25-C10F-H-4* 3,1 (45) –
CVI-32-C10F-H-4* 3,1 (45) –
CVI-40-C10F-C-4* 2,35 (34) –
A
Directional D10 1:1 Sizes 16-40:

B CVI-**-D10-L-4* 0,31 (4.5) –
CVI-**-D10-M-4* 1,55 (22.5) –
A
CVI-**-D10-H-4* 3,1 (45) –
Directional D105 1:1.05 Sizes 16-40:
B CVI-**-D105-L-4* 0,33 (4.8)
CVI-**-D105-M-4* 1,65 (24)
CVI-**-D105-H-4* 3,3 (48)
A
Directional with D105V 1:1.05 Sizes 16-40:

orifice B CVI-**-D105V-L-4* 0,33 (4.8)
CVI-**-D105V-M-4* 1,65 (24)
CVI-**-D105V-H-4* 3,3 (48)
A
Directional D11 1:1.1 Sizes 50 & 63:

B CVI-**-D11-L-1* 0,3 (4)
CVI-**-D11-M-1* 1,4 (20)
CVI-**-D11-H-1* 2,7 (39)
A
Directional D16 1:1.6 Sizes 16-40:

CVI-**-D16-L-4* 0,5 (7.3) 0,83 (12)
CVI-**-D16-M-4* 2,5 (36.3) 4,17 (60)
B CVI-**-D16-H-4* 5,0 (73) 8,3 (120)
Sizes 80 & 100:
CVI-**-D16-L-1* 0,3 (4.4) 0,48 (7)
A
CVI-**-D16-M-1* 1,0 (14.5) 1,6 (23.2)
CVI-**-D16-H-1* 2,0 (29) 3,2 (46.6)
Directional D20 1:2 Sizes 16-63:
B CVI-**-D20-L-1* 0,5 (7.3) 0,5 (7.3)
CVI-**-D20-M-1* 2,5 (36.3) 2,5 (36.3)
CVI-**-D20-H-1* 5,0 (73) 5,0 (73)
A
Direct check DC16 1:1.6 Sizes 16-40:

B CVI-**-DC16-L-4* 0,5 (7.3) 0,83 (12)
CVI-**-DC16-M-4* 2,5 (36.3) 4,17 (60)
CVI-**-DC16-H-4* 5,0 (73) 8,3 (120)
A
D105 and D11 inserts not nromally used for flow from ‘‘B’’ to ‘‘A’’.
315
Functional Symbols - Inserts (continued)
Insert type Function Functional Area ratio Sizes/ Cracking pressure

symbol
ymbol AA : AAP Insert
In ert model bar (psi)
A to B B to A
Flow restricting F 1:1.6 Sizes 80 &100:
B CVI-**-F-L-1* 0,3 (4.4) 0,48 (7)
CVI-**-F-M-1* 1,0 (14.5) 1,6 (23.2)
CVI-**-F-H-1* 2,0 (29) 3,2 (46.6)
A
Flow restricting F 1:2 Sizes 50 & 63:

B CVI-**-F-L-1* 0,5 (7.3) 0,5 (7.3)
CVI-**-F-M-1* 2,5 (36.3) 2,5 (36.3)
CVI-**-F-H-1* 5,0 (73) 5,0 (73)
A
Valvistor HFV 1:2 Sizes 16-63:

proportional throttle CVI-**-HFV-20-A-***-1* – –
B
A
Sizes 16-63:
CVI-**-HFV-20-B-***-1* – –
B
Normally open OD105 ♦ Sizes 25, 32 & 40:

CVI-**-OD105-4* Normally open
B
Pilot pressure to close:
2,5 (36.3) + PA + 0.05 PB
A
Damping R 1:2 Sizes 50 & 63:

B CVI-**-R-L-1* 0,5 (7.3) 0,5 (7.3)
CVI-**-R-M-1* 2,5 (36.3) 2,5 (36.3)
CVI-**-R-H-1* 5,0 (73) 5,0 (73)
A
Damping R16 1:1.6 Sizes 16-40:

B CVI-**-R16-L-4* 0,6 (8.7) 1,0 (14.5)
CVI-**-R16-M-4* 3,0 (43.5) 5,0 (72.5)
CVI-**-R16-H-4* 6,0 (87) 10,0 (145)
A
Unloading U 1:1 Sizes 16-40: –

B
CVI-**-U-4* 3,5 (51)
Reducing X2 – Sizes 16-40:

B
CVI-**-X2-4* – 1,8 (26.1)
Dynamic, zero pilot ZD105 See page 74 ♦ Sizes 16-63:

leakage CVI-**-ZD105-L-1* 1,0 (14.5) –
CVI-**-ZD105-M-1* 2,5 (36.3) –
CVI-**-ZD105-H-1* 4,5 (62.2) –
Dynamic, fast ZDN105 See page 74 ♦ Sizes 16-63:
response, low CVI-**-ZDN105-L-1* 0,5 (7.3) –
hysteresis CVI-**-ZDN105-M-1* 2,0 (29) –
CVI-**-ZDN105-H-1* 4,0 (58) –
♦ Spool geometry based on 1:1.05 ratio spools.
10
316
Introduction to Cartridge Valves
Design Concept Cartridge Valve Because cartridge valves are

two-position valves, a single valve can
Poppet type valves have been used in Advantages control flow between only two major flow
hydraulic systems for many years. They System design flexibility points in a system. Thus, for example,
are commonly known as two-port check Lower installed cost four cartridge valves are required to
valves. In this form, they serve as a Smaller package size replace a typical three position, four-way
one-way valve, allowing free flow in one Better performance and control spool valve (Figure 1).
direction while blocking flow in the Improved reliability
reverse direction. With some Higher pressure capability Operating characteristics of cartridge
refinements, these valves can be More efficient operation valves can be altered easily to fine tune
controlled to overcome the normal Elimination of external leakage and the motions of a machine. For instance,
blocking action, thereby allowing control reduction of internal leakage a cartridge cover can be changed to
of flow in both directions. This is the Greater contamination tolerance control poppet time and travel, thus
basis of the control concept known as Faster cycle times controlling actuator acceleration and
cartridge valves. speed. Shock is easily avoided by
System Design carefully sizing orifices in the valve
Refinements in hydraulic system cover and by timing the opening and
development have led to greater use of Considerations closing sequence of individual
manifold block construction. Block cartridges. In conventional spool type
Cartridge valves offer an alternative
systems eliminate a multitude of valves, timing of the opening or closing
rather than a replacement for
interconnecting lines between of all four ports occurs simultaneously
conventional sliding spool valves. Often,
components, thereby virtually with less ability to avoid shock.
the most economical system
eliminating potential leakage points and
incorporates combinations of manifold
related oil waste. Inserting the active Conventional spool valves must be
mounted spool valves and screw-in and
element of cartridge valves into sized for the highest flow at any one
slip-in cartridge valves. Engineers faced
standardized cavities in the manifold, port. When differential-area cylinders are
with a system design problem should
and retaining this insert by a passive used, a spool valve would probably be
consider all possibilities before deciding
block (cover), completes the cartridge sized for the return flow rate out of the
on a particular solution. Cartridge valve
valve concept. head end of the cylinder. Cartridge
systems will become more cost effective
valves, on the other hand, are sized to
if some of the following design
Vickers New Design parameters are significant.
handle only the flow required through
their individual ports. Economies are
Vickers valves are defined as slip-in Flow rates exceeding 150 L/min realized and the system is optimized.
cartridge valves to differentiate them (40 USgpm)
from another type known as screw-in. Working pressure above 210 bar Cartridge valves are compatible with
Generally, slip-in valves are associated (3000 psi) computer or programmable controls via
with relatively high flows, i.e. 150 L/min Small envelope size electrically modulated pressure and flow
(40 USgpm) or more. Slip-in cartridge Complex circuitry control models. Simple on-off solenoid
valves, which will henceforth be referred Fast response pilot controls, as well as air operated
to simply as cartridge valves in this Low internal leakage types, are also available. The Vickers
catalog, are targeted at more efficient, Good stability soft shift pilot valves DG4V-3S-****2**
faster and more compact hydraulic Low noise level (catalog 614) can also be used to
systems. Vickers has developed its achieve smooth opening and closing.
cartridge valve system technology to
meet the changing needs of new
generations of hydraulically operated
machinery and equipment. Today’s A B
machines need controls that are B A A A AB
B B
exceptionally cost effective and energy T T
efficient. Vickers cartridge valves fulfill
these needs.
A B
b a
AB
b a
PT
P T
Figure 1 Equivalent spool valve
11
317
Features and Benefits
Features Benefits
Positive-seating check type valving Minimum internal valve leakage with little energy waste.
mechanism Improved control of load holding enhances machine performance.
Higher flow capacity results in more economical valve sizing. (Check type valve
opening area is greater than that of equal port size spool valves.)
Lower pressure drops with less heat generation provide greater machine
efficiency.
Faster response – up to four times faster than spool type valves – allows faster
machine cycling for greater productivity. Flow begins as soon as the cartridge
check type valve poppet lifts off its seat. (Spool valves must clear their overlap
before flow begins.)
Individual port control Each cartridge can be tuned to reduce system shock, resulting in smoother
machine operation.
Each cartridge in a system can be sized for the actual flow encountered,
optimizing component size and cost. (Spool valves must be sized for the
maximum flow seen at any of their ports.) This is a refinement over spool type
valves wherein all ports are affected simultaneously by spool movement, and the
demands of one port compromise the others.
Cartridges combine functions of Multi-function reduces the number of valving components required, resulting in
direction, flow and/or pressure lower machine costs.
Manifold block assemblies that are Machine system installation is easier and faster, thereby reducing assembly costs.
compact, neat and low in weight Piping can be eliminated, providing leak free construction.
Cartridges can be easily serviced without disturbing system piping, thereby
increasing machine uptime and reducing maintenance time and costs.
Sealing on the cover’s pilot diameter, Provides greater sealing reliability, particularly at high pressures.
rather than at the cover/manifold Cavity machining becomes less critical. See Figure 2 for the Vickers approach.
interface – Vickers design: sizes 16 No shimming required.
to 63 Vickers is the only supplier to offer low leakage design at high pressure.
Control ports alignment ensured by cover pilot diameter.
Headloss Vickers new “best in class” cartridge valves offer more power efficiency.
Flexibility Components can be individually matched to system requirements.
Serviceability System can be easily serviced as all valves are surface mounted.
Reliability Cartridge technology proven over several decades of use.
All Vickers valves undergo full fatigue and endurance tests before release.
350 bar (5000 psi) rating.
12
318
Cartridge Valve Design
Construction Three different spring rates provide a Functions

selection of insert poppet cracking
Vickers cartridge valves are similar to pressures. Cartridge valves for directional and
poppet check valves and consist of an check functions are essentially
insert assembly that slips into a cavity The control cover can also contain a hydraulically piloted check valves.
machined into a manifold. This cavity is manual adjustment for limiting poppet lift Cartridge relief valves feature manual
made to ISO 7368 or to DIN 24342. and flow rate. Provision is made for the pressure setting adjustment.
fitting of various orifices to optimize or Additionally, venting and remote piloting
The insert is retained in the cavity by a tune cartridge valve response in relation are possible. Alternative arrangements
control cover which is bolted to the to that of the complete hydraulic system. include electrical selection of pressure
manifold. The insert consists of a Some covers have an ISO 4401 size 03 or venting, and of dual pressure settings
sleeve, poppet, spring and seals♦. or size 05 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03 or D05) and venting, via a pilot valve mounted to
Typically, inserts and covers are interface for integrally mounting a pilot the cartridge cover. Electrohydraulic
supplied separately, e.g. insert model directional, or pressure, control valve, proportional control of pressure is also
CVI-**-D10 and cover model CVCS-**-C (optional inch or metric thread mounting available.
(relief valve) shown in Figure 2. For bolts). Control functions can be
some functions, inserts and covers are expanded by adding control modules Relief valve arrangements described in
supplied as a unit (complete assembly); between the pilot valve and the cover. this catalog can be built into system
e.g. the CVU-**-EFP1 (proportional manifold assemblies in combination with
throttle) shown on page 93. Typical single cartridge arrangements directional flow regulating and pressure
are symbolized on the following pages. reducing functions in cartridge form.
Drilled holes in the manifold connect Your Vickers representative can
insert main ports A and B to other illustrate various grouped arrangements. The basic pressure reducing cartridge
cartridges or to the operating hydraulic Grouping cartridge assemblies for arrangement features manual
system. Similarly, drilled control lines in control by one or more common pilot adjustment of reduced pressure, plus a
the manifold interconnect control ports valves can provide directional, check, pilot port for optional remote control.
X, Z1, and Z2 as desired, see pages 131 pressure and/or flow restrictor functions Options include electrical selection of
and 133 for port locations to ISO 7368. for flow rates up to 5500 L/min high and low pressures, and
Drain port Y is always connected directly (1450 USgpm) per cartridge. electrohydraulic proportional control of
to the reservoir. reduced pressure.
♦ Sizes 16 to 63. For sizes 80 and 100,
see page 115.
CVCS-**-C Orifice
Cover
Z1
Y X
X Z1 AP Y
AP
B(T) CVI-**-D10 B(T)
Insert Spring Sleeve
A(P) Poppet
Figure 2 A(P)
13
319
Poppet Area Ratios Referring to a 1:1.6 poppet area ratio
AAP (AA:AAP), Figure 4, the poppet will
A cartridge valve is simply a two-port remain closed, thereby blocking flow
valve that blocks flow, allows free flow, between ports A and B as long as
or modulates flow or pressure. pressure in area AAP, plus the spring
Spring
force, exceeds pressure on either area
A basic cartridge valve insert, Figure 3, AA, annulus AB, or their combined effect.
consists of a sleeve, spring, and poppet. Poppet Flow force (Ff) plays a role when the
The insert has three areas, identified as valve is open, but will not be covered in
AA, AB and AAP , that affect the opening this catalog.
AA
or closing of the valve poppet relative to
the seat in the sleeve. The A-port area is
the circular area defined by the seat Graphic Symbol
diameter. The B-port area is the annular
area between the seat and the outside Sleeve
diameter of the poppet. Area AP is the AAP
circular area defined by the diameter of
the poppet. Pressure on the AP area, B Port
plus the spring force, holds the poppet B
against the seat.
A Port AB
Pressure on the AA and AB areas tends AA
to lift the poppet off the seat, allowing A
flow through the valve. Area AAP Spool area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1.6
A = Main port Figure 4
B = Main port
AP
AP = Spring chamber
AA = Effective area of port A
AB = Effective area of port B (annular)
Port “B”
AAP = Area related to poppet diameter
Port “A”
The valve opens and closes in
accordance with the force balance Area AA
formula:
(PAP AAP))FS*(PA AA)*(PB AB)* Annular

Ff area AB
t 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve opens FS
u 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Valve closes
PAP AAP
Where:
FS + Spring force
Ff + Flow force PB AB
PA AA
Figure 3
14
320
Vickers range of cartridge valves
includes five operating area ratios: Area ratio Area ratio Area ratio Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1 AA:AAP = 1:1.05 AA:AAP = 1:1.6 AA:AAP = 1:2
1:2 area ratio, where AAP is 2 x the
A-port area, and ports A and B areas
are equal. This valve is used primarily
for directional control.
1:1.6 area ratio, where AAP is 1.6 x
the A-port area. This valve is used
primarily for directional control.
A-port area. This valve is used for AA AA AA AA
directional control or pressure control.
A-port area. This valve is used for AAP AB AB AB
directional control or pressure control.
1:1 area ratio, where AAP equals the
A-port area and the B-port area is AAP AAP AAP
zero. This valve is used for pressure
control.
AP AP AP AP
Figure 5 shows area ratio relationships,
associated hydraulic symbols, and B
related model codes. The 1:1.1 area B B B
ratio is not shown, but is similar to the A
A A A
1:1.6 Model: Model: Model: Model:
CVI-**-D10 CVI-**-D105 CVI-**-D16 CVI-**-D20
The reducer insert, Figure 6, differs from
other inserts in that it has a spool type
valving mechanism, rather than poppet
type, and has an integral check valve to
relieve surge pressures in the reduced
pressure A (load) port. The reducer
insert is normally closed, i.e. the spool
tends to widen the hole opening in the 1:1 with 1:1.05 1:1.6
sleeve with increased load pressure at fixed orifice with orifice with damping
port A. Flow is always from port B to
port A.
Unlike most reducing valves, pilot B B B

pressure is obtained from high-pressure
port B rather than from reduced- A A A
pressure port A, thus providing Model Model Model
significantly more flow capacity. CVI-**-C10F CVI-**-D105V CVI-**-R16
Figure 5
CVCS-**-X
Cover
X Z1 AP Y X Z1 AP Y
B(P1)
CVI-**-X2 Pressure
B(P1) A(P2)
Insert port B
A(P2)
Symbols as used in this catalog Symbol showing circuitry of
Figure 6 normally-closed reducer insert Load port A
15
321
Applications, Ratings and Characteristics
Applications Fluids and Seals Solenoid Orientation

Sizes 16 to 63
Cartridge valves are generally used in Where pilot valves are shown in this
medium to high pressure hydraulic All seals are Buna-N. Water glycol, catalog, solenoid identification is
systems, where flows may be greater water-in-oil emulsion fluids and according to the US ANSI B93.9
than 150 L/min (40 USgpm), to provide petroleum oil may be used with these standard requiring solenoid “a” be
power transmission and motion control standard seals. energized to connect port “P” to port “A”
in a wide variety of applications. and/or solenoid “b” to connect “P” to “B”,
The use of synthetic fire-resistant fluids independent of solenoid location. Refer
Presses requires a valve with special seals. Add to applicable pilot valve catalog for
Plastics molding machines prefix “F3” to the model code when further options and details (see
Die casting machines phosphate ester type fluids or their page 19).
Shears and balers blends are to be used. Alkyl-based or
Machine tools and metal forming chlorinated hydrocarbon fluids are not to
machinery
Mounting Attitude
be used.
Steel mill machinery and other Unrestricted for cartridges. Good
primary metal processing equipment Sizes 80 and 100
practice suggests that detented pilot
Mobile vehicles Fluorocarbon seals (F3) are standard. valves, e.g. DG4V-3(S)-2N models, be
Marine These are compatible with water glycol, mounted so that their longitudinal axis is
water-in-oil emulsion fluids, petroleum oil horizontal.
Response Time and synthetic fire-resistant fluids.
Response time is generally faster than

Alkyl-based or chlorinated hydrocarbon Ratings
fluids are not to be used.
that of large spool type valves which See chart below.
have to clear their overlap before flow All Sizes
Nominal flow rate at 5 bar (72 psi)
starts. With cartridge valves, flow starts Cartridges may be used up to 70 bar pressure drop for insert types:
as soon as the poppet starts to lift off the (1000 psi) with high water base (5/95) C10F, D10, D105V for sizes 06-10
seat in the cartridge sleeve. A typical fluids. For higher pressures, consult (NG16-40)
DG4V-3(S) solenoid operated pilot valve your Vickers representative. Contact D11 for sizes 11 and 12 (NG50 and 63)
starts to pass pilot flow about 10 ms your fluid supplier for seal D16 for sizes 13 and 14 (NG80 and 100)
after it is energized. Full opening time of recommendations. For additional
the cartridge valve depends on the information, request catalog 694.
operating pressure and the control
orifice size used. Sizing of control
orifices is key to tuning the relative
response of each cartridge unit. A guide
to orifice sizing is on page 126.
Nominal size Flow Maximum operating
ISO 7368 (DIN 24342) L/min USgpm pressure
Temperature Limits
Ambient min. . . . –20C (–4F) 06 (NG16) (approx. 5/8) 230 60
Ambient max. . . +70C (+158F) 08 (NG25) (approx. 1) 550 145
Fluid temperatures: 09 (NG32) (approx. 11/4) 900 238
Petroleum oil Water-containing 10 (NG40) (approx. 19/16) 1200 317 350 bar
Min. –20C(–4F) +10C (+50F) 11 (NG50) (approx. 2) 1700 449 (5000 psi)
Max. +80C +54C (+129F) 12 (NG63) (approx. 21/2) 2800 740

(+176F) 13 (NG80) (approx. 3) 3500 925
14 (NG100) (approx. 4) 5500 1450
Viscosity
The extreme viscosity range is from 500 Nominal size relates to drilled hole (port size) in manifold that connects one
to 5 cSt (2270 to 42 SUS) but the cartridge to another.
recommended running range is from 54
to 13 cSt (245 to 70 SUS). For further
information about fluids see leaflet
B-920 or 694.
16
322
Orifices The “metric” versions, type CVC(S)-**-*3 Leakage should be considered when
(or *5) have metric threads for pilot designing circuits; see graph for
Throughout this catalog, graphical valve mounting bolts and orifice/closure maximum leakages. Proper orientation
symbols are used to describe the plugs, with BSPF gage ports if of the cartridge and pilots can yield very
function of the cartridge cover and applicable. low internal leakage in systems.
inserts. By changing orifice sizes or
adding or deleting them, a cartridge can Leakage
be fine tuned to achieve desired
machine operation. Figure 7 shows a Excepting pressure reducing and
sample graphical symbol with orifices unloader cartridge inserts, which have
described. Standard orifice sizes and spool type construction, inserts are
optional orifice kits are shown on designed with a positive-seating poppet
pages 124 and 125. mechanism. Therefore, there is virtually
no leakage between ports A and B when
the poppet is held in the closed position
(Figure 2, page 13). However, leakage
b
A B can pass through the diametral
clearance between area AP and port B.
P T
P A B T
X Z1 Z2 Y
AP Maximum Internal Leakages
Fluid viscosity 36 cSt (168 SUS)
Standard Data for sizes 80 and 100 on request.
(factory-fitted) B
orifice in3/min cm3/min
25 400 CVI-63
Tapped port A
for installation of 350
optional orifice 20 CVI-50
Plugged port 300
Leakage rate
Figure 7 15 250
200
10 CVI-40
Metric (Inch) Design 150 CVI-32
CVI-25
Dual dimensioning is used throughout 100 CVI-16
5
this catalog. 50
Inserts (CVI) are universal in design. 0

0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 bar
Optional varations in covers cater for
regional preferences for either inch/SAE 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 psi
or metric/BSPF thread combinations for
pilot valve mounting bolts tappings, Pressure
gage ports and orifice/blanking plugs.
Typically:
Covers type CVC(S)-**-*1 (or *2) have
UNC/UNF threads for pilot valve
mounting bolts and orifice/closure plugs,
with SAE gage ports if applicable.
17
323
Filtration Requirements
Essential information on the correct condition are included in Vickers recommended cleanliness level for
methods for treating hydraulic fluid is publication 561 or 9132. cartridge valves and proportional
included in the Vickers publication 561 throttles.
or 9132 “Vickers Guide to Systemic Recommended cleanliness levels using
Contamination Control”, available from petroleum oil under common conditions Fluids other than petroleum, severe
your local Vickers distributor or by are based on the highest fluid pressure service cycles or temperature extremes
contacting Vickers. levels in the system. are cause for adjustment of these
cleanliness codes. See Vickers
Recommendations on filtration and the In referencing the table below, the publication 561 or 9132 for exact details.
selection of products to control fluid shaded areas highlight the
Product System Pressure Level
t140 bar (2000 psi) 140-210 bar (2000-3000 psi) u210 bar (3000 psi)
Fixed Gear Pumps 20/18/15 19/17/15 18/16/13
Fixed Vane Pumps 20/18/15 19/17/14 18/16/13
Fixed Piston Pumps 19/17/15 18/16/14 17/15/13
Variable Vane Pumps 19/17/15 18/16/14 17/15/13
Variable Piston Pumps 18/16/14 17/15/13 16/14/12
Directional (solenoid) Valves 20/18/15 19/17/14
Pressure (modulating) Valves 19/17/14 19/17/14
Flow Controls (standard) 19/17/14 19/17/14
Check Valves 20/18/15 20/18/15
Cartridge Valves 20/18/15 19/17/14
Screw-in Valves 18/16/13 17/15/12
Prefill Valves 20/18/15 19/17/14
Load-sensing Directional Valves 18/16/14 17/15/13
Hydraulic Remote Controls 18/16/13 17/15/12
Proportional Directional (throttle) Valves 18/16/13 17/15/12*
Proportional Pressure Controls 18/16/13 17/15/12*
Proportional Cartridge Valves 18/16/13 17/15/12*
Proportional Screw-in Valves 18/16/13 17/15/12
Servo Valves 16/14/11 15/13/10*
Cylinders 20/18/15 20/18/15 20/18/15
Vane Motors 20/18/15 19/17/14 18/16/13
Axial Piston Motors 19/17/14 18/16/13 17/15/12
Gear Motors 21/19/17 20/18/15 19/17/14
Radial Piston Motors 20/18/14 19/17/13 18/16/13
Swashplate Design Motors 18/16/14 17/15/13 16/14/12*
Hydrostatic Transmissions (in-loop fluid) 17/15/13 16/14/12* 16/14/11*
Ball Bearing Systems 15/13/11* 15/13/11* 15/13/11*
Roller Bearing Systems 16/14/12* 16/14/12* 16/14/12*
Journal Bearings (high speed) 17/15/13 17/15/13 17/15/13
Journal Bearings (low speed) 18/16/14 18/16/14 18/16/14
General Industrial Gearboxes 17/15/13 17/15/13 17/15/13
* Requires precise sampling practices to verify cleanliness levels.
18
324
Check, Directional and Flow Restrictor Functions
Sizes 16 to 63 (For sizes 80 and 100 see pages 115–118)
General Information Remote Pilot Operated Solenoid Operated,

Cartridge valves for directional and Functions Hydraulically Piloted
check functions are essentially Arrangements
Remote piloted arrangements (pilot not
hydraulically piloted check valves.
integrally mounted on cartridge cover) For full technical data of pilot valves see
Control options include single or multiple
require the application of pilot flows and appropriate Vickers catalog:
pilot arrangements, flow restrictors, and
pressures appropriate to the application Size 03 pilot valves
solenoid controlled, pilot operated
and within the limits of any associated DG4V-3(S) . . . . . . . . . . GB-C-2015
directional control. Grouping cartridge
pilot valves and modules, whichever Size 05 pilot valves
assemblies (selected individually
have the lower limits. DG4V-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB-C-2281
according to flow requirements) for
DG4S4-01, 50 design . 671
control by one or more common pilot
See pilot operated check valve DG4S4-01, 60 design . GB-C-2129
valves can provide directional, check
information, page 20. DG4S4-01, “Soft shift” . 615
and/or flow restrictor functions for
normal flow rates up to 2800 L/min
(740 USgpm) per cartridge.
Pilot Control Modules
Details of CVG***-3 pilot control modules
Typical single cartridge arrangements are are shown on pages 120-123.
symbolized on the following pages, and
your Vickers representative can illustrate
various grouped arrangements. Basic
poppets are illustrated. Others provide
flow restrictions between ports A and B Flow Ratings
and internal pilot orificing between port A
and spring chamber AP. Poppets can be
Nominal Nominal flow at Nominal flow at
combined with different springs to provide
size Dp = 1 bar (14.5 psi) Dp = 5 bar (72 psi)
three different cracking pressures.
ISO 7368 (DIN 24342) L/min USgpm L/min USgpm
Standard combinations are shown in the
inserts model code on page 31. 06 (NG16) 90 24 230 60
08 (NG25) 210 55 550 145
Pressure Ratings 09 (NG32) 425 112 900 238
10 (NG40) 650 172 1200 317
Maximum pressure allowable at ports A 11 (NG50) 900 238 1700 449
and B is 350 bar (5000 psi) for all 12 (NG63) 1200 330 2800 740
cartridges.
Minimum pressure is 0,3 to 5 bar (4.4 to

72 psi), dependent on the poppet/spring
Index to Functional Descriptions on Following
combination. See inserts model code on Pages
page 31. Page
Basic check valve using type N cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
The maximum pressure limit at pilot Direct-acting check valve using type B cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ports X, Z1, Z2 and AP and pilot valve Pilot operated check valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
interface ports P, T, A and B is generally 2-way, 2-position, bi-directional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
350 bar (5000 psi), dependent on the 2-way, 2-position, uni-directional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
limit of any associated pilot valve or Damping function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
module. Pilot shuttle control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Adjustable stroke limiter; bi-directional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Pilot port Y maximum pressure limit is also Adjustable stroke limiter; uni-directional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
350 bar (5000 psi). However, port Y is
normally used as the pilot drain port, when Solenoid controlled, pilot operated models
2-way, 2-position; single- and double-solenoid control; sizes 16 to 40 . . . . . . 23
it should be connected directly to the
2-way, 2-position; single- and double-solenoid control; sizes 50 and 63 . . . . 24
reservoir. In many functions any pressure
Shuttle type 1 (cover types W11/W13) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
at port Y is additive to the set opening/
Shuttle type 3 (cover types W31/W33) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
cracking pressure of the cartridge.
Dual check (cover types DC1/DC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Adjustable stroke limiter; bi-directional control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
19
325
Check Valve Functions
Basic Check Valve: Sizes 16 to 63

The standard directional cover (model
code letter N), contains a pilot pressure CVC(S)-**-N
passage with an orifice to control the Cover
poppet’s opening and closing rate. X AP
When used with insert model D16 (1:1.6 CVI-**-D16, or

B CVI-**-D20
area ratio poppet), or model D20 (1:2
Insert
area ratio poppet), the combined cover
A X B
and insert, Figure 8, becomes a check
valve. Port X in the cover is connected
to port B in the insert. This allows free
flow from insert port A to port B while
blocking flow from B to A. A
Basic poppet
AA:AAP = 1:1.6 or
Figure 8 AA:AAP = 1:2
Direct Acting Check: Sizes 16 to 40

The type DC16 insert is used with the CVCS-**-B
type B cover to provide a direct check Cover
function, Figure 9. The free flow
CVI-**-DC16
direction is A to B. Flow in the opposite Insert
B
direction (B to A) is prevented by
connecting port B to the full poppet area A
AAP, via drilled holes on the poppet,
whereby any pressure at port B assists B
the spring in holding the poppet hard on
to its seat.
Basic poppet
Figure 9 AA:AAP = 1:1.6
Pilot Operated Check Valve (Pilot

Open): Sizes 16 to 40
CVCS-**-PC
A model PC cover can be combined with
a model D16 insert to form a pilot X Z1 AP Y Cover AP
operated check valve (Figure 10). Pilot Y
pressure at Z1 vents spring chamber AP B CVI-**-D16

to Y, permitting flow from B to A. Flow Insert X
from A to B is independent of pilot A Z1

pressure. B
With port B connected to the system

load, pilot pressure at Z1 must be at
least 30% of load pressure, the latter
A
including any intensification that may
occur such as when controlling
double-acting cylinders. Port Y is Basic poppet
normally connected to a drain line. AA:AAP = 1:1.6
Figure 10
20
326
Directional Valve Functions
2-Way, 2-Position Function:

Sizes 16 to 40 CVCS-**-N
Using a model N cover with a D16 Cover
insert, Figure 11, can provide directional X AP
control of flow from insert port A to B or CVI-**-D16
from B to A. Pressurizing port X from a B Insert
X
remote source will block flow from insert
port A and B. With X connected to B, A B
system flow is from A to B. Flow will be
from B to A if X is connected to tank
or A.
A
Area ratio
Figure 11 AA:AAP = 1:1.6
2-Way, 2-Position Function (With

Internal Pilot): Sizes 16 to 40 CVCS-**-N
A model N cover is used with a D105 Cover
insert (1:1.05 area ratio) which can be X AP
supplied with an orifice in the poppet.
See Figure 12. This configuration is B CVI-**-D105V
X
used to open A to B or block A to B. Insert
D105 poppets cannot be used for flow A B
from B to A.
The orifice avoids the need to machine a
connecting hole in the manifold to port
A. To obtain a D105 insert with an orifice A
in the poppet (i.e. D105V), the orifice
size must be specified at the end of the
Area ratio
insert model number.
AA:AAP = 1:1.05
Figure 12
21
327
Damping Function: Sizes 16 to 63
Sizes 16 to 40: Sizes 16 to 40
Damping can be achieved with a model
CVCS-**-N
R16 insert (area ratio 1:1.6), see Figure Cover
13. The poppet has a skirt with a X AP
damping notch which helps smooth
CVI-**-R16 X
shifting (reduces gain) of the poppet. B
Insert
R16 inserts may be used with any check B
or directional function where a D16 A
insert is ordinarily used. Sizes 50 and 63
Sizes 50 and 63: CVC(S)-**-N A
As above but using a model R insert Cover
(area ratio 1:2). Use the R also for any X AP
check or directional function where a Area ratio
CVI-**-R
D20 insert is ordinarily used. B Insert Sizes 16 to 40: AA:AAP = 1:1.6
Sizes 50 and 63: AA:AAP = 1:2
A
Figure 13
Pilot Shuttle Control: Sizes 16 to 40

The shuttle function is obtained with a CVCS-**-W
model W cover and D16 insert (Figure Cover
14). The shuttle directs the higher of the X Z1 APZ2
pressures at the X and Z1 ports to the
spring area (AP) of the insert poppet to B CVI-**-D16
Insert
close it. The Z2 port can be used as a
X Z1
convenience to operate another A
cartridge simultaneously.
B
Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1.6
Figure 14
22
328
Pilot Operated Directional Valves
Sizes 16 to 40 The model identification for size 03 pilot Ports Z1 and Z2 are for remote control of
valve interface options is: additional cartridges.That is, for D1/D3
Covers are available with mounting D1 for North American formats, i.e. covers, Z1 is connected to pilot port A.
interfaces for pilot valves. These pilots UNC/UNF threads The X port is the pilot pressure port. The
are typically the DG4V-3(S) solenoid D3 for European formats, i.e. metric Y port should always go directly to the
operated directional valve that mounts to threads reservoir.
the ISO 4401, size 03
(ANSI/B93.7M-D03) interface. Manually Single or dual solenoid pilots are The insert used can be either the model
operated DG17V-3, pilot operated applicable (Figure 15), depending on D16 (1:1.6 area ratio poppet), or model
DG3V-3, or air operated DG18V-3 pilots circuit requirements. The spool center D20 (1:2 area ratio poppet).
are also applicable. The Vickers soft condition of the solenoid pilots also
shift pilot valves DG4V-3S-****2** depends on the circuit function desired.
(catalog 614 can also be used to
achieve smooth opening and closing.
Dual Solenoid Control: Sizes 16 to 40 Single Solenoid Control: Sizes 16 to 40

3-position, spring centered pilot valve 2-position, spring offset pilot valve
Note that the circuitry (i.e. flow

A B DG4V-3(S)-*C A B DG4V-3(S)-*A
b a path and orifice locations) of b
Pilot valve Pilot valve
P T these 16 to 40 sizes is different P T
P A B T from that of sizes 50 and 63 P A B T
shown on the next page.
CVCS-**-D1/D3 CVCS-**-D1/D3
Cover Cover
X Z1 Z2 Y X Z1 Z2 Y
AP1 AP2 AP1 AP2
CVI-**-D16 or CVI-**-D16 or
B CVI-**-D20 B CVI-**-D20
Insert Insert
A A
DG4V-3(S)-C
Pilot valve
(Dual solenoid)
CVCS-**-D1/D3
Cover
Z2 Z1
B CVI-**-D16 or
CVI-**-D20
Insert
Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1.6 or
AA:AAP = 1:2
Figure 15
23
329
Sizes 50 and 63 Single or dual solenoid pilots are The insert used is the model D20 with a
applicable (Figure 16), depending on 1:2 area ratio poppet.
For these sizes the pilots are typically circuit requirements. The spool center
the DG4V-5 solenoid operated condition of the solenoid pilots also
directional valve that mounts to the ISO depends on the circuit function desired.
4401, size 05 (ANSI/B93.7M-D05)
interface. Ports Z1 and Z2 are for remote control of
additional cartridges.That is, for D2/D5
The model identification for size 05 pilot covers, Z1 is connected to pilot port A.
valve interface options is: The X port is the pilot pressure port. The
D2 for North American formats, i.e. Y port should always go directly to the
UNC/UNF threads reservoir.
D5 for European formats, i.e. metric
threads
Dual Solenoid Control: Sizes 50 and 63 Single Solenoid Control: Sizes 50 and 63
3-position, spring centered pilot valve 2-position, spring offset pilot valve
A B Note that the circuitry (i.e. flow A B DG4V-5-*A

a DG4V-5-*C b
b path and orifice locations) of Pilot valve
Pilot valve
P T these 50 and 63 sizes is P T
P A B T different from that of sizes 16 to P A B T
CVC-**-D2/D5 40 shown on the previous page. CVC-**-D2/D5
Cover Cover
X Z2 AP Z1 Y X Z2 AP Z1 Y
B CVI-**-D20 B CVI-**-D20
Insert Insert
A A
DG4V-5-C
Pilot valve
(Dual solenoid)
CVC-**-D2/D5
Cover
Z2 Z1
B CVI-**-D20
Insert
A Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:2
Figure 16
24
330
Pilot Operated Directional Valves with Shuttle Function
General Information 4401, size 03 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03) The insert used can be either the model
interface. There are two functional cover D16 (1:1.6 area ratio poppet), or model
The shuttle function in combination with types, W11/W13 and W31/W33, that are D20 (1:2 area ratio poppet).
a solenoid operated pilot valve is applied with a model DG4V-3(S) pilot
available in cartridge sizes 16 through valve.
40. In each cartridge size, the pilot valve
is the DG4V-3(S) that mounts to the ISO
Shuttle Type 1 (W11/W13 Cover):

Sizes 16 to 40
With the solenoid de-energized, Figure
17, the cartridge is shut by the higher of
the pressures at X or Z1. Pilot port Z2
can be used to pilot a second cartridge
simultaneously.
b A B DG4V-3(S)-*A
P T Pilot valve
P A B T
CVCS-**-W11/W13
Cover
X Z1 AP Z2 Y
CVI-**-D16 or
B X
CVI-**-D20
Insert Z1
A
Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1.6 or
Figure 17
AA:AAP = 1:2
Shuttle Type 3 (W31/W33 Cover):

Sizes 16 to 40
The function of the W31/W33 cover,
Figure 18, is to provide a
non-reverse-flow check, thereby
eliminating the need for a separate back
flow check. Flow is either blocked or
allowed from port B to port A. Flow from
b A B
port A to port B is always blocked. The DG4V-3(S)-*A
application would have pump flow going P T Pilot valve
into port B, port A connected to the P A B T
actuator and control port X connected to CVCS-**-W31/W33
port A. Cover
X Z1 AP Y
CVI-**-D16 or
B CVI-**-D20
Insert X Y
A
Area ratio
AA:AAP = 1:1.6 or
Figure 18 AA:AAP = 1:2
25
331
Dual Check (DC1/DC3 Cover):
Sizes 16 to 40
The DC1/DC3 cover, Figure 19,

provides parallel check functions in pilot
control ports X and Z1. The higher of
these two pressures is then available at
pilot port P to close the insert via the P
size 03 solenoid operated valve. A Compound section
second cartridge can be operated to illustrate function
simultaneously from pilot port Z2.
A B
b DG4V-3(S)-*A
The DC1/DC3 cover is similar to the P T Pilot valve
type W11/W13 cover but, whereas there P A B T
is an open transient condition in the X
shuttle function (type W11/W13), the CVCS-**-DC1/ Z1
DC1/DC3 design uses two check valves DC3 Cover
to ensure that no transient loss of X Z1 AP Z2 Y B
pressure in port P can occur during pilot CVI-**-D16 or
pressure change-over between ports X B CVI-**-D20
and Z1. This feature is of benefit in any Insert
application where there must be A
A
absolutely no risk of the cartridge even
Basic poppet
momentarily opening during pilot
AA:AAP = 1:1.6 or
pressure changeover. Figure 19 AA:AAP = 1:2
26
332
Stroke Limiter Control Functions
General Information Size 16 to 40 Sizes 50 and 63
Flow control is by means of a standard The R16 insert (1:1.6 area ratio) has a The R insert (1:2 area ratio) has a notch
cover with a stroke adjuster which limits notch for a fine metering (reduced gain) for a fine metering (reduced gain) flow
the stroke of any of the inserts and flow control function. control function. The F insert (area ratio
thereby limits the flow. 1:2) has a larger notch for more coarse
metering (high gain) flow control
function.
The A insert stroke adjuster cover is

available with three types of adjusters,
micrometer (M), micrometer with keylock
(K) or standard square end screw with
hex. locknut (W).
Adjustable Stroke Limiter and Sizes 16 to 40

Directional Functions: Sizes 16 to 63
CVCS-**-A
The adjustable limiting of the insert Cover
poppet opening restricts flow in both X AP
directions (A to B and B to A). Control is
from pilot port X. See Figure 20. B CVI-**-R16
Insert
A
Sizes 50 and 63 X
CVC(S)-**-A
Cover B
X AP
B CVI-**-F or
CVI-**-R A
A Insert
Figure 20
Adjustable Stroke Limiter and Check

Functions: Sizes 16 to 63 Sizes 16 to 40
The adjustable poppet lift limiter restricts CVCS-**-A

flow from A to B. The check function Cover
X AP
prevents flow from B to A. The X pilot
port of the cover is connected to the B B CVI-**-R16
port of the insert. See Figure 21.
Insert
A
Sizes 50 and 63
X
CVC(S)-**-A B
X AP Cover
B CVI-**-F or
CVI-**-R A
A Insert
Figure 21
27
333
Adjustable Stroke Limiter and Pilot Normally Open Function
(Directional) Function: Sizes 16 to 40
b A B
Stroke limiters are available with an ISO DG4V-3(S)-*A
P T Pilot valve
4401, size 03 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03) P A B T
interface for mounting a single-solenoid
CVCS-**-A1/A3
controlled DG4V-3(S) pilot valve. Cover as supplied
X Z1 Z2 Y
These type A1/A3 covers are supplied
AP1 AP2
configured for a “normally open”
function, i.e. the insert poppet is vented B CVI-**-R16
when the solenoid of the pilot valve is Insert
B
de-energized (with pilot pressure A
applied to port X).
Normally Closed Function
The opposite, “normally closed” (NC)
function, can be obtained by A
b A B
interchanging the orifice and plug in DG4V-3(S)-*A
P T Pilot valve
ports AP1/AP2. With this arrangement,
P A B T
the insert poppet is “normally closed”
(NC) and is open when the solenoid of CVCS-**-A1/A3
the pilot valve is energized (with pilot Cover
X Z1 Z2 Y
pressure applied to port X).
AP1 AP2
B CVI-**-R16
Insert
A
Figure 22
28
334
Model Codes - Check, Directional and Flow Restrictor
Functions - Sizes 16 to 40
CVCS Covers DIN 24342. This includes port usage For availability of covers by size and
changes to the D*, PC, W and W1* function see page 4. All features must
Vickers type “CVCS” cartridge covers functions from prior published be specified when ordering; those in
featured in this catalog conform to information for cover types ‘‘CVC.’’ brackets ( ) are optional or apply only to
installation requirements of ISO 7368 and specific models.
Metric Models
Metric bolt tappings and orifice threads; BSPF plugs. Mounting bolts supplied.
(F3-) CVCS - ** - *** (*) - B 2 9 (-*) - 1* - (NC) (-*** **)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Non-Metric Models
UNC bolt tappings; UNF orifice threads; SAE plugs; mounting bolts not supplied.
(F3-) CVCS - ** - *** (*) - S 2 (-*) - 1* - (NC) (-*** **)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13
1 Seal Material 5 Mounting bolt tappings for pilot 10 Design number, 1* series
F3 - Special seals. See ‘‘Fluids and valve
Subject to change. Installation
Seals’’ on page 16. For size 03 pilot valve, applicable to dimensions unchanged for design
Omit for standard seals. types A*, D*, DC*, W1*, W3*: numbers 10 to 19 inclusive.
1 - Inch threads
2 Model 3 - Metric threads 11 Normal function
CVCS - Cartridge valve cover to 6 Plugs and orifice threads NC = Normally closed
ISO 7368 Blank= Normally open
B -G (BSPF) threads for closure plugs;
metric plugs for orifices See page 124 for sizes of factory-fitted
3 Nominal size to ISO 7368 S -SAE threads for closure plugs; UNF standard orifices. Other orifice sizes and
(DIN 24342) threads for orifices locations can be fitted by special
16 - 06 (NG16) arrangement with your Vickers
25 - 08 (NG25) 7 Seals representative. Non-standard orifice
32 - 09 (NG32) 2 - Inch O-ring seals to ISO 3601 requirements should be defined as
40 - 10 (NG40) follows:
4 Function 8 Mounting bolts
12 Pilot control orifice location
A - Stroke adjuster (flow restrictor) 9 - Metric mounting bolts supplied
Specify port location for non-standard
A* - Stroke adjuster with mounting face
orifice, e.g. ‘‘AP’’, followed by orifice size
for size 03 pilot valve
9 Adjuster mechanism code, see 13 . Repeat as necessary for
B - Blanking cover
further non-standard requirements.
D*- Standard directional with mounting For all model types A, A* only
face for size 03 pilot valve For all sizes 13 Orifice size
DC*- Two check valves with mounting W - Wrench adjustment with hex
face for size 03 pilot valve locknut Specify non-standard orifice size code,
N - Basic For sizes 16, 25, 32 only see tables on page 125.
PC - Pilot operated check K - Micrometer adjuster with keylock
W - Pilot shuttle (ports X and Z1) M - Micrometer adjuster without lock
W1*- As type W with mounting face for
size 03 pilot valve
W3*- Pilot shuttle (ports X and B) with
mounting face for size 03 pilot valve
* Code for optional threads, see 5 .
29
335
Functions - Sizes 50 and 63
CVCS Covers For availability of covers by size and

function see page 4. All features must
Vickers type “CVCS” cartridge covers be specified when ordering; those in
featured in this catalog conform to brackets ( ) are optional or apply only to
installation requirements of ISO 7368 specific models.
and DIN 24342.
Metric Models
Metric bolt tappings and orifice threads; BSPF plugs. Mounting bolts supplied.
(F3-) CVCS - ** - *** (*) - B 2 (-*) - 1* - (NC) (-*** **)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Non-Metric Models
UNC bolt tappings; UNF orifice threads; SAE plugs; mounting bolts not supplied.
(F3-) CVCS - ** - *** (*) - S 2 (-*) - 1* - (NC) (-*** **)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1 Seal Material 5 Mounting bolt tappings for pilot 9 Design number, 1* series
F3 - Special seals. See ‘‘Fluids and valve
Seals’’ on page 16. For size 05 pilot valve, applicable to
dimensions unchanged for design
Omit for standard seals. type D* only:
numbers 10 to 19 inclusive.
2 - Inch threads
2 Model 5 - Metric threads
10 Normal function
CVCS - Cartridge valve cover to 6 Plugs and orifice threads NC = Normally closed
ISO 7368, A-S2 and N-S2 B -G (BSPF) threads for closure plugs; Blank= Normally open
options only metric plugs for orifices
CVC - Different pilot port usage and S -SAE threads for closure plugs; UNF See page 124 for sizes of factory-fitted
pilot port orientation to CVCS, threads for orifices standard orifices. Other orifice sizes and
A-B2, D2-S2, D5-B2 and N-B2 locations can be fitted by special
options only 7 arrangement with your Vickers
Seals
representative. Non-standard orifice
3 Nominal size to ISO 7368 2 - Inch O-ring seals to ISO 3601 requirements should be defined as
(DIN 24342) follows:
50 - 11 (NG50) 8 Adjuster mechanism
11 Pilot control orifice location
63 - 12 (NG63)
For model type A only
4 Function W - Wrench adjustment with hex Specify port location for non-standard
locknut orifice, e.g. ‘‘AP’’, followed by orifice size
A - Stroke adjuster (flow restrictor) code, see 11. Repeat as necessary for
D*- Standard directional with mounting further non-standard requirements.
face for size 05 pilot valve
N - Basic 12 Orifice size
* Code for optional threads, see 5 .
Specify non-standard orifice size code,
see tables on page 125.
30
336
Functions - Sizes 16 to 63
CVI Inserts
For availability of inserts by size and

function see page 5. All features must
be specified when ordering; those in
brackets ( ) are optional.
(F3-) CVI - ** - **** - * - ** (-**)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 Seal Material 5 Cracking pressure, bar (psi) 6 Design number, 1* & 4* series
F3 - Special seals. See ‘‘Fluids and For flow direction A to B Subject to change. Installation
Seals’’ on page 16. Sizes 16 to 40 dimensions unchanged for design
Omit for standard seals. Spring Insert code numbers 10 to 19 and 40 to 49 inclusive.
code D10 D105(V) Tables show availability by current
2 Model design number according to function and
L 0,31 (4.5) 0,33 (4.8) size.
CVI - Cartridge valve insert
M 1,55 (22.5) 1,65 (24)
H 3,1 (45) 3,3 (48) Sizes 16 to 40
3 Nominal size to ISO 7368
(DIN 24342) D10 40 design
Spring Insert code
16 - 06 (NG16) code D16, D20 R16 D105 40 design
25 - 08 (NG25) DC16 D105V 40 design
32 - 09 (NG32) D16 40 design
40 - 10 (NG40) L 0,5 (7.3) 0,6 (8.7) D20 10 design
50 - 11 (NG50) M 2,5 (36.3) 3,0 (43.5) DC16 40 design
63 - 12 (NG63) H 5,0 (73) 6,0 (87) R16 40 design
4 Function Sizes 50 and 63 Sizes 50 and 63

Sizes 16 to 40 Spring Insert code
code D11 D20, F, R D11 10 design
D10 - 1:1 ratio D20 10 design
D105 - 1:1.05 ratio F 10 design
L 0,31 (4) 0,5 (7.3)
D105V- 1:1.05 ratio with variable orifice R 10 design
M 1,4 (20) 2,5 (36.3)
plug
H 2,7 (39) 5,0 (73)
D16 - 1:1.6 ratio 7 Orifice size
D20 - 1:2 ratio
DC16 - 1:1.6 ratio direct check Specify non-standard orifice size code,
R16 - 1:1.6 ratio with damping see tables on page 125.
Sizes 50 and 63 See page 124 for sizes of standard

orifices factory-fitted to function type
D11 -1:1.1 ratio D105V. Other orifice sizes can be fitted
D20- 1:2 ratio by special arrangement with your Vickers
F - 1:2 ratio, flow restrictor representative.
R - 1:2 ratio with damping
Note: A nameplate is supplied with each
insert for fixing to the cover to identify the
insert in use.
31
337
Performance Data
Check, Directional and Flow Restrictor Functions
Unless otherwise stated, performances are based on petroleum oil at 36 cSt (168 SUS)
and at 50C (122F). For pressure drops at other viscosities, see page 127.
Pressure Drop/Flow Through Insert
(Flow from Port A to B)
= Rated flow point
CVI-16-C025; D10; D105; D105V CVI-25-C025; D10; D105; D105V; OD105

psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 10
10 10

0 5 0 5
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 L/min 0 200 400 600 800 1000 L/min
0 25 50 75 100 USgpm 0 100 200 300 USgpm

Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-32-C025; D10; D105; D105V; OD105 CVI-40-C025; D10; D105; D105V; OD105
psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
200 20
0
10 10
100 10

5 0 5
0 0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 L/min 0 500 1000 1500 2000 L/min
0 100 200 300 400 USgpm 0 100 200 300 400 500 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-50-D11 CVI-63-D11
psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 10
10 10
5
0 0 5
0 0
0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 L/min 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 L/min
0 200 400 600 800 USgpm 0 500 1000 1500 USgpm

Flow rate Flow rate
32
338
= Rated flow point
CVI-16-D16; DC16; D20 CVI-25-D16; DC16; D20

psi bar psi bar
30 20 30 20
0 0
D20
15 15
20 20 D20
0 0
10 10
D16;
10 D16; 10 DC16

0 5 DC16 0 5
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 L/min 0 200 400 600 800 1000 L/min
0 25 50 75 100 USgpm 0 100 200 300 USgpm

Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-32-D16; DC16; D20 CVI-40-D16; DC16; D20
psi bar psi bar
300 20 30 20
0
15 20 15
20 D20
0 D20
0
10 10
D16;
10 DC16 10
D16;
0 5 0 5
DC16
0 0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 L/min 0 500 1000 1500 2000 L/min
0 100 200 300 400 USgpm 0 100 200 300 400 500 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-50-D20 CVI-63-D20
psi bar psi bar
30 20 30 20
0 0
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 10
10 10

0 5 0 5
0 0
0 600 1200 1800 2400 3000 L/min 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 L/min
0 200 400 600 800 USgpm 0 500 1000 1500USgpm

Flow rate Flow rate
33
339
= Rated flow point
CVI-16-R16 CVI-25-R16
psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 10
10 10

0 5 0 5
0 0
0 100 200 300 400 L/min 0 200 400 600 800 1000 L/min
0 25 50 75 100 USgpm 0 100 200 300 USgpm

Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-32-R16 CVI-40-R16
psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 10
10 10

0 5 0 5
0 0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 L/min 0 500 1000 1500 2000 L/min
0 100 200 300 400 USgpm 0 100 200 300 400 500 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
CVI-50-F; R CVI-63-F; R
psi bar psi bar
300 20 300 20
15 15
20 20
0 0
10 CVI-50-F 10
10 10 CVI-63-F
0 5 0 5
CVI-50-R CVI-63-R
0 0
0 300 600 900 1200 1500 L/min 0 300 600 900 1200 1500 1800 L/min
0 100 200 300 400 USgpm 0 100 200 300 400 500 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
34
340
Covers for Blanking ‘‘B’’ and Basic ‘‘N’’ Functions
CVCS-**-B CVCS-**-N
Sizes 16 to 40 Sizes 16 to 40
CVC(S)-**-N
Dimensions Sizes 50 and 63
mm (inches) X Z1 AP Z2 Y X AP
(CVC = B2
CVCS = S2)
3,0
A sq. (0.12) A sq.
Nameplates: max.
Orientation pin CVC(S) Orientation pin
and 2 holes for
attachment of
CVI (insert) 3,0
Z1 (0.12)
nameplate
max.
X Y X
3,0 Location of
(0.12) Z2
standard
max. orifice X
E E
B B
C C
Mounting Mounting
D face D face
Nameplate: CVCS---
2 holes for attachment of CVI (insert) nameplate See page 128 for information on
bolt sizes, bolt kits and assembly
torques
For thread sizes and rifice kits see page 124.
Minimum clearance for removal of cover from manifold.
Size A B C D max. E Location of nameplates

Tolerance Type B Type N
–0,1 (0.004)
16 66,8 (2.63) 35,0 (1.38) 26,0 (1.02) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0 (0.47) Side Z2 Side Z1
25 85,5 (3.37) 42,0 (1.65) 25,0 (0.98) 10,5 (0.413) 22,0 (0.90) Side Z2 Side Z1
32 102,5 (4.04) 51,0 (2.01) 30,0 (1.18) 13,0 (0.512) 31,0 (1.22) Side Z2 Side Z1
40 124,5 (4.90) 61,0 (2.40) 35,0 (1.38) 15,0 (0.591) 33,0 (1.30) Side Z2 Side Z1
50 141,0 (5.55) 70,0 (2.76) 44,0 (1.73) 18,0 (0.709) 34,0 (1.34) – Side Z1
63 181,0 (7.12) 86,0 (3.38) 48,0 (1.89) 20,0 (0.787) 43,0 (1.70) – Side Z1
35
341
Covers for Pilot Operated Check ‘‘PC’’ and
Shuttle ‘‘W’’ Functions
CVCS-**-PC CVCS-**-W
X Z1 AP Y X Z1 AP Z2
3,0 (0.12) 3,0

max. A sq. 3,0 (0.12) (0.12) A sq. Orientation pin
max. max.
Orientation pin
Location for
Profile for
optional orifice X
size 16 only 3,0 3,0
(0.12) (0.12)
max. Profile for max.
37,5 (1.48) Z1 size 16 Z1
only
X Y X
48,0 (1.89) Nameplates: CVCS Z2

and 2 holes for
attachment of CVI 3,0
(insert) nameplate (0.12)
max.
48,0
(1.89)
Location for
Profile for optional orifice Z2
size 16 only Nameplate: CVCS---
E E
B
B
C C
Mounting Mounting
D face D face
See page 128 for information on

bolt sizes, bolt kits and assembly
torques
2 holes for attachment of CVI
(insert) nameplate
For thread sizes and orifice kits see page 124.

Minimum clearance for removal of cover from manifold.

Tolerance Type PC Type W
–0,1 (0.004)
16-PC 66,8 (2.63) 35,0 (1.38) 26,0 (1.02) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0 (0.47) Side X Side Y
16-W 65,0 (2.56) 35,0 (1.38) 26,0 (1.02) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0 (0.47) Side X Side Y
25 85,5 (3.37) 42,0 (1.65) 25,0 (0.98) 10,5 (0.413) 22,0 (0.90) Side Y Side Z1
32 102,5 (4.04) 51,0 (2.01) 30,0 (1.18) 13,0 (0.512) 31,0 (1.22) Side Y Side Z1
40 124,5 (4.90) 61,0 (2.40) 35,0 (1.38) 15,0 (0.591) 33,0 (1.30) Side Y Side Z1
36
342
Covers for Directional/Flow Control Functions ‘‘D(C)1/D(C)3’’
CVCS-**-D1 P A B T CVCS-**-DC1 P A B T
CVCS-**-D3 CVCS-**-DC3
X Z1 AP1 AP2 Z2 Y
X Z1 AP Z2 Y
3,0 (0.12) A sq. 3,0 (0.12)
max. Orientation max.
3,0 pin Z Interface to ISO 4401 size 03
1
(0.12) (ANSI/B93.7M-D03) 4 mounting holes tapped
CVCS-**-D1/D3 only: max. according to model code on page 29:
Location for optional P For = 1: #10-24 UNC-2B x 12,7 (0.5) deep
orifice Z1 For = 3: M5-6H x 12,0 (0.47) deep
X B A Y For port tappings for plug/optional orifices
CVCS-**-D1/D3 only:
Location for optional T
(according to functional symbol),
orifice Z2 see page 125
3,0
(0.12) Profile for
max. Z2 size 16 only
85,2 (3.35)
CVCS-16-****
DG4V-3(S)-2AL/BL DG4V-3(S)-2A/B
DC sols: 110,0 (4.33) DC sols: 110,0 (4.33)
E
AC sols: 100,0 (3.94) AC sols: 100,0 (3.94)
64,0 (2.52) max. for coil removal
E
Size 16
Pilot mounting interface offset by 11,0
91,0 (0.43) to Y port side
(3.58)
60,0
(2.36)Ę
Nameplate: CVCS---
2 holes for attachment of CVI (insert)

B
C nameplate
Mounti See page 128 for information on bolt sizes,
ng face D bolt kits and assembly torques
Z2 Z2
A
For thread sizes and orifice kits see page 124. Plugged
Minimum clearance for removal of cover from port AP2 X Y X Y
manifold.
Size 03 pilot control valve to be ordered
separately. Recommended model Vickers Location for Fixed
DG4V-3(S), see catalog GB-C-2015. optional Z1 Z1 orifice
ĘDG4V-3(S) with coil type U. AP
DG4V-3(S) with coil type F and terminal box. orifice AP1 View on arrow A:
View on arrow A:
Type D1/D3 Type DC1/DC3

Tolerance Type D* Type DC*
–0,1 (0.004)
16 65,0 (2.56) 48,0 (1.89) 36,0 (1.42) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0 (0.47) Side Z2 Side Z2
25 87,0 (3.43) 48,0 (1.89) 25,0 (0.98) 10,5 (0.413) 22,0 (0.90) Side Y Side Z2
32 101,8 (4.0) 48,0 (1.89) 30,0 (1.18) 13,0 (0.512) 31,0 (1.22) Side Z2 Side Z2
40 124,6 (4.91) 58,0 (2.28) 35,0 (1.38) 15,0 (0.591) 33,0 (1.30) Side Z2 Side Z2
37
343
Covers for Directional and Flow Control Functions ‘‘D2/D5’’
CVC-**-D2-S2 P A B T
CVC-**-D5-B2
Sizes 50 and 63
X Z2 AP Z1 Y
Location for optional orifice X
3,0 (0.12)
3,0 (0.12) A sq. max.
max. Orientation pin
3,0 X
(0.12)
max. Location for optional orifice Z1
P
Location for A B Interface to ISO 4401 size 05
optional Z2 Z1 (ANSI/B93.7M-D05)
T T
orifice Z2 4 mounting holes tapped according to
model code on page :30
For = 2: 1/4-20 UNC-2B x 16 (0.63)
deep
Y For = 5: M6-6H x 16,0 (0.63) deep
For tappings for optional orifices,
see page 125
E DC sols: 312,0 (12.3) For coil removal

AC sols: 246,0 (9.7) DC: 110,0 (4.33) max.
AC: 75,0 (2.95) max.
89,0
(3.5)
Nameplate: CVC---
2 holes for attachment of CVI (insert)
B
C nameplate
Mounting See page 128 for information on bolt sizes,
face D bolt kits and assembly torques
Y Size 05 pilot control valve to be ordered separately.

Location of
Typical model Vickers DG4V-5, see GB-C-2281.
orifice AP1
Z1 Alternatively, for system pressures up to 210 bar
(3000 psi) max., and acceptable response times
For thread sizes and orifice kits see Z2 for the cartridge valve, a size 03 pilot valve may be
page 124. fitted using Vickers interface adaptor, model
Minimum clearance for removal of DGAM-3-01 (GB-C- 2425).
cover from manifold. X
Size A B C D max. E
Tolerance
–0,1 (0.004)
50 141,0 (5.55) 68,0 (2.68) 44,0 (1.73) 18,0 (0.709) 36,0 (1.42)
63 181,0 (7.12) 83,0 (3.27) 48,0 (1.89) 20,0 (0.787) 45,0 (1.77)
38
344
‘‘W1*’’ and ‘‘W3*’’ Covers with Size 03 Pilot Valve Interface
P A B T P A B T
CVCS-**-W11 CVCS-**-W31
CVCS-**-W13 CVCS-**-W33
X Z1 AP Z2 Y X Z1 AP Y
3,0 (0.12)
max. A sq. 3,0 (0.12)
3,0 max.
(0.12) Z1
Interface to ISO 4401 size max. Orientation pin
03 (ANSI/B93.7M-D03)
4 mounting holes tapped P
according to model code on Profile for size 16 only
page 29: X B A Y
For = 1: #10-24 UNC-2B
x 12,7 (0.5) deep Profile for T
For = 3: M5-6H x 12,0 size 16 only
(0.47) deep
For port tappings for Z2
plug/optional orifices 3,0
8,4 (0.33)
(according to functional (0.12)
94,7 (3.73)
symbol), see page 125 max.
CVCS-16-W31/W33
DG4V-3(S)-2AL/BL DG4V-3(S)-2A/B
DC sols: 110,0 (4.33) DC sols: 110,0 (4.33) 64,0 (2.52)
Size 16: AC sols: 100,0 (3.94) AC sols: 100,0 (3.94) max. for E
Pilot mounting interface offset coil removal
by 11,0 (0.43) to Y port side
E
91,0
(3.57)
Nameplate: CVCS--- 60,0
(2.36)Ę
2 holes for attachment

of CVI (insert) nameplate B
Location for C
optional orifice Z1 Mounting
D face
Z2
Y See page 128 Y

for information on bolt sizes, A Location for
bolt kits and assembly optional orifice X
X X
torques
View on arrow A View on arrow A
Z1 Type W11/W13 Type W31/W33 Z1
For thread sizes and orifice kits see Size 03 pilot control valve to be ĘDG4V-3(S) with coil type U.
page 124. ordered separately. Recommended DG4V-3(S) with coil type F and
Minimum clearance for removal of model Vickers DG4V-3(S), see terminal box.
cover from manifold. GB-C-2015.

Tolerance Type W1* Type W3*
–0,1 (0.004)
16 65,0 (2.56) 48,0 (1.89) 36,0 (1.42) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0 (0.47) Side Z2 Side Z2
25 85,5 (3.37) 57,0 (2.24) 25,0 (0.98) 10,5 (0.413) 22,0 (0.90) Side X Side Z2
32 102,5 (4.04) 60,0 (2.36) 30,0 (1.18) 13,0 (0.512) 31,0 (1.22) Side X Side Z2
40 124,5 (4.90) 58,0 (2.28) 35,0 (1.38) 15,0 (0.591) 33,0 (1.30) Side X Side Z2
39
345
Covers with Stroke Limiters ‘‘A’’ for Flow Control Functions
CVCS-**-A Details of Stroke Adjusters

Sizes 16 to 40 For cover types CVC(S)-**-A, A1, A3
CVC(S)-**-A
Sizes 50 and 63 Types K and M
(CVC = B2 X AP Sizes 16, 25 and 32 only
CVCS = S2)
Type K:
Nameplates: CVC(S)--- Adjustment of valve 43,0 (1.69) for key
and 2 holes for setting is only possible insertion type K only
attachment of CVI while key is inserted and
3,0 (0.12) turned to engage driving
max. A sq. (insert) nameplate
For exact location, pin. When key is
see table removed, adjuster knob 74,5 (2.93)
Side Z1 can be freely spun and max.
does not engage with
Orientation mechanism. Top face of
pin 3,0 (0.12) cover
max.
X
Type W Type W
Sizes 16 and 25 Size 32 (CVCS-**-A1/A3 only)
Size 32 (CVCS-**-A only) Size 40
Size 32: A = 36,0 (1.42)
Side Z2 Size 40: A = 43,0 (1.7)
E Thread Thread Adjuster
Adjuster
M14 x 1,5 M14 x 1,5 10,0 (0.39) sq.
For adjuster 10,0 (0.39) sq.
options and
details, see 54,0 A max.
this page (2.12)
F Top face of
cover
Hex. locknut Hex. locknut
B
C 22,0 (0.87) A/F 22,0 (0.87) A/F
Mounting
D face
G
Type W Type W
Size 50 Size 63
See page128 for Thread Adjuster
information on bolt Adjuster Thread
M24 x 1,5 15,0 (0.59) sq
sizes, bolt kits and 15,0 (0.59) sq. M27 x 2
assembly torques
66,0 (2.6)
max.
Minimum clearance for removal of
Top face of
cover from manifold. For adjuster
type K allow 43,0 (1.69) for key cover
Hex. locknut Hex. locknut
removal, see this page. 36,0 (1.42) A/F 38,0 (1.5) A/F
Size A B C D max. E F max. for G Location

Tolerance adjuster type Max. Min. of
–0,1 (0.004) K&M W nameplate
16 65,0 (2.56) 35,0 (1.38) 26,0 (1.02) 8,0 (0.315) 12,0(0.47) 109,5(4.31) 89,0(3.50) 31,0(1.22) 26,0(1.02) Side Z1
25 85,5 (3.37) 42,0 (1.65) 25,0 (0.98) 10,5 (0.413) 22,0(0.90) 116,5(4.59) 96,0(3,78) 47,0(1.85) 32,0(1.26) Side Z1
32 102,5 (4.04) 51,0 (2.01) 30,0 (1.18) 13,0 (0.512) 31,0(1.22) 125,5(4.94) 105,0(4.13) 57,0(2.24) 43,0(1.69) Side Z1
40 124,5 (4.90) 61,0 (2.40) 35,0 (1.38) 15,0 (0.591) 33,0(1.30) – 127,6(5.02) 76,0(2.99) 62,0(2.44) Side Z1
50 141,0 (5.55) 70,0 (2.76) 44,0 (1.73) 18,0 (0.709) 34,0(1.34) – 127,0(5.0) 81,0(3.19) 56,0(2.20) Side Z2
63 181,0 (7.12) 86,0 (3.38) 48,0 (1.89) 20,0 (0.787) 43,0(1.70) – 152,0(5.98) 108,5(4.27) 76,5(3.01) Side Z2
40
346
Covers for Directional and Flow Control Functions ‘‘A1/A3’’
As supplied for As can be modified for Normally Open

CVCS-**-A1 Normally Closed function function: interchange plug/orifice in AP1/AP2
CVCS-**-A3 P A B T P A B T
Sizes 16 to 32
For size 40 see next page
X Z1 AP1AP2Z2 Y X Z1 AP1 AP2Z2 Y

H
Orientation A sq.
pin Z1
Z2 Plugged port AP2
Location for (as supplied)
optional orifice Z1 X Y
Location for X Y
optional orifice Z2
3,0 Location of fixed orifice
(0.12) Z1 AP1 (as supplied)
max.
Z2 View on arrow A
Type W adjuster as fitted
to sizes 16, 25 and 32.
See page for 40:
91,0
–Type W adjuster fitted to J 64,0 (2.52)
(3.57)
larger models. max. for coil removal
E
60,0
–Types K and M adjusters
(sizes 16, 25 and 32 only). (2.36)Ę 4 mounting holes tapped according
–Adjuster wrench sizes. Type W to model code on page 29:
adjuster For = 1: #10-24 UNC-2B x 12,7 (0.5)
DG4V-3(S)-2A deep
DC sols: For = 3: M5-6H x 12,0 (0.47) deep
Nameplate: CVCS 178,75 (7.04)
AC sols:
168,75 (6.64) Datum for
F A
95,0 size 03
interface P T For port tappings
(3.74) for optional orifices
75,5 see page 125
(2.97 ) B
C
Mounting
D face
Interface to ISO 4401
See page 128 for information on bolt sizes,
G size 03
bolt kits and assembly torques
(ANSI/B93.7M-D03)
2 holes for attachment of CVI (insert) nameplate
For thread sizes and orifice kits see page 124. Size 03 pilot control valve to be ordered
Minimum clearance for removal of cover from separately. Recommended model Vickers
manifold. For adjuster type K allow 43,0 (1.69) DG4V-3(S), see GB-C-2015.
for key removal, see page 40 . Ę DG4V-3(S) with coil type U.
A DG4V-3(S) with coil type F and terminal box.
Size A C D max. E F for adjuster type: G H J
Tolerance K&M W Max. Min.
–0,1 (0.004)
16 65,2 26,0 8,0 12,0 167,5 148,0 31,0 26,0 82,8 50,0
(2.57) (1.02) (0.315) (0.47) (6.59) (5.83) max. (1.22) (1.02) (3.25) (1.97)
25 85,8 25,0 10,5 25,0 167,5 148,0 47,0 32,0 99,5 57,0
(3.38) (0.98) (0.413) (0.98) (6.59) (5.83) max. (1.85) (1.26) (3.92) (2.24)
32 102,5 30,0 13,0 31,0 167,5 148,0 57,0 43,0 113,9 63,0
(4.04) (1.18) (0.512) (1.22) (6.59) (5.83) max. (2.24) (1.69) (4.48) (2.48)
41
347
CVCS-**-A1 As supplied for As can be modified for Normally Open
Normally Closed function function: interchange plug/orifice in AP1/AP2
CVCS-**-A3
Size 40 P A B T P A B T
X Z1 AP1AP2 Z2 Y X Z1 AP1 AP2 Z2 Y
4,5 136,4 (5.37)

(0.18)
max. 124,5 sq. (4.90) Location for
Orientation optional orifice Z1
pin Z1
4,5
(0.18) Size 50:
Lifting eyebolts, Z2 Plugged port
max. AP2
M10, supplied
(as supplied)
X Y
X Y
4,5 Z1 Location of fixed

(0.18) orifice AP1
max. Location for Z2 (as supplied)
View on arrow A
optional orifice Z2
4 mounting holes tapped according
74,0 91,0 to model code on page 29:
(2.91) (3.58) 64,0 (2.52)
For = 1: #10-24 UNC-2B x 12,7 (0.5)
60,0 max. for
deep
34,0 (1.34)l (2.36)Ę coil removal
For = 3: M5-6H x 12,0 (0.47) deep
See page 40 for
adjuster wrench DG4V-3(S)-2A
sizes
DC sols: 178.75 (7.04)
135,0 AC sols: 168.75 (6.64) Datum for For port
A
(5.31) 95,0 size 03 tappings for
(3.74) P T
interface optional
75,5
35,0 (2.97) B orifices see
(1.38) page 125
Mounting
face
Interface to ISO 4401 size 03
15,0/14,9 See page 128 for information on bolt (ANSI/B93.7M-D03)
(0.591/0.587) sizes, bolt kits and assembly torques
Nameplate:
2 holes for attachment of CVI (insert) nameplate
CVCS---
76,0 (2.95) max. A
62,0 (2.44) min.
For thread sizes and orifice kits see page 124. Size 03 pilot control valve to be ordered separately.
Recommended model Vickers DG4V-3(S), see GB-C-2015.
Minimum clearance for removal of cover from manifold. For
adjuster type K allow 43,0 (1.69) for key removal, see page Ę DG4V-3(S) with coil type U.
40 .
DG4V-3(S) with coil type F and terminal box.
42
348
Seal Kits
These seal kits are for the “B29“ models only.
Product Standard F3
Dynamic cover
CVCS-ZD(3) 16/25/32 02-156955 02-156956
CVCS-ZD(3) 40 02-156953 02-156954
CVCS-ZD(3) 50 02-156951 02-156952
CVCS-ZD(3) 63 02-156967 02-156968
Dynamic insert
CVI-16-ZD(N)105-10 02-156965 02-156966
CVI-25-ZD(N)105-10 02-156963 02-156964
CVI-32-ZD(N)105-10 02-156961 02-156962
CVI-40-ZD(N)105-10 02-156959 02-156960
CVI-50-ZD(N)105-10 02-156957 02-156958
CVI-63-ZD(N)105-10 02-156969 02-156970
Standard inserts (incl. Valvistor and OD)

CVI-16-** 456173 02-157617
CVI-25-** 456926 02-157618
CVI-32-** 479449 02-157619
CVI-40-** 478732 514808
CVI-50-** 478733 02-157620
CVI-63-** 456798 02-157621
Units (CVU-**)
Size 16 02-157167 02-157168
Size 25 02-157536 02-157537
Size 32 02-157615 02-157616
Size 40 02-157679 02-157680
CVU-50-SWD3-** 02-157675 02-157676
CVU-63-SWD3-** 02-157677 02-157678
Units include CVU-**-ZSWD3, -SWD(3) and -EFP1
Product Standard: F3:

Complete Interface only Complete Interface only
Standard cover assemblies (incl. Valvistor and OD)

CVCS-16-** 02-157672 02-157613 02-157671 02-157614
CVCS-25-** 02-157674 456925 02-157673 02-157612
CVCS-32-** 02-157905 02-310967 02-157906 02-310968
CVCS-40-** 02-157712 02-310969 02-157713 02-310970
CVC(S)-50-** 02-310971 02-310972 02-310973 02-310974
CVC(S)-63-** 02-310975 456799 02-310976 02-310977
130
349
TEST COUPLING EMA3/1/4EDCF

Ermeto Original
SensoControl
Diagnostic
Equipment/
EO Test Points
351
EMA 1/EMA 3-Test Point

fitting
– For pressure monitoring and checking on high, low nad Differences between EMA 1 and EMA 3 types
negative pressure systems. a) sealing system (see previous section)
– For bleeding cylinders and hydraulic systems. b) Test hose connection by plug-in coupling in EMA 1
– For taking samples. Test hose connection by threaded connection in EMA 3
c) Working pressures
Advantages:
Coupling at system pressure level Working pressure
Leakproof connection before ball valve is open – EMA 3 types up to 630 bar
Simple connection to measuring, control and switching – EMA 1 types up to 400 bar
devices Max. working pressure 630 bar for GMA, VKA and
Self locking metal guard cap EMA… the recommended working pressure of fitting
manufacturer has to be applied
Sealing system of the primary seal: Joining under pressure up to 400 bar max.
EMA 1 by ball non-return valve.
EMA 3 by cone seal with O-ring.
The new EMA 3 sealing system garanties minimum leak- Materials and Temperatures:
age rates even for pneumatic and gas applications (see Metal parts: Steel, Stainless Steel on request
application). Ball: Stainless Steel
Seals:
The screw-on Cap (EMA 3), and pin lock (EMA 1) types NBR (Temperature range –20 to +100°C)
both employ an O-ring seal as secondary sealing with the FPM (Temperature range –20 to +200°C)
hose attached. EPDM Ethylene Propylene (for Break Fluid)
(Temperature range –40 to +150°C)
Hose:
Polyamide (Temperature range:
H
–35°C … 100°C max.)
EMA 1
Seals:
– Steel Types NBR (Perbunan)
– Stainless Steel FPM (Viton) only
Media:
Suitable for hydraulic oils and other mineral oil based
fluids (Please pay attention to the sealing materials
used!)
For use in conjunction with other liquid media please
consult Parker
Approvals
EMA 3 DVGW for EMA3/8X1OR, EMA3/10X1OR, EMA3 1/8NPT,
EMA 3 1/4 NPT
352
EMA 3 Test Point with threaded connection M 16×2

Male thread: BSP, metric
Sealing: O-ring, fig. A/Eolastic sealing, fig. B and C, cutting face, fig. D and E
Fig. A M16×2 Fig. B M16×2 Fig. C M16×2
Parker E O EMA3
Parker EO EMA3 Parker E O EMA3
H
H
H
SW17
S1
S1 S1
L
Eolastic sealing Eolastic sealing
I
I
I
O-ring
G G G
D3 D3 D3
0,5 + 0,15
2,5 + 0,2
+0,05
d3 30°
G
min.
9
13
Fig. F M16×2 Fig. D M16×2 Fig. E M16×2
Parker E O EMA3
Parker E O EMA3
Parker E O EMA3
H
H
H
SW17
S1 S1 S1
L
Cutting face
O-ring
I
Cutting face
I
G G G I
Iso 6149 D3 D3 D3
PN Pmax G S1 I L H D3 Form Part no. Part no.

(bar) (bar) Steel stainless steel
630 700 M8×1 17 8.5 46 9.5 A EMA3/8×1OR
630 700 M10×1 17 9.8 47 11.5 A EMA3/10×1OR EMA3/M10OR71
630 700 M14×1.5 19 11.0 49 18.8 F EMA3/14×1.5ISO EMA3/M14ISO71
400 630 M10×1 17 8.0 45 14.0 D EMA3/10×1
400 630 M12×1.5 17 12.0 49 17.0 D EMA3/12×1.5
400 630 M14×1.5 19 12.0 49 19.0 D EMA3/14×1.5
400 630 M16×1.5 22 12.0 49 21.0 D EMA3/16×1.5
400 630 G1/8 17 8.0 45 14.0 D EMA3/1/8
400 630 G1/4 19 12.0 49 18.0 D EMA3/1/4
400 630 G3/8 22 12.0 49 22.0 E EMA3/3/8
400 630 G1/2 27 14.0 24.5 49 26.0 E EMA3/1/2
630 700 G1/8 17 8.0 45 14.0 B EMA3/1/8ED EMA3/1/8ED71
630 700 G1/4 19 12.0 49 19.0 B EMA3/1/4ED EMA3/1/4ED71
630 700 G3/8 22 12.0 49 22.0 B EMA3/3/8ED EMA3/3/8ED71
630 700 M10×1 17 10.0 47 14.0 B EMA3/10×1ED EMA3/M10ED71
630 700 M12×1.5 17 12.0 49 17.0 B EMA3/12×1.5ED EMA3/M12ED71
400 630 M14×1.5 19 12.0 49 19.0 B EMA3/14×1.5ED EMA3/M14ED71
O-Ring of material NBR (steel); FPM (stainless steel)
353
CHECK VALVE RHZ16SREDOMDCF

Ermeto Original
Valves
355
Valves
RHD/V/Z – Non-return valve
LW
5 4 3 2 1 6
Item 1: cone
Item 2: packing disc
Item 3: top disc
Item 4: spring
Item 5: passage disc with guide pin
Item 6: Eolastic-sealing
LW = Inlet diameter (mm)
RHD RHV RHZ
Characteristics: Brass-CuZn35Ni2 (SoMs59 material 2.0540) with internal

parts of 1.4571 (on request).
Sealing achieved by using a 90° cone with a packing
washer of synthetic material. Valve has a lift stop
therefore safe free outlet. Shock-absorbing and muffled
Assembly:
opening. No reduction of cross section. Maximum flow See Parker EO assembly instructions.
velocity not more than 8 m/sec (for higher flow velocities Packaging:
special tests are required). Sealing of male stud thread All non-return valves dust-proof packed.
by Eolastic soft seal with types RHV and RHZ.
Purpose:
Opening pressure: Hydraulic oil, not easily inflammable hydraulic fluids
Approx. 1 bar (on request also 0.5–2 and 3 bar are (but not HFC group; for HFD group; seals made of FPM
available; please specify for order). For pressure see are necessary), compressed air (please indicate with
appropriate tables. Tolerance of opening pressure: order).
± 20 %. Not useable for steam, oxygen or combustible/explosive
gases.
Material: Corrosion inducing media. For use with water, please
indicate kind of water and any additives.
Steel zinc-plated (A3C), seals of NBR (Perbunan).
On request of FPM (Viton).
Stainless steel (71), seals of FPM (Viton).
G6 Catalogue 4100-2/UK
356
Valves
RHD Non return valve

EO tube end / EO tube end
S3 S1 S2
l1
L1
Series Tube PN Pmax S1 S2 S3 L1 I1 DN I.D. Weight

O.D. (bar) (bar) Size bore mm gr./1 piece
L 06 250 315 17 14 17 58.0 29.0 4 3.5 69
08 250 315 19 17 19 59.0 30.0 6 5.5 89
10 250 315 22 19 24 69.5 40.5 8 7.5 146
12 250 315 27 22 30 72.5 43.5 10 9.5 223
15 250 315 27 27 32 77.5 47.5 12 11.5 284
18 160 250 36 32 36 83.5 51.5 16 14.0 424
22
28
35
160
100
100
250
160
160
41
50
60
36
41
50
46
55
60
93.5
102.5
117.5
61.5
69.5
74.5
20
25
32
18.0
23.0
29.0
641
928
1341
G
42 100 160 65 60 70 119.0 74.0 32 29.0 2010
S 06 400 500 19 17 19 63.5 34.5 3 3.5 108
08 400 500 19 19 19 63.5 34.5 4 3.5 119
10 400 500 22 22 24 72.5 40.5 6 5.5 188
12 400 500 24 24 27 74.5 42.5 8 7.5 223
14 315 400 27 27 32 82.5 47.5 10 9.5 324
16 315 400 32 30 36 86.5 50.5 12 11.5 428
20 250 400 41 36 46 97.5 54.5 16 15.0 731
25 250 315 46 46 50 106.5 58.5 20 19.0 1076
30 250 315 60 50 60 122.5 69.5 25 24.0 1630
38 250 315 65 60 70 136.5 75.5 32 29.0 2362
Series Tube Dry Technology Dry Technology

O.D. EO-2 steel DPR steel EO-2 stainless steel DPR stainless steel
L 06 RHD06ZLA3C RHD06LA3C RHD06ZL71 RHD06L71
08 RHD08ZLA3C RHD08LA3C RHD08ZL71 RHD08L71
S 06 RHD06ZSA3C RHD06SA3C RHD06ZS71 RHD06S71
08 RHD08ZSA3C RHD08SA3C RHD08ZS71 RHD08S71
Without nut and ring:
Example → RHD06LOMDA3C RHD06LOMDA3C RHD06LOMD71 RHD06LOMD71
357
Valves
RHV-R-ED Non return valve

EO tube end / Male BSPP with Eolastic seal
S2 S3 S1
d7
G
i
l2
Eolastic
L2 sealing
Series Tube BSPP thread PN Pmax S1 S2 S3 L2 I2 i d7 DN I.D. Weight

O.D. G (bar) (bar) Size bore mm gr./1 piece
L 06 G 1/8 A 250 315 17 14 17 42.5 28.0 8 14 4 3.5 62
08 G 1/4 A 250 315 19 17 19 44.5 30.0 12 19 6 5.5 80
10 G 1/4 A 250 315 22 19 24 53.0 38.5 12 19 8 7.5 126
12 G 3/8 A 250 315 27 22 30 57.0 42.5 12 22 10 9.5 204
15 G 1/2 A 250 315 27 27 32 60.5 45.5 14 27 12 11.5 253
18 G 1/2 A 160 250 36 32 36 66.0 50.0 14 27 16 14.0 360
22 G 3/4 A 160 250 41 36 46 71.0 55.0 16 32 20 18.0 532
28 G1A 100 160 50 41 55 79.5 63.0 18 40 25 23.0 807
35 G 1 1/4 A 100 160 60 50 60 90.5 69.0 20 50 32 29.0 1178
42 G 1 1/2 A 100 160 65 60 70 91.0 68.5 22 55 32 29.0 1798
S 06 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 17 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 3 3.5 92
08 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 19 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 4 3.5 97
10 G 3/8 A 400 500 22 22 24 54.0 38.0 12 22 6 5.5 165
12 G 3/8 A 400 500 24 24 27 57.0 41.0 12 22 8 7.5 191
14 G 1/2 A 315 400 27 27 32 62.0 44.5 14 27 10 9.5 277
16 G 1/2 A 315 400 32 30 36 66.0 48.0 14 27 12 11.5 366
20 G 3/4 A 250 400 41 36 46 73.5 52.0 16 32 16 15.0 631
25 G1A 250 315 46 46 50 78.5 54.5 18 40 20 19.0 863
30 G 1 1/4 A 250 315 60 50 60 90.5 64.0 20 50 25 24.0 1403
38 G 1 1/2 A 250 315 65 60 70 100.0 69.5 22 55 32 29.0 1969

L 06 RHV06ZLREDA3C RHV06LREDA3C RHV06ZLRED71 RHV06LRED71
08 RHV08ZLREDA3C RHV08LREDA3C RHV08ZLRED71 RHV08LRED71
S 06 RHV06ZSREDA3C RHV06SREDA3C RHV06ZSRED71 RHV06SRED71
08 RHV08ZSREDA3C RHV08SREDA3C RHV08ZSRED71 RHV08SRED71
20 RHV20ZSREDA3C RHV20SREDA3C RHV20ZSRED71 RHV20ZRED71
Example → RHV06LREDOMDA3C RHV06LREDOMDA3C RHV06LREDOMD71 RHV06LREDOMD71
358
Valves
RHZ-R-ED Non return valve

Male BSPP with Eolastic seal / EO tube end S3 S1 S2
d7
G
i
l2
Eolastic sealing L2

L 06 G 1/8 A 250 315 17 14 17 41.0 26.5 8 14 4 3.5 55
08 G 1/4 A 250 315 19 17 19 43.0 28.5 12 19 6 5.5 83
10 G 1/4 A 250 315 22 19 24 53.0 38.5 12 19 8 7.5 125
12 G 3/8 A 250 315 27 22 30 55.0 40.5 12 22 10 9.5 190
15 G 1/2 A 250 315 27 27 32 57.5 42.5 14 27 12 11.5 234
18 G 1/2 A 160 250 36 32 36 64.0 48.0 14 27 16 14.0 342
22
28
35
G 3/4 A
G1A
G 1 1/4 A
160
100
100
250
160
160
41
50
60
36
41
50
46
55
60
72.0
80.5
91.5
56.0
64.0
70.0
16
18
20
32
40
50
20
25
32
18.0
23.0
29.0
534
800
1185
G
42 G 1 1/2 A 100 160 65 60 70 93.0 70.5 22 55 32 29.0 1830
S 06 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 17 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 3 3.5 91
08 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 19 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 4 3.5 97
10 G 3/8 A 400 500 22 22 24 54.0 38.0 12 22 6 5.5 161
12 G 3/8 A 400 500 24 24 27 57.0 41.0 12 22 8 7.5 190
14 G 1/2 A 315 400 27 27 32 61.0 43.5 14 27 10 9.5 278
16 G 1/2 A 315 400 32 30 36 64.0 46.0 14 27 12 11.5 348
20 G 3/4 A 250 400 41 36 46 71.5 50.0 16 32 16 15.0 634
25 G1A 250 315 46 46 50 78.5 54.5 18 40 20 19.0 863
30 G 1 1/4 A 250 315 60 50 60 90.5 64.0 20 50 25 24.0 1397
38 G 1 1/2 A 250 315 65 60 70 102.0 71.5 22 55 32 29.0 2001

L 06 RHZ06ZLREDA3C RHZ06LREDA3C RHZ06ZLRED71 RHZ06LRED71
08 RHZ08ZLREDA3C RHZ08LREDA3C RHZ08ZLRED71 RHZ08LRED71
S 06 RHZ06ZSREDA3C RHZ06SREDA3C RHZ06ZSRED71 RHZ06SRED71
08 RHZ08ZSREDA3C RHZ08SREDA3C RHZ08ZSRED71 RHZ08SRED71
Example → RHZ06LREDOMDA3C RHZ06LREDOMDA3C RHZ06LREDOMD71 RHZ06LREDOMD71
359
BLOCK 3: PROPORTIONAL CONTROL CLUTCH AND BRAKE, BHE-G-1069-00

361
PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE C-3 DGMX2 3 PP CW B 40

363
364
365
366
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE C-3 DG4V3S 2C M U H5 60
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE C-3 DG4V3S 2A M U H5 60
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE C-3 DG4V3 22A M U H7 60

Vickers® DG4V-3 flows DG4V-3S flows ISO 4401,
to 80 l/min to 40 l/min size 03; ANSI/
Solenoid Operated Directional Valves (21 USgpm), (10.5 USgpm), B93.7M-D03
Catalog 6* design 6* design
368
Table of Contents
Introduction 01
Features and Benefits 02
Characteristics 03
Functional Symbols 04
Model Code 05
Operating Data 07
Performance Data 09
Installation Dimensions 12
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(V)M-S6-U-**-60 14
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S3-FPA5W-*2-60 14
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S4-FPA5W-*2-60 14
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S5-F-*2-60 14
Electrical Plugs and Connectors 15
Subplates, Connection Plates and Mounting Surfaces 18
DGMA-3-B-1* Blanking Plate 19
DGMA-3-C2-11 Crossover Plate 19
DGMA-3-T*-1*-* Tapping Plate 19
DGAM-3-01-1*-R (Metric bolt tapping) DGAM-3-01-1* (UNC bolt tapping) 20
Adaptor plate, Size 05 to 03 for pressure up to 210 bar (3000 psi) 20
DGVM-3-1*-*, DGMS-3-1E(Y)-1*-* Single station subplate, rear and side tapped port 21
DGMS-3-3E-1*-* Multi-station subplate 22
Mounting Surface 23
Appendix 24
Mounting Bolts 24
Spare Parts Data 25
Seal Kits 25
Solenoid Coils 25
Mass, approx. kg (lb) 25
Mounting Attitude 25
Temperature Limits 26
Fluid Temperature 26
Fluid Cleanliness 26
Ordering Procedure 26
369
Introduction
General description
These solenoid operated • Installation flexibility DG4V-3 and DG4V-3S

directional control valves are resulting from choice of High and standard
for directing and stopping numerous combinations performance models:
flow at any point in a hydrau- of solenoid connectors • Up to 80 l/min (21 USgpm)
lic system. This 60-design and locations. and up to 40 l/min (10.5
series has been specially • Multi-fluid capability with- USgpm) respectively at
designed and developed to out need to change seals. 350 bar (5000 psi).
cover expanded demands in
the industry as well as the • Higher sustained machine • Builds on Eaton's experi-
many traditional uses of the productivity and higher ence as the major supplier
earlier designs. Some of the uptime because of proven of size 03 valves world-
more important benefits to fatigue life and endurance, wide.
users are outlined. tested over 20 million • Offers designers the
cycles. opportunity to select the
• Efficient control of greater
hydraulic powers without • Solenoid coils can be optimum value package
increasing solenoid power changed quickly and for each application.
consumption. easily without leakage • International standard
from hydraulic system. interface. The valve
• Installed cost and space
savings from higher • Compact, cost effective mounting face conforms
power/weight-and-size system design when used to ISO 4401, size 03 and
ratios. with Vickers® SystemStak™ is compatible with related
valves and subplates. international standards.
• Increases system efficiency;
the result of improved
manufacture of spools
and bores.
Features and Benefits
• High pressure and flow Highly reliable operation up

capabilities, thanks to to 80 l/min (21 USgpm) at
special design features 350 bar (5000 psi). Estab-
lishes new market standards
and opens new possibilities
to design engineers on valve
size selection.
Flow rate (USgpm) Flow rate (USgpm)

0 4 8 0 12 4 16 8 20 2112 16 20 21
Pressure differential (psi)
Pressure differential (psi)

Pressure differential (bar)
Pressure differential (bar)
400 400
5000 5000
300 300 4000 4000
200 200 3000 3000
2000 2000
100 100 1450 1450
10 20 30 40 10 50 60 20 70
30 80 40 50 60 70 80
Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min)
DG4V-3S DG4V-3S
DG4V-3 DG4V-3
Typical maximum pressure

differential (P-A-B-T) flow en-
velope, blocked center spool.
Eaton Vickers Solenoid Operated Directional Valves Product Catalog V-VLDI-MC011-E September 2008 1
370
Features and
Benefits
• Minimal
pressure drop, • High reliability • Scratch-proof manual
i.e. 2,5 bar (36 psi) at Design of spring forces and override seal
30 l/min (7.9 USgpm) profile of DC solenoid force Internal seals are located
Achieved by optimization of characteristics ensure spool such that they are beyond
the valve body, spool and position selection under reach of any bore damage
spool-stroke design. The extreme operating condi- caused by small tools used to
results: low energy consump- tions. Result is a valve with operate the manual override.
tion and improved efficiency. high reliability when being Result is no messy oil drips
energized or de-energied. from the manual overrides.
Pressure Pressure
differential differential Performance leader Small diameter manual over-
bar psi Vickers rides prevent inadvertent
Flow rate (USgpm) operation.
solenoid force
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 Normal solenoid
14 200 force range on DG4V-3 – High Performance
Force
12 the market
10 150
Vickers spring
8 force
100
6 Normal spring
4 50 force range on
2 the market
0 0 Solenoid Solenoid
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 energized de-energized
Flow rate (l/min)
DG4V-3S
DG4V-3
• Electrical connections
P Conduit box design that
simplifies electrical wiring
A DG4V-3S – Standard
B connections to solenoids.
Orientation tabs prevent Performance
T
incorrect positioning.
Mounting surface to
ISO 4401 size 03
• Ease of servicing
Wet-armature solenoid,
screw-in core tube design
allows coils to be changed
without removing valve from
installation and without oil
spillage or risk of contaminat- • Surge supression for
ing system fluid. DC valves
Surge suppression is used
to prevent coil damage by
reducing contact burnoff –
increasing switch life – and
protecting electrical control-
lers from inductive spikes.
Three coil options are
available:
ISO4400 (DIN 43650)
coil shown D1 – Encapsulated diode
(Industrial application)
D2 – Encapsulated diode
(Mobile application)
D7 – Transzorb type
2 Eaton Vickers Solenoid Operated Directional Valves Product Catalog V-VLDI-MC011-E September 2008
371
Characteristics
High performance Operating considerations Temperature limits

DG4V-3, 6* design 1. Dependent on the applica- Minimum ambient
tion and the system filtration, -20°C (-4° F)
Standard performance any sliding spool valve if held
DG4V-3S, 6* design Maximum ambient
shifted under pressure for Valves with coils listed in
long periods of time, may model code and at stated
Mounting interface stick and not move readily percentages of rated voltage.
ISO 4401 size 03 due to fluid residue forma-
ANSI/B93.7M size D03 tion. It may therefore need
CETOP RP65H, size 3 to be cycled periodically to Construction of a typical
DIN 24340, NG6 prevent this from happening. single solenoid model
2. Surges of fluid in a com-
Basic characteristics mon tank line serving two
Maximum pressure: or more valves can be of
DG4V-3 350 bar (5075 psi) sufficient magnitude to cause
DG4V-3S 350 bar (5075 psi) inadvertent shifting of these
valves. This is particularly
Maximum flow:
critical in no-spring detented
DG4V-3 up to 80 l/min
models, separate drain lines
(21 USgpm)
are necessary.
DG4V-3S up to 40 l/min
(10.5 USgpm)
DG4V-3 models are direct
solenoid operated four-way
directional control valves.
Their primary function in a
hydraulic circuit is to direct
fluid flow. This, in turn, would Fluid temperature
determine the direction of
movement of a fluid cylinder, Fluid Temp. Mineral oil Watercontaining
or the direction of rotation of Min –20°C (-4°F) +10°C (+50°F)
a fluid motor.
Max.* +70°C (+158°F) +54°C (+129°F)
Port connections are made
by mounting the valve on * To obtain optimum service life from both fluid and hydraulic
system, 65°C (150°F) normally is the maximum temperature
a subplate or manifold. The
except for watercontaining fluids.
valve has wet armature type
solenoids.
Electrical connections to Coil type and Percentage Maximum ambient temperature
frequency voltage DG4V-3 DG4V-3S
the valve are made in the
electrical wiring housing or Dual frequency coils
thru various plug-in connec- @ 50 Hz 107% 40°C (104°F) 65°C (149°F)
tors such as a DIN 43650 @ 50 Hz 110% 30°C (86°F) 65°C (149°F)
type coil. @ 60 Hz 107% 50°C (122°F) 65°C (149°F)
Good hydraulic design prac- @ 60 Hz 110% 40°C (104°F) 65°C (149°F)
tice suggests that detented Single frequency (50 Hz) coils
models be mounted with @ 50 Hz 110% 40°C (104°F) 65°C (149°F)
longitudinal axis horizon- DC coils 110% 70°C (158°F) 70°C (158°F)
tal. Other models may be
mounted in any position.
For synthetic fluids consult Whatever the actual tempera-
manufacturer or Eaton rep- ture range, ensure that vis-
resentative where limits are cosities stay within the limits
outside those for mineral oil. specified in the “Hydraulic
fluids” section.
372
Functional U.S. solenoid standard
Symbols Double solenoid valves, Single solenoid valves, Single solenoid valves,
two position, detented solenoid at port A end solenoid at port B end
AA BB A B AA BB A BAA BB A B
SSool.l. BB PP
S ol. B TTSSooPl.l. AA T S ol. ASol.
Sol.BB Sol. PBP TT P TPP TT P Sol.AA
TSol. Sol. A
Double solenoid valves,
spring centered
AA BB A B
Spool types shown repre-
sent the highest proportion SSool.l. BB SPoPl. B TT P SSoolT.l. AA S ol. A
of market requirements. For s Transient condition only
other spool functions that may
be required, consult your
Eaton sales representative. The valve function schematics apply to both U.S. and European valves.
Solenoids identified to U.S. DG4V-3(S)-*N(V) DG4V-3(S)-*A(V) DG4V-3(S)-*AL(V)
standards
Functional symbols related to 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
solenoid identity “A” and/or
“B” according to NFPA/ANSI 2 2 2 2 2 2
standards, i.e. energizing
solenoid “A” gives flow P to 22 22 22 22 22 22
A, solenoid “B” gives flow P
to B (as applicable). 24 24 24 24 24 24
Port A Port P
DG4V-3(S)-*C(V) DG4V-3(S)-*B/F(V) DG4V-3(S)-*BL/FL(V)
Solenoid Solenoid 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Port B 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Port T
For 6 6 6
spool
6 6 6 6 6 6
Solenoid type Solenoid 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66 66
B All A 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
except
“8” 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
A “8”only B
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
For valves with type “8”spools, 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34
solenoid identity to U.S.
convention is the same as for 52 52 52 5 2 15 2 1 521 52 52 52
European convention.
56 56 56 5 6 15 6 1 561 56 56 56
Solenoids identified to
European standards DG4V-3(S)-8C(V) DG4V-3(S)-8BL(V) DG4V-3(S)-8B(V)
(specify “V” in model code)
Functional symbols related 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
to solenoid identity “A” and/
or “B” according to European
convention i.e. solenoid “A” European solenoid standard
adjacent to “A” port, solenoid Double solenoid valves, Single solenoid valves, Single solenoid valves,
“B” adjacent to “B” port of two position, detented solenoid at port A end solenoid at port B end
valve. AA BB A B AA BB A ABA BB A B
Port A Port P
Sol.
Sol.
AA Sol.P AP T T Sol.
PSol.
B BT Sol.
Sol.BA A
Sol. P AP
Sol. TT P PTP T T P Sol.
TB B
Sol. Sol. B
Solenoid Solenoid
A B
Double solenoid valves,
Port B spring centered
Port T
• For differences in valve func- A B
tion, refer to Performance
Data page 11. P T
Sol. A Sol. B
◊ F build spools.
s Transient condition only
373
Model Code
DG4V—3(S)—** *(L)—(**)—(V)M—(S*)—* ** * D* (L)—* *—6*—(EN***)—(P**—A**—B**—T**)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
1 odel Series
M 6 olenoid energization
S 9 Coil type 11 Housing (F type coils only)
D – Directional valve identity U – ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) W–1
/2" NPT thread
G–S ubplate/manifold mounted V – Solenoid “A” is at port “A” mounting u wiring housing
4 – Solenoid operated end and/ or solenoid “B” is U1– Connector fitted J–2
0 mm thread wiring
at port “B” end, indepen- housing
V – Pressure rating 350 bar dent of spool type U6 – Connector fitted w/lights
(5075 psi) on P, A & B ports U11 – C
onnector fitted
Omit for U.S. ANSI B93.9 12 S
urge suppressor/
standard requiring solenoid w/rectifier & lights**
2 tandard or high
S damper
“A’’ energization to connect U12 – C
onnector fitted
performance P to A and/or solenoid “B’’ to D1 – E
ncapsulated diode
w/rectifier**
3 – High performance specifi- connect P to B, independent (Industrial applications)
of solenoid location. F–1
/2" NPT thread
cation: up to 80 l/min (21 D2 – E
ncapsulated diode
conduit box
USgpm) at 350 bar (5075 psi) NOTE: Type “8” spool valves (Mobile applications)
conform to both U.S. and KU – Top exit flying leads*
3S – Standard performance D7 – Transzorb type
specification: up to 40 European solenoid designa- SP1 – Single 6,3 mm spade* u (F,KU,U,SP1,SP2 only)
l/min (10.5 USgpm) at tions. When ordering an “8” SP2 – Dual 6,3 mm spade* u
350 bar (5075 psi) spool, designate a “V” in the 13 Solenoid indicator lights
model code. X1 – F
lame resistant sole-
3
noids TP EEx-d-11B-T4 Not available on PA, KU, U,
Spool type SP1& SP2
7 Flag symbol X2 – H
azardous location
See “Functional symbols” section. solenoids to meet
M–E
lectrical options and 14 Coil rating
UL & CSA approval
4 features
pool Spring
S X3 –Special protection Full power coils, see
Arrangement solenoids to BASEEFA “Operating Data”.
8 Spool indicator switch
A – Spring offset, end-to-end standar SFA009:1972, A – 110V AC 50Hz
AL – Same as “A” but left Available on high performance protection class EX-S-11-T4
hand build models, DG4V-3, only. Omit B◊ – 110V AC 50Hz/120V AC 60 Hz
when not required.
u emale connector to be
F
B – Spring offset, end to center supplied by customer C – 220V AC 50 Hz
BL – Same as “B” but left DG4V-3-*A(L)-(V)M models D◊ – 220V AC 50 Hz/240V AC 60 Hz
hand build with type U (ISO4400) electri- * DC service only
C – Spring centered cal connector to solenoid; ** AC service only G – 12V DC
F – Spring offset, shift to center spool type 0, 2 or 22 only: H – 24V DC
FL – Same as “F” but left S6 – LVDT type DC switch with 10 Electrical connector For DG4V-3 only (not usable
hand build Pg7 connector plug. T – Wired terminal block with DG4V-3S):
N–N o-spring detented DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S*-FPA5W Low power coils, see “Operating
PA – Instaplug male Data”. (Not available with “N” –
valves with mechanical type receptacle only
5 Manual override option AC (~) switch, wired to 5-pin No-spring detented models)
receptacle: PB – Instaplug male & BL – 110V 50 Hz/120V 60 Hz
No symbol – Plain override(s)
female receptacle
in solenoid S3 – Switch, wired normally open DL – 220V AC 50 Hz/240V AC 60 Hz
end(s) only s PA3 – Three pin connector
S4 – Switch, wired normally GL – 12V DC
H – Water-resistant override(s) closed PA5 – Five pin connector
on solenoid end(s) s HL – 24V DC
H2 – Water-resistant override DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S5-F(T) ◊ For 60 Hz or dual frequency
both ends of solenoid. W/J valves with mechanical
P2 – Plain override both ends type AC (~) switch: Contact your Eaton representa-
of single solenoid. tive for additional coil voltage
S5 – Switch, free leads
Yl – Latching manual over- options.
ride on solenoid ends
(includes “H” feature
seal) s
Z – No overrides at either end
s No override in non-solenoid
end of single solenoid valves
l Not available on DG4V-3S,
AC models
374
Model Code
DG4V—3(S)—** *(L)—(**)—(V)M—(S*)—* ** * D* (L)—* *—6*—(EN***)—(P**—A**—B**—T**)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
15 Port T code 17 Special features

Refer to “Operating Data” for “EN***” code number
port T pressure ratings. assigned as required.
2 – 10 bar (150 psi) for spool EN21 – CSA approved models
position indicator models with 1/2” NPT entry
S3, S4 and S5. conduit box, type FW
4 – 70 bar (1000 psi) and solenoid coil letter
B,D,G, or H.
5 – 100 bar (1500 psi) for stan-
dard performance models, 18 Port restrictor plugs
DG4V-3S, with AC or DC
solenoids. For details of plug orifice sizes
and how to specify in model
6 – 207 bar (3000 psi) for AC code see page 15. May be
high performance models, fitted to valves by agreement
DG4V-3, including spool with your Eaton representative.
position indicator type S6.
Omit – N
o restrictor plugs
7 – 207 bar (3000 psi) for DC fitted
high performance models,
DG4V-3, including spool
position indicator type S6.
16 Design number
60 – Basic design
61 – Type 8 spool
375
Operating Data
Performance data is typical with fluid at 36cSt (168 SUS) and 50°C (122°F).
Standard performance valve High performance valve

Feature DG4V-3S DG4V-3
Pressure Limits
P, A and B ports 350 bar (5075 psi) n 350 bar (5075 psi)
T port:
Spool indicator switch models
Types S3, S4, S5 N/A 10 bar (145 psi)
Type S6 N/A 210 bar (3045 psi)
All other models 100 bar (1450 psi) 210 bar (3045 psi)
Flow rating See performance data See performance data
Relative duty factor Continuous; ED = 100% Continuous; ED = 100%
Type of protection:
ISO 4400 coils with plug fitted correctly IEC 144 class IP65 IEC 144 class IP65
SP1 – Single spade 6,3 mm IEC 760 IEC 760
SP2 – Dual spade 6,3 mm IEC 760 IEC 760
Coil winding Class H Class H
Lead wires (coils type F***) Class H Class H
Coil encapsulation Class F Class F
Permissable voltage fluctuation:
Maximum Refer to temperature limits. Refer to temperature limits.
Minimum 90% rated 90% rated
Typical response times at 100% rated volts measured from
application/removal of voltage to full spool displacement of “2C” spool at:
Flow rate P-A, B-T 20 l/min (5.3 USgpm) 40 l/min (10.6 USgpm)
Pressure 175 bar (2537 psi) 175 bar (2537 psi)
AC (~) energizing 18 ms 15 ms
AC (~) de–energizing 32 ms 23 ms
DC (=) energizing 60 ms 45 ms
DC (=) de–energizing 40 ms 28 ms
Power consumption, AC solenoids Initial s Holding Initial s Holding
(for coils listed in model code). VA (RMS) VA (RMS) VA (RMS) VA (RMS)
Full power coils:
Single frequency coils AC 50 Hz 225 39 265 54
Dual frequency coils at 50 Hz 265 49 280 61
Dual frequency coils at 60 HZ 260 48 300 58
Low power coils, “BL” and “DL”:
(Not available with “N” – No-spring detented models) Low power coils not usable 170 37
Dual frequency coils at 50 Hz with DG4V-3S valves. 190 37
Dual frequency coils at 60 Hz
Power consumption, DC solenoids at rated voltage and 20 C (68 F).
Full power coils:
12V, model type “G” 30W – 30W –
24V, model type “H” 30W – 30W –
Low power coils:
12V, model type “GL” Low power coils not usable 18W –
24V, model type “HL” with DG4V-3S valves. 18W –
n applications where valves are to remain pressurized (either energized or de-energized) at pressures over 210 bar (3045 psi)
For
without frequent switching, it is recommended to use the high performance model, DG4V-3.
s 1st half cycle; armature fully retracted.
376
Operating Data
Spool Position Indicator This product has been achieve effective protection
Models, high performance designed and tested to levels see this leaflet and the
valve DG4V-3 ONLY meet specific standards out- Installation Wiring Practices
Spool/spring arrangement lined in the European Electro- for Eaton's Vickers® Electronic
types 0A (L), 2A(L), 22A(L) magnetic Compatibility. Products leaflet 2468. Wiring
Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC, practices relevant to this
DC model type “S6” Directive are indicated by
(see page 14 for Installation amended by 91/263/EEC,
92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, • Electromagnetic
Dimension) Compatibility (EMC).
article 5. For instructions on
installation requirements to
Input:
Supply voltage 10 to 35V DC inclusive of a maximum 4V pk-to-pk ripple
Current, switch open 5 mA
Current, switch closed 255 mA
Output:
Voltage 1V below input at maximum load
Maximum continuous current 250 mA
Maximum load impedance 136Ω at maximum input volts
Maximum switching frequency 10 Hz
Plug connections:
Pin 1 (output 1) Normally open (ie. not connected to pin 3)
Pin 2 Supply +ve
Pin 3 0V
Pin 4 (output 2) Normally closed (ie.connected to pin 3)
Switching point Within the spool spring offset condition •
Connector Pg7 plug (supplied with valve)
Protection Overload and short-circuit protected; self re-setting.
IEC 144 class IP65 with connector correctly fitted.
• Factory setting ensures this condition under all combinations of manufacturing tolerance and of temperature drift (see “Temperature Limits”).
Wiring Connections
Electric •
panel
Warning
All power must be switched
off before connecting or
disconnecting any plugs
LVDT Solenoid
Customer’s protective ground connection
WARNING: Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

It is necessary to ensure that the unit is wired up in accordance with the connection arrangements shown above.
• For effective protection the user’s electrical cabinet, the valve subplate or manifold and the cable screens should be
connected to efficient ground points.
In all cases both valve and cable should be kept as far away as possible from any sources of electromagnetic
radiation such as cables carrying heavy current, relays and certain kinds of portable radio transmitters, etc. Difficult
environments could mean that extra screening may be necessary to avoid the interference.
Micro-switch type “S3”, “S4” and “S5”

Voltage 250V maximum 50/60 Hz
Maximum current 5A
377
Performance Data Typical with mineral oil at
36 cSt (168.6 SUS) and a
Maximum flow rates
Performance based on full
specific gravity of 0.87. power solenoid coils warm
and operating at 90% rated
voltage.
See note at bottom of next
page when using low power
coils (DG4V-3 models only).
DG4V-3S models (standard performance)
Graph 1 Graph 2
AC solenoid valves with dual AC solenoid valves with
frequency coils operating at –D
ual frequency coils – Single frequency (50 Hz)
50 Hz operating at 60 Hz coils operating at 50 Hz
psi bar psi bar

5000 350 2 5000 350
3 1 1
300 300 3
6 2
4000 8 4 4000
250 250
5 4
3000 7
200 3000 200
Pressure
Pressure
6 5
150 150
2000 2000
7
100 100
9 8
1000 1000
50 50
0 0 0 10 20 30 40 l/min
0 10 20 30 40 l/min
0 2 4 6 8 10 USgpm 0 2 4 6 8 10 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
Graph 3 Spool/spring Graph 1 Graph 2 Graph 3

DC solenoid valves code curve curve curve
0A(L) 1 1 3
0B(L) & 0C, 0F 1 1 1
psi bar
2A(L) 5 5 3
5000 350
2B(L) & 2C, 2F 2 2 3
1
300 2N 1 1 1
4000 6B(L) & 6C, 6F 6 6 5
2
250 7B(L) & 7C, 7F 6 6 2
3
3000 8B(L) & 8C 8s 7 s 8s
200
Pressure
4 22A(L) 9 8 7
22B(L) & 22C 7 7 6
150 8
2000 5 24A(L) 6 6 5
100 33B(L) & 33C 4 4 4
7 34B(L) & 34C 6 6 5
1000 6
50 52BL, 52C, 6 6 5
56BL & 56C 6 6 5
0 0 66B(L) & 66C 3 3 5
0 10 20 30 40 l/min
521B & 561B 6 6 5
0 2 4 6 8 10 USgpm
sC
onsult Eaton regarding each application that will jointly have
Flow rate flow rates approaching this curve and a pressurized volume
exceeding 2000 cm3 (122 cu.in.)
378
Performance Data
DG4V-3 models (high performance)
Graph 4 – Single-frequency coils Graph 5

AC solenoid valves with: – Dual-frequency coils AC solenoid valves with dual-
operating at 50 Hz frequency coils operating at 60 Hz
psi bar psi bar

5000 350 5000 350
3 2
1
300 300
4000 1 4000
5 4 3 2
250 250
5
Pressure
Pressure
6 48 9
3000 200 3000 200
7 9 3
150 150
2000 8 2000 4 8
5 7 6
100 100
5
1000 1000
50 50
7&9
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 l/min 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 l/min
0 3 6 9 12 15 USgpm 0 3 6 9 12 15 USgpm
Flow rate
Spool/ Graph Graph Graph
spring 4 5 6
code curve curve curve
Graph 6 0A(L) 2 2 3
DC solenoid valves 0B(L) & 0C, 0F 1 1 2
2A(L) 2 2 3
psi bar 2B(L) & 2C, 2F 1 1 1
5000 350 2N 1 1 2
6 3 1 6B(L) & 6C, 6F 6 5 6
300
4000 7 4 2 7B(L) & 7C, 7F 1 1 2
250 8B(L) & 8C 5 s 4 s 5s
5
22A(L) 8 7 8
Pressure
3000 200
4 22B(L) & 22C 7 6 7
8 6 24A(L) 9 8 5
150
2000 33B(L) & 33C 4 3 4
5
100 34B(L) & 34C 4 3 6
1000 52BL, 52C, 6 5 6
50 56BL & 56C 6 5 6
2,3
4&6 66B(L) & 66C 3 9 6
0 521B & 561B 6 5 6
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 l/min
s C
onsult Eaton regarding each application that will jointly have
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 USgpm flow rates approaching this curve and a pressurized volume
Flow rate exceeding 2000 cm3 (122 cu.in.)
Flow limits applicable to 3. Valves with type 52 spools (b) S

ubstantially different reduced from values given on
the following usages: having one service port (A simultaneous flow this page (graphs 4, 5 and 6)
1. All valves except types or B as appropriate) con- rates between P to A by up to:
22 and 52 spools having nected to the full bore end or B and B or A to T, e.g. 70% – for DC coils
simultaneous equal flow of a 2:1 area ratio double- when A and B are
acting cylinder and the connected to a cylinder 50% – for AC coils
rates from P to A or B
and from B or A to T and other to the annulus end. having a large differen- depending on spool type.
S3, S4, S5 (limit switch) 4. Consult Eaton, with tial area. Consult your Eaton repre-
models. application details, if either Low Power Coils sentative relative to specific
of the following usages (DG4V-3 models only) applications for low power
2. Valves with type 22 spools coils.
having flow from P to A or are required: When using low power coils
B, the other being plugged. (a) Single flow path, i.e. P to (coil designations *L in model
T is drained at all times. A, P to B, A to T or B to T. code) the maximum flow is
379
Performance Data
Pressure drops
psi bar 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 psi bar

12 2000
160 2 140
140 10 120
1600
15
120 100
8
1200
Pressure drop
Pressure drop
100 80
80 6
1 60
60 800 14
4
40 40
2 400 13
20 20
0 0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 l/min 0 10 20 30 l/min
0 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 USgpm 0 2 4 6 8 USgpm
Flow rate Flow rate
DG4V-3S
DG4V-3S & DG4V-3
DG4V-3
t Curve for spool type 6: not recommended for flows in excess of 60 l/min (15.8 USgpm).
Pressure drops in offset positions except where otherwise indicated

Spool/spring Spool P to A P to B A to T B to T P to T B to A For other viscosities, pres-
code positions or sure drops approximate to:
covered A to B
0A(L) Both 5 5 2 2 – – Viscosity cSt (SUS)
0B(L) & 0C, 0F De-energized – – – – 4s∆ – 14 20 43 54 65 76 85
Energized 4 4 2 2 – – (17.5) (97.8) (200) (251) (302) (352) (399)
2A(L) Both 6 6 5 5 – – % of ∆p
2B(L) & 2C, 2F Energized 5 5 2 2 – – 81 88 104 111 116 120 124
2N Both 6 6 3 3 – –
6B(L) & 6C, 6F De-energized – – 3s 3∆ – – A change to another specific
Energized 6 6 1 1 – – gravity will yield an approxi-
7B(L) & 7C, 7F De-energized 6s 6∆ – – – 7m mately proportional change
Energized 4 4 3 3 – –
in pressure drop.
8B(L) & 8C All 9 9 5 5 3 – The specific gravity of a fluid
22A(L), 22B(L) & 22C All 6 6 – – – – may be obtained from its
producer. Fire resistant fluids
24A(L) De-energized 6 6 2 2 – –
usually have higher specific
33B(L) & 33C De-energized – – 15s 15∆ – – gravities than oil.
34B(L) & 34C De-energized – – 14s 14∆ – –
52BL & 52C Energized 6s 6∆ 2 – – 10m
56BL Both 6s 6∆ 11s 10∆ – 10m
56C De-energized – – 11s 10∆ – 10m
Energized 6s 6∆ 2 – – 10m
66B(L) & 66C De-energized – – 12 12 – 13
521B All 6s 6∆ – – – 10m
561B De-energized – – 10s 11∆ – 10m
Energized 6 6∆ – – – 10m
s“B” plugged ∆ “A” plugged m“P” plugged
380
Installation
Dimensions
Models for use with ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) connectors 3rd angle
projection
Double solenoid models s Single solenoid modelss
DG4V-3(S)-*C-**-(V)M-U-**-60 DG4V-3(S)-*A(-**) n DG4V-3(S)-*AL(-**) n
As Spolenoid
DG4V-3(S)-*N-**-(V)M-U-**-60 DG4V-3(S)-*B(-**) n shown DG4V-3(S)-*BL(-**) n and end cap
DG4V-3(S)-8BL(-**) DG4V-3(S)-8B(-**) interchanged
DG3V-3(S)-*F n DG4V-3(S)-*FL(-**) n
74,00 Alternative plug positions by
D (2.91) loosening knurled nut, turning
coil, and re-tightening.
Coil types: U (shown), KU, SP1,
and SP2 (see Model Code)
100,0
(4.0)
87,0
(3.42)
53,00
(2.1)
25,00 C, coil 21,75 24,00

(0.98) length (0.86) (0.94)
B (single solenoid model) 48,00
A (double solenoid model) (1.88)
Port P
Port A
Port B
Port T
n Not applicable to type “8” spool. Model type AC or DC A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. D Dim.
s See page 25 for solenoid information.
All DC = 220 (8.66) 156 (6.14) 61 (2.5) 73 (2.87)
‡ Can vary dependent on source of plug.
DG4V-3 AC ~ 200 (7.87) 146 (5.75) 51 (2.1) 63 (2.48)
Dimensions in mm(in). DG4V-3S AC ~ 200 (7.87) 146 (5.75) 45 (1.7) 63 (2.48)
Water-resistant manual override on solenoid Latching manual override on solenoid
DG4V-3(S)-****(L)-H-(V)M-**-**-60 DG4V-3-****(L)-Y-(V)M-**-**-60
DG4V-3S-****(L)-Y-(V)M-**-**-60, DC coil models only
Application
General use where finger operation is required (standard manual Application
overrides cannot be operated without using small tool). Stainless steel lever/latch mechanism and water-resistant seal
make this feature ideal for vehicle-mounted and exposed
applications requiring emergency selection of valve for a period
of time in the event of electrical failure.
Overall length
Overalloflength of
Manual Manual 15 Overall
15 length
Overalloflength
valveof
with
valve with 40 40 valve withvalve
standard
with standard
actucationactucation
must must (0.6) standard
(0.6) standard
manual manual
overrides
overrides Lever inLever
latched
in latched
positionposition
(1.6) (1.6)manual manual
overrides overrides
be appliedbewithin
applied within Lever inLever
free position
in free position Lift latchLift
to latch to
this diameter:
this diameter: release release
lever lever
approximately
approximately
20(0.75). 20(0.75). Push lever
Pushto lever to
Spacer prevents
Spacer prevents operateoperate
valve; valve;65
actuationactuation
by by latch holds
latchlever
holds
in lever 65
larger device.
larger device. operatedoperated (2.5) in (2.5)
positionposition
Spacer Spacer
Note: Notes:
“H” feature is not field convertible from other models; 1. O
pposite solenoid (on “C” and “N” double solenoid models)
specify with order. should not be energized while the valve is latched in selected
position; AC solenoid coils will burn out under
this improper usage.
2. “Y” feature is field-convertible from “H” type manual override
(omitting spacer), but is not field-convertible from other models.
381
Installation
Dimensions
Models with “F” type coils (lead wires) and conduit box.
Double solenoid models s Single solenoid models s

DG4V-3(S)-*C-**-(V)M-F-**-60 DG4V-3(S)-*A(-**)l DG4V-3(S)-*AL(-**)l
As Spolenoid
DG4V-3(S)-*N-**-(V)M-F-**-60 DG4V-3(S)-*B(-**)l shown DG4V-3(S)-*BL(-**)l and end cap
interchanged
DG4V-3(S)-8BL(-**) DG4V-3(S)-8B(-**)
DG3V-3(S)-*Fl DG4V-3(S)-*FL(-**)l
A (double solenoid models)
B (single solenoid models) Thread connection

*J & W conduit boxes “W”– NPT 50,00
“J”– M20 × 1.5-8H (2.0)
Ground
connection
4,0 (0.16 dia.)
self–tapping Two lead
91,00 wires per
screw (3.57) solenoid with
68,75 M3 size
(2.71) terminals for
53,00 customer
25,00 (2.1) connections
(0.98)
24,00
21,75 C coil (0.94)
(0.86) 47 3,0
length (1.85) (0.12) 48,00
74,00 (1.88)
D (2.91)
Port P
Port A
Port B
Port T
* 89 (3.5) for FPB – J & W conduit boxes

104 (4.0) All plug-in conduit boxes
Dimensions in mm(in).
Model type AC or DC A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. D Dim.

All DC = 220 (8.66) 156,5 (6.14) 61 (2.5) 73 (2.87)
DG4V-3 AC ~ 200 (7.87) 146,5 (5.75) 51 (2.1) 63 (2.48)
DG4V-3S AC ~ 200 (7.87) 146,5 (5.75) 45 (1.7) 63 (2.48)
l Not applicable to type “8” spool. s See page 24 for solenoid information.
Codes “FJ” and “FW”: 2 lead wires for each solenoid, approximately 150,00 (6.00) long. M3 (#6)
terminals provided for customer connection.
Codes “FTJ” and “FTW”: Valve supplied with lead wires connected into terminal strip suitable
for M3 (#6) terminals for customer connection.
382
Installation
Dimensions
Pin number 3, 0V Pin number 1,

“normally open”
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(V)M-S6-U-**-60 Pin number 2, supply +ve Pin number 4,

“normally closed”
Single solenoid models with Location of solenoid Location of switch
LVDT type switch indicat- for RH build models for RH build models Plug (part no. 458939)
ing when the spool is in the supplied with valve
spring off-set position. ISO Cable gland PG7:
4400 (DIN 43650) connection 6,0 (0.24) dia.
to solenoid; Pg7 connection
to switch.
For LH build (DG4V-3-*AL )

solenoid and switch locations 138,2 (5.44)
are reversed. For coil removal: 248,2 (9.8) with DC solenoid
64 (2.51) DC coil 238,2 (9.4) with AC solenoid
54 (2.12) AC coil
Warning
Wiring: See Electromagnetic
• Compatibility (EMC) warning
Dimensions in mm(in) note on page 8.
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S3-FPA5W-*2-60
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S4-FPA5W-*2-60 See page 16 for details of connections
DG4V-3-*A(L)-(Z)-(V)M-S5-F-*2-60 to pre-wired 5-pin receptacle for:
“S3” normally open and
Single solenoid models with Conduit box with leads, or “S4” normally closed.
mechanical type switch moni- pre-wired to NFPA T3.5.29-
toring of spool movement. 1980 receptacle.
Location of switch and housing
for RH build models
Normally closed lead (Monitor switch)
sleeving identification color white.
Common lead (Monitor switch)
sleeving identification color black.
Normally open lead (Monitor switch)
no color identification.
Location of solenoid 100 (3.94)
for RH build models
For LH build (DG4V-3-*AL ) 54 (2.12)
solenoid and switch locations are reversed. 200 (7.87) with AC solenoid for removal
210 (8.27) with DC solenoid of switch hsg.
Port restrictor plugs Restrictor plug

selection table
Restrictor plugs are available Code Orifice Part
for use in ports P, T, A or B. diameter number
These can be used for *00 Blank 694353
restricting flow or for circuit
*03 0,30 (0.012) 694341
dampening. Restrictor plugs
are not recommended for *06 0,60 (0.024) 694342
use above 210 bar (3000 psi) *08 0,80 (0.030) 694343
system pressure. *10 1,00 (0.040) 694344 M5 x 0.8-6H thread
for plug extraction
Typical model codes: *13 1,30 (0.050) 694345
*15 1,50 (0.060) 694346
DG4V-3(S)-**-M-**-**-60-P08 Maximum port dia in
*20 2,00 (0.080) 694347 subplate/manifold block:
(0.8 mm dia orifice in port P)
*23 2,30 (0.090) 694348
DG4V-3(S)-**-M-**-**-60- For steel and SG (ductile)
* = P, T, A or B, as required iron: 7,0 (0.3)
P10-A10 n h hOrder in multiples of 25
(1.0 mm dia orifice in ports per part number For gray iron: 6,5 (0.25)
P and A)
383
Electrical Plugs
and Connectors
Terminal strip and lights

For valves with type “F” coils.
Terminal strip Conduit box cover and

(part number nameplate complete with
890345) clips to sealing gasket and 4 screws
cover and can
be field-fitted
Light assembly is held in place
4 terminal screws M3 x 0,5-6H by end pair of M3 screws; can
M3 x 0,5-6H screws (part number 02-113355) be fitted to terminal strip.
(part number 186006) Connections to solenoid A
2 each end (or B, according to model type)
28,50 30,00
(1.12) (1.18)
Anti-rotation tab ensures

Connections to correct orientation of cover
solenoid B Rubber gasket to junction box
(or A, according
to model type) 2 lenses in cover
1. For DC coils the +ve ing leads to double solenoid 2. For correct light indica- terminals are common with
lead(s) must be connected valves (i.e. common neutral) tion of energized solenoid each outer pair of solenoid
to the terminal(s) marked +. the inner pair of terminals ensure that solenoid leads terminals according to the
When using 3-wire incom- must be interconnected. are correctly connected: light side with + mark.
Insta-Plug
DG4V-3(S)---FPA---60 plug is inside a wire housing longer ground post provides Optional solenoid indicator
DG4V-3(S)---FPBW---60 with external terminals for first make/last break ground lights are pre-wired to the
Eaton 2-part “Insta-Plug” machine wire connections. connection. female plug. Solenoids “A”
eliminates breaking electrical Captive thumb screws, when The PBW configuration com- and/or “B” are identified on
inputs for valve disconnect. loosened, permit the wire bines both male and female the wiring housing.
A male half is pre-wired to housing to be pulled clear of plugs in the wiring housing for
the valve body. The mating the valve for disconnect. A a self-contained plug-in unit.
PA configuration PBW configuration

16,25 Clearance to remove Customer connection solenoid at port A
(0.64) female receptacle end of body to female receptacle plate
20,25 (0.79) M4-6H thd.
Customer connection
48,0 solenoid at port B end of
(1.89) body to female receptacle
plate
89,0
23,1 (0.91) (3.50) Ground connection
24,0 in terminal box
(0.95) (ref.)
32,50 15,5 (0.61)
(1.28)
98,5
71,1 (3.88) WARNING TAG
(2.80) 69,0 “Electrical power
(2.72) must be
47,5 ref.
(1.87) disconnected
ref. before removing or
replacing this
receptacle”.
Port A Port A Port B
Port B
The conduit box dimensions used for the PA/PBW type connector are different from
those on the other “F” type coil models.
384
Electrical Plugs
and Connectors
NFPA Connector T3.5.29-1980 3 pin connector 5 pin connector

Use with single solenoid valve Use with single solenoid valve
DG4V-3(S)–FPA3W(L)-**-60 long. The three pole plug has Key model code designations: Key model code designations:
DG4V-3(S)–FPA5W(L)-**-60 two leads 101,6 (4.0) long
and one 177,8 (7.0). All wires DG4V-3(S)-*A(L)(-**)-(V)M- DG4V-3(S)-*A(L)(-**)-(V)M-
DG4V-3–S3-FPA5W(L)-**-60 have underwriters recognized FPA3W(L) FPA5W(L)
DG4V-3–S4-FPA5W(L)-**-60 non-solder insulated eyelet DG4V-3(S)-*B(L)(-**)-(V)M- DG4V-3(S)-*B(L)(-**)-(V)M-
terminals. The green wire is FPA3W(L) FPA5W(L)
The receptacle is a standard
used for the ground (earth)
three or five pole connector 1 – green lead
1 – green
(ground)
lead (ground) 1 – lead to1solenoid
– lead to 5solenoid
connection (No. 8 screw fur- – lead to 5 – lead to
with shortened leads and 1 – green lead (ground) solenoid solenoid
nished). Valves are supplied 3 – lead 3 – lead
terminals added. The five 43––lead
pre-wired. to solenoidto solenoid
5 lead 4 – lead
pole plug has four leads 101,6
2
1
2
1
1 1 to 5solenoid
capped capped
(4.0) long and one 177,8 (7.0) 1 4 4
3 3 22 3 2 3
25,4 (1.00) 25,4 (1.00) 3
hex (reference
hex (reference 25,4 (1.00)
Connection details and model type/model code references all types) all types) hex (reference
3 – green lead
3 – green
(ground)
all lead (ground)
types)
0.875-16UN-2A thd. 2 – lead to 2solenoid
– lead to solenoid 2 – lead capped
2 – lead capped
Warning tag:
2 – lead to solenoid
“Electrical power must be
16,00 disconnected before removing
or replacing electrical plug.” 5 pin connector 5 pin connector
(0.62)
Use with double solenoid valve Use with single solenoid
Key model code designations: valve with S3 spool position
monitor switch
DG4V-3-*C/N(L)(-**)-(V)M-S4-
FPA5W(L) Key model code designa-
tions:
DG4V-3-*A(L)(-**)-(V)M-S3-
68,75
FPA5W(L)
1 – lead to 1solenoid 5 – lead to 5 – lead to
– lead to solenoid 1 – lead to 1solenoid
– lead to solenoid
5 – lead to 5 – lead to
ad (ground)(2.71) 11 –– lead
greentolead
solenoid
(ground)
5 – lead to 11––lead solenoid
solenoidB 5solenoid
leadtotosolenoid 1 – lead to 5solenoid
1 – lead to solenoid – lead toBsolenoid
solenoid
– lead to solenoid 5 – lead to
3 – lead solenoid 5 –– lead to
4 – lead to4solenoid 4 – lead to4 – lead to
3 – lead 5
to solenoid 4 to
– lead
solenoid 1
5 5
4solenoid
monitor monitor– lead B 1 1 –5lead to monitor
4monitor solenoid B
1 5 capped 4 1 switch,554 n.o.switch,
4 –
cappedlead n.o.
to 54 54 n.c.switch,
monitor
switch, 4 – leadn.c.
to
12 4 2 3 112 3 44 solenoid A 1 2 3 4 12switch, 3 4 n.o.solenoid A
3 2 33 22 33 2 3 2 3
25,4 (1.00) 25,4 (1.00)
hex (reference hex (reference 3 – green lead3 – green
(ground)
lead (ground) 3 – green lead
3 – green
(ground)
lead (ground)
all types) all types) 2 – lead to2monitor
– lead 3 –to
green leadto (ground)
3 – green lead (ground) 33 ––to
switch,
monitor
green leadswitch,
(ground) 2 – lead 2monitor
– lead
3
switch,
–
monitor switch,
green lead (ground)
common common green lead (ground) 2common
– lead tocommon
monitor switch,
olenoid 22 ––lead
lead capped
to solenoid 22 –– lead
lead to solenoid A
capped common 2 – lead to solenoid A
5 pin connector Female 3 & 5 pin connectors

Use with single solenoid are available from a Daniel
valve with S4 spool position Woodhead Co., Brad Harrison
monitor switch Div. Distributor (847-272-7990)
Key model code designa- 40903 – Female connector
tions: with 12' lead for PA3
DG4V-3-*A(L)(-**)-(V)M-S4- conn.
FPA5W(L) 41308 – Female connector
olenoid 5 – lead to 11––lead
leadto
tosolenoid
solenoid 55 ––lead
lead to
to with 12' lead for PA5
1 – lead to solenoid 5 – lead to
solenoid solenoid
solenoid solenoid conn.
4 – lead to 44 –– lead
lead to
to 4 – lead to These are Brad Harrison #’s.
5 monitor 55 monitor
monitor 5
4 11 44 1 monitor
switch, n.o. switch, n.c.
switch, n.o. 4 switch, n.c.
3 22 33 2 3
een lead (ground) 3 – green lead (ground) 3 – green lead (ground)

monitor switch, 22 –– lead
lead to
to monitor
monitor switch,
switch, 2 – lead to monitor switch,
common
common common
385
Electrical Plugs
and Connectors
DIN 43650 Connector
Cable diameter range: Ø6–10 mm (0.24–0.40)

Wire section range: Ø,5–1,5 mm2 (0.0008–
0.0023 in2)
Terminals: Screw type
Type of protection: IEC144 class IP65, when
plugs are fitted correctly to
the valves with interface
seals (supplied with plugs)
in place.
51(2.01)
Connector can be positioned 18 sq. 27
Recptacle Voltage Part Numbers (1.06)
at 90° intervals on valve by (AC or DC) Gray – Black – (0.71)
re-assembling contact holder "A" sol. "B" sol. 1,5
into appropriate position U1 Coils – 710776 710775 (0.06)
Seal
inside connector housing. without lights
M3
Use U12 or U11 type connec- U6 Coils 12-24 977467 977466 thread 30,5 sq. 5,5
tors with 12 and 24V DC coils with lights 100-125 977469 977468 (1.20) (0.22)
if rectification is required. 200-240 977471 977470
Connectors with and without U11 Rectified 12 DC 02-141358
coils with 24 DC 02-141359
indicator lights are available
lights 98-240 VDC 02-141360
(order separately): 200-240 VDC 02-141361
U12 Rectified 02-141357 26,5
27,5 (1.04)
coils without (1.08)
lights 22,5
(0.88)
Surge Suppression Devices

(For DC Valves)
Standard diode Transzorb NOTE: These surge suppres- Times represent cessation/
sion devices are “Polarity application of voltage to coil
Diode in parallel with coil. Diode and Zener diode in par-
Dependent.” Proper biasing versus velocity (start/stop)
When switch (S1) is opened, allel with coil. When switch
conditions must be met of a cylinder using a single
the energy stored in the coil (S1) is opened, the energy
when installing/connecting solenoid, spring offset valve
is trapped and dissipated by stored in the coil is trapped
a coil in a system. (time in milliseconds).
the diode (D1). and dissipated by the diode
• Works only with DC voltage (D1) and Zener diode (Z1) and
the coil resistance. Valve Shift and Dropout
• Polarity dependent Times with and without
• The Zener makes exact limi- Surge Suppression
• Increase drop out time tation of inductive spikes.
• Works only with DC voltage Shift Dropout
CETOP 3
• Polarity dependent
Do Diode 23 60
Diode Alone 23 131
Diode/Zener 23 78
Coil Coil
CETOP 5
Do Diode 70 50
Diode Alone 70 158
Z1
Diode/Zener 70 100
S1 S1
D1 (No 2) (No 2)
(No 1) D1 (No 1)
386
Subplates, Connection
Plates and Mounting
Surfaces
General description Description and

maximum pressure Functional symbol Model code
This range of subplates and Blanking plate DGMA–3–B–1*

auxiliary connection plates 250 bar (3600 psi)
are for use with size 3 valves.
Optional BSPF or SAE/UNF P T B A
pipe thread connections are Crossover plate DGMA–3–C1–1*
available. P–A, B–T
The subplates fall into five 250 bar (3600 psi)
groups: P T B A
• S
ingle station subplates Crossover plate DGMA–3–C2–1*
with either side or rear P–B, A–T
entry ports for connecting 250 bar (3600 psi)
to the main system. P T B A
• M
ulti-station manifolds Tapping plate DGMA–3–T1–1*–B
having from two to six Ports A and B DGMA–3–T1–1*–S
stations. The two service
250 bar (3600 psi)
ports per station are ar- P T B A
ranged along one side but
the pressure and tank lines Tapping plate DGMA–3–T2–1*–B
are internally connected in Ports P and T DGMA–3–T2–1*–S
parallel to each station. 250 bar (3600 psi)
P T B A
• T
apping plates for insertion
under modules or valves to Adaptor size 05 to 03 DGAM–3–01–1*–R
provide access to service P T B A Size 03
207 bar (3000 psi) DGAM–3–01–1*
lines, e.g. for pressure (UNC valve mtg. bolts)
gage connection.
• C
ross-over plates for inter- P TA TB B A Size 05
connecting two sets of Single station DGVM–3–1*–R
service lines at the top of
subplate/manifold DGVM–3–1*–S
module stacks when direc-
tional valves are not fitted. Rear ports P,T,A,B
250 bar (3600 psi) P T B A
• Blanking plate for termi-
Single station DGMS–3–1E–1*–R
nating a valve station e.g.
when the station is not to subplate/manifold P A DGMS–3–1E–1*–S
be used until later. Side ports P,T,A,B T B
The 2 to 6 multi-station sub- 250 bar (3600 psi)
plates, when used together Multi-station subplate/ DGMS–3–2/3E–1*–R
with Vickers® SystemStak™ manifold; side ports Valve station 1 Valve station 2 – 3 DGMS–3–2/3E–1*–S
valves, provide very compact P,T,A1,B1,A2,B2, etc. P1 T1 B1 A1 P2 T2 B2 A2
control assemblies. 250 bar (3600 psi) P
Plates having machined trap- 2 station T
ezoidal O-ring recesses are 3 station B1 A1 B2 A2
supplied complete with Viton
O-rings. Multi-station subplate/ DGMS–3–4/5/6E–1*–R
On all models, the size 03 manifold; side ports Valve station 1 Valve station 2 – 6 DGMS–3–4/5/6E–1*–S
mounting face includes a P,T,A1,B1,A2,B2, etc. P1 T1 B1 A1 P6 T6 B6 A6
drilled hole (for a location pin) 250 bar (3600 psi)
in conformance with ANSI/ P
4 station T
B93.7M) and (NFPA) size
03. All Eaton size 3 valves 5 station B1 A1 B6 A6
and auxiliary plates contain 6 station
a matching location pin to Design number subject to change. No change of installation dimensions for designs 10 thru 19. “R”
ensure correct orientation of (or “B”) suffix – ISO 228 (BSPF) ports and/or metric attaching bolt tappings. “S” suffix – SAE/UNC
the mounting faces. ports and/or UNC attaching bolt tappings.
387
Installation
Dimensions
4 holes Ø 5,6 (0.22 dia.)

DGMA-3-B-1* Blanking Plate counterbored to Ø 9,5 (0.374 dia) P T B A
46,0 (1.8) 10,0 (0.4)
A
Nameplate
73,0 P
(2.9) T
22,0 (0.9)
24,4 (1.0)
DGMA-3-C2-11 Crossover Plate
P T B A
48,5 (1.9)
46,0 (1.8) 11,0 (0.43)
A Nameplate
75,0 P
(3.0)
T
22,0 (0.9)
DGMA-3-T*-1*-* Tapping Plate
2 tapped ports P T B A
for DGMA–3–T*–1*–B, G 1/8 (1/8” BSPF)
for DGMA–3–T*–2*–S, 7/16 ”– 20 UNF – 2B (SAE)
(for 1/4” O.D. tubing)
48,4 (1.9) P T B A
46,0 (1.8)
Nameplate
A A
75,0
(3.0) P P
T 4 holes Ø 5,6 T
B (0.22 dia.)
B
DGMA-2-T1-1*–* DGMA-2-T2-1*–* 20,0

(Ports A and B) (Ports P and T) (0.78)
388
Installation
Dimensions
DGAM-3–01–1*–R Size 3 valves can frequently be The DGAM–3 adaptor bolts

(Metric bolt tapping) used in place of size 5 valves, to an existing size 5 interface
DGAM-3–01–1* typically for pilot control func- and provides a size 3 mounting Size 03
(UNC bolt tapping) tions, or generally where the face for the smaller valves. P T B A
system flow rate is within that
Adaptor plate, Size 05 to 03 of size 3 valves.
for pressure up to 210 bar
P TA TB B A
(3000 psi)
Size 05
70,0 (2.75) 28,4 (1.12)
31,0 14,2
(1.22) (0.56) 21,0 (0.83)
5,3
(0.21)
A 90,4 A
P T (3.56) Standard T
40,5 54,0 port (TA )
(1.59) P
(2.12)
B Additional T
B port (TB )
4 holes for valve 31,75 18,3

mounting (1.25) (0.72)
bolts (see table)
46,0 12,0
(1.81) (0.47)
0,75
(0.03)
Size 03 Mounting Surface Size 05 Mounting Surface (seals included)

Adaptor is supplied complete with bolts for mounting
Model Tappings for valve mounting bolts
to size 5 interface:
DGAM–3–01–1*–R M5–6H x 12 (0.47) deep
M6 bolts with type DGAM–3–01–1*–R
P A
DGAM–3–01–1* #10–24 UNC–2B x 12,7 (0.5) deep
1/4" –20 UNC bolts with type DGAM–3–01–1*
T B
P T B A
DGVM DGMS
4 holes tapped according
to model type (see table)
84,0 (3.3) 4 ports .750-16 UNF-2B
72,0 (2.83) 6,0 16,0 (0.63) for rear ports.
5,6 (.22) dia. thru 19,75 (0.24)
13,0 (.51) spotface 6,0 12,75 (0.5)
(0.78) (0.24)
to depth shown. 4
holes for mounting.
B
35,0
B 84,0
T (1.38) 57,25
(3.31) (2.25)
T P
72,0 P
A (2.83)
A
20,0 12,75 (0.5)

35,0 (.787) 36,00
(1.37) (1.42)
59,25
(2.33)
4 ports .750-16 UNF-2B
Dimensions in mm(in). for side ports.
389
P T (3.56) Standard T
40,5 54,0 port (TA )
(1.59) P
(2.12)
Installation B Additional T
B
Dimensions port (TB )
4 holes for valve 31,75 18,3

mounting (1.25) (0.72)
bolts (see table)
46,0 12,0
(1.81) (0.47)
0,75
(0.03)
DGVM-3-1*–*
DGMS-3-1E(Y)-1*-*
Single station subplate,

rear and side tapped port P A
T B
P T B A
DGVM DGMS
4 holes tapped according
to model type (see table)
84,0 (3.3) 4 ports .750-16 UNF-2B
72,0 (2.83) 6,0 16,0 (0.63) for rear ports.
5,6 (.22) dia. thru 19,75 (0.24)
13,0 (.51) spotface 6,0 12,75 (0.5)
(0.78) (0.24)
to depth shown. 4
holes for mounting.
B
35,0
B 84,0
T (1.38) 57,25
(3.31) (2.25)
T P
72,0 P
A (2.83)
A
20,0 12,75 (0.5)

35,0 (.787) 36,00
(1.37) (1.42)
59,25
(2.33)
4 ports .750-16 UNF-2B
for side ports.
Model Ports P, A, T, B Thread

at rear or side
DGVM–3–1*–R Rear G3/8 (3/8” BSPF) x
DGMS–3–1E–1*–R Side 12,0 (0.47) deep
DGVM–3–1*–S Rear 3/4” 16 UNF–2B x 14,3
DGMS–3–1E–1–S* Side (0.56) deep (SAE)
DGMS–3–1EY–1–S* Side 5/8” 18 UNF–2B x 12,7
(0.5) deep (SAE)
390
Installation
Dimensions
DGMS-3-3E-1*-* Valve Station 1 Valve Station 2

Multi-station subplate
(3 station shown) P1 T1 B1 A1 P2 T2 B2 A2
P P
T T
B1 A1 B2 A2
Ø5,6 (0.22 dia.

counterbored
A 11,1 (0.438 dia). 68,0 (2.68)
34,0
(1.34)
B B B
P 68,0 38,0 P
T P T P T P
(2.68) (1.5)
37,5 A A A
T (1.47) 5,0 T
(0.6)
B 6,0
(0.24)
These two ports are present 4 holes per model type P and T ports tapped
in 4, 5, and 6 station models. BSPF ports: M5-6H x 12,0 (0.47) deep according to model type:
Optional in 2 and 3 station SAE ports: #10-24 UNC-2B x 12,5 (0.5) deep DGMS-*E(X)–1*– R:
models, specify G1/2 (1/2 ” BSPF)
DGMS–3–2EX –1*–* or DGMA-*E(X)-1*-S:
DGMS–3–3EX –1*–* 3/4:-16 UNF-2B (SAE)
15,0
50,0 50,0 35,0 (0,6)
(1.97) (1.97) (1.38)
A
60,0
(2.36) 38,0
effective (1.5)
bolt length
B
A and B ports tapped

according to model type:
Model A Dim. B Dim. DGMS-*E(X)–1*–R:
DGMS–3–2E(X)–1*–* 121 (4.8) 108 (4.25) G3/8 (3/8 ” BSPF)
DGMS–3–3E(X)–1*–* 171 (6.8) 158 (6.22) DGMA-*E(X)-1*-S:
3/4:-16 UNF-2B (SAE)
DGMS–3–4E–1*–* 221 (8.7) 208 (8.19)
DGMS–3–5E–1*–* 271 (10.7) 258 (10.15)
DGMS–3–6E–1*–* 321 (12.7) 308 (12.12)
u T
hru connection P and T ports on types DGMS-3-2EX-1*-*
and DGMS-3-3EX-1*-*
391
Installation
Dimensions
Mounting Surface
70 (2.75) min.
When a subplate is not used,
a machined pad must be 40,5 ± 0,1 (1.594 ± 0.004)
provided for mounting. The
pad must be flat within 0,01 30,2 (1.890)
mm per 100 mm (0.0001" per
1") and smooth within 0,8 μm 21,5
(32 μin). (0.85)
The interface conforms to 12,7
ISO 4401-AB-03-4A (size 03) (0.5) 0,75 ± 0,1
(0.03 ± 0.004)
plus location pin hole
ANSI/B93.7M (and NFPA)
5,1
size 03 CETOP R35H4.2-03, (0.20) T
plus location pin hole
DIN 24340 Form A6, plus 15,5
location pin hole 25,9 (0.61) A B
(1.01)
Dimensional tolerance = 31,0 ± 0,1 31,75 ± 0,1
±0,2 ( 0.008) except where (1.22 ± 0.004) (1.25 ± 0.004)
otherwise stated. 48
(1.89)
Prior to installing a valve, min.
ensure that both valve and P
mounting surface are clean
and free from burrs.
Ø4,0 x 4,3 7,5 (0.29)
min. deep
4 holes, M5-6H x 12,0 (0.16 dia x
(0.47) min. full thread depth 0.17 deep)
ISO 4401 gives dimensions for locating pin
s 4 ports Ø6,3 (0.25 dia). For all
in mm. Inch conversions Vickers size 3 valves this
are accurate to 0.01" unless diameter may be increased to
stated. Ø7,5 (0.29 dia).
n #10-24 UNC-2B optional
392
Appendix
Mounting Bolts
Inch bolt kits, #10–24 UNC–2B Metric bolt kits, M5 Metric bolt kits, M6
Size x length, in (mm) Size x length, mm (in) Size x length, mm (in)
#10-24 x 12,7 (0.50) BK590715 M5 x 20 (0.79) BK466834M M6 x 16 (0.63) BK534564M
#10-24 x 19,05 (0.75) BK466847 M5 x 25 (0.98) BK465723M M6 x 20 (0.79) BK534565M
#10-24 x 25,4 (1.00) BK304 M5 x 30 (1.18) BK616452M M6 x 25 (0.98) BK534566M
#10-24 x 31,8 (1.25) BK590716 M5 x 40 (1.57) BK02–156493M M6 x 30 (1.18) BK534567M
#10-24 x 38,1 (1.50) BK306 M5 x 50 (1.97) BKDG3699M M6 x 40 (1.57) BKDG01633Mu
#10-24 x 44,4 (1.75) BK02-156494 M5 x 55 (2.17) BK986135M M6 x 45 (1.77) BK534569M
#10-24 x 50,8 (2.00) BKDG3698 M5 x 60 (2.36) BK466836M M6 x 50 (1.97) BK534570M
#10-24 x 57,2 (2.25) BK02-139165 M5 x 70 (2.76) BK464125M M6 x 55 (2.17) BK534571M
#10-24 x 60,3 (2.38) BK466849 M5 x 75 (2.95) BK869720M M6 x 65 (2.56) BK534572M
#10-24 x 69,9 (2.75) BK870017 M5 x 80 (3.15) BK466837M M6 x 70 (2.76) BK534573M
#10-24 x 69,9 (2.75) BKDGFNL- M5 x 90 (3.54) BK466838M M6 x 75 (2.95) BK534574M
694Mu M5 x 95 (3.74) BK869721M M6 x 80 (3.15) BK638873M
#10-24 x 76,2 (3.00) BK02-156496 M5 x 100 (3.94) BK466839M M6 x 80 (3.15) BKDGFN01637Mu
#10-24 x 79,4 (3.13) BK466850 M5 x 110 (4.33) BK466840M M6 x 85 (3.35) BK978478M
#10-24 x 88,9 (3.50) BK466851 M5 x 120 (4.72) BK466841M M6 x 90 (3.54) BK534576M
#10-24 x 95,3 (3.75) BK869704 M5 x 130 (5.12) BK466842M M6 x 100 (3.94) BK978479M
#10-24 x 100 (3.94) BK466852 M5 x 140 (5.51) BK466843M M6 x 110 (4.33) BK978480M
#10-24 x 101,6 (4.00) BK02-156497 M5 x 150 (5.91) BK466844M M6 x 115 (4.53) BK534580M
#10-24 x 109,5 (4.31) BK466853 M5 x 160 (6.30) BK466845M M6 x 120 (4.72) BK534581M
#10-24 x 120,7 (4.75) BK466854 M5 x 170 (6.69) BK466846M M6 x 140 (5.51) BK638878M
#10-24 x 127,0 (5.00) BK02-156499 M5 x 200 (7.87) BK464468M
#10-24 x 130,2 (5.13) BK466855
#10-24 x 133,4 (5.25) BK02-156498
#10-24 x 139,7 (5.50) BK466856
#10-24 x 150,9 (5.94) BK466857
#10-24 x 160,3 (6.31) BK466858
#10-24 x 170,0 (6.69) BK466859
#10-24 x 177,8 (7.00) BK890325
Note: threads lubricated. Prior to

If not using Eaton's Vickers® installation of DG4V-3 valve,
bolt kits, bolts must be ensure that both the face
to Grade 12.9 (ISO 898) of the valve and the face on
or better. which it is being mounted
The required bolt length (i.e subplate, manifold,
should allow 0.40" (10 mm) SystemStak valve or plate)
thread engagement in the is as clean as possible. Do
subplate/manifold block. not over tighten hold-down
Bolts should be torqued to bolts beyond recommended
5–7 N.m (44–62 lbf. in.) with values.
393
Appendix
Spare parts data Solenoid Coils

Refer to service drawing
I–3886–S for spare parts AC coils
and kit information. Code Voltage/ Standard performance High performance
frequency “U” type “F” type “U” type “F” type
Seal kits Full power coils:
For valves with spool indi- A 110V/50 Hz 02-101725 02-101730 507825 508166
cator switch, model types B 110/120V/50/60 Hz 02-101726 02-101731 507833 508169
DG4V-3-*A-M-S*-60:
C 220V/50 Hz 02-101727 02-101732 507826 508167
kit no. 859049
D 220/240V/50/60 Hz 02-101728 02-101733 507834 508170
For other models seal kits Low power coils:
vary according to type of
BL 110/120V/50/60 Hz N/A N/A 598562 698563
coil fitted:
DL 220/240V/50/60 Hz N/A N/A 866455 866457
For “U” type coil:
kit no. 858995 DC coils (Standard and high performance)
For “F” type coil: Code Voltage “U” type “F” type “SP1” type “SP2” type “KU” type
kit no. 858996 Full power coils:
Note: Each seal kit covers G 12V 507847 508172 02–111246 02-111166 02–140394
a variety of models and may H 24V 507848 508173 02–111248 02-111168 02–140395
have redundant seals for a Low power coils:
particular model. GL 12V 507855 508175 N/A N/A N/A
HL 24V 507852 508174 N/A N/A N/A
Mass, approx. kg (lb) Mounting Attitude
DG4V-3 and “U” “F” No restrictions except for

DG4V-3S (DC) coils coils no-spring, detented models
Single sol. valve 1,6 1,8
DG4V-3-*N and DG4V-3S-*N
which should be mounted
(3.5) (4.0) with the spool axis horizontal.
Double sol. valve 2,2 2,3 These model types may be
(4.8) (5.0) affected by severe vibration
DG4V-3 and “U” “F” or shock, especially if a sole-
DG4V-3S (AC) coils coils noid is not held energized.
Single sol. valve 1,5 1,6
(3.3) (3.5)
Double sol. valve 1,8 2,0
(4.0) (4.4)
Single sol. 2,0 2,0
valve w/ position (4.4) (4.4)
switch
394
Appendix
Temperature Limits Fluid Cleanliness
Ambient range: Proper fluid condition is es- fluid pressure levels in the Fire resistant fluids usually
-20°C to 70°C (-4°F to +158°F) sential for long and satisfac- system and are coded in the have higher specific gravities
tory life of hydraulic compo- chart below. Fluids other than than oil. The specific gravity
Fluid Temperature nents and systems. Hydraulic petroleum, severe service cy- of a fluid may be obtained
fluid must have the correct cles or temperature extremes from its producer.
Fluid Mineral Water balance of cleanliness, mate- are cause for adjustment of
Temp. oil containing rials and additives for protec- these cleanliness codes. See
Minimum -20°C +10°C tion against wear of compo- Eaton's Vickers® publication
(-4°F) (+50°F) nents, elevated viscosity and 561 for exact details.
Maximum* +70°C +54°C inclusion of air. Eaton products, as any com-
(+158°F) (+129°F) Essential information on ponents, will operate with
the correct methods for apparent satisfaction in fluids
* To obtain optimum service life
treating hydraulic fluid is with higher cleanliness codes
from both fluid and hydraulic
system, 65°C (150°F) is the
included in Eaton publica- than those described. Other
recommended maximum tion 561;“Vickers Guide to manufacturers will often rec-
fluid temperature, except for Systemic Contamination ommend levels above those
water-containing fluids. Control,” available from your specified.
local Eaton distributor or by Experience has shown, how-
For synthetic fluids, consult contacting Eaton, Incorpo-
fluid manufacturer or Eaton ever, that life of any hydraulic
rated. Recommendations on components is shortened
representative where limits are filtration and the selection of
outside those for mineral oil. in fluids with higher cleanli-
products to control fluid con- ness codes than those listed
Whatever the actual tempera- dition are included in 561. below. These codes have
ture range, ensure that fluid Recommended cleanliness been proven to provide a long
viscosities stay within the levels, using petroleum oil trouble-free service life for
limits specified in “Hydraulic under common conditions, the products shown, regard-
Fluids”. are based on the highest less of the manufacturer.

System Pressure Level
bar (psi)
Product <70 (<2000) 70–207 (2000–3000) 207+ (3000+)
Vane pumps, fixed 20/18/15 1 9/17/14 18/16/13
Vane pumps, variable 18/16/14 17/15/13
Piston pumps, fixed 19/17/15 18/16/14 17/15/13
Piston pumps, variable 18/16/14 17/15/13 16/14/12
Directional valves 20/18/15 20/18/15 19/17/14
Proportional valves 17/15/12 17/15/12 15/13/11
Servo valves 16/14/11 16/14/11 15/13/10
Pressure/Flow controls 19/17/14 19/17/14 19/17/14
Cylinders 20/18/15 20/18/15 20/18/15
Vane motors 20/18/15 19/17/14 18/16/13
Axial piston motors 19/17/14 18/16/13 17/15/12
Ordering Procedure
When placing an order,

please specify full model
designations of valves,
subplates and kits. Refer
to relevant “Model Code”
sections.
395
Eaton
Hydraulics Operations USA
14615 Lone Oak Road
Eden Prairie, MN 55344
USA
Tel: 952-937-9800
Fax: 952-294-7722
www.eaton.com/hydraulics
Eaton
Eaton Hydraulics Operations Asia Pacific
© 2008 Eaton Corporation Hydraulics Operations Europe 11th Floor Hong Kong New World Tower
All Rights Reserved Route de la Longeraie 7 300 Huaihai Zhong Road
Printed in USA 1110 Morges Shanghai 200021
Document No. V-VLDI-MC011-E Switzerland China
Supersedes GB-2072B Tel: +41 (0) 21 811 4600 Tel: 86-21-6387-9988
September 2008 Fax: +41 (0) 21 811 4601 Fax: 86-21-6335-3912
396
SV13-10-C/CM
Poppet type normally closed solenoid valve, 350 bar
Functional symbol Description

1 The SV13–10–C is a 2-way, 2-position, pilot operated, poppet type, normally closed,
screw-in cartridge solenoid valve.
2 Operation
In the de–energized position, this valve blocks flow from port 2 to port 1 and free flow is
allowed from port 1 to port 2. In the energized position, bi-directional flow is allowed
between port 1 and port 2.
Sectional view
Typical application pressure (all ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 bar (5000 psi)
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 bar (4500 psi)
Rated flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 l/min (12 USgpm)
Internal leakage (port 2 to port 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 drops/min. maximum
@ 350 bar (5000 psi)
Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40 to 100_C (–40_ to 212_F)
Coil duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous from 85% to 110% of nominal voltage
Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10-2 (See page 48)
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanliness code 18/16/13
Standard housing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel
Weight cartridge only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,18 kg (0.39 lb.)
2 Seal kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565803 Buna–N
566086 Vitonr
1
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.

Cartridge only
Flow in lpm (21,8 cSt oil @ 49_C)
0 8 15 23 30 38 45
100 7
Pressure Drop psi
75
Pressure Drop bar
50
3
A
25
B 1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Flow in USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120_F)
A – Port 1 to 2
B – Port 2 to 1 energized
10
397
Model Code SV13-10-C/CM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 Function 7 Port size/housing part number 8 Voltage Rating

SV13 – Solenoid valve 0 – Cartridge only 00 – No coil
Code Port size Housing 12D – 12 VDC
2 Size 24D – 24 VDC
2G – 1/4 ” BSPP 02Ć175102
10 – 10 Size 36D – 36 VDC
3G – 3/8” BSPP 02-175103
24A – 24 VAC
6T – SAE 6 02-175100 120A – 120 VAC
3 Seals
8T – SAE 8 02-175101 240A – 240 VAC
Blank – Buna-N See page 51 for housings 12B – 12 VDC/w diode*
V – Viton
24B – 24 VDC/w diode*
9 Connector type/coil part number *optional arc suppression diode
4 Style
C – Normally closed Blank – No coil
Coil G N P Q W Y
5 Manual override option Voltage ISO 4400 Deutsch 1/2” NPT Spade Leadwire Amp junior
DIN 43650 conduit port terminals
Blank – without manual override w/ leadwire
M – manual override
12D 02Ć178027 02Ć178030 02Ć178021 02-178018 02Ć178015 02Ć178035
For valve dimensions with manual 24D 02Ć178028 02Ć178031 02Ć178022 02-178019 02Ć178016 02Ć178036
override option installed see page 56.
36D 02Ć178029 02Ć178032 02Ć178023 02-178028 02Ć178017 02Ć178037
6 Housing material 24A 02Ć178047 – 02Ć178044 02-178043 02Ć178042 –
120A 02Ć178048 – 02Ć178045 – – –
Blank – Cartridge only 240A 02Ć178049 – 02Ć178046 – – –
S – Steel 12B 02-178855 02-178857 02-178851 02-178849 02-178847 02-178861
24B 02-178856 02-178858 02-178852 02-178850 02-178848 02-178862
10 Coil type See dimensions of connectors on page 55.
H – 26 W coil
Dimensions 46,0
8,6 (0.34) Torque cartridge in housing
mm (inch) (1.80)
68–75 Nm (50–55 lbf ft)
Note
38,9 When solenoid valve is ordered
(1.53) as cartridge only, nut is included.
19,4 (0.77) 22,2 (0.875) hex

WARNING
57,8 Maintain 5-8 Nm (4-6 lbf ft)

(2.28) maximum torque on valve
tube nut. Overtightening may
cause valve failure.
25,4 (1.00) hex
0.875”–14 Thd. 31,7
(1.25)
2
∅ 15,82 (.623) 1
11
398
FLOW RESTRICTOR VALVE MODULE C-3 DGMFN 3 X B1W 41

400
401
402
CARTRIDGE CHECK VALVE CV3 10 P 0 10

404
405
CARTRIDGE DIRECTIONAL CONTROL VALVE: SV3-10-C-0- 24D-G

SV3-10-C/CM/CR
Poppet type, normally
closed solenoid valve
(free reverse flow)
Description Operation
The SV3-10-C is a 2-way, In the de-energized posi- In the energized position,
2-position, poppet-type, tion, flow is blocked from the poppet lifts to allow
normally closed screw-in port 2 to port 1 and free flow in either direction.
cartridge solenoid valve. flow is allowed from port 1
to port 2.
Functional Symbol RATINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

Performance data is typical with fluid at 21,8 cST (105 SUS) and 49°C (120°F)
1 Typical application pressure (all ports) 210 bar (3000 psi)
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) 210 bar (3000 psi)
Rated flow 45 L/min (12 USgpm)
2 Internal leakage less than 5 drops/min. max @ 210 bar (3000 psi)
Temperature range -40° to 120°C (-40° to 248°F)
Sectional View Coil duty Continuous from 85% to 110% of nominal voltage
Cavity C-10-2
Fluids All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
MIL-H-5606, SAE 10, SAE 20 etc.
Filtration Cleanliness code 18/16/13
Housing material (standard) Aluminum
Weight cartridge only 0,4 kg (0.87 lbs)
Seal kit 565803 (Buna-N), 566086 (Viton®)
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont

Flow - L/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49°C)
Cartridge only 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45
100 7
75
Pressure Drop - bar

5
Pressure Drop - psi
50
B 3
A
2
25
1
1
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Flow - USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120°F)
A - Port 1 to port 2 de-energized

B - Port 2 to port 1 energized
A-24 EATON Vickers Screw-in Cartridge Valves V-VLOV-MC001-E1 June 2003
407
Model Code SV3-10-C
SV3 – 10 (V) – C (*) (F) – ** – **** * – 00
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 Function 7 Port Size 9 Connector types

SV3 - Solenoid valve CODE PORT SIZE HOUSING NUMBER
Blank - No coil
G - ISO 4400 DIN 43650
2 Size 0 Cartridge only P - 1/2” NPT conduit port
10 - 10 size 3B 3/8” BSPP 02-175462* w/leadwire
2G 1/4” BSPP 876702 Q - Spade terminals
3 Seal material W - Leadwire
3G 3/8” BSPP 876703
N - Deutsch (DC only)
Blank - Buna-N 6T SAE 6 566151* Y - Amp JR (DC only)
V - Viton® 6H SAE 6 876700 For coil part numbers and dimensions
see page C-5.
4 Style 8H SAE 8 876701
C - Normally closed *Light duty housing
See section J for housing details. 10 Special features
5 Manual override option 00 - None

Blank - No manual override 8 Voltage rating 24A - 24VAC (Only required if valve
M - Knob type 120A - 120VAC has special features,
00 - No coil 240A - 240VAC
R - Cable type omitted if “00.”)
12D - 12VDC 12B - 12VDC/w diode*
For valve dimensions with manual 24D - 24VDC 24B - 24VDC/w diode*
override option installed see page A-135. 36D - 36VDC Note
*Optional arc suppression diode.
Use 10 series, 20 W coils
6 Filter option with this solenoid valve.
Blank - None
F - Filter screen 46,0
8,6 (0.34)
19,4 (0.77) (1.81)
Dimensions
mm (inch) 38,9
(1.53)
Torque cartridge in alu-

minum housing 47-54 Nm
(35-40 ft. lbs)
19,0 (0.75) hex

Note
When solenoid valve is
ordered as cartridge only,
57,1
coil nut is included.
(2.25)
25,4 (1.0 ) hex
0.875" – 14 Thd.
WARNING 31,7
• Maintain 5-8 Nm (1.25)
(4-6 ft. lbs) maxi- 2
mum torque on valve tube
nut. Over tightening may 1
cause valve failure. Ø 15,80 (0.622)
EATON Vickers Screw-in Cartridge Valves V-VLOV-MC001-E1 June 2003 A-25
408
CONNECTOR WITH LED 10/50V PG11 A1T1112BR

PROPORTIONAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE C-3 KCG 3 160D Z M U H1 10

Vickers®
Proportional Valves
Proportional Pressure Relief Valves

KCG-3, 1* Series; KACG-3, 1* series
Basic Characteristics Features and Benefits
Max. pressure . . . . . . 350 bar (5075 psi) F Valve design ensures low hysteresis
Max. flow . . . . . . . . 5 L/min (1.3 USgpm) and good repeatability.
Mounting face to ISO 4401 size 03 F Self-bleeding design simplifies
installation and ensures consistent
General Description performance.
F When used for piloting a large
An electro-hydraulic proportional relief
pressure relief or reducing valve, a
valve designed to regulate pressure in a
low minimum pressure is obtainable
hydraulic system in proportion to an
combined with fast and stable
applied electrical input.
response to step input signals.
These open-loop, single-stage valves
can be used for direct control of Functional Symbol
pressure in low flow systems, or for pilot
control of larger pressure controls, and KCG-3 KACG-3
for such applications as pressure-
controlled pumps.
7-pin plug
KCG-3
The valve responds to variations in
current supply to its solenoid; separate
Vickers amplifiers, with PWM output P A B T
stage and output current control, are
available for driving this model, see P A B T
“Operating Data”.
KACG-3
The addition of an integral amplifier
Typical Section: KCG-3 Valve with Type “U” Coil Connection
allows the pressure to be controlled from
a 0 to +10V, or 0 to –10V command
signal range. The amplifier is mounted in
a robust metal housing and electrical
connections are via an industry standard
7-pin plug. Factory-set adjustments
ensure high reproducibility valve
-to-valve.
Other Models
For proportional pressure relief valves
with flow ratings up to 400 L/min
(106 USgpm), see catalog 2324 (model
types KCG, sizes 6 and 8)
This product has been designed and tested to meet specific standards outlined in the European Electromagnetic
Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC, amended by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, article 5. For
instructions on installation requirements to achieve effective protection levels, see this leaflet, the Installation
Wiring Practices for Vickers Electronic Products leaflet 2468 and leaflet 02-123931A which is packed with every
KA valve. Wiring practices relevant to this Directive are indicated by Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
Revised 10/97 GB-2162E

411
Model Code
Features in brackets () may be omitted. All other features must be specified.
Models requiring separate amplifier
KCG-3(-L)- *** -D-Z-M-***** - *** -1* (-EN46)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11
Models with integral amplifier
KACG-3(-L)- *** -D-Z-M- 2- PD7- H1-1*
1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
1 Valve type 7 Coil connections (KCG only) Valves supplied with type HJ1 coils
KC = Proportional pressure relief U = ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) will be stamped with the applicable
KAC = Proportional pressure relief with interface maximum controlled pressure.
integral amplifier FW = Flying-leads in wiring box
tapped 1/2I NPT Model code Max. pressure
FTW= As “FW” plus terminal strip position 5 with HJ1 coil
2 Mounting type
G = Subplate mounted FJ = Flying-leads in wiring box
tapped M20 40 35 bar (500 psi)
FTJ = As “FJ” plus terminal strip 100 85 bar (1230 psi)
3 Interface 160 140 bar (2000 psi)
P = Plug-in coil (type “H” only)
3 = ISO 4401, size 03 (NFPA D03) Use with “EN46” 250 210 bar (3000 psi)
350 315 bar (4500 psi)
4 Solenoid location 8 Connections (KACG only)
Blank = At port B end PD7 = 7 pin connector with plastic plug. 10 Design number, 1* series
L = At port A end See Warning note below. Subject to change. Installation
dimensions unaltered for design
5 Controlled pressure range 9 Coil rating numbers 10 to 19 inclusive.
(All coils except type HJ, see position Code = amps x ohmsY
9 footnoteB) G1 = 3,5 x 1,65 11 Special features
At rated flow of 1 L/min (0.26 USgpm) GP1 = 3,0 x 2,0 EN46 used with P-type coil
40 = 2-40 bar (29-580 psi) H1 = 1,6 x 7,3 F connection and Uniplug connector.
100 = 3-100 bar (44-1450 psi) HA1 = 0,94 x 22 Omit if not required.
160 = 4-160 bar (58-2300 psi) HJ1 = 1,00 x 14,25B
250 = 5-250 bar (73-3625 psi) HL1 = 0,80 x 29 z
350 = 6-350 bar (87-5000 psi)
Y Resistance at 20_C (68_F).
FKACG valves must have H1 coils
6 Standard features z For valves replacing ECG-02 models.
DZM = For KCG-3 B This low power coil is limited to the
DZM2 = For KACG-3 following maximum controlled
pressures.
Warning
To conform to the EC Electromagnetic Compatibility directive (EMC) this KACG valve must be fitted with a metal 7-pin
plug. The screen of the cable must be securely connected to the shell of the metal connector. A suitable IP67 rated
connector is available from Vickers, part no. 934939. Alternatively a non IP67 rated connector is available from
ITT-Cannon, part no.CA 02 COM-E 14S A7 P.
Additionally the cable must be fitted with a ferrite EMC suppression core not more than 4cm from the connector
referred to above. Suitable types include Farnell 535-898 or Farnell 535-904 which snap fit over the cable.
The plastic plug, part number 694534, is only suitable for use in a sealed electromagnetic environment or outside of
the European Community.
2
412
Operating Data
Standard test conditions are with antiwear hydraulic oil at 36 cSt (168 SUS) and 40_C (104_F)
Maximum pressures:
Port P:
Operating See in “Model Code”
Static 350 bar (5075 psi)
Port T:
Operating 2 bar (29 psi). See “Back pressure at port T” under “Installation
Static and start-up” on next page.
210 bar (3000 psi)
Flow limits:
Rated flow 1 L/min (0.26 USgpm)
Maximum flow 5 L/min (1.3 USgpm)
Coil or amplifier rating:
KCG models See in “Model Code”
KACG models 24V x 40W max. (22 to 36V including 10% pk.-to-pk. max. ripple
Command signal ranges, KACG models 0 to +10V DC, or 0 to –10V DC
Dither, KACG models Factory set, not user adjustable
Monitor point signal, KACG models 0,5V per amp. solenoid current
Power stage PWM, KACG models 2kHz nominal
7-pin plug connections, KACG models:
A Power supply +ve
B Power 0V
C Signal 0V
D +ve voltage command signal
E –ve voltage cpommand signal
F Monitor output
G Protective ground
Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)
KACG models only:
Emission (10V/m) EN 50081-2
Immunity (10V/m) EN 50082-2
Pressure gain See graph
Factory setting - Maximum with 10V command signal.
User adjustment - 30 to 120% of factory setting.
Note that altering this setting will affect valve to valve
interchangeability.
Pressure override See graph
Minimum-pressure adjustment 50% of maximum pressure limit of model
Pressure step response: Typical times to reach 90% of commanded step:
KCG-3-250-D-Z-M-*****-H1 model using
EEA-PAM-513-A-1* amplifier:
0 to 100% step 48 ms
100 to 0% step 9 ms
25 to 100% step 37 ms
100 to 25% step 18 ms
KACG-3-250 model:
25 to 100% step 26 ms
100 to 25% step 30 ms
Linearity, between 10% and 100% of controlled pressure <4%
range
3
413
Hysteresis
KCG models <4% (with 100 mA pk.-to-pk. dither)
KACG models <5% (with factory-set dither)
Repeatability
KCG models <"0,5% of rated pressure for a constant coil current
KACG models <"1.0% of rated pressure for a constant amplifier supply voltage
and constant command signal
Reproducibility (valve to valve) KACG models only <3% at factory settings
Protection, Electrical (KACG models) Reverse-polarity protected
Mass (weight)
KCG 1,7 kg (3.8 lb)
KACG 2,1 kg (4.6 lb)
Supporting products:
Amplifiers for KCG valves with “H” type coils only:
EHH-AMP-724-C/D-10 (Uniplug) See catalog 2367
EHH-AMP-7*2 series (power plug) See catalogs 2114, 2115 and 2282
EEA-PAM-513-A-14 (1 adjustable ramp) See catalog 2137
EEA-PAM-513-A-3* (2 adjustable ramps) See catalog 2464
Auxilliary electronic modules (Din-rail mounting) for
KACG models:
EHA CON 201 A 2* signal converter See catalog 2410B
EHD DSG 201 A 1* command signal generator See catalog 2470
EHA RMP 201 A 2* ramp generator See catalog 2410B
EHA PID 201 A 2* PID controller See catalog 2427
EHA PSU 201 A 1* power supply See catalog 2410B
ISO 4400 (DIN 43650) electrical connector:
Black, marked “B” Part number 710775
Gray, marked “A” Part number 710776
Subplates, size 03 See catalog 2425
Mounting boltsJ See catalog 2314A
J Note: If not using Vickers recommended bolt kits, bolts
must be to ISO 898 grade 12.9 or stronger.
Installation and start-up (commissioning):
Installation and start-up (commissioning) guide ML-B-9133B (Multi-lingual English, German, French and Italian),
shipped with each product and also available separately on
request.
Electrical data See under that heading on previous page.
Electromagnetic capability See under that heading on previous page.
Mounting attitude No restriction, provided that the valve is kept full of fluid through
port T.
Back pressure at port T Port T should be piped directly to reservoir with minimum
restriction. Any back pressure at this port is additive to the
controlled pressure at port P. The recommended max. pressure
at port T when the valve is controlling pressure is 2 bar (29 psi);
the max. pressure at T under static conditions is 210 bar
(3000 psi).
Ordering procedure Valves, subplates, bolt kits and Vickers amplifiers should be
ordered by full model code designation. Order ISO (DIN)
electrical connectors by part number.
4
414
Performance Data
Pressure Gain, Typical

Typical pressure v. command signal
response of K(A)CG-3-250 models psi bar
250
Test conditions:
Fluid = Antiwear hydraulic oil at 36 cSt
3 L/min (0.8 USgpm)
(168 SUS) 3000
200
Pressure 2000
150
100
1000
50
1 L/min (0.26 USgpm)
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 K(A)CG-3(-L)-250 models
Volts
0 0.5 1.0 1.5 1.6 KCG-3(-L)-250 models

Amps with 24V supply
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 KCG-3(-L)-250 models

Amps with 12V supply
Pressure Override, Typical
Test conditions:
Fluid = Antiwear hydraulic oil at 36 cSt
bar
(168 SUS)
psi 80
K(A)CG-3(-L)-350 models
(Rise above valve cracking pressure)
1000 70
60
800
50
600
40
Pressure override
30 K(A)CG-3(-L)-40 models
400
20
200
10
0 (At valve cracking

pressure) 0 1 2 3 4 5 L/min
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.32 USgpm

Rated flow;
see 5 in
“Model Code”
5
415
KACG-3 Electrical Block Diagram
Wiring
Connections must be made via the 7-pin
plug mounted on the amplifier.
Recommended cable sizes are:
Power cables:
For 24V supply
0,75 mm2 (18 AWG) up to 20m (65 ft)
1,00 mm2 (17 AWG) up to 40m (130 ft)
Signal cables:
0,50 mm2 (20 AWG)
Screen:
A suitable cable would have 7 cores, a
separate screen for the signal wires and an
overall screen.
See wiring connection diagram on page 7
7-pin plug con-

nections +15V
+24V A
Power 0V B 0V
Signal 0V C
–15V
Monitor output F Modulator

Command Positive D
signal
voltage Negative E
(see table) Minimum
Pressure
Gain
Protective ground G
Dither
Valve envelope Solenoid drive

Warning
All power must be switched
off before connecting or
disconnecting any plugs.
6
416
KACG-3 Typical Connection Arrangements
Wiring Connections for Valves with integral Amplifier
Outer
User panel Screen “KA” valve
Power +24V A
Supply
0V B
CJ
Inner screen
Demand 0V D or E
Signal
+/– 10V E or D Valve must
Drain wire be connected
Solenoid 0V G to ground via
Current subplate
Monitor Input F
Enclosure
0V must be Y Connector shell

connected
to ground
J Solenoid current monitor voltage (pin F) Y Note: In applications where the valve
will be referenced to the KA valve local must conform to European RFI/EMC
ground. A “local ground” (pin C) is regulations, the outer screen (shield) must
provided for optional use by differential be connected to the outer shell of the
input customer supplied electronics. 7-pin connector and the valve body must
be fastened to the earth ground. Proper
earth grounding practices must be
observed in this case, as any differences
Warning in command source and valve ground
potentials will result in a screen (shield)
Do not ground pin C. If the
ground loop.
local ground (pin C) is not used for
differential monitor electronics, do not use.
Read monitor pin F with respect to ground.
Warning
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
It is necessary to ensure that the valve is wired-up as above. For effective protection, the user
electrical cabinet, the valve subplate or manifold, and the cable screens should be connected to
efficient ground points. The metal 7-point connector, part no. 934939, should be used for the
integral amplifier.
In all cases, both valve and cable should be kept as far as possible from any sources of
electromagnetic radiation such as cables carrying heavy current, relays and certain kinds of
portable radio transmitters, etc. Difficult environments could mean that extra screening may be
necessary to avoid the interference.
It is important to connect the 0V lines as shown above. The multi-core cable should have at least
two screens to separate the demand signal and monitor output from the power lines.
7
417
Installation Dimensions in mm (inches)
KCG-3-***-D-Z-M-U-10 models 3rd angle

For KCG-3-L-***-D-Z-M-U models the solenoid projection
is mounted at port A-end of body, which then has
C and D dimensions as in table.
88 (3.52)
39
(1.54)
Alternative Power Plugs

See “Supporting products”
on page 4.
13,0 (0.5) for plug removal J
74,4
(3.0) J 51,0
41,75 (2.0)
(1.64) max.
Port B Port A
61,0 (2,4) for 155,0

coil removal (6.1)
Port T
Port B Y Port A Y
46,0
(1.8)
Orientation pin Port P

Model C D C D
KCG-3-*** 57,3 (2.26) 20,5 (0.81)
KCG-3-L-*** 61,2 (2.41) 16,8 (0.66)
J KCG-3-(L)-***-D-Z-M-U models.
Dimensions may vary according to
source of plug.
Y Ports A and B are blind holes with
O-ring recesses.
B The cable entry on this plug can be
repositioned at 90_ intervals by
reassembly of the contact holder
relative to the plug housing. The
cable entry is Pg 11 for cables
Ø6-10 mm (0.24-0.4I dia).
8
418
KCG-3-(L)-***-D-Z-M-F**-**1-10 models
For dimensions not shown see previous page
Ground (earth) connection
Ø4,0 (0.16 dia) self-tapping screw Conduit entry both ends, see
“Model Code” 3 for thread
163,0 (6.42): KCG-3-L type. Closure plug fitted to one
end.
163,0 (6.42): KCG-3 50,0 (2.0) max.
over wiring box
93,0 (3.7)
Y
93,5 (3.7)
69,5 (2.7)
Y Ref. Model Code 7 :

Codes “FJ” and “FW”: 2 lead wires approx. 150,0 (6.0) long.
M3 terminals provided for customer connection.
Codes “FTJ” and “FTW”: Lead wires connected into terminal
strip suitable for M3 terminals on customer connection.
KCG-3-(L)-***-D-Z-M-P-H1-10-EN46
For use with Vickers single-cable UNIPLUG connectors: To fit UNIPLUG connector to KCG-3 valve:
For “Soft Switch” Control: Unscrew coil retention nut and remove coil.
Use UNIPLUG model type EHH-AMP-724-C**-1* Slide UNIPLUG connector onto dummy pins (at non-solenoid
For Proportional Control: end) then replace coil, ensuring pins are fully engaged.
Use UNIPLUG model type EHH-AMP-724-D**-1* Replace and tighten coil retention nut.
UNIPLUG connectors should be ordered separately;
see catalog 2367. For dimensions not shown see previous page.
164,0 (6.46): KCG-3-L

UNIPLUG connector
164,0 (6.46): KCG-3
correctly assembled to
KCG-3 valve
87,5 (3.44)
9,0 (0.35)
9
419
KACG-3-** models
For KACG-3-L-*** models the solenoid is mounted at port
A-end of body (both versions have C and D dimensions as in
table on page 8 ) and the amplifier turned through 180°
Metal plug 934939

Cable outside diameter 8,0 to 10,5 (0.31 to 0.41)
Must be used for full EMC protection. See also warning
note on page 2
Plastic plug 694534

PG11. Cable maximum outside diameter 11,0 (0.43)
Â
ÂÂÂ
Remove plug for
access to the gain
40,0 potentiometer
(1.6) 25,0 227,0 (8.9)
Remove plug for (1.0)
access to
minimum-pressure
potentiometer.
7-pin plug
128,0 (5.1)
Do not
max.
remove
this plug.
To bleed air, loosen plug

in end of core tube;
24,0 21,75
re-tighten after bleeding 16,8 (0.66)
(0.94 (0.86)
is complete. 48,0 98,87 (3.89)
)
(1.9)
200,0 (7.9) max.
See Warning note on page 2 regarding the use of 7-pin plugs.
10
420
Further Information
Hydraulic Fluids Temperatures

Materials and seals used in these valves For petroleum oil:
are compatible with: Min. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –20°C (–4°F)
Anti-wear petroleum oils . . . . . . . . L-HM Max.* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . +70°C (158°F)
Non-alkyl based * To obtain optimum service life from both fluid and
phosphate esters . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-HFD hydraulic system, 65°C (150°F) normally is the
maximum temperature.
The extreme operating range is 500 to
13 cSt (270 to 70 SUS) but the For other fluids where limits are outside
recommended running range is 54 to those of petroleum oil, consult fluid
13 cSt (245 to 70 SUS). For further manufacturer or Vickers representative.
technical information about fluids see Whatever the actual temperature range,
694. ensure that viscosities stay within those
specified under “Hydraulic Fluids”.
Contamination Control Requirements
Recommendations on contamination Ambient for:
control methods and the selection of Valves at full performance specification:
products to control fluid condition are –20 to +60_C (–4 to +140_F).
included in Vickers publication 9132 or Valves, as above, will operate at
561, “Vickers Guide to Systemic temperatures of 0 to –20_C (32 to –4_F)
Contamination Control”. The book also but with a reduced dynamic response.
includes information on the Vickers
concept of “ProActive Maintenance”. Storage:
The following recommendations are –25 to +85_C (–13 to +185_F)
based on ISO cleanliness levels at Eurocard electronics:
2 mm, 5 mm and 15 mm. 0 to 50_C (32 to 122_F)
For products in this catalog the Seal Kits
recommended levels are: K(A)CG-3 (KA + DIN) . . . . . 02-138201
Up to 210 bar (3000 psi) . . . . . 18/16/13 KCG-3 (’F’ & ’P’ versions) . . 02-145869
Above 210 bar (3000 psi) . . . . 17/15/12
Installation and Start-up Guidelines

The proportional valves in this catalog
can be mounted in any attitude but it
may be necessary, in certain demanding
applications, to ensure that the
solenoids are kept full of hydraulic fluid.
If this proves to be the case any

accumulated air can be bled from the
solenoid bleed screw. This task is easier
if the valve has been mounted base
downwards. Good installation practice
dictates that the tank port, and any drain
port, are piped so as to keep the valve
full of fluid once the system start-up has
been completed.
11
421
SCREW COUPLING 1/8" 2103.01.17.00

MINIMESS®-1620 Test Points
ø 20
H +3 mm
H
SW
i
G
Metal cap with anti vibration O-ring Plastic cap – Vibration Proof
Material: Material: Material:

Free cutting steel Free cutting steel Stainless steel
1.0718 1.0718 1.4571
Torque in Nm
Technical data Metal Plastic Metal

cap cap cap
Thread Type of seal p max H i SW Part-number Part-number Part-number

G A in mm in mm in mm with NBR - sealing with NBR - sealing with FKM - sealing
M 8 x 1* 6 25 MPa 41 8,5 17 2103-01-32.00 2103-30-32.00 on request

Form G
M 10 x 1 12 37,5 8,5 17 2103-01-33.00 2103-30-33.00 2703-01-33.10
M 12 x 1,5 30 36 10 17 2103-01-13.00 2103-30-13.00 on request
M 14 x 1,5 Form F 40 63 MPa 36 10 19 2103-01-14.00 2103-30-14.00 2703-01-14.10
M 16 x 1,5 60 36 10 22 2103-01-15.00 2103-30-15.00 on request
M 14 x 1,5 Form E** 45 35,5 11 19 2103-01-96.00 2103-30-96.00 on request
ISO 228-G 1/8 18 40 MPa 38 8 17 2103-01-17.00 2103-30-17.00 2703-01-17.10
ISO 228-G 1/4 Form F 40 36 10 19 2103-01-18.00 2103-30-18.00 2703-01-18.10

63 MPa
ISO 228-G 3/8 60 36 10 22 2103-01-16.00 2103-30-16.00 on request
1/8 NPTF – 40 MPa 33 9,5 17 2103-01-46.00 2103-30-46.00 on request

Form H
1/4 NPTF – 33 16,5 17 2103-01-47.00 2103-30-47.00 2703-01-47.10
7/16-20 UNF 20 63 MPa 37 9 17 2103-01-21.00 2103-30-21.00 on request

Form E
9/16-18 UNF 35 36 10 19 2103-01-53.00 2103-30-53.00 on request
ISO 7/I-R 1/8 – 40 MPa 33 13 17 2103-01-40.00 2103-30-40.00 on request

Form C
ISO 7/I-R 1/4 – 63 MPa 33 13 17 2103-01-41.00 2103-30-41.00 on request
* M8x1 - Please do not use for new machinery design.

** Form E – ISO 6149-2.
Option
For sealing in FKM (Viton) Exchange end digits from 00 to 10 10
Other materials, designs, sealing and screw-in threads on request.

We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications.
8 1 MPa =10 bar

423
Metric DKO, Tee Adaptors - 1620
For solder free screw-in pipe connections according to DIN 2353; free-cutting steel 1.0718; sealing NBR
ø 20 ø 20
ø 20
SW17
L0
L0
L0
SW1
SW2 SW17
SW SW Safety ring
ød
G
G G
Fig. 1 ød Fig. 2
ød
L2
ca.L1
DKO - measuring connection with 24° sealing cone and Test Points incorporated. Tee adapter c/w cutting rings with union nuts.
Elastic Perbunban O-ring at the sealing cone. Test Points incorporated.
Series Thread
p max Fig. Lo SW Part-number L1 L2 Lo SW1 SW2 Part-number
Ød G
L 6 M 12 x 1,5 52 14 2103-93-06.00 50,5 20,5 49,5 24 14 2103-11-06.00
L 8 M 14 x 1,5 52 17 2103-93-08.00 50,5 20,5 49,5 24 17 2103-11-08.00
L 10 31,5 MPa M 16 x 1,5 1 52 19 2103-93-10.00 52,5 22,5 49,5 24 19 2103-11-10.00
L 12 M 18 x 1,5 52 22 2103-93-12.00 52,5 22,5 49,5 24 22 2103-11-12.00
L 15 M 22 x 1,5 52 27 2103-93-15.00 54,5 24,5 52,5 30 27 2103-11-15.00
L 18 M 26 x 1,5 52 32 2103-93-18.00 56,5 23,5 53,5 32 32 2103-11-18.00
L 22 M 30 x 2 60 36 2103-40-22.00 60,5 27,5 55,5 36 36 2103-11-22.00
L 28 16 MPa M 36 x 2 2 61 41 2103-40-28.00 60,5 27,5 58 41 41 2103-11-28.00
L 35 M 45 x 2 63 50 2103-40-35.00 68,5 25,5 60,5 46 50 2103-11-35.00
L 42 M 52 x 2 63 60 2103-40-42.00 70,5 24,5 65 55 60 2103-11-42.00
S 6 M 14 x 1,5 52 17 2103-94-06.00 54,5 24,5 49,5 24 17 2103-12-06.00

S 8 M 16 x 1,5 52 19 2103-94-08.00 54,5 24,5 49,5 24 19 2103-12-08.00
S 10 63 MPa M 18 x 1,5 1 52 22 2103-94-10.00 56,5 23,5 49,5 24 22 2103-12-10.00
S 12 M 20 x 1,5 52 24 2103-94-12.00 56,5 23,5 49,5 24 24 2103-12-12.00
S 14 M 22 x 1,5 2 63 27 2103-41-14.00 62,5 26,5 51 27 27 2103-12-14.00
S 16 M 24 x 1,5 1 52 30 2103-94-16.00 62,5 25,5 52,5 30 30 2103-12-16.00
S 20 40 MPa M 30 x 2 63 36 2103-41-20.00 68,5 25,5 55,5 36 36 2103-12-20.00
S 25 M 36 x 2 64,5 46 2103-41-25.00 74,5 26,5 58 41 46 2103-12-25.00
2
S 30 M 42 x 2 66 50 2103-41-30.00 80,5 27,5 60,5 46 50 2103-12-30.00
S 38 31,5 MPa M 52 x 2 69 60 2103-41-38.00 91 29 65 55 60 2103-12-38.00
Options
All sealing made of Viton with metal cap (when ordering, exchange end digits from 00 to 10) 10
With mounted plastic cap (when ordering, exchange end digits from 00 to 90) 90
All sealing made of Viton with plastic cap (when ordering, exchange end digits from 00 to 95) 95
1 MPa =10 bar 9

424
Metric DKO 1620 Male/Female Tee Adaptors
For solder free screw-in pipe connections according to DIN 2353
Series p max G1 D1 G2 D2 SW L Part-number
L 6 M 12 x 1,5 6 M 12 x 1,5 6 24 44,5 2103-KL-06.00

L 8 M 14 x 1,5 8 M 14 x 1,5 8 24 44,5 2103-KL-08.00
37,5
L 10 31,5 MPa M 16 x 1,5 10 M 16 x 1,5 10 24 47,5 2103-KL-10.00

L 12 M 18 x 1,5 12 M 18 x 1,5 12 24 48,5 2103-KL-12.00
L 15 M 22 x 1,5 15 M 22 x 1,5 15 30 51,5 2103-KL-15.00
L 18 M 26 x 1,5 18 M 26 x 1,5 18 32 55,5 2103-KL-18.00
G2
G1
D2
D1
L 22 M 30 x 2 22 M 30 x 2 22 36 58,5 2103-KL-22.00
SW L 28 16 MPa M 36 x 2 28 M 36 x 2 28 41 59 2103-KL-28.00
ca.L
L 35 M 45 x 2 35 M 45 x 2 35 46 68 2103-KL-35.00
L 42 M 52 x 2 42 M 52 x 2 42 55 68 2103-KL-42.00
Series G1 D1 G2 D2 SW L Part-number
S 6 M 14 x 1,5 6 M 14 x 1,5 6 24 46,5 2103-KS-06.00

S 8 M 16 x 1,5 8 M 16 x 1,5 8 24 48,5 2103-KS-08.00
S 10 63 MPa M 18 x 1,5 10 M 18 x 1,5 10 24 49,5 2103-KS-10.00
S 12 M 20 x 1,5 12 M 20 x 1,5 12 24 50 2103-KS-12.00
S 14 M 22 x 1,5 14 M 22 x 1,5 14 27 53,5 2103-KS-14.00
S 16 M 24 x 1,5 16 M 24 x 1,5 16 30 56,5 2103-KS-16.00
S 20 40 MPa M 30 x 2 20 M 30 x 2 20 36 64,5 2103-KS-20.00
S 25 M 36 x 2 25 M 36 x 2 25 41 66 2103-KS-25.00

1620 Bulkhead Adaptors
For solder free screw-in pipe connections according to DIN 2353, to MINIMESS® - 1620 Test Points, NBR sealing
ø 20
Thread L L1 SW
p max Connectoin Part-number
G in mm in mm in mm
M 12 x 1,5 L 6 34 67 17 2103-04-22.00
M 14 x 1,5 31,5 MPa L 8 34 67 19 2103-04-23.00

13max.
L1
SW M 16 x 1,5 L 10 33,5 66,5 22 2103-04-18.00

L
M 14 x 1,5 S 6 36 69 19 2103-04-24.00
M 16 x 1,5 63 MPa S 8 33,5 66,5 22 2103-04-25.00

G
24° M 18 x 1,5 S 10 37 70 24 2103-04-26.00
ø 20
Thread Part-number
p max Connectoin
G
13max.
SW22
M 16 x 2 63 MPa Both sides for MINIMESS® 1620 (M 16 x 2) 2103-04-16.00
70
SW19
10 1 MPa =10 bar

425
1620 Standpipe adaptor 37° - edged screwing SAE J514
NBR sealing
ø 20 Pipe Ø Pipe Ø L SW
Thread p max Part-number
G in mm in inch in mm in mm
7/16-20 UNF 60 MPa 6 1/4” 55 17 2103-85-21.00

L
1/2 -20 UNF 42 MPa 8 5/16” 56,5 17 2103-85-22.00

SW
9/16-18 UNF 10 3/8” 57,5 19 2103-85-23.00
31,5 MPa
G 3/4- 16 UNF 12 1/2” 60,5 22 2103-85-24.00
MINIMESS®- pressure gauge connection for bulkhead fitting

G1
Internal thread Connection L SW
p max Note Part-number
SW1
G1 G2 in mm in mm
ISO 228-G 1/4 38 19 2103-05-11.00

Without
10 max.
SW2 1620 /
ISO 228-G 1/2 63 MPa 42,5 27 return valve 2103-05-12.00
M 16 x 2
G2 1/4 NPT – 19 2103-05-23.00
MINIMESS®-1620 pressure gauge – direct connection

G Internal thread L SW
p max Part-number
G in mm in mm
SW ISO 228-G 1/4 14,5 19 2103-07-11.62

L
SW22
ISO 228-G 1/2 63 MPa 17 27 2103-07-12.62
1/4 NPT – 19 2103-07-23.62
MINIMESS®-1620
90° Swivel screw connection
NBR sealing
L2
Thread L1 L2 SW
SW p max Part-number
G in mm in mm in mm
ISO 228-G 1/4 63 MPa 34,5 64,5 19 2115-22-34.00

L1
dka-ring Sealing on screw-in thread (hollow screw) via dka-ring, on hexagon via Gi-ring (NBR).
G Other options on request.
MINIMESS®-1620 hose adaptor

G
Thread L SW
p max Note Part-number
G in mm in mm
Without
M 16 x 2 63 MPa 42 17 2146-01-00.00
return valve
L
SW
Other materials, further executions, sealing and screw-in threads on request.

1 MPa =10 bar 11
426
MINIMESS®-1620 p/T Test Points
for pressure and temperature measurement
45° 30°
ø20 ø11,5
G1/4
1,5
M10x1
9
12
Thread forms
25,5*)
0,5+0,15
27*)
2,5+0,2
only for p/T -
screw coupling
Form F Form G
*) = recommended min. depth of drill

ø 20 Material:
Free cutting steel
1.0718
Torque in Nm
Technical data Metal
cap
H
SW
Thread Type of sealing p max H i L0 L SW Part-number
in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm with NBR - sealing
i
G A
G ISO 228-G 1/4 Form F 40 36,5 10 16 14,5 19 2149-04-15.13

L
L0
63 MPa
M 10 x 1 Form G 12 38 8,5 16 14,5 17 2149-04-19.13
L0 = max. immersion depth in coupled state, L = not coupled state
Option
For FKM (Viton) - exchange end digits from 13 to 53 53
Other materials, further options, sealing and screw-in threads on request.

We reserve the right to carry out technical modifications.
12 1 MPa =10 bar

427
HYDROTECHNIK GmbH
Holzheimer Straße 94 –96 | 65549 Limburg
Tel. 0 64 31.40 04-0 | Fax 0 64 31.4 53 08
www.hydrotechnik.com | info@hydrotechnik.com
TEST WITH CONFIDENCE
8898-01-00.71/2005
428
EHH AMP 702 D 20

Vickers®
Amplifier Cards
Power Plugs for Proportional Valves

EHH-AMP-702-D/J/K; 2* Series
For use with valve types: Features and Benefits F Adjustable dither
KDG4V-3(S)-H*-6* F EMC to latest European standards
KTG4V-3(S)-H*-6* F Integral amplifier provides essential F Protection to IP67
KDG4V-5-H*-3* functions for control of proportional
KTG4V-5-H*-3* valves Application
KCG-3/6/8-H1-1* F Adjustable ramp time (types D and K),
gain, deadband compensation and Primary applications are in the control of
KX(C)G-6/8-H1-1* directly operated, non-feedback
KDG5V-5/7/8-H1-1* dither
F Ease of installation, with reduced cost proportional valves where the cost of
CMX***-E-G more sophisticated electronic controls
EPV**-12D-1* F Fully short-circuit and reverse-polarity
protected can be avoided.
ERV1/2**-12D-1*
EPFR1**-12D-1* F Differential voltage command signal Type J is for closed-loop applications.
(types D and J)
General Description
Three types of plugs, conforming to
ISO 4400/DIN 43650 interface, with
Electrical Block Diagram
integral amplifiers and necessary EHH-AMP-702-D/J/K-2*
adjustment potentiometers, are
Power input 1
designed for use with non-feedback 24V DC + Dither X1
hydraulic valves.
0V –
2 Max. Power
This plug/valve combination offers very Solenoid
Gain limiter PWM amp.
low cost solutions to many hydraulic 3 J X2
control problems requiring proportional + Ramp
control. Command
signal Deadband
Type D is controlled with a 0-10V –
command signal, and has adjustable 4
gain, ramp, deadband compensation
and dither. J Type J does not have the ramp function.
Type J, designed for closed-loop

applications, is controlled with a 0-10V
command signal, and has no ramp Model Code
function. EHH-AMP-702- * - 2*
Type K is controlled with a 4-20 mA
command signal, and has an adjustable 1 2
ramp time of 50 ms to 5s.
1 Adjustment range 2 Design number, 20 series

D = Proportional plug: 50 ms to 5s Subject to change. Installation
J = Proportional plug without ramp dimensions unaltered for design
function numbers 20 to 29 inclusive.
K = Proportional plug: 4-20 mA
This product has been designed and tested to meet specific standards outlined in the European Electromagnetic Compatibility
Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC, amended by 91/263/EEC, 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC, article 5. For instructions on installation
requirements to achieve effective protection levels, see this leaflet and the Installation Wiring Practices for Vickers Electronic
Products leaflet 2468. Wiring practices relevant to this Directive are indicated by Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
August 1996 GB-2115E

430
Operating Data
Electrical
Types D and J Type K
Connections
1 24V DC
2 0V (power and signal)
3 Positive command signal
4 Negative command signal
Power (input) supply 20-30V DC including "10% maximum ripple (peak-to-peak)
24V DC nominal
Absolute maximum voltage 40V
Max. power consumption incl. solenoid 35W
Reverse polarity protected Yes
Short circuit protected Yes
Maximum output current 1,6A
Max. output voltage typical (1,6A output Typically 1,5V below supply voltage
current)
Command signal 0-10V (10 kohms) 4-20 mA (250 ohms)
Deadband triggering 200 mV 4 mA
For output (LED ON) 200 mV to 10V 4-20 mA
For no output (LED OFF) 0 mV to 100 mV 0-4 mA
Deadband adjustment range 100 to 1000 mA
Gain adjustment range 0.02 A/V to 0.16 A/V 0.01 A/mA to 0.08 A/mA
Dither adjustment range 0 to 500 mA
Ramp time (types D and K only) 50 ms to 5s
PWM frequency 1200 Hz "10%
Dither frequency 120 Hz "10%
Protection IEC 529: IP67 (when correctly installed with interface seal in place)
Fully short-circuit and reverse-polarity protected
Isolation to VDE 0110 Group “B”
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC):
Emission EN 50081-2
Immunity EN 50082-2
Mechanical
Housing PA6 glass-reinforced plastic (conforming to UL-94HB). Color: gray
Mounting interface ISO 4400 (DIN 43650)
Cable clamp Pg9 screw type
Cable diameter Ø 5 to 10 mm (0.197 to 0.394I dia)
Wire section 0,5 to 1,0 mm2 (20 AWG-17 AWG)
Temperature, ambient range –20_ to +70_C (–4_ to +158_F)
Mass 0,07 kg (0.154 lb)
2
431
Input/Output Characteristics
Types D and K Type J
Command Command
signal signal
Type K Type D voltage Us
20 mA 10V 10V
8V 8V
12 mA 6V 6V
4V 4V
2V 2V
4 mA Time Time
Output Ramp Output

current setting current
US US
Gain setting Gain setting
Deadband compensation Deadband compensation

Time Time
Installation Dimensions in mm (inches) 3rd angle

projection
88 (3.52)
22
(0.87)
39
(1.54)
Solenoid Connections
34 (1.34)
No connection
1 (or 2)
2
38
(1.5)
1
2 (or 1)
3
432
Installation Data
Adjustments Ramp time: Terminal 1:

Gain Deadband
Turn clockwise to increase ramp time. Power supply 20V-30V DC, positive.
Ramp Dither
(Only types D/K)
Terminal 2:
Gain: Power supply 0V.
Turn clockwise to increase gain.
Terminal 3:
Deadband compensation: Command signal positive (see
Turn clockwise to increase deadband “Operating Data”).
compensation current.
Terminal 4:
LED Dither: Command signal negative (see
Turn clockwise to increase the dither “Operating Data”).
current.
4 3 2 1
Installation Wiring Options
Positive Command Voltage Bi-polar Command Voltage for Operating

Two Solenoids from One Signal
+10V EHH-AMP-702-D/J-20 EHH-AMP-702-D/J-20
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
24V 24V
0V 0V
0V 0V
+10V
Negative Command Voltage

EHH-AMP-702-D/J-20 EHH-AMP-702-D/J-20
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
–10V 24V –10V 24V

0V 0V
0V 0V
4-20 mA Command Signal Connections when replacing –10 design power plug
EHH-AMP-702-K-20 with –20 design and only 3 wires exist
EHH-AMP-702-D/J/K-20
4 3 2 1
24V
0V
4 3 2 1
24V
4-20 mA 0V
0V 0V
Link pin 2 to pin 4

Customer’s protective ground connection.
Warning: Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Screened cables should be used and particular attention paid to the grounding of the screens as shown in the above diagrams.
4
433
Installation Data
Assembly Showing Wiring Connection Points
Warning
F Ensure cable clamp nut is adequately

tightened to secure the cable.
F Do not connect, or disconnect, the
plug while power is on.
F Do not mount, or dismount, the plug
while power is on.
Wiring Preparation
4 0,5-1,0 mm2
(20 AWG-17 AWG)
Ø5-10
5 (0.2) (0.197-0.394 dia)
40 (1.6)
J All seals must be fitted correctly at plug

installation to provide protection to IP67
(IEC 529).
5
434
Start-Up Procedure Spare Parts
F Correctly wire the plug and, before The only spare part available is the
mounting it on the valve solenoid, interface seal, part number 732100.
apply 24V DC (20 to 30V limits) to the
“power input” terminals. Ordering Procedure
F Check for correct plug function by Order plug by full model code, and spare
illumination/non-illumination of the interface seals by part number 732100.
LED. The LED should illuminate when
the demand applied to the “signal
input” terminal is between 200 mV and
10V (or 4 mA and 20 mA) and should
not be illuminated when the applied
demand is less than 100 mV (4 mA). If
there is a malfunction a new plug must
be fitted.
F Switch off power supply and

command/input signal and then install
plug on solenoid. Ensure that all seals
are fitted correctly and clamped as the
retaining screw is tightened: this is
essential in providing IP67 protection.
F Ensure that the hydraulic system will

not cause any erratic movement of
actuators, then:
– Switch on power supply again.
– Repeat LED/function check as in 2.
An LED malfunction now indicates a
short circuit at the load.
F Successful completion of these

checks means that the plug and load
are ready for use.
6
435
BLOCK 4: SELECTION PRESSURE STEERING

437
BLOCK 5: SELECTION PRESSURE "LOAD SENSING"

439
RELEIF VALVE C-3 DGMC 3 BT CW 41

Relief Valves
DGMC-3-4*
DGMC2-3-4*
General Description Typical Section
These two-stage adjustable pressure

relief valves limit the maximum pressure
in the line(s) controlled by the integral
relief valve elements.
Pressure adjustment options of control

knob (with or without keylock) or
screw/locknut design are available. The
two-stage operation is basically identical
to long-established balanced piston
valves, described in detail in Vickers
Industrial hydraulics manual.
Functional Symbols Model Code for Relief Valves

For simplicity these two-stage valves are DGMC(2) -3- ** - * * (-B * - * * )- * - 4*
represented as single-stage models
DGMC-3-PT-** 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
P T B A
1 Type
2 = Dual relief function
Omit for single relief function
2 First function
DGMC2-3-AT-**-BT-**
Single relief, or first line of dual models
P T B A Code Pressure Discharge Usage
limited in into
PT P T Single only
AB A B Single, or dual with BA
BA B A Single only
AT A T Single, or dual with BT
BT B T Single only
DGMC-3-BA-**
3 Pressure adjustment range, first
P T B A function
A = 3-50 bar (43.5-725 psi)
B = 3-100 bar (43.5-1450 psi)
C = 10-200 bar (145-2900 psi)
G = 50-315 bar (725-4500 psi)
DGMC2-3-AB-**-BA-** 4 Pressure adjustment/ locking

method, first function
P T B A
H = Handknob
K = Micrometer with keylock
W = Screw and locknut
5
441
Relief Valves
DGMC-3-4*
DGMC2-3-4*
5 Second function Performance

Second line of dual models
Characteristics
Code Pressure Discharge Usage Pressure override
limited in into Typical performance for PT models at
max. pressure settings with mineral oil at
BA B A Dual with
21 cSt (102 SUS) and at 50_C (122_F).
AB
BT B T Dual with
AT psi bar
Omit for single line models 5000 350
300
4000
6 Pressure adjustment range,
250
second function Pressure
3000
Options as in 3 200
2000 150
7 Pressure adjustment/ locking
100
method, second function
1000
Options as in 4 50
0
8 Gage port: option on AT and PT 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 L/min
single models only
B = G1/4I (1/4 BSPF) 0 4 8 12 16 USgpm
S = SAE 4 (7/16I-20 UNF-2B) Flow rate
Blank = No gage port
9 Design number, 40 series

dimensions unchanged for design
numbers 40 to 49 inclusive.
6
442
DGMC(2)-3**-**(-B*-**)-4*
Models with type W adjuster
To adjust valve setting slacken off locknut
and turn adjuster screw .
Turn clockwise to increase pressure;
counter-clockwise to decrease pressure
Re-tighten locknut after completing
adjustment.
A max.
79 (3.1)
fully out
T
A
B
P
Line A adjustment Line B or line P adjustment
(according to model type)
B max.
4 (0.16) max. over gage port plug
4 (5/32) A/F hex. socket

40
(1.57) 20
(0.79)
12,7 (1/2) A/F hex. locknut
Ø3 (0.12 dia) Torque to 25-30 Nm (18-22 lbf ft)
3,5 (0.14)
4 holes through: Ø5,3 (0.21 dia) 4 off “O” seals supplied for this mounting face
P
47,6 46 B
(1.87) (1.8)
A
T
39 (1.54)
76 (3)
C max.
D max.
Model A B C D
DGMC-3-AT-*W-4* – – 154 (6.1) –

DGMC-3-BT-*W-4* – – – 156 (6.2)
DGMC-3-AT-*W-*-4* – 160 (6.3) – –
DGMC-3-PT-*W-4* – – – 156 (6.2)
DGMC-3-PT-*W-*-4* – 160 (6.3) – –
DGMC2-3-AT-*W-BT-*W-4* 234 (9.2) – – –
For gage port thread options see model code 8
7
443
E max.
T
A
B
Line A adjustment P Line B adjustment
16,75 (0.66)
16,75 (0.66)
8 (0.13) max. 10 (0.4) max.
F max.
G max.
Model E F G
DGMC-3-AB-*W-4* – – 164 (6.5)

DGMC-3-BA-*W-*-4* – 164 (6.5) –
DGMC2-3-AB-*W-BA-*W-4* 234 (9.2) – –
8
444
BLOCK 6: PROPORTIONAL CONTROL BLOCK SAFETY RENDERING, BHE-G-1070-00

446
SV13 10 C 0 24DGH

SV13-10-C/CM
Poppet type normally closed solenoid valve, 350 bar
Functional symbol Description

1 The SV13–10–C is a 2-way, 2-position, pilot operated, poppet type, normally closed,
screw-in cartridge solenoid valve.
2 Operation
In the de–energized position, this valve blocks flow from port 2 to port 1 and free flow is
allowed from port 1 to port 2. In the energized position, bi-directional flow is allowed
between port 1 and port 2.
Sectional view
Typical application pressure (all ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 bar (5000 psi)
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 bar (4500 psi)
Rated flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 l/min (12 USgpm)
Internal leakage (port 2 to port 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 drops/min. maximum
@ 350 bar (5000 psi)
Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . –40 to 100_C (–40_ to 212_F)
Coil duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Continuous from 85% to 110% of nominal voltage
Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10-2 (See page 48)
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All general purpose hydraulic fluids such as:
Filtration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleanliness code 18/16/13
Standard housing material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steel
Weight cartridge only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0,18 kg (0.39 lb.)
2 Seal kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565803 Buna–N
566086 Vitonr
1
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.

Cartridge only
Flow in lpm (21,8 cSt oil @ 49_C)
0 8 15 23 30 38 45
100 7
Pressure Drop psi
75
Pressure Drop bar
50
3
A
25
B 1
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
Flow in USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120_F)
A – Port 1 to 2
B – Port 2 to 1 energized
10
448
Model Code SV13-10-C/CM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 Function 7 Port size/housing part number 8 Voltage Rating

SV13 – Solenoid valve 0 – Cartridge only 00 – No coil
Code Port size Housing 12D – 12 VDC
2 Size 24D – 24 VDC
2G – 1/4 ” BSPP 02Ć175102
10 – 10 Size 36D – 36 VDC
3G – 3/8” BSPP 02-175103
24A – 24 VAC
6T – SAE 6 02-175100 120A – 120 VAC
3 Seals
8T – SAE 8 02-175101 240A – 240 VAC
Blank – Buna-N See page 51 for housings 12B – 12 VDC/w diode*
V – Viton
24B – 24 VDC/w diode*
9 Connector type/coil part number *optional arc suppression diode
4 Style
C – Normally closed Blank – No coil
Coil G N P Q W Y
5 Manual override option Voltage ISO 4400 Deutsch 1/2” NPT Spade Leadwire Amp junior
DIN 43650 conduit port terminals
Blank – without manual override w/ leadwire
M – manual override
12D 02Ć178027 02Ć178030 02Ć178021 02-178018 02Ć178015 02Ć178035
For valve dimensions with manual 24D 02Ć178028 02Ć178031 02Ć178022 02-178019 02Ć178016 02Ć178036
override option installed see page 56.
36D 02Ć178029 02Ć178032 02Ć178023 02-178028 02Ć178017 02Ć178037
6 Housing material 24A 02Ć178047 – 02Ć178044 02-178043 02Ć178042 –
120A 02Ć178048 – 02Ć178045 – – –
Blank – Cartridge only 240A 02Ć178049 – 02Ć178046 – – –
S – Steel 12B 02-178855 02-178857 02-178851 02-178849 02-178847 02-178861
24B 02-178856 02-178858 02-178852 02-178850 02-178848 02-178862
10 Coil type See dimensions of connectors on page 55.
H – 26 W coil
Dimensions 46,0
8,6 (0.34) Torque cartridge in housing
mm (inch) (1.80)
68–75 Nm (50–55 lbf ft)
Note
38,9 When solenoid valve is ordered
(1.53) as cartridge only, nut is included.
19,4 (0.77) 22,2 (0.875) hex

WARNING
57,8 Maintain 5-8 Nm (4-6 lbf ft)

(2.28) maximum torque on valve
tube nut. Overtightening may
cause valve failure.
25,4 (1.00) hex
0.875”–14 Thd. 31,7
(1.25)
2
∅ 15,82 (.623) 1
11
449
CARTRIDGE 3/8" DPS2 10 F S O 160

451
452
BELL HOUSING RV 250/110/446

Pumpenträger nach VDMA 24 561
Bellhousings acc. to VDMA 24 561
• Abmessungen gemäß VDMA 24 561 • Dimensions acc. to VDMA 24 561

•S tarre und gedämpfte Ausführung mit • Rigid and noise damping versions in
identischer Längenabstufung identical length
•P roblemloses Austauschen der Ausführun- • Easy interchangeability
gen untereinander möglich
454
www.rajalovejoy.com 2
Typenbezeichnung
Model type
RV 250 / 148 / 1000/ DF/ ***
VDMA Pumpenträger Interner Zusatzcode für Optionen

VDMA bellhousing Optional internal code
160 Zwischenflansch Pumpenseite
ZF
Intermediate flange pump side
200
Zwischenflansch Motorseite
250 MZF
Intermediate flange motor side
300 Zentrierring Pumpenseite
ZR
Flansch-Ø 350 Centerring pump side
Flange dia. 400 Inspektionsöffnung
MB
Inspection hole
450
Leckölbohrung
550 LB
Leakage boring
660 Einpressmutter
E
800 Press nut
Mit Schutzgitter für MB
GI
Totale Pumpenträgerlänge incl. DF Pumpenanschluss Including protective grid for MB
Total length of bellhousing incl. DF Pump connection Mit Stopfen für MB
ST
Siehe Tabelle Seite 4+5 Bearbeitungscode Including drain plug for MB
XXXX
See table page 4+5 Internal machining code
Gedämpfter Pumpenträger
Bellhousing with noise reduction
Ohne Dämpfungsflansch
–
Without damping flange
Mit Dämpfungsflansch von 250 – 350 (Mono-
bloc)
DF
With damping flange from 250 – 350 (Mono-
bloc)
DF350
Mit Dämpfungsflansch ab RV400
DV400
With damping flange up from RV400
DF401
Gewichtsbelastung der gedämpften Pumpenträger

Permitted weight load of damped bellhousings
Zulässige Gewichtsbelastung der gedämpften Pumpenträger und Dämpfungsflansche unter Berücksichtigung

einer Betriebstemperatur bis 60°C
Permitted weight load for dampened bellhousing and damping flange valid for an operating temperature of 60°C
F zul. Pumpenträger gedämpft Dämpfungflansch

Bellhousing noise reduction Damping flange
L
RV 250 RV 300 RV 350 DV 400 DF 401/1N DF 401/1H
Schwerpunktabstand L [mm]
100 100 200 300 300 300
Centre to centre spacing [mm]
Zul. Gewichtskraft F [N]
400 1300 1000 2500 2500 4000
Permitted weight load F [N]
Für andere Schwerpunktabstände Lx errechnet sich die zulässige Gewichtskraft Fzul. aus der Näherungsformel:
Other centre to centre distances Lx, the permitted weight load Fzul. can be calculated acc. to the approximation formula:
L [mm] Max. zulässige Betriebstemperatur +80°C, kurzzeitig +100°C

Fzul. [N] =F [N] + 0,5 F( -1)
Lx [mm] Max. permitted operating temperature +80°C, for short periods +100°C
455
3
Monobloc-Pumpenträger, gedämpft nach VDMA 24 561

Monobloc-Bellhousings with noise damper acc. to VDMA 24 561
Hersteller von Hydraulik-Zubehör haben bekanntlich keinen Einfluss auf It is a well-known fact, that manufacturers of hydraulic accessories have no in-
den Geräuschcharakter einer Pumpe. Die Beeinflussung von Luftschall und fluence at all upon the noise characteristics of a pump. The influencing of air
Flüssigkeitsschall und auch des Körperschalls einer Pumpe obliegt dem sound and liquids sound, but also that of structure-borne noise is incumbent on
Pumpenkonstrukteur. the pump design engineer himself.
Der Geräuschcharakter einer Pumpe – bestehend aus Grundfrequenz und The noise characteristics of a pump – consisting of basic frequency and har-
Oberwellen – kann besonders unangenehm werden, wenn sich der Körper- monic waves – can become very annoying, when the structure-borne noise of
schall in andere Bauelemente eines Hydraulikaggregates und hiermit ver- the hydraulic unit and that of the herewith integrated elements of the machine
bundene Maschinenelemente fortpflanzt. Die Volumenpulsation und somit are propagated. The volume vibration of a pump, and with it the pressure vibra-
Druckpulsation einer Pumpe kann zu besonders unangenehmen Struktur- tion, can cause a particularly unpleasant resonance of the structure, which itself
resonanzen führen, welche teilweise selbst durch eine Schalldruckpegel- cannot always be expressed, even by means of a sound-pressure level monitor-
messung in Form des dB(A)-Wertes nicht immer umfassend zum Ausdruck ing in form of a dB(A)-value.
kommen.
Zur Vermeidung der Fortpflanzung dieser Pulsation in andere Bauelemente In order to prevent the propagation of this vibration into other integrated ele-
ist eine weitestgehende Körperschalltrennung zu erwirken und abgesehen ments as far as possible, the separation of the structure-borne noises is to be
von der erforderlichen Verwendung einer drehelastischen Kupplung und achieved. And, apart from having to use a flexible clutch and pressure piping in-
von Druckschläuchen anstelle von Verrohrungen, geschieht die wesentliche stead of the conventional one, the structure-born noises will be essentially sepa-
Körperschalltrennung mittels eines gedämpften Pumpenträgers. Derartige rated through the implementation of bellhousings with noise damper. Damper
Dämpungsflansche enthalten ein Elastomer, welches den metallischen flanges of this type contain an elastomer, which hinders the metallic contact
Kontakt zwischen Pumpe und den übrigen Elementen eines Hydraulikag- between the pump and the other elements of the hydraulic unit.
gregates verhindert.
Seit mehr als 25 Jahren fertigt und vertreibt die Firma Raja-Lovejoy Dämp- The company Raja-Lovejoy manufactures and distributes damper flanges for
fungsflansche zur Geräuschreduzierung von Hydraulikaggregaten. Auf- the noise reduction of hydraulic units. On account of its many years of experi-
grund der langjährigen Erfahrung hat Raja-Lovejoy ein gedämpftes Mono- ence in this field, Raja-Lovejoy has developed a monobloc bellhousing system
bloc-Pumpenträgersystem (Abb. 4) entwickelt, welches eine wesentliche with noise damping (Fig. 4), which offers an essential simplification towards the
Vereinfachung gegenüber der üblichen Bauweise bietet. Die Verbindung conventional construction. The connection between the noise damper ring and
zwischen Dämpfungsring und Pumpenträger erfolgt jetzt gänzlich ohne the bellhousing is now totally made without bolting. What is more, the pump
Verschraubungen. Vielmehr wird der Pumpenflansch direkt durch eine flange is directly combined with the bellhousing by means of a form-conclusive
formschlüssige, anvulkanisierte Elastomer-Verbindung (sowohl in Dreh- and vulcanised elastomer compound (as well in the sense of rotation as in the
richtung als auch als Radialabstützung) unmittelbar mit dem eigentlichen radial back-up).
Pumpenträger verbunden.
Abb. 1 Schalldruckpegelmessung Fig. 1 Sound-pressure level Abb. 2 Schalldruckpegelmessung Fig. 2 Sound-pressure level moni-
Flügelzellenpumpe monitoring vane pump Außenzahnradpumpe toring external gear pump
85
85
RV250-starr
RV250-rigid
80
80
S ound leve l [dB ( A ) ]
S c ha llpe ge l [dB ( A ) ]
RV300-starr 75
S c ha llpe ge l [dB ( A ) ]
S ound leve l [dB ( A ) ]
75 RV250-DF (Monobloc)
RV300-rigid
RV250-DF (Monobloc)
70
70
RV300-DF (Monobloc)
RV300-DF (Monobloc) 65
65
60 60
0 20 40 60 80 100 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200
Betriebsdruck p [bar] Betriebsdruck p [bar]

Operating pressure p [bar] Working pressure p [bar]
Trotz hervorragender Dämpfungseigenschaften ergibt sich hierdurch eine A noticeable improvement of the stiffness is the result of this, in spite of first-rate
deutliche Verbesserung der Steifigkeit. Bei einem Monobloc-Pumpenträ- noise damping characteristics i.e. meaning a tensile strength of 56 kN , in the
ger mit Motorflanschdurchmesser 300 mm, passend zu einem E-Motor, case of a monobloc bellhousing with a motor flange diameter of 300 mm, suit-
Baugrösse 132, ergibt sich beispielsweise eine Zerreißkraft von 56 kN. Die able for an E-motor frame size 132. The higher stiffness results especially in less-
höhere Steifigkeit bewirkt vor allem geringere Verlagerungswerte und so- er misalignments, which go together with a higher service life of the coupling.
mit eine höhere Lebensdauer der Kupplung.
Der Dämpfungseffekt des Monobloc-Pumpenträgers ist nicht nur abhängig The noise damping effect of the monobloc bellhousing does not only depend on
von dem speziellen Einsatzfall, sondern auch von dem Geräuschcharak- the special field case but also on the noise characteristics of the pump. The more
ter der Pumpe. Je unangenehmer das Pumpengeräusch, desto höher der annoying the pump’s noise is, the higher the damping degree will be. The spec-
Dämpfungsgrad. Das Spektrum der Schallpegelreduzierung liegt in der Re- trum of soundlevel reduction generally lies between 3 dB(A) in the case of less
gel zwischen 3 dB(A) bei geräuschärmeren Pumpen (Abb. 1) und über 10 noisy pumps (Fig. 1) and more than 10 dB(A) by pumps (Fig. 2), which procure a
dB(A) bei Pumpen (Abb. 2), welche ein unangenehmeres „Geräuscherlebnis“ more annoying “noise-experience”.
vermitteln.
456
Starre Ausführung RV Monobloc-System, gedämpfte Ausführung

Rigid version RV Monobloc-System, noise reduction version
Ø D1 = 160 – 350 mm Ø D1 = 250 – 350 mm
Ø D1 = 160 – 350 mm Ø D1 = 250 – 350 mm
Abb. 3 Pumpenträger, starr, nach VDMA 24 561 Abb. 4 Monobloc-Pumpenträger, gedämpft, nach VDMA 24 561
Fig. 3 Bellhousings, rigid, acc. to VDMA 24 561 Formschlüssige Verbindung ohne Verschraubung
Fig. 4 Monobloc-Bellhousings with noise damper, acc. to VDMA 24 561
Form fitting without screw joint
RV.../.../... RV.../.../.../DF
Ød 3
Ød2
G1
H2
L
L
ØD 4 d ØD 4
G
1
F
F
L1
L1
ØD 3 ØD 3
ØD 2 ØD 2
ØD 1 ØD 1
Pumpen- E-Motor Leistung Wellenende Fußflansch D1 D2 D3 D4 d1 d2 d3 L L1 F G G1 H2

trägertyp Baugröße Power Shaftend Footbracket
Type of Frame size
bellhousing DxI
[kW] [mm]
RV 160/80/... 71 0.25 14 x 30 PTFL160 160 130 110 110 21 107 – 80 13 4 9 M8 8.5
RV 160/90/... 0.37 90
RV 200/100/... 80 0.55-0.75 19 x 40 PTFL200 200 165 130 145 36 129 – 100 16 5 11 M10 12.5
RV 200/110/... 90 S+L 1.1-1.5 24 x 50 110
RV 200/118/... 118
RV 200/124/... 128 124
RV 200/140/... 140
RV 250/120/... 100 L 2.2-3 28 x 60 PTFL250 250 215 180 190 45 178 172 120 19 5 14 M12 14.5
RV 250/124/... 112 M 4 PTFS250 124
RV 250/128/... 128
RV 250/135/... 135
RV 250/148/... 172 148
RV 250/175/... 176 175
RV 300/144/... 132 S 5.5 38 x 80 PTFL300 300 265 230 234 50 222 217 144 20 5 14 M12 18
RV 300/150/... 132 M 7.5 Ptfs300 221 150
RV 300/155/... 155
RV 300/168/... 220 168
RV 300/196/... 217 196
RV 350/188/... 160 M+L 11-15 42 x 110 PTFS350 350 300 250 260 41 236 231 188 26 6 18 M16 18
RV 350/204/... 180 M+L 18.5-22 48 x 110 53 234 204
RV 350/228/... 70 232 228 228
RV 350/256/... 90 230 226 256
Pumpenträger mit Flansch-Ø D1 = 160 mm nach VDMA 24 561 nur in starrer Ausführung. Ausführung mit Flansch-Ø D1 = 200 mm mit verschraubtem Dämpfungsflansch auf Anfrage.
Bellhousings with flange-Ø D1 = 160 mm acc. to VDMA 24 561 only in rigid version. Noise reduction version with flange-Ø D1 = 200 mm with screwed damping flange on request.
457
5
Starre Ausführung RV Gedämpfte Ausführung, 2-teilig

Rigid version RV Noise reduction version, 2-piece
Ø D1 = 400 – 800 mm Ø D1 = 400 – 800 mm
Ø D1 = 400 – 800 mm Ø D1 = 400 – 800 mm
RV.../.../... Ab Größe 450, 8 Bohrungen RV.../.../.../DF350 RV.../.../.../DV400

From Size 450, 8 bores RV.../.../.../DF400
Ød3
Ød3
Ød2
G1
H2
L
L
ØD4 d ØD4
G
1
F
F
L1
L1
ØD3 ØD3
ØD2 ØD2
ØD1
ØD1
Pumpen- E-Motor Leistung Wellenende Fußflansch D1 D2 D3 D4 d1 d1 d2 d3 L L1 F G G1 H2

trägertyp Baugröße Power Shaftend Footbracket min min
Type of Frame size
bellhousing DxI
[kW] [mm]
RV 400/204/... 200 L 30 55 x 110 PTFS400 400 350 300 300 50 50 265 260 204 26 6 18 M16 22
RV 400/228/... (DF350) 262 (DF350) 228
RV 400/256/... 50 259 283 256
RV 450/234/... 225 S 37 60 x 140 PTFS450 450 400 350 350 80 (DV400) 301 (DV400) 234 26 6 18 M16 20
RV 450/262/... 225 M 45 80 297 362 262
RV 450/285/... (DF400) 276 (DF400) 285
RV 450/315/... 315
RV 550/248/... 250 M 55 65 x 140 PTS5500 550 500 450 450 80 362 248 26 6 18 M16 20
RV 550/265/... 280 S+M 75 - 90 75 x 140 359 265
RV 550/275/... 276 275
RV 550/295/... 295
RV 550/315/... 315
RV 660/310/... 315 S+M+L 110 - 132 80 x 170 PTS660 660 600 550 550 80 414 310 32 6 23 M20 20
RV 660/330/... 160 - 200 276 330
RV 660/345/... 345
RV 800/315/...** 355 L 250 - 315 95 x 170 — 800 740 680 680 125 468 315 60 10 23 M20 35
RV 800/335/...** 400 L 355 - 400 100 x 210 474 335
RV 800/350/...** 485 350
RV 800/443/...** 490 443
**Nicht in der VDMA-Norm enthalten **Not included in the VDMA-Standard
458
Pumpenträgerfüße Baureihe PTFL / PTFS Footbracket series PTFL / PTFS

nach VDMA 24 561, für Motorbauform IM B5 acc. to VDMA 24 561 for bellhousings, motor type IM B5
PTFL Leichte Baureihe PTFL Light version PTFS Schwere Baureihe PTFS Heavy duty version
BB BB
dd dd
R1
R1
R1
R1
R
R
R
R
H2
H2
H1
H1
H1
H1
H
H
H
H
H3
H3
H2
H2
H4
H4
B3
B3
B1
B1
d1d1
d1d1
B1
B1
L1
L1
L
L
S
S
B2
B2
L3
L3
L3
L3
L5
L5
B4
B4
L8
L8
S
S
L2
L2
L1
L1
L
L
L4
L4
L6
L6
Typ
Type B B1 B2 B3 B4 L L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 H H1 H2 H3 H4 R R1 S d d1 L L8
PTFL 160 160 140 – – – 80 50 15 7 – – – 108 100 10 – – 65 55 12 9 9 – –
PTFL 200 210 180 – – – 90 60 15 4 – – – 122 112 12 – – 82.5 72.5 14 11 11 – –
PTFL 250 250 220 – – – 110 60 25 21 – – – 145 132 15 – – 107.5 95 19 14 14 – –
PTFL 300 290 260 – – – 120 80 24 20 – – – 172 160 20 – – 132.5 117 18 14 14 – –
PTFS 250 250 215 193 250 162 260 185 — 10 147.5 67.5 110 167 155 155 120 15 107.5 95.15 15 14 14 15 60
PTFS 300 300 265 243 300 207 270 225 — 10 172 80 130 197 185 185 145 18 132.5 117.25 18 14 14 20 75
PTFS 350 350 300 260 350 210 305 265 — 12 195 92 150 255 235 235 184 18 150 130 18 18 18 25 90
PTFS 400 400 350 320 400 260 350 300 — 12 225 105 – 277 260 232 220 20 175 151 20 18 18 – 100
PTFS 450 450 400 364 450 317 385 335 — 12 250 113 – 312 295 272 238 20 200 176 22 18 18 – 110
PTFS 550 550 500 454 550 401 465 415 — 12 300 140 – 365 350 335 285 25 250 226 25 18 18 – 140
PTFS 660 660 600 550 660 486 555 495 — 18 360 165 – 400 380 360 308 30 300 276 30 22 22 – 165
PTFS 800 auf Anfrage. PTFS 800 on request.

Bitte beachten Sie unsere Montageanleitung. Der Pumpenträger muss mit sämtlichen Please note our assembly instruction. The bellhousing must be assembled with
Befestigungsbohrungen des Fußflansches verschraubt werden, um die volle Belastbarkeit all mounting holes of the foot bracket, to ensure the maximum loading capacity of the
des PTFL/PTFS zu gewährleisten! PTFL/PTFS!
459
7
Vorteile bei Montage mit Fußflansch Das Raja-Lovejoy-Konzept

Advantages of footbracket assembly starr, gedämpft, gekühlt
1. Reduzierung der Motor-Lagerhaltung auf IM B5/V Identische Einbaumaße L, B1, B2, H1 bei Verwendung der
2. Einfacher Austausch des E-Motors. Fußflansch- Baureihe PTFL.
3. Aufbau von Pumpe und Verrohrung auch ohne Motor möglich.
4. Die bei Fußmotoren teilweise notwendige Unterfütterung entfällt.
Raja-Lovejoy – the general solution concept
1. Storage reduction to electric-motors, frame IM B5/V1 (without feet). rigid, dampened, cooled
2. Simple exchange of the electric-motor.
3. Assembly of pump and pipes without electric-motors possible. Identical dimensions L, B1, B2, H1 in case of using footbrackets
4. No shimming of motor-feet. series PTFL.
L
Leichte Baureihe
L PTFL Light version PTFL L
L
ø Dø1D 1
H1
H1
H1
H1
øD1
H1
B1 B2
Fußflansch Flansch
H1
B1
E-Motor B2
Baugröße Footflange Flange
H1
Frame
Size Ø D1 B7 B2 H1 L
71 B1 B2
PTFL 160 160 20 50 100 siehe Pumpen-
80 PTFL 200 200 20 60 112 träger Maßblatt
H1
90 S+L see bellhousing
diagram
100 L PTFL 250 250 40 60 132 H1
112 M
132 S+M PTFL 300L 300 40 80 160
H1
Schwere Baureihe PTFS Heavy duty version PTFS

L
øD1
L B1 B2
H1
H1
H1
øD1
A B1 B2
øD1
L1 B1 B2
H1
H1
A
L1
A
E-Motor Fußflansch Flansch
L1
Baugröße Footflange Flange
Frame
Size Ø D1 A L7 H1 L
100 L PTFS 250 250 79 185 155 siehe
112 M Pumpenträger
132 S+M PTFS 300 300 95 225 185 Maßblatt
160 M PTFS 350 350 116 265 235 see bellhousing
diagram
180 L
200 L PTFS 400 400 126 300 260
225 S+M PTFS 450 450 136 335 295
250 M PTFS 550 550 166 415 350
280 S+M
315 S+M+L PTFS 660 660 197 495 380
460
VERSCHENKTE ZEIT
WASTED TIME
Einzelkomponenten suchen
Looking for individual components
GESCHENKTE ZEIT
THE GIFT OF TIME
3D-Baugruppen online konfigurieren
Configure 3D assembly groups online
FLUIDWARE®3D grenzt sich gegenüber FLUIDWARE®3D makes the design engi-
üblichen Konfigurations-Tools dadurch neer’s work much easier and thus sa-
ab, dass es in wenigen sinnvollen Aus- ves valuable time – each and every day.
wahlschritten den Konstrukteur bei der FLUIDWARE®3D distinguishes itself from
Suche nach den richtigen Komponenten ordinary configuration tools because it
unterstützt und nur solche Optionen zu- supports the design engineer in the search
lässt, die realisierbar sind. FLUIDWARE®3D for the correct components by requiring
entlastet den Konstrukteur und hilft ihm only a few sensible selection steps and
täglich wertvolle Zeit einzusparen. performing only the feasible options.
www.fluidware3d.com
In 3 Schritten zur 3-D-Baugruppe
3D Component Groups in three steps
Schritt 1: Die Registrierung Schritt 2: Die Konfiguration Schritt 3: Der Datei-Download

Step 1: Registration Step 2: Configuration Step 3: File-download
Raja-Lovejoy GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 23 92 / 5 09-0 © Raja-Lovejoy GmbH Version 03/09
Friedrichstraße 6 Fax +49 (0) 23 92 / 5 09-509 Technische Änderungen vorbehalten Pumpenträger VDMA
D-58791 Werdohl E-Mail: info@rajalovejoy.com Technical changes reserved Bellhousings VDMA
www.rajalovejoy.com
461
HALF-COUPLING SPIDEX ALU A24/32.28H7
HALF-COUPLING SPIDEX ALU A24.N2
CROWN SPIDEX ZK 24 SHORE A

SPIDEX® – die elastische Kupplung
SPIDEX® – the elastic coupling
• Drehelastisch • Torsional elasticity

• Schwingungsdämpfend • Dampening
• Axial steckbar • Blind assembly
• Durchschlagsicher • Safe against break-down
• Wartungsfrei • No maintenance
•N abenwerkstoffe: • Hub material:
Aluminium (Al), Grauguss (GG/GGG), Aluminium (Al), Cast Iron (GG/GGG),
Sinterstahl (Si), Stahl (St) Sintered Steel (Si), Steel (St)
463
Funktionsweise Technical descripton
Abb. 1 Kupplung bestehend aus:

Unbelasteter Polyurethan-Zahn Zwei Kupplungsnaben mit
Fig. 1 elastischem Zahnkranz
Unloaded Polyurethane-tooth Coupling assembled:
Two hubs with elastic spider
Abb. 2
Belasteter Polyurethan-Zahn
Fig. 2
Loaded Polyurethane-tooth
Elastische Kupplungen sind in der Lage, kurzzeitige Drehmomentstöße Elastic couplings reduce intermittent short period torsional shocks, by briefly
durch zeitweilige elastische Speicherung eines Teiles der Stoßenergie zu mil- storing elastically part of this shock energy. Any degree of uneven movement
dern. Der Ungleichförmigkeitsgrad der Bewegungs- und Kraftübertragung and load transference is consequently reduced. Elastic couplings restrain body
wird somit kleiner. Elastische Kupplungen dämpfen den Körperschall und resonance, and therefore contribute to noise reduction. The elastic SPIDEX®-
tragen somit zur Geräuschminderung bei. Die elastische SPIDEX®-Kupplung coupling transmits the torque safe against break-down. The convex generated
überträgt das Drehmoment formschlüssig und durchschlagsicher. Der ballig profiled tooth crown, see fig. 1, allows compensation of radial and angular
profilierte Evolventenzahn (Abb.1) gestattet den Ausgleich von Radial- und displacements of the two connected shafts. It consists of a thermoplastic Poly-
Winkelverlagerungen der zu verbindenden Wellen. Er besteht aus einem urethane elastomer, which is exclusively pressure loaded and designed for high
thermoplastischen Polyurethan-Elastomer, ist ausschließlich auf Druck be- abrasion resistance and elasticity, and to have good damping characteristics,
lastbar und zeichnet sich darüber hinaus durch hohe Verschleißfestigkeit and to be resistant to oils, greases, many solvents, atmospheric effects and
und Elastizität, gute Dämpfungseigenschaften und gute Beständigkeit ge- ozone, as well as good resistance to hydrolysis in tropical conditions.
gen Öle, Fette, viele Lösemittel, Witterungseinflüsse und Ozon aus. Hinzu
kommt eine gute Hydrolyse- und Tropenbeständigkeit. The operating temperatures are between -40 °C and +100 °C. Short temperature
peaks up to +120°C are admissible.
Die Einsatztemperaturen liegen zwischen -40 °C und +100 °C. Kurzzeitige
Temperaturspitzen bis +120 °C sind zulässig. The standard hardness of the spider is 92° Shore A. For low torques a spider of
80° Shore A, can be used and for higher torques a spider of 95° to 98° Shore A,
Die Standardhärte des Zahnkranzes beträgt 92° Shore A. Für niedrige Dreh- can be used. From figures 1 and 2, it can be seen that the convex rim of the tooth
momente kann auch ein Zahnkranz mit 80° Shore A und für höhere Dreh- takes higher proportion of deformation-energy, the more deformation increas-
momente mit 95° bis 98° Shore A eingesetzt werden. Durch die aus Abb. es. The value of the torsional stiffness CT of the tooth crown increases with the
1 und Abb. 2 zu ersehende Balligkeit nehmen die Zähne des Zahnkranzes torsional angle f. Consequently, the coupling is relatively soft under small load
mit zunehmender Verformung eine überproportional wachsende Verfor- conditions and becomes harder and harder as the torque increases. This causes
mungsenergie auf. a progressive torsion curve, as shown in fig. 3. The dynamic torsion curve has an
insignificantly steeper course.
Der Wert der Federsteife CT des Zahnkranzes nimmt mit Vergrößerung des
relativen Drehwinkels f zu. Folglich arbeitet die Kupplung bei geringer Kraft- The damping energy shown in fig. 3 results in the damping of torque shocks as
übertragung relativ weich und mit zunehmendem Drehmoment immer shown in fig. 4.
härter. Hieraus ergibt sich eine progressive Federkennlinie gemäß Abb. 3.
Die dynamische Federkennlinie hat einen geringfügig steileren Verlauf. Special advantage of the progressive torsion characteristic is in the resonance
suppression achieved by the SPIDEX®-coupling, as the critical resonance speed
Die in Abb. 3 dargestellte Dämpfungsarbeit bewirkt die in Abb. 4 ersicht- depends on the torsional stiffness CT (see fig. 5).
liche Dämpfung von Drehmomentstößen.
The progressive curve therefore mainly protects the coupling against inadmis-
Ein besonderer Vorteil der progressiven Federkennlinie liegt im Resonanz- sible overstressing. Furthermore, the torsional stiffness CT of the spider can be
verhalten der SPIDEX®-Kupplung. Da die kritische Resonanzdrehzahl ab- influenced by the choice of an appropriate Shore hardness material. A larger
hängig von der Federsteife CT ist, letztere sich jedoch mit Verschiebung des Shore hardness moves the resonance speed higher, and a lower Shore hardness
Arbeitspunktes ändert, ergibt sich eine Verstimmung des Systems gemäß moves resonance speed into a lower range. If in doubt, we recommend a calcu-
Abb. 5, welche die Gefahr des Aufschaukelns verringert. lation of the system parameters by using the moments of inertia of the driving
and driven sides.
Die progressive Kennlinie schützt somit vor allem die Kupplung gegen
unzulässige Überbeanspruchung. Darüber hinaus kann die Federsteife CT
durch eine entsprechende Wahl der Shorehärte beeinflusst werden. Eine
größere Shorehärte verlagert die Resonanzdrehzahl in einen höheren, eine
niedrigere Shorehärte in einen niedrigeren Bereich. Im Zweifelsfalle emp-
fehlen wir eine Berechnung des Systems mittels der antriebs- und lastsei-
tigen Massenträgheitsmomente.
3
2 Progressive
Kennlinie
Progressive
characteristi c
Abb. 3 Abb. 4 Abb. 5

Progressive Drehfederkennlinie mit Drehmomentstoß mit und ohne Dämpfung Resonanzverhalten elastischer Kupplungen mit linear und
Dämpfung erzeugender Hysterese Fig. 4 progressiv ansteigender Drehfederkennlinie
Fig. 3 Torque shock with and without damping Fig. 5
Progressive torsional characteristic with Resonance suppression of elastic couplings with linear and
damping, effected by hysterisis progressively increasing torsional characteristic
464
3
Typenbezeichnung Kupplungsnabe Model type of hub
KL ST A 38/45 . A35 x 31 L = 70 SO
Standard Verlängerte Naben

–
Standard Extended hub length
Klemmnabe Standard
KL –
Clamping hub Standard
Siehe Seite 6
70
See page 6
Nabenwerkstoff Nabengröße/Nabenausführung Beispiel Wellenbohrung Sonderbearbeitung

Material of hub Size/Design of hub Example finish bores Special machining
Aluminium / Aluminium ALU A15 A14/16 Ung. Ungebohrt / Unbored Standard
–
Standard
Sinterstahl / Sintered steel SI A19 A19/24 Vorg. Vorgebohrt / Prebored
Sonderzeichnung
Grauguss / Cast iron GG A24 CJ24/32 38H7 ISO-Standard H7 ** SO
Special drawing
Sphäroguss / SG GGG A28 A28/38 B17 Konisch / Tapered *
Nabenausführung A / Hub A
Nabenausführung B / Hub B
Stahl / Steel ST A38 A38/45 F Zöllig / Inch bored ***

A42 A42/55 *** SAE 16/32Z13 SAE
Splines
Profile
A48 A48/60 *** A35x31 DIN 5482
A55 A55/70 *** N30x2x14x9G DIN 5480
A65 A65/75 * Siehe Seite 10 / See page 10
A75 A75/90 ** Siehe Seite 11 / See page 11
*** Siehe Seite 12 / See page 12
A90 A90/100
A100 A100/110
A110 A110/125
A125 A125/145
Typenbezeichnung Kupplungsflansch Model type of flange
GGG A 38 . FLANSCH F
Flanschwerkstoff A28 Flanschausführung

Material of flange Design of flange
A38
Sphäroguss SG Ungebohrt
GGG A42 –
GGG40 Unbored
Type of flange
A48
Flanschtyp
Durchgangslöcher
F
A55 Through holes
A65 Gewindebohrungen
BF
Threaded holes
A75
Ausführung für
A90 CFA
Hydraulikpumpen
A100 Fabrikat LINDE
CFB Designed for
hydraulic pumps
manufacturer LINDE
CFD
465
Der Auswahlprozess zur Größenbestimmung Selection process for sizing determination
Schritt 1: Bestimmung des Nenndrehmoments Ihrer Anwendung: Step 1: Determine the nominal torque of your application:
P[kW] x 9550 P[kW] x 9550

TKN [Nm] = TKN [Nm] =
U/min [1/min] U/min [1/min]
Schritt 2: Berechnung des Betriebsfaktors Ihrer Anwendung mit der Tabelle Step 2: Calculate your Application Service Factor using the charts on page 5.
auf Seite 5. Der Gesamtbetriebsfaktor (K) ergibt sich aus: The total Service Factor (K) will be:
K = K1* x K2* x K3* K = K1* x K2* x K3*
Schritt 3: Berechnung des konstruktiven Drehmoments (∆TKmax) Ihrer Step 3: Calculate the design torque (∆TKmax) of your application.
Anwendung.
Design torque (∆TKmax ) =
Konstruktives Drehmoment (∆TKmax) = Nominal torque (TKN) x service factor (K).
Nenndrehmoment (TKN) x Betriebsfaktor (K).
Step 4: Using the Elastomer performance data charts on page 7 select the ure-
Schritt 4: Unter Verwendung der Elastomer- Leistungsdatentabellen auf thane shore hardness which best corresponds to your relative damping
der Seite 7 den Urethan-Shore-Härtegrad auswählen, der am Be- needs in the application.
sten den relativen Dämpfungsanforderungen Ihrer Anwendung
entspricht. Step 5: Next find the columns listing TKN and TKmax values listed in Nm and com-
pare them against the ∆TKmax figure for your application. Make sure that
Schritt 5: Finden Sie als nächstes die Spalten, in denen die Werte the spider/coupling size values are larger than the application values.
TKN und TKmax in Nm gelistet sind und vergleichen Sie diese mit dem
Wert ∆TKmax für Ihre Anwendung. Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Werte
des Mitnehmers (Sterns) größer als die Anwendungswerte sind. Step 6: Once the size is selected using the torque values, check the table on
page 8 to make sure the bore size needed will fit in the coupling.
Schritt 6: Nachdem die Größe unter Verwendung der Drehmomentwerte
ausgewählt ist, stellen Sie mit Hilfe der Tabelle auf Seite 8 sicher,
dass der erforderliche Bohrungsdurchmesser in die Kupplung Step 7: Double check the overall dimensions of the coupling to ensure that it
passt. will fit in the space allowed for the coupling in the application.
Schritt 7: Überprüfen Sie sorgfältig das Gesamtmaß der Kupplung, um zu

gewährleisten, dass die Kupplung in den Einbauraum passt.
Definition der Begriffe Definition of terms

TKN Nenndrehmoment der Kupplung TKN Rated coupling torque
TKmax Maximales Drehmoment der Kupplung TKmax Maximum torque of the coupling
P [kW] Leistung in Kilowatt P [kW] Power in kilowatts
U/min [1/min] Umdrehungen pro Minute U/min [1/min] Revolutions per minute
Nm Newtonmeter Nm Newton meters
ΔTKmax Maximales Drehmoment der Anwendung ΔTKmax Maximum torque of the application
TKW Variierende Belastung einer Anwendung TKW Varying load of an application in kilowatts
in Kilowatt (DIN 740 Teil 2) (DIN 740 part 2)
K Betriebsfaktor K Application Service Factor
* siehe nächste Seite *see next page
466
5
Anwendungs-Betriebsfaktoren Application service factors
K1 K1
Betriebsfaktor K1 Application service factor K1
Gleichmäßiger Betrieb mit kleinen Beschleunigungsmassen. Uniform operation with small masses to be accelerated.
Hydraulik- und Zentrifugalpumpen, kleine Generatoren, 1.0 Hydraulic and centrifugal pumps, light generators, 1.0
Gebläse, Lüfter, Venlilatoren, Band/Schraubenförderer. blowers, fans, ventilators, belt/screw conveyors.
Gleichmäßiger Betrieb mit mittleren Beschleunigungsmassen. Uniform operation with medium masses to be
Blechbiegemaschinen, Holzbearbeitungsmaschinen, Walzwerke, 1.2 accelerated. Sheet metal bending machines, wood 1.2
Textilmaschinen, Mischer. workingg machines, mills, textile machines, mixersg
Irregular operation with medium masses to be

Ungleichmäßiger Betrieb mit mittleren Beschleunigungsmassen.
accelerated. Rotating ovens, printing presses,
Rotierende Öfen, Druckpressen, Generaloren, Schredder, Wickel- 1.3 1.3
generators, shredders, winders, spinning machines,
maschinen, Soinnmaschinen, Pumpen für dickflüssige Fluide.
pumps for viscous fluids
Ungleichmäßiger Betrieb und Stoßbelastungen mit mittleren Irregular operation and shocks, with medium masses to
Beschleunigungsmassen. Betonmischer, Fallhämmer, Seilbahnen, be accelerated Goncrete mixers, drop hammers,
1.4 1.4
Papiermühlen, Kompressionspumpen, Propellerpumpen, cable cars, paper mills, compression pumps, propeller
Seilwinden, Zentrifugen. pumps, rope winders, centrifuges
Ungleichmäßiger Betrieb und starke Stoßbelastungen mit Irregular operation and heavy shocks, with large
großen Beschleunigungsmassen. Bagger, Hammermühlen, masses to be accelerated. Excavators, hammer mills,
1.6 1.6
Kolbenpumpen, Pressen, Erdbohrmaschinen, Scheren, piston pumps, presses, rotary boring machines, shears,
Schmiedepressen, Steinbrecher. forge presses, stone crushers
Ungleichmäßiger Betrieb und sehr starke Stoßbelastungen mit

Irregular operation and very heavy shocks, with very
sehr großen Beschleunigungsmassen.
large masses to be acceleratedg Piston type compressors
Kolbenkompressoren und Pumpen ohne Drehzahlregelung, 1.8 1.8
and pumps without speed variations, heavy roll
schwere Walzensätze, Schweißmaschinen, Ziegelpressen,
sets, welding machines, brick Dresses, stone crushers.
Steinbrecher.
K2 – für Anläufe pro Stunde K2 – for starts per hour
Anläufe pro Stunde 100 200 400 800 Starts per hour 100 200 400 800
Betriebsfaktor K2 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 Service factor K2 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6
K3 – für Umgebungstemperaturen K3 – for ambient temperature

Umgebungs- Ambient
-30 bis +30 °C +40 °C +60 °C +80 °C -30 to +30 °C +40 °C +60 °C +80 °C
temperatur temperature
Betriebsfaktor K3 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.8 Service factor K3 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.8
467
SPIDEX®-Kupplungen für IEC-Normmotoren, Zahnkranz 92° Shore A

SPIDEX ®-Couplings for IEC-standard motors, spider 92° Shore A
Motor- Welle n = 750 [1/min] Größe TK n = 1000 [1/min] Größe TK n = 1500 [1/min] Größe TK n = 3000 [l/min] Größe TK
bau- Shaft Leistung P Size max Leistung P Size max Leistung P Size max Leistung P Size max
größe D x I [mm] Power P [Nm] Power P [Nm] Power P [Nm] Power P [Nm]
Motor
size = 1500 = 3000 kW TAN kW TAN kW TAN kW TAN
[1/min] [1/min] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm] [Nm]
56 9 x 20 – – 14/16 15 – – 14/16 15 0.06 0.4 14/16 15 0.09 0.3 14/16 15
15 15 0.09 0.6 15 0.12 0.4 15
63 11 x 23 – – – – 0.12 0.9 0.18 0.6
– 0.18 1.2 0.25 0.9
71 14 x 30 – – – – 0.25 1.8 0.37 1.3
0.37 2.5 0.55 1.9
80 19 x 40 – – 19/24 20 0.37 3.7 19/24 20 0.55 3.7 19/24 20 0.75 2.5 19/24 20
0.55 5.5 0.75 5.0 1.1 3.7
90 S 24 x 50 – – 0.75 7.9 1.1 7.5 1.5 4.9
90 L – – 1.1 11 1.5 10 2.2 7.4
100 L 28 x 60 0.75 11 24/32 70 1.5 15 24/32 70 2.2 15 24/32 70 3 9.8 24/32 70
1.1 16 3 20
112 M 1.5 21 2.2 22 4 27 4 13
132 S 38 x 80 2.2 29 28/38 190 3 30 28/38 190 5.5 36 28/38 190 5.5 18 28/38 190
7.5 25
132 M 3 40 4 39 7.5 49
5.5 55
160 M 42 x 110 4 54 38/45 380 7.5 74 38/45 380 11 72 38/45 380 11 35 38/45 380
5.5 74 15 49
160 L 7.5 100 11 108 15 98 18.5 60
180 M 48 x 110 42/55 530 42/55 530 18.5 121 42/55 530 22 72 42/55 530
180 L 11 147 15 147 22 144
200 L 55 x 110 15 196 18.5 185 30 195 30 97
22 215 37 117
225 S 60 x 140 55 x 110 18.5 245 48/60 620 48/60 620 37 245 48/60 620
225 M 22 294 30 292 45 294 45 146
250 M 65 x 140 60 x 140 30 390 65/75 1250 37 361 55/70 820 55 357 55/70 820 55 176 48/60 620
280 S 75 x 140 65 x 140 37 490 45 440 65/75 1250 75 487 65/75 1250 75 245 55/70 820
280 M 45 585 55 536 90 584 90 294
315 S 80 x 170 55 715 75/90 2560 75 730 75/90 2560 110 714 75/90 2560 110 350
315 M 75 970 90/100 4800 90 876 132 857 132 420 65/75 1250
315 L 90 1170 110 1070 90/100 4800 160 1030 90/100 4800 160 513
110 1420 132 1280 200 1290 200 641
355 L 95 x 170 75 x 140 132 1710 160 1550 250 1610 250 801 75/90 2560
160 2070 100/110 6600 200 1930 315 2020 315 1010
200 2580 250 2420
100/110 6600 90/100 4800
400 L 100 x 210 80 x 170 250 3230 110/125 9600 315 3040 2280 100/110 6600 355 1140
2560 400 1280
Die Kupplungsvorauswahl erfolgte für den Normalbetrieb ohne Berücksichtigung von Betriebsfaktoren.
Coupling selection made for normal operation. For other conditions please notify the safety factors.
468
7
Technische Daten Technical data
Zahnkranz Größe Drehmoment Max. Drehzahl Verdrehwinkel Drehfedersteife Verhältnis-

Spider Size Torque Max. rotation Torsional angle Torsional stiffness mäßige
[Nm] n [1/min] Cdyn [Nm/rad] Dämpfung
Relatively
Nenn Maximal Wechsel V= damping
Contin. Maximum Alternat. TKN TKmax
TKN TKmax TKW 30 m/s 40 m/s φKN φKmax 1.00 TKN 0.75 TKN 0.5 TKN 0.25 TKN
80° Shore 14/16, 15 4 8 1 19000 – 6.4° 10° – – – – 0.85

Skala A 19/24 4.9 9.7 1.3 14000 19000 3.2° 5° 0.25 x 10³ 0.21 x 10³ 0.17 x 10³ 0.11 x 10³
Farbe: 24/32 17 34 4.4 10600 14000 0.90 x 10³ 0.75 x 10³ 0.60 x 10³ 0.40 x 10³
Blau 28/38 46 92 12 8500 11800 2.30 x 10³ 1.93 x 10³ 1.52 x 10³ 1.03 x 10³
38/45 93 185 24 7100 9500 4.10 x 10³ 3.45 x 10³ 2.75 x 10³ 1.85 x 10³
Scale A 42/55 130 260 34 6000 8000 5.90 x 10³ 5.05 x 10³ 4.00 x 10³ 2.70 x 10³
Color: 48/60 150 300 39 5600 7100 8.00 x 10³ 6.81 x 10³ 5.30 x 10³ 3.60 x 10³
Blue 55/70 180 360 47 4750 6300 9.95 x 10³ 8.45 x 10³ 6.71 x 10³ 4.50 x 10³
65/75 205 410 53 4250 5600 13.05 x 10³ 11.08 x 10³ 8.79 x 10³ 5.89 x 10³
75/90 475 950 124 3550 4750 22.00 x 10³ 18.44 x 10³ 14.65 x 10³ 9.85 x 10³
90/100 1175 2350 306 2800 3750 45.00 x 10³ 38.20 x 10³ 30.05 x 10³ 20.00 x 10³
100/110 1610 3220 419 2500 3350 75.69 x 10³ 64.00 x 10³ 50.20 x 10³ 34.00 x 10³
110/125 1950 3900 507 2240 3000 100.00 x 10³ 84.00 x 10³ 67.00 x 10³ 45.00 x 10³
125/145 2440 4880 634 2000 2650 140.00 x 10³ 118.00 x 10³ 94.00 x 10³ 63.06 x 10³
92° Shore 14/16, 15 7.5 15 2.0 19000 – 6.4° 10° 0.38 x 10³ 0.31 x 10³ 0.24 x 10³ 0.14 x 10³ 0.75
Skala A 19/24 10 20 2.6 14000 19000 3.2° 5° 1.28 x 10³ 1.05 x 10³ 0.80 x 10³ 0.47 x 10³
Farbe: 24/32 35 70 9.1 10600 14000 4.86 x 10³ 3.98 x 10³ 3.01 x 10³ 1.79 x 10³
Weiß 28/38 95 190 25 8500 11800 10.90 x 10³ 8.94 x 10³ 6.76 x 10³ 4.01 x 10³
38/45 190 380 49 7100 9500 21.05 x 10³ 17.26 x 10³ 13.05 x 10³ 7.74 x 10³
Scale A 42/55 265 530 69 6000 8000 23.74 x 10³ 19.47 x 10³ 14.72 x 10³ 8.73 x 10³
Color: 48/60 310 620 81 5600 7100 36.70 x 10³ 30.09 x 10³ 22.75 x 10³ 13.49 x 10³
White 55/70 410 820 107 4750 6300 50.72 x 10³ 41.59 x 10³ 31.45 x 10³ 18.64 x 10³
65/75 625 1250 163 4250 5600 97.13 x 10³ 79.65 x 10³ 60.22 x 10³ 35.70 x 10³
75/90 1280 2560 333 3550 4750 113.32 x 10³ 92.92 x 10³ 70.26 x 10³ 41.65 x 10³
90/100 2400 4800 624 2800 3750 190.09 x 10³ 155.87 x 10³ 117.86 x 10³ 69.86 x 10³
100/110 3300 6600 858 2500 3350 253.08 x 10³ 207.53 x 10³ 156.91 x 10³ 93.01 x 10³
110/125 4800 9600 1248 2240 3000 311.61 x 10³ 255.52 x 10³ 193.20 x 10³ 114.52 x 10³
125/145 6650 13300 1729 2000 2650 474.86 x 10³ 389.39 x 10³ 294.41 x 10³ 174.51 x 10³
98° Shore 14/16, 15 12.5 25 3.3 19000 – 0.56 x 10³ 0.46 x 10³ 0.35 x 10³ 0.21 x 10³ 0.7
Skala A 19/24 17 34 4.4 14000 19000 6.4° 10° 2.92 x 10³ 2.39 x 10³ 1.81 x 10³ 1.07 x 10³
Farbe: Rot 24/32 60 120 16 10600 14000 3.2° 5° 9.93 x 10³ 8.14 x 10³ 6.16 x 10³ 3.65 x 10³
28/38 160 320 42 8500 11800 26.77 x 10³ 21.95 x 10³ 16.60 x 10³ 9.84 x 10³
Scale A 38/45 325 650 85 7100 9500 48.57 x 10³ 39.83 x 10³ 30.11 x 10³ 17.85 x 10³
Color: Red 42/55 450 900 117 6000 8000 54.50 x 10³ 44.69 x 10³ 33.79 x 10³ 20.03 x 10³
48/60 525 1050 137 5600 7100 65.29 x 10³ 53.54 x 10³ 40.48 x 10³ 24.00 x 10³
55/70 685 1370 178 4750 6300 94.97 x 10³ 77.88 x 10³ 58.88 x 10³ 34.90 x 10³
95° Shore 65/75 940 1880 244 4250 5600 3.2° 5° 129.51 x 10³ 106.20 x 10³ 80.30 x 10³ 47.60 x 10³
Skala A 75/90 1920 3840 499 3550 4750 197.50 x 10³ 161.95 x 10³ 122.45 x 10³ 72.58 x 10³
Farbe: Rot 90/100 3600 7200 936 2800 3750 312.20 x 10³ 256.00 x 10³ 193.56 x 10³ 114.73 x 10³
Scale A 100/110 4950 9900 1287 2500 3350 383.26 x 10³ 314.27 x 10³ 237.62 x 10³ 140.85 x 10³
Color: Red 100/125 7200 14400 1872 2240 3000 690.06 x 10³ 565.85 x 10³ 427.84 x 10³ 253.60 x 10³
125/145 10000 20000 2600 2000 2650 1343.64 x 10³ 1101.79 x 10³ 833.06 493.79 x 10³
64° Shore 24/32 75 150 19.5 10600 14000 2.5° 3.6° 15.11 x 10³ 12.39 x 10³ 9.37 x 10³ 5.55 x 10³ 0.6
Skala D 28/38 200 400 52 8500 11800 27.52 x 10³ 22.57 x 10³ 17.06 x 10³ 10.12 x 10³
Farbe: 38/45 405 810 105 7100 9500 70.15 x 10³ 57.52 x 10³ 43.49 x 10³ 25.78 x 10³
Grün 42/55 560 1120 146 6000 8000 79.86 x 10³ 65.49 x 10³ 49.52 x 10³ 29.35 x 10³
48/60 655 1310 170 5600 7100 95.51 x 10³ 78.32 x 10³ 59.22 x 10³ 35.10 x 10³
Scale D 55/70 825 1650 215 4750 6300 107.52 x 10³ 88.50 x 10³ 66.91 x 10³ 39.66 x 10³
Color: 65/75 1175 2350 306 4250 5600 151.09 x 10³ 123.90 x 10³ 93.68 x 10³ 55.53 x 10³
Green 75/90 2400 4800 624 3550 4750 248.22 x 10³ 203.54 x 10³ 153.90 x 10³ 91.22 x 10³
90/100 4500 9000 1170 2800 3750 674.52 x 10³ 553.11 x 10³ 418.20 x 10³ 247.89 x 10³
Bei Umfanggeschwindigkeit über V=30 m/s ist dynamisches Wuchten erforderlich. For speeds of over V=30 m/s dynamic balancing is necessary.
Einsatzbedingungen für SPIDEX®-Zahnkränze Operating conditions for SPIDEX ®-spiders

Standardausführung Sonder-Zahnkranz
Basic version SpecIal Spider
Werkstoff Material Polyurethane
Zahnkranzhärte Hardness of spider 80 °C Shore A 92 °C Shore A 95°/98° Shore A 64 °C Shore D
Zahnkranzfarbe Color of spider Blau Blue Weiß White Rot Red Grün Green
Zul. Temperaturbereich Dauereinsatz -40 °C bis +80 °C -40 °C bis +90 °C -30 °C bis +100 °C -20 °C bis +100 °C
Permissible durable lemperalure range -40 °C up to +80 °C -40 °C up to +90 °C -30 °C up to +100 °C -20 °C up to +100 °C
Zul. kurzfristige Temperaturspitzen -60 °C bis +80 °C -50 °C bis +120 °C -40 °C bis +120 °C -30 °C bis +120 °C
Permissible short lerm lemperature peaks -60 °C up to +80 °C -50 °C up to +120 °C -40 °C up to +120 °C -30 °C up to +120 °C
Dämpfunq Damping Sehr gut Very Good Gut Good Mittel Medium Gering Low
Elastizität Elasticity Weich Soft Mittel Medium Hart Hard Sehr hart Very hard
Abriebfestigkeit Abrasion resistance Sehr gut Very good Sehr gut Very good Gut Good Gut Good
Dauerfestigkeit Durability Ausgezeichnet Excellent Sehr gut Very good Sehr gut Very good Sehr gut Very good
Einsatzbereiche Typical applications Allgemeine Antriebe, auch mit Dreh- Allgemeine Antriebe Allgemeine Antriebe mit Hohe Belastbarkeit mit geringem
schwingungsgefährdung Normal drives erhöhten Belastungen Verdrehwinkel
Normal drives also resonance speed Normal drives with high High performace with small
possibility performance torsional angle
469
Abmessungen SPIDEX®-Kupplungen Dimensions SPIDEX ®-Couplings
H* C s b s C H* C s b s C1 H* C1 s b s C1
dh
dh
dh
Ø Ba
Ø Ba
ØB
ØB
ØB
ØA
ØA
ØA
ØB
Ød
Ød
Ød
Ød
Ød
Ød
Ø
Ø
g
g g g g g
f f f
f f f
L1 E L2 L1 E L2 L1 E L2
L L L
Nabenkombination A/A Hub combination A/A Nabenkombination A/B Hub combination A/B Nabenkombination B/B Hub combination B/B
Spidex® Bohrungen Abmessungen [mm] Gewicht Naben

Type Bores Dimensions [mm] Weight Sonder-
länge
Fertigbohrung Special
Finish bores hub
length
Nabe A Nabe B L1
Hub A Hub B +
min max min max A B Ba L L2 E s b C C1 dh g f H* [kg] [mm]

Werkstoff: Aluminium-Druckguss Material: Die cast aluminium
A15 – – 4 15 26 – 26 28 10 8 1 6 – – 12 M5 5 8 0.025 –
A19/24 6 19 19 24 40 32 39 66 25 16 2 12 20 21 18 M5 10 14 0.13 55
A24/32 8 24 16 32 55 40 53 78 30 18 2 14 24 26 27 M5 10 16 0.26 60
A28/38 10 28 28 38 65 48 63 90 35 20 2.5 15 28 29 30 M6 15 18 0.46 60
A38/45 14 38 38 45 80 66 79 114 45 24 3 18 37 39 38 M8 15 19 0.90 70
Werkstoff: Grauguss (GG), Sphäroguss (GGG), Stahl (St), Sinterstahl (Si) Material: Cast iron (GG), SG iron (GGG), Steel (St), Sintered steel (Si)
A14/16 Sint – – 4 16 30 – 30 35 11 13 1.5 10 – – 10 M4 5 12 0.14 18.5
A19/24 GG/St/Si 6 19 12 24 40 32 39 66 25 16 2 12 20 21 18 M5 10 14 0.35 55
A24/32 GG/St/Si 10 24 14 32 55 40 52 78 30 18 2 14 24 26 27 M5 10 16 1.0 60
A28/38 GG/St/Si 12 28 28 38 65 45 62 90 35 20 2.5 15 28 29 30 M6 15 18 1.6 80
A38/45 GG/GGG/St/Si 14 38 38 45 80 66 77 114 45 24 3 18 37 37 38 M8 15 19 2.3 110
A42/55 GG/GGG/St 19 42 42 55 95 75 94 126 50 26 3 20 40 40 46 M8 20 21 3.6 110
A48/60 GG/GGG/St 19 48 48 60 105 85 102 140 56 28 3.5 21 45 45 51 M8 20 22 4.8 110
A55/70 GG/GGG/St 19 55 55 70 120 98 118 160 65 30 4 22 52 52 60 M10 20 23 7.4 140
A65/75 GG/GGG/St 22 65 65 75 135 115 132 185 75 35 4.5 26 61 59 68 M10 20 27 10.9 140
A75/90 GG/GGG/St 30 75 75 90 160 135 158 210 85 40 5 30 69 65 80 M10 25 31 17.7 195
A90/100 GG/GGG/St 40 90 90 100 200 160 180 245 100 45 5.5 34 81 81 100 M10 25 35 29.5 140/210
A100/110 GG/GGG/St – – 55 110 225 – 200 270 110 50 6 38 – 89 113 M12 30 39 43.5 –
A110/125 GG/GGG/St – – 65 125 255 – 230 295 120 55 6.5 42 – 96 127 M16 35 43 63 –
A125/145 GG/GGG/St – – 65 145 290 – 265 340 140 60 7 46 – 112 147 M16 40 47 95 –
H* ist das Mindestmaß, um welches die Aggregate auseinander geschoben werden müssen, um H* is the minimum dimension required for the disassembly of the aggregates in the radial direction. Fin-
einen radialen Ausbau zu ermöglichen. ish bores acc. to ISO standard H7, keyway acc. to DIN 6885, sheet 1 (JS9). Weight and moment of inertia in
Fertigbohrungen nach ISO-Passung H7, Passfedernut nach DIN 6885, Blatt 1 (JS9). Das Gewicht relation to the materials Al/GG/GGG with max. diameter without keyway.
und Massenträgheitsmoment bezieht sich auf die Werkstoffe Al/GG/GGG bei max. möglichem
Durchmesser d ohne Nut.
Standardprogramm: A Nabe und B Nabe in Grauguss „GG“ Standard program: A-hub and B-hub in cast iron „GG“
B Nabe in Sphäroguss „GGG“, Stahl „St“, B-hub in spheroidal iron „GGG“, steel „St“,
Sinterstahl „Si“ sintered steel „Si“
A Nabe als Sonderanfertigung lieferbar A-hub available as special design
Baureihen 140/160/180 auf Anfrage Series 140/160/180 on request
Massenträgheitsmomente J [kgm2] (Standardnabe mit maximalem Bohrungsdurchmesser ohne Nut)

Moment of inertia J [kgm2] (Standard hub with max. diameter of boring without keyway)
Nabenteil Material Kupplungsgröße
Part of Material Coupling size
coupling
14/16 15 19/24 24/32 28/38 38/45 42/55 48/60 55/70 65/75 75/90 90/100 100/110 110/125 125/145
Nabe A AI – – 0.000010 0.00004 0.00010 0.00035 – – – – – – – – –
Hub A GG/GGG/St – – 0.000050 0.00025 0.00040 0.00010 0.0020 0.0030 0.0060 0.0125 0.025 0.069 – – –
Nabe B AI – 0.000004 0.000020 0.00009 0.00020 0.00045 – – – – – – – – –
Hub B GG/GGG/St 0.00002 – 0.000050 0.00020 0.00070 0.00100 0.0030 0.0050 0.0100 0.0183 0.041 0.09 0.154 0.091 0.575
Zahnkranz Pu – – 0.000003 0.00001 0.00002 0.00005 0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0005 0.002 0.004 0.007 0.015 0.025
Spider
470
9
Abmessungen SPIDEX®-Flanschkupplungen Dimensions SPIDEX ® -Flange Couplings
s b s
s b s
H7
H7
z=Anzahl
dh
z=Anzahl
ØD3
Ø A1
ØB
ØA
dh
Ød
ØD3
ØA
ØD4
Ø
D7
ØD4
Ø
D7
Ød2;
Ød2;
g
f
L1 E D6 D6 E D6
L L
Baureihe F Series F
Spidex® Fertigbohrung 1) Abmessungen Gewicht Massenträgheits-
Type Finishbores 1) Dimensions Weight moment 2)
[mm] Moment of
inertia 2)
d2 z
DIN Anzahl
min max 4)
A A1 B L1 L E s b dh g f D6 D7 69 Number D3 D4 [kg] J [kgm2]
F 28 10 28 100 65 65 35 65 20 2.5 15 30 M8 15 10 1.5 7 6 65 80 1.18 0.0012
F 38 14 38 115 80 66 45 79 24 3 18 38 M8 15 10 1.5 7 6 80 95 1.87 0.0023
F 42 19 42 140 95 75 50 88 26 3 20 46 M8 20 12 2 9 6 95 115 3.06 0.0054
F 48 19 48 150 105 85 56 96 28 3.5 21 51 M8 20 12 2 9 8 105 125 3.88 0.0080
F 55 19 55 175 120 98 65 111 30 4 22 60 M10 20 16 2 11 8 120 145 6.21 0.0178
F 65 22 65 190 135 115 75 126 35 4.5 26 68 M10 20 16 2 11 10 135 160 8.63 0.0293
F 75 30 75 215 160 135 85 144 40 5 30 80 M10 25 19 2.5 14 10 160 185 13.2 0.0595
F 90 40 90 260 200 160 100 165 45 5.5 34 100 M12 30 20 3 14 12 200 225 22.0 0.1443
4) Wenn größere Fertigbohrungen benötigt werden, können B-Naben verwendet werden. 4) If larger bore diameters required you have to use hub type B.
Baureihe FF Series FF
Spidex® Abmessungen Gewicht Massenträgheits-
Type Dimensions Weight moment 2)
[mm] Moment of inertia 2)
z
d2 Anzahl
A L E s b dh D6 D7 DIN 69 3) Number D3 D4 [kg] J [kgm2]
FF 28 100 40 20 2.5 15 30 10 1.5 7 6 65 80 1.19 0.0015
FF 38 115 44 24 3 18 38 10 1.5 7 6 80 95 1.66 0.0028
FF 42 140 50 26 3 20 46 12 2 9 6 95 115 2.91 0.0072
FF 48 150 52 28 3.5 21 51 12 2 9 8 105 125 3.35 0.0092
FF 55 175 62 30 4 22 60 16 2 11 8 120 145 5.78 0.023
FF 65 190 67 35 4.5 26 68 16 2 11 10 135 160 7.13 0.034
FF 75 215 78 40 5 30 80 19 2.5 14 10 160 185 10.5 0.065
FF 90 260 85 45 5.5 34 100 20 3 14 12 200 225 16.5 0.15
1) Fertigbohrungen nach ISO-Passung H7, Passfedernut nach DIN 6885, Blatt 1 (JS9). 1) Finish bores acc. to ISO-standard H7, keyway acc. to DIN 6885, sheet 1 (JS9).
2) Gewicht und Massenträgheitsmoment für Werkstoffe GG/GGG bei maximalem 2) Weight and moment of inertia in relation to the materials GG/GGG with max. diameter
Bohrungsdurchmesser ohne Nut. without keyway.
3) Wenn Gewindebohrungen anstatt Durchgangsbohrungen benötigt werden, 3) Even threaded holes instead of through holes may be obtained,
ändert sich die Flanschbezeichnung in BF bzw. BFF. the flange sign changed into „BF“ resp. „BFF“.
471
Maximal zulässige Verlagerungswerte für Zahnkranzhärten 80°, 92°, 95°, 98° Shore A
Max. permissible displacement values for spiders 80°, 92°, 95°, 98° Shore A
Spidex® Abmessungen [mm] Axialversatz Radialversatz Radial displace ∆Kr [mm] Winkelversatz Angular displace ∆Kw [°]
Type Dimensions [mm] Axial displace
Drehzahl Rotation n[1/min] Drehzahl Rotation n[1/min]
L E b s ∆Ka [mm] 750 1000 1500 3000 750 1000 1500 3000
A14 35 13 10 1.5 1.0 0.22 0.20 0.16 0.11 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1
A15 28 8 6 1 1.0 0.22 0.20 0.16 0.11 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1
A19 66 16 12 2.0 1.2 0.27 0.24 0.20 0.13 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1
A24 78 18 14 2.0 1.4 0.30 0.27 0.22 0.15 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8
A28 90 20 15 2.5 1.5 0.34 0.30 0.25 0.17 1.1 1.0 0.9 0.8
A38 114 24 18 3.0 1.8 0.38 0.35 0.28 0.19 1.1 1.1 1.0 0.8
A42 126 26 20 3.0 2.0 0.43 0.38 0.32 0.21 1.1 1.1 1.0 0.8
A48 140 28 21 3.5 2.1 0.50 0.44 0.36 0.25 1.2 1.2 1.1 0.9
A55 160 30 22 4.0 2.2 0.54 0.46 0.38 0.26 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.0
A65 185 35 26 4.5 2.6 0.56 0.50 0.42 0.28 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.0
A75 210 40 30 5.0 3.0 0.65 0.58 0.48 0.32 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.0
A90 245 45 34 5.5 3.4 0.68 0.60 0.50 0.34 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1
A100 270 50 38 6.0 3.8 0.71 0.64 0.52 0.36 1.3 1.3 1.2 1.1
A110 295 55 42 6.5 4.2 0.75 0.67 0.55 0.38 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.1
A125 340 60 46 7.0 4.6 0.80 0.70 0.60 – 1.3 1.3 1.3 –
1) Das Längenmaß L vergrößert sich um die angegebenen ΔKa-Werte. 1) The dimension L extends acc. to the mentioned ΔKa-values.
2) Die aufgeführten Verlagerungswerte sind allgemeine Richtwerte. 2) The above mentioned displacement values are general guidelines.
3) Bei gleichzeitigem Winkel- und Radialversatz können die angegebenen 3) In case of angular and radial displacements at the same time you can use
Werte nur anteilmäßig ausgenutzt werden. the values only proportionally.
4) Die Tabellenwerte sind gültig für eine Betriebstemperatur T = +30°C. 4) The values are valid for an operating temperature of T = +30°C.
Bei einer Temperaturerhöhung müssen die max. zulässigen Radialund If the temperature increases, you have to multiply the permissible radial
Winkelverlagerungswerte mit dem Temperaturfaktor St multipliziert werden. and angular displacement values with the temperature factor St.
Temperatur Temperature -25 < +30 ºC +30 < +40 ºC +40 < +60 ºC +60 < +80 ºC
Faktor Safety 1.0 0.8 0.7 0.6
Sorgfältiges Ausrichten der Wellen erhöht die Lebensdauer der Kupplung Careful alignment will extend the coupling life
Achtung: Montageanleitung beachten Caution: Notify the assembly instruction
Kegelige Bohrungen Taper bores

Code Konus 1:8 Code Konus 1:5 l
Taper 1:8
Taper 1:5
ød b t2 I ød b t2 I
…N/1 9.75 2.4 10.7 17 A10 9.85 2 10.9 11.5 b
…N/1c 11.6 3 12.9 16.5 B17 16.85 3 18.9 18.5
…N/1e 13 2.4 13.8 21 C20 19.85 4 220 21.5
t2
d
…N/1d 14 3 15.5 17.5 Cs22 21.95 3 23.8 21.5

…N/1b 14.3 3.2 15.7 19.5 D25 24.85 5 27.9 26.5
…N/2 17.2 3.2 18.3 24 E30 29.85 6 32.5 31.5
…N/2a 17.2 4 18.9 24 F35 34.85 6 37.5 36.5
…N/3 22 4 23.4 28 G40 39.85 6 45.5 41.5
…N/4 25.46 4.78 27.8 36
…N/4b 25.46 5 28.2 36
…N/4a 27 4.78 28.8 32.5
…N/4g 28.45 6 29.3 38.5
…N/5 33.17 6.38 35.4 44
…N/5a 33.17 7 35.4 44
…N/6 43.05 7.95 46.5 51
…N/6a 41.15 8 44.2 42.5
472
11
Basisprogramm metrische Bohrungen Standard metric bores
Typ Nabe Material Fertigbohrungen ISO-Passung H7, Nut nach DlN 6885, Blatt 1
Type Hub Material Finish bores acc. to ISO-Slandard H7, keyway acc. To DIN 6885, sheet 1
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 24 25 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 45 48 50 55 60
A14/16 B Si x x x x x x x
A14/16 L=18,5 x x x x x
A15 B AI x x x x x x x x x
A19 A AI x x x x x x x x x x x x x
A19/24 B x x x
A19/24 L=55 x x x
A19 A GG x x x x x x x x x
A19/24 B x x x
A24 A AI x x x x x x x x x x x x
A24/32 B x x x x
A24/32 L=60 x x
A24 A GG x x x x x x x x
A24/32 B x x x x
A24/32 L=60 x x
A28 A AI x x x x x x x x x x
A28/38 B x x x x
A28/38 L=60 x x
A28 A GG x x x x x x x
A28/38 B x x x x
A28/38 L=80 x x
A38 A AI x x x x x x x x x x x
A38/45 B x x x
A38/45 L=70 x x
A38 A GG x x x x x x x x x x x
A38/45 B x x x
A38/45 L=80 x x x
A38/45 L=110 x
A42 A GG x x x x x x x x x x x x
A42/55 B x x x x
A42/55 L=110 x x x
A48 A GG x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
A48/60 B x x x
A48/60 L=110 x x x x
Typ Nabe Material Fertigbohrungen ISO-Passung H7, Nut nach DlN 6885, Blatt 1
Type Hub Material Finish bores acc. to ISO-Slandard H7, keyway acc. To DIN 6885, sheet 1
20 22 24 25 28 30 32 35 38 40 42 45 48 50 55 60 63 65 70 75 80 85 90 100 110
A55 A GG x x x x x x x x x x
A55/70 B x x x
A55/70 L=140 x x
A65/75 B x x
A65/75 L=140 x
A75/90 B x x x
A90/100 B x
A100/110 B GG x x x x
473
Basisprogramm Zollbohrungen Standard inch bores

Typ Nabe Material
Type Hub Material
V TA DNC S E ES ED DNH Ad AS A G F B Bs H Hs Sb Sd Js K M C N L KS NM D P W
A19 A AI x x x x x x x x
A19/24 B x x
A19 A GG x x x x x x
A19/24 B x x
A24 A AI x x x x x x x x x x x x
A24/32 B x x x x x
A24/32 B x x x x
A28 A AI x x x x x x x
A28/38 B x x x x x
A28 A GG x x x x x
A28/38 B x x x x x
A38 A AI x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
A38/45 B
A38 A GG x x x x x
A38/45 B x
A42/55 B x x x
A48/60 B
Typ Nabe Material

Type Hub Material
G F K M C N L NM DS D P W WN WA WK
A55 A GG x x x x x x x x
A55/70 B x x
A65/75 B x
A75 A GG x x x x x x
A75/90 B x
A90 A GG x x x x
Abmessungen Zollbohrungen Dimensions inch bores

Code Nut Code Nut Code Nut
Code Keyway Code Keyway Code Keyway l
ø d [mm] b [mm] t2 [mm] ø d [mm] b [mm] t2 [mm] ø d [mm] b [mm] t2 [mm]
V 11.11 H7 3.18 12.34 G 22.22 4.75 24.7 C 38.07 9.55 43
TA 12.7 3.17 14.3 F 22.22 6.35 25.2 N 41.29 9.55 46.1
b
DNC 13.45 H7 3.17 14.9 B 25.37 4.78 27.8 L 44.45 11.11 49.5
S 15.87 3.97 17.9 Ba 25.38 H7 6.35 27.6 NM 47.625 12.73 53.4
E 15.87 3.17 17.5 H 25.4 4.78 27.8 DS 50.77 12.73 56.4
t2
d
ES 15.88 4 17.7 Sb 28.6 6.35 32.1 D 50.8 12.73 55.1

ED 15.89 4.75 18.3 Sd 28.58 7.93 32.1 P 53.95 12.73 59.6
DNH 17.485 H7 4.75 19.6 Js 31.75 6.35 34.62 W 60.37 15.87 68.8
Ad 19.02 3.17 20.7 K 31.75 K7 7.93 35.5 WN 73.025 19.05 83
AS 19.02 4.78 21.3 KS 31.75 7.93 36.6 WA 85.78 22.22 97.3
A 19.05 4.78 21.3 M 34.94 7.93 39 WK 92.08 22.22 103.3
Verzahnungsvarianten Available splines

Profil DIN 5480 Profil DIN 5482 Profil SAE
Spline DIN 5480 Spline DIN 5482 SplineSAE
N 20 x 1.25 x 14 x 9 G A 17 x 14 16/32 x 9 J 498 B
N 25 x 1.25 x 18 x 9 G A 28 x 25 16/32 x 10 J 498 B
N 30 x 2 x 14 x 9 G A 30 x 27 16/32 x 11 J 498 B
N 35 x 2 x 16 x 9 G A 35 x 31 16/32 x 13 J 498 B
N 40x 2 x 18 x 9 G A 40 x 36 16/32 x 15 J 498 B
Kupplungsnaben mit Verzahnung sind
N 45 x 2 x 21 x 9 G A 45 x 41 16/32 x 21 J 498 B
N 50 x 2 x 24 x 9 G A 48 x 44 16/32 x 23 J 498 B
vorzugsweise als Klemmnabe einzusetzen!
N 55 x 2 x 24 x 9 G A 50 x 45 16/32 x 27 J 498 B Erhältlich jedoch auch ohne Klemmung mit
N 60 x 2 x 28 x 9 G A 58 x 53 12/24 x 14 J 498 B Feststellschraube.
N 70 x 3 x 22 x 9 G A 70 x 64 12/24 x 17 J 498 B Coupling-hubs with spline are recommen-
N 80 x 3 x 25 x 9 G 8/16 x 13 J 498 B ded as clamping-hub! Available also with set
N 90 x 3 x 28 x 9 G 3/4 x 6 J 498 B screw.
Raja-Lovejoy GmbH Tel. +49 (0) 23 92 / 5 09-0 © Raja-Lovejoy GmbH Version 03/09
Friedrichstraße 6 Fax +49 (0) 23 92 / 5 09-509 Technische Änderungen vorbehalten SPIDEX®
D-58791 Werdohl E-Mail: info@rajalovejoy.com Technical changes reserved
www.rajalovejoy.com
474
CHECK VALVE RHD18LOMDCF

Ermeto Original
Valves
476
Valves
RHD/V/Z – Non-return valve
LW
5 4 3 2 1 6
Item 1: cone
Item 2: packing disc
Item 3: top disc
Item 4: spring
Item 5: passage disc with guide pin
Item 6: Eolastic-sealing
LW = Inlet diameter (mm)
RHD RHV RHZ
Characteristics: Brass-CuZn35Ni2 (SoMs59 material 2.0540) with internal

parts of 1.4571 (on request).
Sealing achieved by using a 90° cone with a packing
washer of synthetic material. Valve has a lift stop
therefore safe free outlet. Shock-absorbing and muffled
Assembly:
opening. No reduction of cross section. Maximum flow See Parker EO assembly instructions.
velocity not more than 8 m/sec (for higher flow velocities Packaging:
special tests are required). Sealing of male stud thread All non-return valves dust-proof packed.
by Eolastic soft seal with types RHV and RHZ.
Purpose:
Opening pressure: Hydraulic oil, not easily inflammable hydraulic fluids
Approx. 1 bar (on request also 0.5–2 and 3 bar are (but not HFC group; for HFD group; seals made of FPM
available; please specify for order). For pressure see are necessary), compressed air (please indicate with
appropriate tables. Tolerance of opening pressure: order).
± 20 %. Not useable for steam, oxygen or combustible/explosive
gases.
Material: Corrosion inducing media. For use with water, please
indicate kind of water and any additives.
Steel zinc-plated (A3C), seals of NBR (Perbunan).
On request of FPM (Viton).
Stainless steel (71), seals of FPM (Viton).
477
Valves
RHD Non return valve

EO tube end / EO tube end
S3 S1 S2
l1
L1
Series Tube PN Pmax S1 S2 S3 L1 I1 DN I.D. Weight

O.D. (bar) (bar) Size bore mm gr./1 piece
L 06 250 315 17 14 17 58.0 29.0 4 3.5 69
08 250 315 19 17 19 59.0 30.0 6 5.5 89
10 250 315 22 19 24 69.5 40.5 8 7.5 146
12 250 315 27 22 30 72.5 43.5 10 9.5 223
15 250 315 27 27 32 77.5 47.5 12 11.5 284
18 160 250 36 32 36 83.5 51.5 16 14.0 424
22
28
35
160
100
100
250
160
160
41
50
60
36
41
50
46
55
60
93.5
102.5
117.5
61.5
69.5
74.5
20
25
32
18.0
23.0
29.0
641
928
1341
G
42 100 160 65 60 70 119.0 74.0 32 29.0 2010
S 06 400 500 19 17 19 63.5 34.5 3 3.5 108
08 400 500 19 19 19 63.5 34.5 4 3.5 119
10 400 500 22 22 24 72.5 40.5 6 5.5 188
12 400 500 24 24 27 74.5 42.5 8 7.5 223
14 315 400 27 27 32 82.5 47.5 10 9.5 324
16 315 400 32 30 36 86.5 50.5 12 11.5 428
20 250 400 41 36 46 97.5 54.5 16 15.0 731
25 250 315 46 46 50 106.5 58.5 20 19.0 1076
30 250 315 60 50 60 122.5 69.5 25 24.0 1630
38 250 315 65 60 70 136.5 75.5 32 29.0 2362

L 06 RHD06ZLA3C RHD06LA3C RHD06ZL71 RHD06L71
S 06 RHD06ZSA3C RHD06SA3C RHD06ZS71 RHD06S71
Example → RHD06LOMDA3C RHD06LOMDA3C RHD06LOMD71 RHD06LOMD71
478
Valves
RHV-R-ED Non return valve

EO tube end / Male BSPP with Eolastic seal
S2 S3 S1
d7
G
i
l2
Eolastic
L2 sealing

L 06 G 1/8 A 250 315 17 14 17 42.5 28.0 8 14 4 3.5 62
08 G 1/4 A 250 315 19 17 19 44.5 30.0 12 19 6 5.5 80
10 G 1/4 A 250 315 22 19 24 53.0 38.5 12 19 8 7.5 126
12 G 3/8 A 250 315 27 22 30 57.0 42.5 12 22 10 9.5 204
15 G 1/2 A 250 315 27 27 32 60.5 45.5 14 27 12 11.5 253
18 G 1/2 A 160 250 36 32 36 66.0 50.0 14 27 16 14.0 360
22 G 3/4 A 160 250 41 36 46 71.0 55.0 16 32 20 18.0 532
28 G1A 100 160 50 41 55 79.5 63.0 18 40 25 23.0 807
35 G 1 1/4 A 100 160 60 50 60 90.5 69.0 20 50 32 29.0 1178
42 G 1 1/2 A 100 160 65 60 70 91.0 68.5 22 55 32 29.0 1798
S 06 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 17 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 3 3.5 92
08 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 19 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 4 3.5 97
10 G 3/8 A 400 500 22 22 24 54.0 38.0 12 22 6 5.5 165
12 G 3/8 A 400 500 24 24 27 57.0 41.0 12 22 8 7.5 191
14 G 1/2 A 315 400 27 27 32 62.0 44.5 14 27 10 9.5 277
16 G 1/2 A 315 400 32 30 36 66.0 48.0 14 27 12 11.5 366
20 G 3/4 A 250 400 41 36 46 73.5 52.0 16 32 16 15.0 631
25 G1A 250 315 46 46 50 78.5 54.5 18 40 20 19.0 863
30 G 1 1/4 A 250 315 60 50 60 90.5 64.0 20 50 25 24.0 1403
38 G 1 1/2 A 250 315 65 60 70 100.0 69.5 22 55 32 29.0 1969

L 06 RHV06ZLREDA3C RHV06LREDA3C RHV06ZLRED71 RHV06LRED71
S 06 RHV06ZSREDA3C RHV06SREDA3C RHV06ZSRED71 RHV06SRED71
20 RHV20ZSREDA3C RHV20SREDA3C RHV20ZSRED71 RHV20ZRED71
Example → RHV06LREDOMDA3C RHV06LREDOMDA3C RHV06LREDOMD71 RHV06LREDOMD71
479
Valves
RHZ-R-ED Non return valve

Male BSPP with Eolastic seal / EO tube end S3 S1 S2
d7
G
i
l2
Eolastic sealing L2

L 06 G 1/8 A 250 315 17 14 17 41.0 26.5 8 14 4 3.5 55
08 G 1/4 A 250 315 19 17 19 43.0 28.5 12 19 6 5.5 83
10 G 1/4 A 250 315 22 19 24 53.0 38.5 12 19 8 7.5 125
12 G 3/8 A 250 315 27 22 30 55.0 40.5 12 22 10 9.5 190
15 G 1/2 A 250 315 27 27 32 57.5 42.5 14 27 12 11.5 234
18 G 1/2 A 160 250 36 32 36 64.0 48.0 14 27 16 14.0 342
22
28
35
G 3/4 A
G1A
G 1 1/4 A
160
100
100
250
160
160
41
50
60
36
41
50
46
55
60
72.0
80.5
91.5
56.0
64.0
70.0
16
18
20
32
40
50
20
25
32
18.0
23.0
29.0
534
800
1185
G
42 G 1 1/2 A 100 160 65 60 70 93.0 70.5 22 55 32 29.0 1830
S 06 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 17 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 3 3.5 91
08 G 1/4 A 400 500 19 19 19 46.0 31.5 12 19 4 3.5 97
10 G 3/8 A 400 500 22 22 24 54.0 38.0 12 22 6 5.5 161
12 G 3/8 A 400 500 24 24 27 57.0 41.0 12 22 8 7.5 190
14 G 1/2 A 315 400 27 27 32 61.0 43.5 14 27 10 9.5 278
16 G 1/2 A 315 400 32 30 36 64.0 46.0 14 27 12 11.5 348
20 G 3/4 A 250 400 41 36 46 71.5 50.0 16 32 16 15.0 634
25 G1A 250 315 46 46 50 78.5 54.5 18 40 20 19.0 863
30 G 1 1/4 A 250 315 60 50 60 90.5 64.0 20 50 25 24.0 1397
38 G 1 1/2 A 250 315 65 60 70 102.0 71.5 22 55 32 29.0 2001

L 06 RHZ06ZLREDA3C RHZ06LREDA3C RHZ06ZLRED71 RHZ06LRED71
S 06 RHZ06ZSREDA3C RHZ06SREDA3C RHZ06ZSRED71 RHZ06SRED71
Example → RHZ06LREDOMDA3C RHZ06LREDOMDA3C RHZ06LREDOMD71 RHZ06LREDOMD71
480
CARTRIDGE 3/8" RV1 10 C 0 9

RV1-10
Relief valve

The RV1-10 is a direct acting, poppet type, screw-in cartridge relief valve.
1 2
Operation
This valve remains closed from port 1 to port 2 until the predetermined setting has
been reached at port 1. The poppet is unseated and allows flow out of port 2.

Typical application pressure (all ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 bar (3000 psi)
Cartridge fatigue pressure (infinite life) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 bar (3000 psi)
Sectional View
Rated flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l/min (8 USgpm)
Cavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10–2 (See page 72)
Seal kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565803 Buna–N
566086 Viton®
1
Viton is a registered trademark of E.I.DuPont
Pressure Override Curves Flow in l/min (21,8 cSt oil @ 49_C)

Cartridge only
Tank pressure = 0 0 10 20 30
3000 200
A
Inlet pressure bar
Inlet pressure psi
150
2000
B
100
1000
C 50
A – 36 spring 0 0
0 2 4 6 8 10
B – 18 spring
C – 9 spring Flow in USgpm (105 SUS oil @ 120_F)
10
482
Model Code RV1-10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RV1 – Relief valve O – Cartridge only
Code Port size Housing number
2 Size
Aluminum Aluminum Steel
10 – 10 Size Light duty Fatigue rated Fatigue rated
3B 3/8” BSPP 02–175462
3 Seals
2G 1/4” BSPP 876702 02–175102
Blank – Buna–N 3G 3/8” BSPP 876703 02–175103
V– Viton 6H SAE 6 876700
8H SAE 8 876701
4 Adjustment 6T SAE 6 566151 02–175100
C– Cap 8T SAE 8 02–175101
F– Factory set 7 Cracking pressure range See pages 75 and 78 for housings
I– Internal
3 – 3,5 - 20 bar (50 - 300 psi) 8 Factory set reduced pressure
K– Knob
S– Screw 9 – 7 - 62 bar (100 - 900 psi) Within ranges in 7
18 – 17 - 124 bar (250 - 1800 psi) Blank – Normal factory setting at
5 Valve housing material 36 – 34 - 250 bar (500 - 3600 psi) approximate mid–range.
User requested settings in 3,45 bar (50
Blank – Aluminum Aluminum housings can
psi) steps, coded as in the following
S– Steel be used for pressures up
examples:
to 210 bar (3000 psi)
10 – 70 bar (1000 psi)
Steel housings must be used for operating 10.5 – 72,4 bar (1050 psi)
pressures above 210 bar (3000 psi)
Dimensions Torque cartridge in housing

“C” Adjustment 19,1 (0.75) hex A – 47–54 Nm (35–40 lbf ft)
mm (inch)
S – 68–75 Nm (50–55 lbf ft)
“I” Adjustment “S” Adjustment “K” Adjustment

∅ 38,1 (1.50)
“F” Adjustment 80,0
(3.13)
53,0
(2.08)
25,4 (1.00) hex
0.875I-14 Thd.
31,8
(1.25)
2
1
∅ 15,82 (0.623)
11
483
ANNEX XI – TABLE OF OILS

485
ANNEX XII – GREASING POINTS DRAWING

487

Seabulk

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Seabulk

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1

INSTRUCTIONS & MAINTENANCE BOOK

CLIENT: SEABULK TANKERS, INC.

MACHINERY : HYDRAULIC COMBINED TOWING WINCH MR-MAN/H/80/150-50/20,5-22-S/1

VESSEL: STATIA SUNRISE

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 3

LR classification expenses for the anchoring part (ABS)

• Warping end in cast steel.

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 4

♦ Static brake capacity (drum 1st layer) …. 125 t

3.2. - Protection of machined surfaces.

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 5

3.4. - Lubrication points, threaded holes.

3.5. - Brake lining.

3.6. - Spare parts.

3.7. - Electrical equipment, cabinets, and panels.

3.8. - Inspection and maintenance.

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 6

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 7

6. - Electric connection diagram

8. - Guide for installation

8.2. - Levelness and alignment.

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 8

The target values for dial gauging (mm).

8.4. - Hydraulic motor (TRACTION WINCH) and hoses

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 9

8.4.1.4 Before commissioning.

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 10

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 11

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 12

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 13

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 14

8.5. - Electrical connections.

8.6. – Hydraulic components

A - INSTALLATION GUIDE OF HIGH PRESSURE PIPING SYSTEMS

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 15

2. - Pipes; types, cleaning and flushing:

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 16

B – RECOMMENDATION FOR HYDRAULIC OILS

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 17

5. - Recommendation and selection oil table:

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE WORK

C – COMMISSIONING OF HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

7. - Check list before start:

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 18

8. - Starting of pumps. Purge air:

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 19

9.1. - Table of oils.

10. – Maintenance manual

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 20

Recommendations for maintenance:

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 21

Every year (or in oil change):

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 22

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 23

Company approved ISO-9001:2008 abcde 24

1.:. Winch data

Drum diameter D 457 mm Flow pump Q 135 l/min

Rope capacity 176 Lc 150 m Laps/layer ne 5

3.1.:. Pull / speed on first layer

3.2.:. Hydraulic motors data